1998-2001 Honda Accord v-6 b7xa

Introduction

-How to Use This Manual—— ^ ^ T h i s s u p p l e m e n t c o n t a i n s i n f o r m a t i o n for t h e '98-01 A C C O R D V 6 S e d a n a n d '98-01 A C C O R D C O U P E V 6 . Refer t o t h e '98-01 A C C O R D a n d A C C O R D C o u p e S e r v i c e M a n u a l , P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 , f o r s e r v i c e p r o c e d u r e s a n d da ta n o t i n c l u d e d in t h i s s u p p l e m e n t .

T h e f i r s t p a g e o f e a c h s e c t i o n is m a r k e d w i t h a b lack t a b t h a t l i nes u p w i t h o n e o f t h e t h u m b i n d e x t a b s o n t h i s p a g e a n d t h e b a c k c o v e r . Y o u c a n q u i c k l y f i n d t h e f i r s t p a g e o f e a c h s e c t i o n w i t h o u t l o o k i n g t h r o u g h a f u l l t a b l e o f c o n t e n t s . T h e s y m b o l s p r i n t e d a t t h e t o p c o r n e r o f e a c h p a g e c a n a l so be u s e d as a q u i c k r e f e r e n c e s y s t e m .

Safety Messages —

Y o u r sa fe t y , a n d t h e s a f e t y o f o t h e r s , is v e r y i m p o r t a n t . T o h e l p y o u m a k e i n f o r m e d d e c i s i o n s , w e h a v e p r o v i d e d s a f e t y m e s s a g e s a n d o t h e r sa fe t y i n f o r m a t i o n t h r o u g h o u t t h i s m a n u a l . O f c o u r s e , it is n o t p rac t i ca l o r p o s s i b l e t o w a r n y o u a b o u t a l l t h e h a z a r d s a s s o c i a t e d w i t h s e r v i c i n g t h i s v e h i c l e . Y o u m u s t use y o u r o w n g o o d j u d g m e n t . Y o u w i l l f i n d i m p o r t a n t s a f e t y i n f o r m a t i o n in a v a r i e t y o f f o r m s i n c l u d i n g :

S a f e t y L a b e l s o n t h e v e h i c l e . S a f e t y M e s s a g e s p r e c e d e d b y a s a f e t y a le r t s y m b o l ^ a n d o n e o f t h r e e s i g n a l w o r d s , D A N G E R , W A R N I N G , o r C A U T I O N . T h e s e s i gn a l w o r d s m e a n :

i n H T ^ T T c T i n i Y o u W I L L be K ILLED o r S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if y o u d o n ' t f o l l o w i n s t r u c t i o n s .

WMMzIMM Y o u C A N be K ILLED o r S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if y o u d o n ' t f o l l o w i n s t r u c t i o n s .

f i r a O T J T I t f l l Y o u C A N be H U R T if y o u d o n ' t f o l l o w i n s t r u c t i o n s .

i ns t ruc t ions h o w t o se r v i ce t h i s v e h i c l e c o r r e c t l y a n d sa fe l y .

A l l i n f o r m a t i o n c o n t a i n e d in t h i s m a n u a l is b a s e d o n t h e la tes t p r o d u c t i n f o r m a t i o n a v a i l a b l e a t t h e t i m e o f p r i n t i n g . W e r e s e r v e t h e r i g h t t o m a k e c h a n g e s at a n y t i m e w i t h o u t n o t i c e . N o pa r t o f t h i s p u b l i c a t i o n m a y be r e p r o d u c e d , s t o r e d in r e t r i e va l s y s t e m , o r t r a n s m i t t e d , in a n y f o r m b y a n y m e a n s , e l e c t r o n i c , m e c h a n i c a l , p h o t o c o p y i n g , r e c o r d i n g , o r o t h e r w i s e , w i t h o u t t h e p r i o r w r i t t e n p e r m i s s i o n o f t h e p u b l i s h e r . Th i s i n c l u d e s t e x t , f i g u r e s a n d t a b l e s .

A s y o u r e a d t h i s m a n u a l , y o u w i l l f i n d i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t is p r e c e d e d b y a I NOTICE | s y m b o l . T h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s m e s s a g e is t o h e l p p r e v e n t d a m a g e t o y o u r v e h i c l e , o t h e r p r o p e r t y , o r t h e e n v i r o n m e n t .

First Ed i t ion 9/2000 HONDA M O T O R C O . , Al l Rights Reserved LTD. Spec i f i ca t ions app ly t o U.S.A. and Canada Service Publication

Office A s sect ions wi th "include S R S components ; special precautions are required w h e n servicing.

m a r k e d s e c t i o n s a re n o t i n c l u d e d in t h i s m a n u a l .

1 9 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d V - 6 S u p p l e m e n t

General Info

Specifications

Maintenance

Engine Electrical

Engine

Fuel and Emissions

*Transaxle

Steering

*Brakes (Including ABS )

Body

*Heatincj,Ventilation and Air Conditioning

Body Electrical

^Restraints

user

Navigation

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS includes a dr iver 's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in the '98-01 Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) Service Manual, P/N 61S8008. Items marked wi th an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items wi l l require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be done by and authorized Honda dealer.

• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal col l ision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.

• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury caused by unintentional deployment of the frontal airbags (and/or side airbags on some '00-01 models).

• Do not bump the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a coll ision, or the airbags may deploy when the ignit ion switch is ON (II).

• SRS electrical wir ing harnesses are indicated wi th yel low color coding. Related components are located in the steering column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats ('00-01 models) and around the f loor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.

General Information

Chassis and Paint Codes -1998 Model 1-2



Chassis and Paint Codes - 2001 Model 1-5

Identification Number Locations 1-6

Warning/Caution Label Locations 1-7

Under-hood Emission Control Label 1-8

Parts Marking Locations 1-12

General Information

Chassis and Paint Codes -1998 Model

Vehicle Identification Number

d.

h.

1HG CG1 6 4 * W A 000001 rrrrrm c d e f g h

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle 1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A.

HONDA, Passenger vehicle b. Line, Body and Engine Type

CG1: ACCORD V6/J30A1 CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1 Body Type and Transmission Type 1: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Manual 2: 2-door Coupe/4-speed Automatic 6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic Vehicle Grade (Series) US model Canada model 4: LX, LX V6 4: LX, LX V6 5: EX, EX V6 5 :EX,EXV6

6: EX-L Check Digit Model Year W: 1998 Factory Code A: Marysvil le, Ohio Factory in U.S.A. Serial Number 0 0 0 0 0 1 - : US model 800001 —: Canada model

V e h i c l e Ident i f icat ion N u m b e r a n d F e d e r a l M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Cer t i f i ca t ion .

V e h i c l e Ident i f icat ion Number a n d C a n a d i a n M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Cer t i f i ca t ion .

Engine Number

J 3 0 A 1 - 1000001

a. Engine Type J30A1: 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Mult iport

Fuel-injected engine b. Serial Number

Transmission Number

b.

B 7 X A - 5 0 0 0 0 0 1

Transmission Type B7XA: 4-speed Automatic P2A8: 5-speed Manual Serial Number

Paint Code

Code Color B-80P Mystic Blue Pearl * N o t e 1

G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl NH-578 Taffeta White NH-592P Flamenco Black Pearl NH-612M Regent Silver Metallic RP-25P Black Currant Pearl RP-29P Raisin Pearl R-94 San Marino Red YR-508P Heather Mist Metallic * N o t e 2

* Note 1: US model only

* Note 2: Canada model only

C O L O R L A B E L

INT . C O L O R

TYPE E E X T . C O L O R

B-80P K A S 8 4 AO A

1-2

Chassis and Paint Codes -1999 Model

Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number

1 H G C G 1 6 4 * X A 000001

a b c d e f g h

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle 1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A.

HONDA, Passenger vehicle b. Line, Body and Engine Type

CG1: ACCORD V6/J30A1 CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1

c. Body Type and Transmission Type 2: 2-door Coupe/4-speed Automatic 6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic

d. Vehicle Grade (Series) US model Canada model 4: LX, LX V6 4: LX 5: EX, WX V6 5: EX

e. Check Digit f. Model Year

X:1999 g. Factory Code

A: Marysvil le, Ohio Factory in U.S.A. h. Serial Number

0 0 0 0 0 1 - : US model 8 0 0 0 0 1 - : Canada model

V e h i c l e Ident i f icat ion N u m b e r a n d Federa l M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Cer t i f ica t ion .

V e h i c l e Ident i f icat ion N u m b e r a n d C a n a d i a n Motor V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Cer t i f ica t ion .

J 3 0 A 1 - 2000001

a b

a. Engine Type J30A1: 3.0 6 SOHC VTEC Sequential Mult iport


Transmission Number

B 7 X A - € 0 0 0 0 0 1

a b

a. Transmission Type B7XA: 4-speed Automatic

b. Serial Number

Paint Code

Code Color G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl NH-578 Taffeta White NH-592P Flamenco Black Pearl NH-612M Regent Silver Metallic # N o t e 2

NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic RP-25P Blackcurrant Pearl * N o t e 1

R-94 San Marino Red * N o t e 1

YR-508M Heather Mist Metallic * Note 1: US model only

* Note 2: Canada model only

1-3

General Information

Chassis and Paint Codes - 2000 Model

Vehicle identification Number

1HG C G 5 5 4 * Y A 000001

a.

b .

i b c d e f g h

Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle 1 HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A.

HONDA, Passenger vehicle Line, Body and Engine Type CG1: ACCORD V6/J30A1 CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1 Body Type and Transmission Type 2: 2-door Coupe/4-speed Automatic 6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic Vehicle Grade (Series) US model Canada model 4: LX, LX V6 4: LX 5: EX, EX V6 5: EX Check Digit Model Year Y: 2000 Factory Code A: Marysvil le, Ohio Factory in U.S.A. Serial Number 0 0 0 0 0 1 U S model 800001 - : Canada model

V e h i c l e Ident i f icat ion N u m b e r a n d F e d e r a l M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Cer t i f i ca t ion .

V e h i c l e Ident i f icat ion N u m b e r a n d C a n a d i a n M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Cer t i f i ca t ion .

Engine Number

J 3 0 A 1 - 3 0 0 0 0 0 1



Transmission Number

B7XA - 7500001

a. Transmission Type B7XA: 4-speed Automatic (Ohio)

b. Serial Number

Paint Code

Code Color B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl NH-578 Taffeta White # N o t e

NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic RP-31M Signet Silver Metallic R-94 San Marino Red # N o t e

YR-524M Naples Gold Metallic * Note : US model only

COLOR LABEL

INT. COLOR T Y P E E EXT. COLOR B-80P KA S84 AO A

Paint Code

1-4

Chassis and Paint Codes - 2001 Model

Vehicle Identification Number

1HG C G 5 5 4 * 1 A 000001

b.

c.

d.

a b c d e f g h

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle JHM: HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.

HONDA, Passenger vehicle 1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG

HONDA, Passenger vehicle Line, Body and Engine Type CG1: ACCORD V6/J30A1 CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1 Body Type and Transmission Type 2: 2-door Coupe/4-speed Automatic 6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic Vehicle Grade (Series) US model Canada model 4: LX, LX V6 4: LX 5: EX, EX V6 5: EX Check Digit Model Year 1:2001 Factory Code A: Marysvil le, Ohio Factory in U.S.A. C: Saitama in Japan (Sayama). Serial Number 0 0 0 0 0 1 - : US model 800001 - : Canada model

INC., U.S.A.

V e h i c l e Ident i f icat ion N u m b e r a n d F e d e r a l Motor V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Cer t i f i ca t ion .

V e h i c l e Ident i f icat ion N u m b e r a n d C a n a d i a n M o t o r V e h i c l e S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Cer t i f i ca t ion .

Engine Number

J30A1 - 4000001

a



Transmission Number

B 7 X A - € 0 0 0 0 0 1

a.

b.

Transmission Type B7XA: 4-speed Automatic Serial Number

Paint Code

Code Color B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl B-96P Eternal Blue Pearl * N o t e 2

G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl * N o t e 1

NH-578 Taffeta White # N o t e 1

NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic R-94 San Marino Red * N o t e 1

R-507P Firepepper Pearl RP-31M Signet Silver Metallic * N o t e 2

YR-524M Naples Gold Metallic * Note 1: US model

* Note 2: Canada m

only

odel only

COLOR LABEL

INT. COLOR T Y P E E EXT. COLOR B-80P KA S84 AO A

Paint Code

1-5

General Information

1-6

Warning/Caution Label Locations

1 -

General Information

Under-hood Emission Control Label (1998 Model)

Emission Group Identification

Example:

V E H I C L E E M I S S I O N C O N T R O L I N F O R M A T I O N

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.

SPARK PLUG GAP NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.

WHNXV03, OFfl TWC/H02S (2) WHNXR0130AAA EGR/SFI

6.1 30-96 PROCEDURES) 3.0L

CATALYST 30VHGXBG

HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD

(5dD) P8C-A00

FEDERAL THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.

CALIFORNIA TLEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.

TIER 1/LEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 1 AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.

Engine and Evaporative Families

Engine Family:

W HNX V 03.0 FF1

a b r r r c d

a. Model Year W: 1998

b. Manufacturer Subcode HNX: HONDA

c. Family Type V: LDV T: LDT

d. Displacement e. Sequence Characters

Evaporative Family:

W HNX R 0130 AAA r a b c d

a. Model Year W: 1998


c. Family Type E: EVAP R: EVAP/ORVR

d. Canister Work Capacity e. Sequence Characters

CALIFORNIA LEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.

CALIFORNIA ULEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.

1-8



Example:

V E H I C L E E M I S S I O N C O N T R O L I N F O R M A T I O N

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.

SPARK PLUG GAP

NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.

CATALYST

TO CANISTER EWP -| \ VALVE

HJ HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD

30VHGXBG G3)

FEDERAL THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.

CALIFORNIA TLEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.

TIER 1/LEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 1 AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.

CALIFORNIA LEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.


Engine Family:

X HNX V 03 0 FF1

a b c d

a. Model Year X: 1999




Evaporative Family:

X HNX Ft 0130 AAA

rr a b c d

a. Model Year X:1999




CALIFORNIA ULEV THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA AND STATE OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.

General information



Example:

V E H I C L E E M I S S I O N C O N T R O L I N F O R M A T I O N THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA NLEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.

SPARK PLUG GAP NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.

TWC/H02S (2) EGR/SFI

CATALYST

TO CANISTER EVAP PURGE ^ \ VALVE

30VHGFFG

HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD

FEDERAL THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS, AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.


Engine Family:

Y HNX V 03.0 FF1

a b c d e

a. Model Year Y: 2000




Evaporative Family:

Y HNX R 0130 AAA

a b c d

a. Model Year Y: 2000




1-10



Example;

V E H I C L E E M I S S I O N C O N T R O L I N F O R M A T I O N THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.

IAC VALVE E V A P EVAP CANISTER CANISTER

i f—\ ' A PURGE ,, l 1 f VALVE

m^jmMmJ^ I ST VALVE LASH (IN) 0. 22±0. 02mm

(COLD) !EX)0. 30±0. 02mm

REGULATOR vK/ \ w

IA BYPASS CONTROL/ / THERMAL VALVE J \

FRONT

SPARK PLUG GAP 1.0-1.1mm

REGULATOR vK/ \ w


FRONT

NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.

REGULATOR vK/ \ w


FRONT

1 HNXV03.OM5U TWC/H02S (2) 1 HNXR01 30AAF EGR/SF1

3.0L OBO II C E R T I F I E D

CATALYST

REGULATOR vK/ \ w


FRONT

( T T 1 30VAGFFG

IHJ O HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD P8C-AQ3

FEDERAL THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS, AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.

CANADIAN TIER 1 THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV REGULATIONS AND CANDIAN TIER 1 STANDARDS FOR 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS.


Engine Family:

1 HNX V 03.0 M5U

a b c d e

a. Model Year 1:2001




Evaporative Family:

1 HNX R 0130 AAF

a b c d e

a. Model Year 1: 2001




General Information

Parts Marking

To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked wi th the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts wi l l have self-adhesive labels, and a replacement engine and transmission wi l l have the VIN plate attached w i th a break-off bolt.

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.

1-12

Specifications specs

Standards and Service Limits Engine Electrical 2-2 Engine Assembly 2-2 Cylinder Head 2-3 Engine Block 2-4 Engine Lubrication 2-5 Cooling 2-5 Fuel and Emiss ions 2-5 Automatic Transmission and Differential 2-6 Steering 2-12 Suspension 2-13 Brakes '2-13 Air Conditioning 2-13

Design Specifications Dimensions 2-14 Weight (U.S.A.) • 2-14 Weight (CANADA) 2-14 Engine 2-14 Starter 2-14 Automatic Transmission 2-14 Steering 2-15 Suspension 2-15 Wheel Alignment 2-15 Brakes 2-15 Tires 2-15 Air Conditioning 2-15 Electrical Ratings 2-16

Body Specifications Illustration 2-17

Standards and Service Limits Engine Electrical i

Stem M e a s u r e m e n t Q u a l i f i c a t i o n Standard or N e w Serv ice Limit

I gn i t i on coi l Rated vo l t age 12 V

P r ima ry w i n d i n g res is tance at 68°F (20°C) 0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 2 il

Seconda ry w i n d i n g res is tance at 68°F (20°C) 1.71 —20.3 k i i

Fi r ing o rde r 1 - 4 - 2 - 5 - 3 - 6

Ign i t i on w i r e Resis tance at 68°F (20°C) 25 kQ m a x .

Spa rk p l ug T y p e NGK: PZFR5F-11

D EN SO ; PKJ16CR-L11

Gap 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in.) 1.3 m m (0.05 in.)

I gn i t i on t i m i n g A t id le (check

the red mark )

A / T ( in M or B ) : 1 0 ± 2 ° B T D C at 680 + 50 r p m

A l t e r n a t o r be l t T e n s i o n a d j u s t m e n t A u t o ad jus te r t y p e

A l t e r n a t o r O u t p u t A t 13.5 V a n d

n o r m a l e n g i n e

t e m p e r a t u r e

100 A

Star te r O u t p u t 1.6 k W

C o m m u t a t o r m ica dep th 0 . 4 - 0 . 5 m m

( 0 . 0 1 6 - 0 . 0 2 0 in.)

0.15 m m (0.006 in.)

C o m m u t a t o r r u n o u t 0.02 m m (0.001 in.) max . 0.05 m m (0.002 in.)

C o m m u t a t o r O.D. 2 8 . 0 - 2 8 . 1 m m ( 1 . 1 0 2 - 1 . 1 0 6 in.) 27.5 m m (1.083 in.)

B rush l eng th 1 5 . 8 - 1 6 . 2 m m ( 0 . 6 2 - 0 . 6 4 in.) 11.0 m m (0.43 in.)

B rush s p r i n g tens ion (new) 1 5 . 7 - 1 7 . 7 N ( 1 . 6 0 - 1 . 8 0 kgf, 3 . 5 3 - 3 . 9 7 Ibs)

Engine Assembly I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qualification Standard or N e w Serv ice Limit

C o m p r e s s i o n Pressure Check at 200 r p m w i t h w i d e M i n i m u m 930 kPa (9.5 kg f / cm 2 , 135 psi)

o p e n th ro t t l e . (See Des ign Specs f o r

rat io.)

M a x i m u m

var ia t i on

200 kPa (2.0 kg f / cm 2 , 28 psi)

2-2

specs Cylinder Head

I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qualification Standard or N e w Serv ice Limit

Head W a r p a g e 0.05 m m (0.002 in.) Head

Height 120.95 - 121.05 m m ( 4 . 7 6 2 - 4.766 in.)

Camsha f t End p lay 0 . 0 5 - 0 . 2 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 8 in.) 0.20 m m (0.008 in.) Camsha f t

Camshaf t - to -ho lder oi l c learance 0 . 0 5 0 - 0 . 0 8 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 0 3 5 in.) 0.15 m m (0.006 in.)

Camsha f t

Tota l r u n o u t 0.03 m m (0.001 in.) m a x . 0.04 m m (0.002 in.)

Camsha f t

Cam lobe he igh t Intake, p r i m a r y 34.615 m m (1.3628 in.)

Camsha f t

Cam lobe he igh t

Intake, m i d 36.210 m m (1.4256 in.)

Camsha f t

Cam lobe he igh t

Intake,

secondary

31.188 m m (1.2279 in.)

Camsha f t

Cam lobe he igh t

Exhaust 36.076 m m (1.4203 in.)

Valves Clearance (cold) Intake 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.) Valves Clearance (cold)

Exhaust 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)

Valves

S tem O.D. Intake 5 . 4 8 5 - 5 . 4 9 5 m m ( 0 . 2 1 5 9 - 0 . 2 1 6 3 in.) 5.455 m m (0.2148 in.)

Valves

S tem O.D.

Exhaust 5 . 4 5 0 - 5 . 4 6 0 m m ( 0 . 2 1 4 6 - 0 . 2 1 5 0 in.) 5.420 m m (0.2134 in.)

Valves

S tem- to -gu ide c learance Intake 0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 1 8 in.) 0.08 m m (0.003 in )

Valves

S tem- to -gu ide c learance

Exhaust 0 . 0 5 5 - 0 . 0 8 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 1 in.) 0.12 m m (0.005 in )

Va lve seats W i d t h Intake 1 . 2 5 - 1 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 - 0 . 0 6 1 in.) 2.00 m m (0.079 in.) Va lve seats W i d t h

Exhaust 1 . 2 5 - 1 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 - 0 . 0 6 1 in.) 2.00 m m (0.079 in )

Va lve seats

S t e m ins ta l led he igh t Intake 4 6 . 7 5 - 4 7 . 5 5 m m (1.841 - 1 . 8 7 2 in.) 47.80 m m (1.882 in.)

Va lve seats

S t e m ins ta l led he igh t

Exhaust 4 6 . 6 8 - 4 7 . 4 8 m m ( 1 . 8 3 8 - 1 . 8 6 9 in.) 47.73 m m (1.879 in.)

Valve sp r i ngs Free leng th Intake 51.03 m m (2.009 in.) Valve sp r i ngs Free leng th

Exhaust 53.48 m m (2.106 in.)

Va lve gu ides I.D. Intake 5 . 5 1 5 - 5 . 5 3 0 m m ( 0 . 2 1 7 1 - 0 . 2 1 7 7 in.) 5.55 m m (0.219 in.) Va lve gu ides I.D.

Exhaust 5 . 5 1 5 - 5 . 5 3 0 m m (0.2171 - 0 . 2 1 7 7 in.) 5.55 m m (0.219 in.)

Va lve gu ides

Instal led he igh t Intake 2 1 . 2 0 - 2 2 . 2 0 m m ( 0 . 8 3 5 - 0 . 8 7 4 in.) _ — _

Valve gu ides

Instal led he igh t

Exhaust 2 0 . 6 3 - 2 1 . 6 3 m m ( 0 . 8 1 2 - 0 . 8 5 2 in.)

Rocker a r m s A rm- to -sha f t c learance Intake 0 . 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 6 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 6 in.) 0.067 m m (0.0026 in.) Rocker a r m s A rm- to -sha f t c learance

Exhaust 0 . 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 7 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 0 3 0 in.) 0.077 m m (0.0030 in.)

2-3

Standards and Service Limits Engine Block

I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qualif ication Standard or N e w Serv ice Limit

Block W a r p a g e o f deck 0.07 m m (0.003 in.) max . 0.10 m m (0.004 ir. Block

Bore d i a m e t e r 8 6 . 0 0 0 - 8 6 . 0 1 5 m m

( 3 . 3 8 5 8 - 3 . 3 8 6 4 in.)

86.065 m m

(3.3884 in.)

Block

Bore tape r 0.05 m m (0.002 in )

Block

Rebo r i ng l im i t 0.5 m m (0.02 in.)

P is ton Sk i r t O.D .at 16.0 m m {0.63 in.) f r o m

b o t t o m o f sk i r t

8 5 . 9 7 5 - 8 5 . 9 8 5 m m

( 3 . 3 8 4 8 - 3 . 3 8 5 2 in.)

85.965 m m

(3.3844 in.)

P is ton

Clearance in cy l i nde r 0 . 0 1 5 - 0 . 0 4 0 m m

( 0 . 0 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 1 6 in.)

0.08 m m (0.003 in.)

P is ton

R ing g r o o v e w i d t h T o p 1 . 2 2 0 - 1 . 2 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 8 0 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.) 1.25 m m (0.049 in )

P is ton

R ing g r o o v e w i d t h

S e c o n d 1 . 2 2 0 - 1 . 2 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 8 0 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.) 1.25 m m (0.049 in )

P is ton

R ing g r o o v e w i d t h

Oi l 2 . 8 0 5 - 2 . 8 2 5 m m ( 0 . 1 1 0 4 - 0 . 1 1 1 2 in.) 2.85 m m (0.112 in )

Pis ton r ings R ing - to -g roove c learance T o p 0 . 0 3 5 - 0 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 2 4 in.) 0.13 m m (0.005 in ) Pis ton r ings R ing - to -g roove c learance

S e c o n d 0 . 0 3 0 - 0 . 0 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 2 - 0 . 0 0 2 2 in.) 0.13 m m (0.005 in.)

Pis ton r ings

R ing e n d gap T o p 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.) 0.60 m m (0.024 in.)

Pis ton r ings

R ing e n d gap

S e c o n d 0 . 0 4 0 - 0 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 1 6 - 0 . 0 2 2 in.) 0.70 m m (0.028 in.)

Pis ton r ings

R ing e n d gap

Oi l 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 7 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 2 8 in.) 0.80 m m (0.031 in.)

Pis ton p in O.D. 2 1 . 9 6 2 - 2 1 . 9 6 5 m m

( 0 . 8 6 4 6 - 0 . 8 6 4 8 in.)

21.954 m m

(0.8643 in.)

Pis ton p in

P in - to -p is ton c learance - 0 . 0 0 5 0 - + 0 . 0 0 1 0 m m

( - 0 . 0 0 0 2 0 - + 0 . 0 0 0 0 4 in.)

0.004 m m (0.0002 in.)

Connec t i ng r od P in - to - rod c learance 0 . 0 0 5 - 0 . 0 1 4 m m

( 0 . 0 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 0 6 in.)

0.019 m m (0.0007 in.) Connec t i ng r od

S m a l l - e n d bo re d i a m e t e r 2 1 . 9 7 0 - 2 1 . 9 7 6 m m

( 0 . 8 6 5 0 - 0 . 8 6 5 2 in.)

Connec t i ng r od

Large-end bo re d i a m e t e r N o m i n a l 56.0 m m (2.20 in.)

Connec t i ng r od

End p lay ins ta l led o n c rankshaf t 0 . 1 5 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.) 0.45 m m (0.018 in.)

Crankshaf t M a i n j o u r n a l d i a m e t e r 7 1 . 9 7 6 - 7 2 . 0 0 0 m m

( 2 . 8 3 3 7 - 2 . 8 3 4 6 in.)

Crankshaf t

Rod j o u r n a l d i a m e t e r 5 2 . 9 7 6 - 5 3 . 0 0 0 m m

( 2 . 0 8 5 7 - 2 . 0 8 6 6 in.)

Crankshaf t

R o d / m a i n j o u r n a l taper 0.005 m m (0.0002 in.) max . 0.010 m m (0.0004 in.)

Crankshaf t

R o d / m a i n j o u r n a l o u t - o f - r o u n d 0.005 m m (0.0002 in.) max . 0.010 m m (0.0004 in.)

Crankshaf t

End p lay 0 . 1 0 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.) 0.45 m m (0.018 in )

Crankshaf t

R u n o u t 0.020 m m (0.0008 in.) max . 0.03 m m (0.0012 in.)

Crankshaf t

bear ings

M a i n bear ing - to - jou rna l oi l

c learance

0 . 0 2 0 - 0.044 m m (0.0008 0.0017 in.) 0.050 m m (0.0020 in.) Crankshaf t

bear ings

Rod bea r i ng

c learance

0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 4 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 1 7 in.) 0.050 m m (0.002 in.)

2-4

Engine Lubrication I tem Measurement Qualification Standard or N e w ! Serv ice Limit

Eng ine o i l Capaci ty 5.0 % (5.3 U S qt , 4.4 I m p qt) f o r eng ine ove rhau l

4.4 £ (4.6 U S qt, 3.9 I m p qt) f o r oi l change , i nc lud ing f i l te r

4.0 % (4.2 US qt , 3.5 I m p qt) f o r oi l change , w i t h o u t f i l ter

Oi l p u m p Inner - to -ou ter ro to r c learance 0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.) 0.20 m m (0.008in.) Oi l p u m p

P u m p hous ing - to -ou te r ro tor c learance 0 . 1 4 - 0 . 1 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 7 in.) 0.20 m m (0.008 in.)

Oi l p u m p

P u m p hous ing - to -ou te r ro tor axial

c learance

0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 7 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 3 in.) 0.12 m m (0.005 in.)

Oi l p u m p

Oil p ressure w i t h oi l t e m p e r a t u r e at

176°F (80°C)

at idle 7 0 k P a (0.7 k g f / c m 2 , 1 0 psi)

Oi l p u m p

Oil p ressure w i t h oi l t e m p e r a t u r e at

176°F (80°C) at 3,000 r p m 490 kPa (5.0 kg f / cm 2 , 71 psi)

Cooling I tem Measurement Qualification Standard or N e w | Serv ice Limit

Radia tor Coo lan t capaci ty ( inc ludes eng ine ,

heater , hoses and reservoi r )

Eng ine ove rhau l 7.5 ft (7.9 US qt , 6.6 Imp qt) Radia tor Coo lan t capaci ty ( inc ludes eng ine ,

heater , hoses and reservoi r ) Coo lan t change j 5.6 fl (5.9 US qt , 4.9 Imp qt)

Reservo i r Coo lan t capac i ty | 0.6 ft (0.6 US q t , 0.5 I m p qt)

Radia tor cap O p e n i n g pressure 9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 kg f / cm 2 , 1 4 - 18 psi)

T h e r m o s t a t

'98-00 m o d e l s

O p e n i n g t empe ra tu re Beg ins t o open 1 6 9 - 1 7 6 ° F ( 7 6 - 8 0 ° C ) T h e r m o s t a t

'98-00 m o d e l s

O p e n i n g t empe ra tu re

Ful ly open 194°F(90°C)

T h e r m o s t a t

'98-00 m o d e l s

Va lve l i f t at fu l l y open 10.0 m m (0.39 in.) m i n .

T h e r m o s t a t

'01 m o d e l s

O p e n i n g t e m p e r a t u r e Beg ins t o o p e n 1 6 3 ~ 1 7 1 ° F (73~77°C) T h e r m o s t a t

'01 m o d e l s

O p e n i n g t e m p e r a t u r e

Ful ly open 190°F(88°C)

T h e r m o s t a t

'01 m o d e l s

Va lve l i f t at fu l l y o p e n 10.0 m m (0.39 in.) m i n .

Radia tor f an

sw i t ch

T h e r m o s w i t c h " O N " t e m p e r a t u r e 1 9 6 ~ 2 0 3 ° F ( 9 1 - 9 5 ° C ) Radia tor f an

sw i t ch T h e r m o s w i t c h " O F F " t empe ra tu re Sub t rac t 5 - 1 5 ° F ( 3 - 8 ° C ) f r o m actual " O N " t empe ra tu re

Radia tor f an

sw i t ch

Fan t i m e r " O N " t empe ra tu re 2 1 7 - 2 3 2 ° F ( 1 0 3 - 1 1 1 ° C )

Radia tor f an

sw i t ch

Fan t i m e r " O F F " t e m p e r a t u r e Sub t rac t 5 - 2 3 ° F (3— 13°C) f r o m actual " O N " t e m p e r a t u r e

Fuel and Emissions I tem Measurement Qualification Standard or N e w | Serv ice Limit

Fuel p ressure

regu la to r

Pressure w i t h regu la tor

v a c u u m hose d isconnec ted

2 8 0 - 3 3 0 kPa ( 2 . 9 - 3 . 4 kg f / cm 2 , 4 1 - 4 8 psi)

Fuel tank Capac i ty 64.8 ft (17.1 US ga l , 14.3 Imp gal)

Eng ine id le Idle speed w i t h head l igh ts

and rad ia to r f an of f

I n d o r E 680 ± 5 0 r p m Eng ine id le

Idle CO % 0.1 m a x .

2-5

Standards and Service Limits Automatic Transmission and Differential

I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qualif ication S tandard or N e w Serv ice Limit

A T F (Au toma t i c Capac i ty Use H o n d a For f l u i d change : 2.9 fi (3.1 US qt , 2.6 Imp qt)

T r a n s m i s s i o n ATF-Z1 For ove rhau l : 7.2 fi (7.6 US qt , 6.3 I m p qt)

F lu id)

A T F pressure Line p ressure A t 1,500 r p m in 8 0 0 - 8 6 0 kPa 760 kPa

l l o r E ( 8 . 2 - 8 . 8 kg f / cm 2 , 1 2 0 - 130 psi) (7.7 kg f / cm 2 , 110 psi)

pos i t i on

4th c lu tch p ressure A t 2,000 r p m in 7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa 750 kPa

H pos i t i on (8.1 - 8 . 9 kg f / cm 2 , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi) (7.6 kg f / cm 2 , 110 psi)

3 rd c lu tch p ressure A t 2,000 r p m in 7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa 750 kPa

H pos i t i on (8.1 - 8 . 9 kg f / cm 2 , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi) (7.6 kg f / cm 2 , 110 psi)

2nd c lu tch p ressure A t 1,500 r p m in 7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa 750 kPa

[U pos i t i on ( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 kg f / cm 2 , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi) (7.6 kg f / cm 2 , 110 psi)

1st c lu tch p ressure A t 1,500 r p m in 7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa 750 kPa

CD pos i t i on ( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 kg f / cm 2 , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi) (7.6 k g f / c m 2 , 1 1 0 psi)

T o r q u e conve r te r Stall speed : Check with veh ic le on

level g r o u n d

2 , 2 5 0 - 2 , 5 5 0 r p m

Clu tches Clu tch e n d plate-to-top d isc

c learance

1st 1 . 2 - 1 . 4 m m

( 0 . 0 4 7 - 0 . 0 5 5 in.)

2 n d 0 . 8 5 - 1 . 0 5 m m

( 0 . 0 3 3 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)

3 r d 0 . 5 5 - 0 . 7 5 m m

( 0 . 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 3 0 in.)

4th 0 . 5 5 - 0 . 7 5 m m

( 0 . 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 3 0 in.)

C lu tch re tu rn s p r i n g f ree l eng th 1st 45.7 m m (1.80 in.) 43.7 m m (1.72 in.)

2 n d 63.0 m m (2.48 in.) 61.0 m m (2.40 in.)

3 r d , 4 th 33.5 m m (1.32 in.) 31.5 m m (1.24 in,)

C lu tch disc th ickness 1.94 m m (0.076 in.)

Clutch plate th i ckness 1st 2.0 m m (0.079 in.) W h e n d isco lo red

2nd 2.0 m m (0.079 in.) W h e n d isco lo red

3 rd 2.3 m m (0.091 in.) W h e n d i sco lo red

4th 2.0 m m (0.079 in.) W h e n d i sco lo red

I s l a n d 2 n d c lu tch e n d p la te th i ckness M a r k l 3.10 m m (0.122 in.) W h e n d i sco lo red

M a r k 2 3.20 m m (0.126 in.) W h e n d i sco lo red


M a r k 4 3.40 m m (0.134 in.) W h e n d isco lo red


Mark 7 2.70 m m (0.106 in.) W h e n d isco lo red



M a r k O 3.00 m m (0.118 in.) W h e n d isco lo red

3 rd and 4th c lu tch e n d p la te th i ckness M a r k l 2.10 m m (0.083 in.) W h e n d isco lo red





Mark 6 2.60 m m (0.102 in.) W h e n d i sco lo red




2-6

specs I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qualification Standard or N e w S e r v i c e Limit

Valve b o d y Stator shaf t need le bear ing con tac t I.D. T o r q u e conve r te r

s ide

2 7 . 0 0 0 - 2 7 . 0 2 1 m m

( 1 . 0 6 3 0 - 1 . 0 6 3 8 in.)

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

Va lve b o d y Stator shaf t need le bear ing con tac t I.D.

ATF p u m p s ide 2 9 . 0 0 0 - 2 9 . 0 2 1 m m

( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 6 in.)

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

Va lve b o d y

ATF p u m p gear th rus t c learance 0 . 0 3 - 0 . 0 5 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.) 0.07 m m (0.003 in.)

Va lve b o d y

ATF p u m p gear - to -body c learance Dr ive gear 0 . 2 1 0 - 0.265 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 3 - 0 . 0 1 0 4 in.)

Va lve b o d y

ATF p u m p gear - to -body c learance

Dr iven gear 0 . 0 7 0 - 0 . 1 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 8 - 0 . 0 0 4 9 in.)

Va lve b o d y

ATF p u m p dr i ve gear I.D. 1 4 . 0 1 6 - 1 4 . 0 3 4 m m

( 0 . 5 5 1 8 - 0 . 5 5 2 5 in.)

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

Va lve b o d y

ATF p u m p d r i ven gear shaft O.D. 1 3 . 9 8 0 - 1 3 . 9 9 m m

( 0 . 5 5 0 4 - 0 . 5 5 0 8 in.)

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

Reverse shi f t

f o rk

Fork f i nge r th ickness 5 . 6 0 - 6 . 0 0 m m ( 0 . 2 2 0 - 0 . 2 3 6 in.) 5.40 m m (0.213 in.)

Park gear and

p a w l

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

Se rvo b o d y Shi f t fo rk shaf t bore I.D. 1 4 . 0 0 0 - 1 4 . 0 1 0 m m

( 0 . 5 5 1 2 - 0 . 5 5 1 6 in.)

Se rvo b o d y

Sh i f t f o rk shaf t va lve bo re I.D. 3 7 . 0 0 0 - 3 7 . 0 3 9 m m

( 1 . 4 5 6 7 - 1 . 4 5 8 2 in.)

37.045 m m

(1.4585 in.)

Regu la tor va lve

b o d y

Sea l ing r ing con tac t I.D. 3 2 . 0 0 0 - 3 2 . 0 2 5 m m

( 1 . 2 5 9 8 - 1 . 2 6 0 8 in.)

32.050 m m

(1.2618 in.)

A c c u m u l a t o r

b o d y

Sea l ing r ing con tac t I.D. 3 5 . 0 0 0 - 3 5 . 0 2 5 m m

( 1 . 3 7 8 0 - 1 . 3 7 8 9 in.)

35.05 m m

(1.3799 in.)

S ta tor shaf t Sea l ing r ing con tac t I.D. 2 9 . 0 0 0 - 2 9 . 0 1 3 m m

( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 2 in.)

29.050 m m

(1.1437 in.)

2-7

Standards and Service Limits Automatic Transmission and Differential (cont'd)

I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qualif ication S tandard or N e w Serv ice Limit

Mainsha f t D iamete r o f need le bea r ing con tac t at s ta to r sha f t 2 2 . 9 8 4 - 2 3 . 0 0 0 m m W h e n w o r n or

area ( 0 . 9 0 4 9 - 0 . 9 0 5 5 in.) d a m a g e d

at 3 r d gear 5 2 . 9 7 5 - 5 2 . 9 9 1 m m W h e n w o r n o r

( 2 . 0 8 5 6 - 2 . 0 8 6 3 in.) d a m a g e d

at 4 th gear co l la r 3 3 . 9 7 5 - 3 3 . 9 9 1 m m W h e n w o r n or

( 1 . 3 3 7 6 - 1 . 3 3 8 2 in.) d a m a g e d

I.D. o f 3 rd gear 5 9 . 0 0 0 - 5 9 . 0 1 9 m m W h e n w o r n o r

( 2 . 3 2 2 8 - 2 . 3 2 3 6 in.) d a m a g e d

I.D. o f 4th gea r 4 0 . 0 0 0 - 4 0 . 0 1 6 m m W h e n w o r n or

( 1 . 5 7 4 8 - 1 . 5 7 5 4 in.) d a m a g e d

End p lay o f 3 rd gear 0 . 0 3 - 0 . 3 1 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 1 2 in.)

End p lay o f 4 th gear 0 . 1 0 - 0 . 2 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.)

41 x 73 m m t h r u s t s h i m th ickness N o . 1 7.85 m m (0.309 in.) W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

N o . 2 7.90 m m (0.311 in.) W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d


d a m a g e d

No . 4 8.00 m m (0.315 in.) W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d


d a m a g e d


d a m a g e d

T h r u s t w a s h e r th i ckness 27 x 47 x 5 m m 5.00 m m (0.197 in.) W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

Leng th o f 4th gear co l lar 5 8 . 5 - 5 8 . 6 m m ( 2 . 3 0 3 - 2 . 3 0 7 in.)

4 th gear co l la r f l ange th ickness 4 . 4 5 - 4 . 6 0 m m ( 0 . 1 7 5 - 0 . 1 8 1 in.) W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

Sea l i ng r ing th i ckness 32 m m sea l ing 1 . 8 5 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 3 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.) 1.800 m m (0.071 in.)

r ing

29 m m sea l ing 1 . 8 5 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 3 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.) 1.800 m m (0.071 in.)

r ing

W i d t h o f sea l ing r i ng g r o o v e 2.025 - 2.060 m m (0.079 - 0.081 in.) 2.080 m m (0.082 in.)

C lu tch f e e d p ipe O.D. 3rd c lu tch 5.97 - 5.98 m m (0.2350 - 0.2354 in.) 5.95 m m (0.2343 in.)

4 th c lu tch 11.47 - 11.48 m m (0.4516 - 0.4520 in.) 11.45 m m (0.4508 in.)

C lu tch feed p ipe b u s h i n g I.D. 3rd c lu tch 6.018 - 6.030 m m (0.2369 - 0.2374 in.) 6.045 m m (0.2380 in.)

4 th c lu tch 11.500 - 1 1 . 5 1 8 m m 11.530 m m

(0.4528 - 0.4535 in.) (0.4539 in.)

2-8

I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qualification Standard or N e w Serv ice Limit

Counte rsha f t D iamete r o f needle bear ing con tac t at 4 th gear 3 4 . 9 7 5 - 3 4 . 9 9 1 m m W h e n w o r n or

area ( 1 . 3 7 7 0 - 1 . 3 7 7 6 in.) d a m a g e d

at 2 n d gear 3 9 . 9 7 9 - 4 0 . 0 0 0 m m

( 1 . 5 7 4 0 - 1 . 5 7 4 8 in.)

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

at park gear 41.964 - 4 1 . 9 8 0 m m

( 1 . 6 5 2 1 - 1 . 6 5 2 8 in.)

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

at r igh t end 3 8 . 5 0 5 - 38.515 m m

( 1 . 5 1 5 9 - 1 . 5 1 6 3 in.)

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

I.D. o f 4th gear 4 1 . 0 0 0 - 4 1 . 0 1 6 m m

( 1 . 6 1 4 2 - 1 . 6 1 4 8 in.)

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

I.D. o f id ler gear 5 0 . 0 0 0 - 5 0 . 0 1 6 m m

( 1 . 9 6 8 5 - 1 . 9 6 9 1 in.)

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

I.D. o f reverse gear 4 6 . 0 0 0 - 4 6 . 0 1 6 m m

(1.8110—1.8116 in.)

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

End p lay o f 1st gear 0 . 0 0 - 0 . 3 3 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)

End p lay o f 4th gear 0 . 0 4 - 0 . 2 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 1 1 in.)

End p lay o f id ler gear 0 . 0 1 5 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 1 8 in.)

End p lay o f reverse gear 0 . 1 0 - 0 . 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 0 in.)

Leng th o f d is tance col lar 5 3 . 9 2 - 5 3 . 9 6 m m ( 2 . 1 2 3 - 2 . 1 2 4 in.)

Cot ter th ickness 1 . 9 9 - 2 . 0 2 m m ( 0 . 0 7 8 - 0 . 0 8 0 in.)

Reverse se lector hub O.D. 5 5 . 8 7 - 5 5 . 9 0 m m ( 2 . 1 9 9 6 - 2 . 2 0 0 8 in.) W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

2-9


I tem Measurement Quali f icat ion Standard or N e w Serv ice Limit

S e c o n d a r y shaf t D iame te r o f need le bear ing con tac t

area

at 1st gear 3 7 . 9 7 8 - 3 7 . 9 9 3 m m

( 1 . 4 9 5 2 - 1 . 4 9 5 8 in.)

at 2 n d gear 3 3 . 9 8 6 - 3 3 . 9 9 9 m m

( 1 . 3 3 8 0 - 1 . 3 3 8 5 in.)

I.D. of 1st gear 4 4 . 0 0 0 - 4 4 . 0 1 6 m m

( 1 . 7 3 2 3 - 1 . 7 3 2 9 in.)

I.D. of 2 n d gear 4 0 . 0 0 0 - 4 0 . 0 1 6 m m

( 1 . 5 7 4 8 - 1 . 5 7 5 4 in.)

End p lay o f 1st gear 0 . 0 7 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)

End p lay o f 2 n d gear 0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)

38 x 56.5 m m sp l i ned w a s h e r th ickness N o . 1 6.85 m m (0.270 in.)

N o . 2 6.90 m m (0.272 in.)

N o . 3 6.95 m m (0.274 in.)

No . 4 7.00 m m (0.276 in.)

No . 5 7.05 m m (0.278 in.)

No . 6 7.10 m m (0.280 in.)

37 x 55 m m t h r u s t s h i m th ickness N o . 1 4.90 m m (0.193 in.)

No . 2 4.95 m m (0.195 in.)

N o . 3 5.00 m m (0.197 in.)

N o . 4 5.05 m m (0.199 in.)

No . 5 5.10 m m (0.201 in.)

No . 6 5.15 m m (0.203 in.)

No . 7 5.20 m m (0.205 in.)

Cot ter th i ckness 1 . 9 9 - 2 . 0 2 m m ( 0 . 0 7 8 - 0 . 0 8 0 in.)

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

Sea l ing r ing th ickness 1 . 8 9 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 4 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.) 1.800 m m (0.071 in.)

W i d t h o f sea l ing r ing g r o o v e 2 . 0 2 5 - 2 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 8 0 - 0 . 0 8 1 in.) 2.080 m m (0.082 in.)

C lu tch f eed p ipe O.D. 7 . 9 7 - 7 . 9 8 m m ( 0 . 3 1 3 8 - 0 . 3 1 4 2 in.)

C lu tch f eed p ipe b u s h i n g I.D. 8 . 0 0 0 - 8 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 3 1 5 0 - 0 . 3 1 5 6 in.)

7.95 m m (0.3130 in.)

8.030 m m (0.3161 in.)

Reverse id ler

gear

D iamete r o f need le bea r i ng con tac t

area

at reverse id le r

gear shaf t

1 3 . 9 9 0 - 1 4 . 0 0 0 m m

( 0 . 5 5 0 8 - 0 . 5 5 1 2 in.)

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

End p lay 0 . 0 3 - 0 . 3 6 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)

I.D. 1 8 . 0 0 7 - 1 8 . 0 2 0 m m

( 0 . 7 0 8 9 - 0 . 7 0 9 4 in.)

W h e n w o r n or

d a m a g e d

T h r u s t w a s h e r th i ckness T r a n s m i s s i o n

h o u s i n g s ide

0 . 9 7 - 1 . 0 3 m m ( 0 . 0 3 8 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)

I.D. o f reverse id ler gear shaf t ho lde r

I.D. o f t r a n s m i s s i o n h o u s i n g of reverse

id ler gea r sha f t con tac t area

Reverse id ler

gear shaf t ho lder

s ide

0 . 9 7 - 1 . 0 3 m m ( 0 . 0 3 8 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)

1 4 . 0 0 6 - 1 4 . 0 2 4 m m

( 0 . 5 5 1 4 - 0 . 5 5 2 1 in.)

W h e n w o r n o r

d a m a g e d

1 4 . 0 0 6 - 1 4 . 0 2 4 m m

( 0 . 5 5 1 4 - 0 . 5 5 2 1 in.)

2-10

specs I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qualification S tandard o r N e w

W i r e D iamete r O.D. Free Leng th No . o f Coi ls

M a i n va lve b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161)

M o d u l a t o r va lve sp r i ng 1.6 m m

(0.063 in.)

10.4 m m

(0.409 in.)

33.5 m m

(1.319 in.)

9.8 M a i n va lve b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161) Shi f t va lve C sp r ing 0.8 m m

(0.031 in.)

6.6 m m

(0.260 in.)

49.1 m m

(1.933 in.)

21.7


sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161)

Sh i f t va lve D sp r ing 0.7 m m

(0.028 in.)

6.6 m m

(0.260 in.)

35.7 m m

(1.406 in.)

17.2


sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161)

Sh i f t va lve E sp r i ng 0.7 m m

(0.028 in.)

6.6 m m

(0.260 in.)

32.2 m m

(1.268 in.)

13.4


sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161)

Relief va lve sp r ing 1.1 m m

(0.043 in.)

8.6 m m

(0.339 in.)

30.1 m m

(1.185 in.)

10.7


sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161)

Lock-up shi f t va lve sp r i ng 0.9 m m

(0.035 in.)

7.6 m m

(0.299 in.)

63.0 m m

(2.480 in.)

22.4


sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161)

Coo ler check va lve sp r i ng 0.6 m m

(0.024 in.)

5.8 m m

(0.228 in.)

14.5 m m

(0.571 in.)

6.8


sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161)

T o r q u e conver te r check

va lve sp r i ng

1.2 m m

(0.047 in.)

8.6 m m

(0.339 in.)

35.1 m m

(1.382 in.)

14.3


sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161)

Se rvo con t ro l va lve sp r i ng 0.7 m m

(0.028 in.)

6.6 m m

(0.260 in.)

35.7 m m

(1.406 in.)

17.2


sp r i ngs (see

page 14-161)

Reverse CPC va lve sp r i ng 0.7 m m

(0.028 in.)

6.1 m m

(0.240 in.)

17.8 m m

(0.701 in.)

7.9

Regu la to r va lve

b o d y sp r i ngs

(see page 14-

164)

Sta tor react ion sp r i ng 5.5 m m

(0.217 in.)

37.4 m m

(1.472 in.)

30.3 m m

(1.193 in.)

2.12 Regu la to r va lve

b o d y sp r i ngs

(see page 14-

164)

Regu la tor va lve sp r i ng A 1.8 m m

(0.071 in.)

14.7 m m

(0.579 in.)

87.5 m m

(3.445 in.)

16.5

Regu la to r va lve

b o d y sp r i ngs

(see page 14-

164)

Regu la tor va lve sp r i ng B 1.7 m m

(0.067 in.)

9.4 m m

(0.370 in.)

44.0 m m

(1.732 in.)

13.4

Regu la to r va lve

b o d y sp r i ngs

(see page 14-

164)

Lock-up con t ro l va l ve sp r i ng 0.7 m m

(0.028 in.)

6.6 m m

(0.260 in.)

42.9 m m

(1.689 in.)

14.2

Regu la to r va lve

b o d y sp r i ngs

(see page 14-

164)

Lock-up t i m i n g va lve sp r i ng 0.65 m m

(0.026 in.)

6.6 m m

(0.260 in.)

34.8 m m

(1.370 in.)

15.6

Se rvo b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-165)

Sh i f t va lve B sp r ing 0.8 m m

(0.031 in.)

7.1 m m

(0.280 in.)

40.4 m m

(1.591 in.)

16.9 Se rvo b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-165) Shi f t va lve A sp r ing 0.8 m m

(0.031 in.)

7.1 m m

(0.280 in.)

40.4 m m

(1.591 in.)

16.9

Se rvo b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-165)

CPC va lve A sp r i ng 0.7 m m

(0.028 in.)

6.1 m m

(0.240 in.)

17.8 m m

(0.701 in.)

7.9

Se rvo b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-165)

CPC va lve B sp r i ng 0.7 m m

(0.028 in.)

6.1 m m

(0.240 in.)

17.8 m m

(0.701 in.)

7.9

Se rvo b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-165)

4th accumu la to r s p r i n g A 2.6 m m

(0.102 in.)

19.6 m m

(0.772 in.)

66.4 m m

(2.614 in.)

9.7

Se rvo b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-165)

4th accumu la to r sp r i ng B 2.4 m m

(0.094 in.)

12.8 m m

(0.504 in.)

51.5 m m

(2.028 in.)

11.5

Se rvo b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-165)

3 rd accumu la to r sp r i ng A 2.6 m m

(0.102 in.)

19.6 m m

(0.772 in.)

66.4 m m

(2.614 in.)

9.7

Se rvo b o d y

sp r i ngs (see

page 14-165)

3 rd accumu la to r s p r i n g B 2.4 m m

(0.094 in.)

12.8 m m

(0.504 in.)

51.5 m m

(2.028 in.)

11.5


b o d y sp r i ngs

(see page 14-

166)

1st accumu la to r sp r i ng B 2.7 m m

(0.106 in.)

15.0 m m

(0.591 in.)

52.5 m m

(2.067 in.)

10.3 A c c u m u l a t o r

b o d y sp r i ngs

(see page 14-

166)

1st accumu la to r sp r i ng A 2.5 m m

(0.098 in.)

21.6 m m

(0.850 in.)

87.5 m m

(3.445 in.)

11.8


b o d y sp r i ngs

(see page 14-

166)

2nd accumu la to r sp r i ng B 2.4 m m

(0.094 in.)

12.6 m m

(0.496 in.)

53.5 m m

(2.106 in.)

12.9


b o d y sp r i ngs

(see page 14-

166)

2 n d accumu la to r sp r i ng A 2.7 m m

(0.106 in.)

19.6 m m

(0.772 in.)

66.3 m m

(2.610 in.)

9.9

2-11


I tem Measurement Quali f icat ion Standard or N e w Serv ice Limit

A/1 d i f fe rent ia l

car r ie r

P in ion shaf t con tac t area I.D. 1 8 . 0 1 0 - 1 8 . 0 2 8 m m

( 0 . 7 0 9 1 - 0 . 7 0 9 8 in.)


car r ie r

Car r ie r - to -p in ion shaf t c learance 0 . 0 2 3 - 0 . 0 5 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.) 0.1 m m (0.004 in.)


car r ie r

Dr ivesha f t con tac t area I.D. 3 0 . 0 2 5 - 3 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 1 . 1 8 2 - 1 . 1 8 3 in.)


car r ie r

Car r ie r - to -d r iveshaf t c learance 0 . 0 4 5 - 0 . 0 8 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 in.) 0.12 m m (0.005 in.)


car r ie r

Car r ie r - to - in te rmed ia te shaf t c learance 0 . 0 8 0 - 0 . 1 1 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)


car r ie r

Tape red ro l ler bea r ing s ta r t i ng t o r q u e

(pre load)

For n e w b e a r i n g 2 . 7 - 3 . 9 N-m

( 2 8 - 4 0 kg f - cm, 2 4 - 3 5 ibf- in.)

A d j u s t


car r ie r

Tape red ro l ler bea r ing s ta r t i ng t o r q u e

(pre load)

For used b e a r i n g 2 . 5 - 3 . 6 N-m

( 2 5 - 3 7 kg f - cm, 2 2 - 3 2 Ibf-in.)

Ad jus t

A /T d i f fe rent ia l

p i n i o n gear

Backlash 0 . 0 5 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.) A /T d i f fe rent ia l

p i n i o n gear I.D. 1 8 . 0 4 2 - 1 8 . 0 6 6 m m

( 0 . 7 1 0 3 - 0 . 7 1 1 3 in.)

A /T d i f fe rent ia l

p i n i o n gear

P in ion gea r - to -p in ion sha f t c learance 0.055 -0 .095 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 7 in.) 0.12 m m (0.005 in.)

Steering I tem Measurement Qualif ication S tandard or N e w Serv ice Limit

Steer ing w h e e l Rota t iona l p lay m e a s u r e d at ou ts ide

edge

W i t h e n g i n e

r u n n i n g

0 - 1 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 3 9 in.) S tee r ing w h e e l

S ta r t i ng load m e a s u r e d at ou ts ide

edge

W i t h eng ine

r u n n i n g

30 N (3.1 kgf, 6.8 lbs)

Gea rbox A n g l e of rack g u i d e sc rew loosened

f r o m locked pos i t i on

60° ± 5 °

P u m p O u t p u t p ressure w i t h shu t -o f f va l ve

c losed

7 , 6 0 0 - 8 , 3 0 0 kpa

( 7 8 - 8 5 kg f / cm 2 ,

1 , 1 1 0 - 1 , 2 1 0 psi)

Power s teer ing

f l u i d

Capac i ty Use G enu ine

H o n d a P o w e r

S tee r ing Flu id

For f l u i d change : 0.4 fi (0.42 US pt , 0.35 I m p qt) Power s teer ing

f l u i d

Capac i ty Use G enu ine

H o n d a P o w e r

S tee r ing Flu id

For sys tem ove rhau l : 1.1 fi (1.16 US qt , 0.97 Imp qt)

Power s teer ing

p u m p bel t

NOTE: A d j u s t a

n e w belt to t he

n e w bel t spec,

run the eng ine

fo r 5 m i n u t e s ,

t h e n readjust it

t o the used bel t

spec.

Def lec t ion w i t h 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs)

app l ied m i d - w a y b e t w e e n pu l leys

Used bel t : 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in.) Power s teer ing

p u m p bel t

NOTE: A d j u s t a

n e w belt to t he

n e w bel t spec,

run the eng ine


t h e n readjust it

t o the used bel t

spec.

Def lec t ion w i t h 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs)

app l ied m i d - w a y b e t w e e n pu l leys N e w belt : 8 . 5 - 1 1 . 0 m m ( 0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 3 in.)

Power s teer ing

p u m p bel t

NOTE: A d j u s t a

n e w belt to t he

n e w bel t spec,

run the eng ine


t h e n readjust it

t o the used bel t

spec.

Tens ion (measu red w i t h bel t t ens ion

gauge)

Use bel t : 3 9 0 - 5 4 0 N ( 4 0 - 5 5 kgf, 8 8 - 1 2 0 lbs))

Power s teer ing

p u m p bel t

NOTE: A d j u s t a

n e w belt to t he

n e w bel t spec,

run the eng ine


t h e n readjust it

t o the used bel t

spec.

Tens ion (measu red w i t h bel t t ens ion

gauge) N e w belt : 740 - 8 8 0 N ( 7 5 - 9 0 kgf, 1 7 0 - 2 0 0 lbs))

2-12

specs Suspension

I t e m Measurement Qualification S tandard or N e w Serv ice Limit

W h e e l a l i g n m e n t C a m b e r F ron t 0 ° 0 0 ' ± 1 °

Rear - 0 ° 3 0 ' + 1 °

Caster Front 2°48' + 1°

To ta l Toe Fron t 0 + 2 m m ( 0 + 1 / 1 6 in.)

Rear IN 2 ± 2 (1 /16+1/16 in.)

F ron t w h e e l t u r n i n g angle Inside w h e e l 38°32 ' • 2°

Outs ide w h e e l 31°03 ' (Reference)

A l u m i n u m w h e e l R u n o u t Ax ia l 0 - 0.7 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 3 in.) 2.0 m m (0.08 in.)

Radial 0 - 0 . 7 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 3 in.) 1.5 m m (0.06 in.)

Steel w h e e l Runou t Ax ia l 0 - 1 . 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 4 in.) 2.0 m m (0.08 in.)

Radial 0 - 1 . 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 4 in.) 1.5 m m (0.06 in.)

W h e e l bear ings End p lay Fron t 0 - 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)

Rear 0 - 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)

Brakes I tem Measurement Qualification Standard or N e w Service Limit

Park ing brake

lever

Dis tance t rave l led w h e n

pu l l ed w i t h 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbs) of

fo rce

6 - 9 cl icks

Brake peda l Pedal he igh t (carpet r emoved ) 148 m m (5 13/16 in.) Brake peda l

Free p lay 1 ---5 m m ( 1 / 1 6 - 3 / 1 6 in.)

Mas te r cy l i nder P is ton - to -pushrod c learance 0 - 0 . 4 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 2 in.)

Brake disc Th ickness Front 2 2 . 9 - 2 3 . 1 m m ( 0 . 9 0 - 0 . 9 1 in.) 21.0 m m (0.83 in.) Brake disc Th ickness

Rear 8 . 9 - 9 . 1 m m ( 0 . 3 5 - 0 . 3 6 in.) 8.0 m m (0.31 in.)

Brake disc

Runou t Fron t 0.10 m m (0.004 in.)

Brake disc

Runou t

Rear 0.10 m m (0.004 in )

Brake disc

Para l le l ism Front and rear 0.015 m m (0.0006 in.)

Brake pads Th ickness Front 1 0 . 5 - 1 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 4 1 - 0 . 4 5 in.) 1.6 m m (0.06 in.) Brake pads Th ickness

Rear 8 . 9 - 9 . 1 m m ( 0 . 3 5 5 - 0 . 3 5 8 in.) 1.6 m m (0.06 in.)

Air Conditioning Item Measurement Qualification Standard or N e w -1 Serv ice Limit

Refr igerant T y p e HFC-134a(R-134a) Ref r igerant

Capac i ty o r sys tem 450 - 500 g ( 1 5 . 2 - 1 6 . 9 oz)

Ref r igerant o i l T y p e DENSO: N D - O I L 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01 A H or 38899-PR7-A01) Ref r igerant o i l

Capac i ty o f c o m p o n e n t s Condenser 25 mf i (5/6 f l oz, 0.9 I m p oz)

Ref r igerant o i l

Capac i ty o f c o m p o n e n t s

Evapora to r 40 mf i (1 1/3 f l oz, 1.4 Imp oz)

Ref r igerant o i l


Each l ine and

hose

10 mfi (1/3 f l oz, 0.4 Imp oz)

Ref r igerant o i l


Receiver 10 mf i (1/3 f l oz, 0.4 I m p oz)

Ref r igerant o i l


Compresso r 1 6 0 - 1 7 5 mf i (5 1 / 3 - 6 f l oz, 5 . 6 - 6 . 2 Imp oz)

Compresso r

(DENSO)

Star ter coi l resistance a t68°F (20°C) 3 . 4 - 3 . 8 ii Compresso r

(DENSO) Pu l ley- to-pressure p late

c learance

0.5 + 0.15 m m (0.02 + 0.006 in.)

2-13

Design Specifications I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qualif ication Specif ication

D I M E N S I O N S Overa l l l eng th 4 -doo r 4,795 m m (188.8 in.) D I M E N S I O N S Overa l l l eng th

2 -door 4,745 m m (186.8 in.) D I M E N S I O N S

Overa l l w i d t h 1,785 m m (70.3 in.)

D I M E N S I O N S

Overa l l he igh t 4 -door 1,455 m m (57.3 in.)

D I M E N S I O N S

Overa l l he igh t

2 -door 1,405 m m (55.3 in.)

D I M E N S I O N S

W hee lbase 4 -door 2,715 m m (106.9 in.)

D I M E N S I O N S

W hee lbase

2 -door 2,670 m m (105.1 in.)

D I M E N S I O N S

Track F ron t 1,555 m m (61.2 in.)

D I M E N S I O N S

Track

Rear 1,535 m m (60.4 in.)

D I M E N S I O N S

G r o u n d c learance 158 m m (6.2 in.)

D I M E N S I O N S

Sea t ing capac i ty Five

W E I G H T (U.S.A.) Gross Veh ic le W e i g h t Rat ing

(GVWR)

4 -door 4,235 lbs W E I G H T (U.S.A.) Gross Veh ic le W e i g h t Rat ing

(GVWR) 2 -door 4,190 lbs

W E I G H T

( C A N A D A )

Gross Veh ic le W e i g h t Rat ing

(GVWR)

4 -door 1,920 kg W E I G H T

( C A N A D A )

Gross Veh ic le W e i g h t Rat ing

(GVWR) 2 -door 1,900 kg

ENGINE T y p e Wa te r - coo led , 4-stroke SOHC VTEC V6 gaso l ine

eng ine ENGINE

Cy l inder a r r a n g e m e n t 60° V6-cy l inder , t ransverse

ENGINE

Bore a n d s t roke 86.0 x 86.0 m m (3.39 x 3.39 in.)

ENGINE

D isp lacemen t 2,997 c m 3 (mft) (183 cu in.)

ENGINE

C o m p r e s s i o n rat io 9.4

ENGINE

Va lve t ra in Belt d r i ven , SOHC VTEC 4 va lves per cy l i nder

ENGINE

Lubr i ca t ion sys tem Forced, w e t s u m p , w i t h t r o c h o i d p u m p

ENGINE

Oi l p u m p d i sp lacemen t at 6,000 e n g i n e r p m 58.4 ft (61.7 US qt , 51.4 I m p q t ) /m inu te

ENGINE

W a t e r p u m p d i sp lacemen t at 6,000 e n g i n e r p m 172 ft (182 US qt , 151 I m p q t ) /m inu te

ENGINE

Fuel requ i red UNLEADED gaso l ine w i t h 86 p u m p octane n u m b e r or

h igher

STARTER T y p e Gear reduc t ion STARTER

N o r m a l o u t p u t 1.6 kW STARTER

N o m i n a l vo l t age 12 V

STARTER

Hour ra t i ng 30 seconds

STARTER

Di rec t ion o f ro ta t ion C lockwise as v i e w e d f r o m gear end

A U T O M A T I C

T R A N S M I S S I O N

T y p e Elect ronica l ly con t ro l l ed au tomat i c , 4-speed f o r w a r d , 1

reverse A U T O M A T I C


P r ima ry reduc t i on Direct 1:1

A U T O M A T I C


Gear rat io 1st 2.534

A U T O M A T I C


Gear rat io

2 n d 1.502

A U T O M A T I C


Gear rat io

3 rd 0.947

A U T O M A T I C


Gear rat io

4th 0.608

A U T O M A T I C


Gear rat io

Reverse 1.846

A U T O M A T I C


Final reduc t i on T y p e S ing le hel ical gear

A U T O M A T I C


Final reduc t i on

Gear ra t io 4.200

2-14

specs I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Qua l i f i ca t i on Specif ication

STEERING Type Power-ass is ted rack and p i n i o n STEERING

Overal l rat io 15.77

STEERING

Turns , lock-to- lock 3.05

STEERING

Steer ing w h e e l d iamete r 380 m m (15.0 in.)

SUSPENSION Type Front I ndependen t d o u b l e w i s h b o n e , co i l sp r i ng w i t h stabi l izer SUSPENSION Type

Rear Five- l ink d o u b l e w i s h b o n e

SUSPENSION

Shock absorber F ron t and rear Te lescop ic , hydrau l i c , n i t r ogen gas- f i l led

WHEEL

A L I G N M E N T

Camber Front 0° WHEEL

A L I G N M E N T

Camber

Rear - 0 ° 3 0 '

WHEEL

A L I G N M E N T

Caster F ron t 2°48'

WHEEL

A L I G N M E N T

Tota l toe Front 0 m m (0 in.)

WHEEL

A L I G N M E N T

Tota l toe

Rear In 2 m m (1/16 in.)

BRAKES T y p e of service brake Fron t Power-ass is ted se l f -ad jus t ing ven t i l a ted disc BRAKES T y p e of service brake

Rear Power-ass is ted se l f -ad jus t ing so l id d isc

BRAKES

T y p e of pa rk ing brake Mechan ica l ac tua t ing , rear w h e e l s

BRAKES

Pad f r i c t ion sur face area Fron t 59 c m 2 x 2 (9.0 sq i n . x 2)

BRAKES

Pad f r i c t ion sur face area

Rear 28 c m 2 x 2 (4.3 sq i n . x 2 )

TIRES Size of f r o n t and rear t i res P205/65R15 92V TIRES

Size of spare t i res T135/90D15 100M

AIR

CONDIT IONING

Coo l ing capac i ty 5,240 Kcal /h (20,800 BTU/h) AIR

CONDIT IONING Compresso r T y p e / M a n u f a c t u r e r S w a s h p la te /DENSO

AIR

CONDIT IONING Compresso r

N u m b e r of cy l inders 10

AIR


Capaci ty 177.7 mf i / rev . (10.84 cu in/rev.)

AIR


M a x i m u m speed 7,600 r p m

AIR


Lubr ican t capac i ty 160 mfl (5 1/3 f l oz)

AIR


Lubr ican t t y p e N D - O I L 8

AIR

CONDIT IONING

Condenser T y p e Co r ruga ted f in

AIR

CONDIT IONING

Evapora tor T y p e Cor ruga ted f in

AIR

CONDIT IONING

B lower T y p e S i rocco f a n

AIR

CONDIT IONING

B lower

M o t o r inpu t 2 3 0 W / 1 2 V

AIR

CONDIT IONING

B lower

Speed con t ro l M a n u a l A /C : 4-speed A u t o A /C : Inf in i te var iab le

AIR

CONDIT IONING

B lower

M a x i m u m capac i ty 520 m 3 / h (18,300 cu f t /h)

AIR

CONDIT IONING

Tempera tu re con t ro l A i r - m i x t ype

AIR

CONDIT IONING

Compresso r c lu tch T y p e Dry , s ing le p la te, Poly-V bel t d r ive

AIR

CONDIT IONING

Compresso r c lu tch

Electr ical p o w e r

c o n s u m p t i o n at 68°F (20°C)

40 W m a x i m u m at 12 V

AIR

CONDIT IONING

Refr igerant T y p e HFC-134a(R-134 a)

AIR

CONDIT IONING

Refr igerant

Quan t i t y 4 5 0 - 5 0 0 g (15.2 - 1 6 . 9 f l oz)

2-15

Design Specifications I t e m M e a s u r e m e n t Q u a l i f i c a t i o n Specif ication

ELECTRICAL Bat tery 12 V - 5 5 AH/5 hou rs

RATINGS Star te r 12 V - 1 . 6 k W

A l t e r n a t o r 12 V - 1 0 0 A

Fuses U n d e r - h o o d fuse / re lay b o x 100A, 50A, 40A, 30A, 20A, 15A

U n d e r - d a s h d r i v e r ' s f u s e / 30A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A

re lay b o x

U n d e r - d a s h passenge r ' s 30A, 20A, 10A, 7.5A

f use / re l ay b o x

L igh t bu lbs H e a d l i g h t h i gh b e a m 12 V - 6 0 W

H e a d l i g h t l o w b e a m 12 V - 5 1 W

Fron t t u r n s i gna l /F ron t s ide 12 V - 2 4 W/2.2 CP (cand lepower ) ( two f i l amen ts )

m a r k e r l igh ts

F ron t p a r k i n g l i gh ts 12 V - 3 C P

Rear t u r n s igna l l i gh ts 12 V - 2 1 W

Brake/Ta i l l igh ts 12 V - 2 1 / 5 W

Ta i l l i gh t 12 V - 3 C P

H i g h m o u n t brake l igh t 12 V - 2 1 W

Back-up l i gh ts 12 V - 2 1 W

License p late l i gh t 12 V - 3 C P

Ce i l ing l i gh t 12 V - 8 W

T r u n k l igh ts 12 V - 5 W

Doo r cou r tesy l i gh ts 12 V - 2 C P

Van i t y m i r r o r l igh ts 12 V - 1 . 1 W

G l o v e box l igh t 12 V - 3 . 4 W

Spo t l i gh t s 12 V - 4 C P

G a u g e l igh ts 12 V - 1 . 2 6 W , 3.78 W

Ind ica tor l igh ts 12 V - L E D , 1 4 V - 0 . 5 6 W , 0.7 W , 1.4 W

Panel a n d p i lo t l i gh ts 14 V - 0 . 5 6 W , 0.84 W

Heater con t ro l pane l l i gh ts 8 V - 1 . 2 W , 14 V - 1 . 1 2 W , 1.4W

2-16

Body Specifications

specs

4-door sedan

Un

it; mm

(in.)

(cont'd)

2-17

Body Specifications

(cont'd)

2-door coupe

Un

it: mm

(in.)

2-18

Maintenance

Lubricants and Fluids 3-2

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (1998-2000 models) Listed by Distance/Time 3-4

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (1998-2000 models) Listed by Distance/Time 3-6

Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions (1998-2000 models) Listed by Maintenance Item 3-8

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (2001 Model) Listed by Distance/Time 3-10

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (2001 Model) Listed by Distance/Time 3-12

Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions (2001 Model) Listed by Maintenance Item ........................................ 3-14

Lubricants and Fluids

For details of lubrication points and type of lubricants to be appl ied, refer to the illustrated index and various work procedure (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.

NO. LUBRICATION POINTS LUBRICANT 1 Engine API Service Grade: Use SJ "Energy Conserving" grade

oi l . The oil container may also display the API Certification seal shown below. Make sure it says "For Gasoline Engines/ ' SAE Viscosity: See chart below.

2 Transmission Honda ATF-Z1* 1

3 Brake line (includes ABS line) Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid*" 4 Power steering gearbox Steering grease P/N 08733-B070E 5 Thrott le cable end (Dashboard lower panel hole) Sil icone grease 6 Throttle cable end (Throttle link) Mult i-purpose grease 7 Brake master cylinder pushrod 8 Pedal linkage 9 10

Battery terminals Fuel fi l l l id

11 Hood hinges and hood latch Honda White Lithium Grease 12 Trunk hinges and latch 13 Door hinges, upper and lower 14 Door opening detent 15 Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and boots Silicone grease 16 Brake line joints (Front and rear wheelhouse) Rust preventives 17 Power steering system Genuine Honda Power Steering Flu id* 3

18 Air condit ioning compressor Compressor oi l : DENSO: ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01) For Refrigerant: HFC-134 a (R-134 a)

API SERVICE LABEL API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil Eng ine o i l v i s c o s i t y f o r a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e r a n g e s

30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 °C

* 1 : Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. *2 : Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake f luid can cause corrosion and decrease

the life of the system. *3 : Always use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering f luid or automatic

transmission f luid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.

NOTE: Lubricate all hinges, latches, and locks once a year. In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary. We recommend Honda White Lithium Grease.

3-2

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (1998-2000 Models)

Listed by Distance/Time

Serv ice at t he ind ica ted d is tance or t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i rs t .

7,500 m i / 12,000 k m / — • Do i t ems in A . 15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 year • D o i t e m s in A and B. 22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / — • Do i t ems in A, 30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 years • Do i t ems in A , B, a n d C. 37,500 mi/ 60,000 km/ — • Do i t ems in A . 45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 years

• Replace coo lan t (see page 10-10). Capaci ty : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S qt , 4.9 I m p q t ) . Use Honda A l l Season Ant i f reeze /coo lan t Type 2. • Replace brake f l u i d . Use Genu ine Honda DOT 3 Brake F lu id . Fill t o b e t w e e n marks on reservo i r . • Do i t ems in A and B.

52,500 m i / 8 4 , 0 0 0 k m / — • Do i t ems in A . 60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 years • Do i t ems in A , B, a n d C. 67,500 mi /108,000 k m / — • Do i t ems in A . 75,000 mi /120,000 k m / 5 years

• Replace coo lan t (see page 10-10). Capaci ty : 5.6 G (5.9 US q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) . Use Use Honda A l l Season Ant i f reeze /coo lan t Type 2. • Do i tems in A and B.

82,500 mi /132,000 k m / — • Do i t e m s in A . 90,000 mi /144,000 k m / 6 years

• Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . 2.9 fl (3.1 US qt , 2.6 I m p q t ) . Use H o n d a ATF-Z1 (see page 14-113). • Replace brake f l u i d . Use Genu ine Honda DOT 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n reservo i r . • Do i t ems in A , B, and C.

97,500 mi /156,000 k m / — • Do i t ems in A . 105,000 mi /168,000 k m / 7 years

• Inspect va lve c learance (cold) (see page 6-13). Intake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.) , Exhaust : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)

• Replace spark p lugs (see page 4-24). Use N G K (PZFR5F-11) or D E N S O (PKJ 16CR-L11). GAP: 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in)

• Replace t i m i n g bel t (see page 6-19) and inspect w a t e r p u m p (see page 10-10). • Check idle speed . S h o u l d be 680 + 50 r p m in M o r E pos i t i on (see page 11-68). LJ Replace coo lan t (see page 10-10). Capac i ty : 5.6 fl (5.9 US qt , 4.9 I m p qt ) . Use Honda A l l Season Ant i f reeze /coo lan t Type 2.

112,500 mi /181,000 k m / — • Do i t ems in A . 120,000 mi /192,000 k m / 8 years • Do the i t ems in A, B, a n d C.

3-4

Do t h e i t ems in parts A, B, and C as requ i red f o r m i l eage / t ime interval l is ted.

A • Replace eng ine oil (see page 8-5). - C a p a c i t y w i t h f i l te r change: 4.4 fi (4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt) • Rotate t i res. Fo l low the pat tern s h o w n in the O w n e r ' s M a n u a l - Check t i re in f la t ion and c o n d i t i o n .

• Replace eng ine oi l f i l ter (see page 8-5). • Inspect f r on t and rear brakes (see page 19-2).

• Check pads and discs fo r w e a r ( th ickness) , d a m a g e , and cracks. • Check cal ipers fo r d a m a g e , leaks, and t i gh tness of m o u n t bol ts .

• Check park ing brake ad jus tmen t . S h o u l d be fu l l y app l ied w i t h i n 6 to 9 cl icks. • Inspect t ie rod ends , s teer ing gea rbox , and boo ts (see page 17-12).

• Check rack grease and s teer ing l inkage. • Check boots fo r d a m a g e and leak ing grease. • Check f l u id l ine fo r damage a n d leaks.

• Inspect suspens ion c o m p o n e n t s . • Check bol ts fo r t igh tness . • Check cond i t i on of ball j o in t boo ts f o r de te r io ra t i on and d a m a g e .

• Inspect dr iveshaf t boo ts . Check boo ts f o r cracks and b o o t bands fo r t i gh tness (see page 16-3)* 1 . • Inspect brake hoses and l ines ( i nc lud ing ABS) . - C h e c k the master cy l inder , p r o p o r t i o n i n g con t ro l va lve , and A B S m o d u l a t o r fo r d a m a g e

a n d leakage. • Check all f l u id levels and c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i ds ; check fo r leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-112), eng ine coo lan t , brake f l u i d , and

w i n d s h i e l d washe r f l u i d . • Inspect coo l ing sys tem hoses and connec t i ons .

• Check fo r d a m a g e , leaks, and de te r i o ra t i on . • Check fo r p roper fan ope ra t i on .

• Inspect exhaus t s y s t e m * . Check cata ly t ic conver te r heat sh ie ld , exhaus t p ipe , and mu f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, and t i gh tness (see page 9-4). • Inspect fue l l ines and c o n n e c t i o n s * . Check fo r loose connec t ions , cracks and de te r i o ra t i on ; re t igh ten loose connec t i ons and replace

d a m a g e d parts (see page 11-73).

C • Replace air c leaner e lement . • Inspect and ad just d r ive belt.

• Look fo r cracks and d a m a g e , t h e n check bel t de f lec t ion by push ing on it (about 22 lbs) m i d w a y be tween the pu l leys . - P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see page 17-10).

• Replace the air cond i t i on i ng f i l te r (see page 21-26)* 1 . • Replace it tw i ce as o f ten (at 15,000 m i le in terval ) if the veh ic le is d r i ven m o s t l y in u rban areas tha t have h igh concen t ra t i ons of soot in the

air f r o m indus t ry and d iese l -powered veh ic les . • Replace it w h e n e v e r a i r f l ow f r o m the c l imate con t ro l s ys tem is less t han n o r m a l .

A c c o r d i n g to state and federa l regu la t ions , fa i lu re t o do the ma in tenance serv ice i t ems marked w i t h aster isk (*) w i l l no t v o i d cus tomer ' s em iss ions war ran t ies . However , Honda r e c o m m e n d s tha t all ma in tenance serv ices be d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d in terva l t o ensure l ong - te rm re l iab i l i ty . * 1 : Refer t o '98-01 ACCORD Serv ice M a n u a l (P/N 61S8008)

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (1998-2000 Models)


Serv ice at t he ind ica ted d is tance or t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i r s t . Use th i s s c h e d u l e if t he veh ic le is d r i ven M A I N L Y in Canada o r in any o f t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s ; if on l y O C C A S I O N A L L Y d r i v e n in t hese c o n d i t i o n s , use t h e N o r m a l Cond i t i ons schedu le (see page 3-4). S e v e r e Driving Condi t ions • Less t han 5 m i l es (8 km) per t r i p or , in f reez ing t e m p e r a t u r e s , less t h a n 10 m i l e s (16 km) per t r i p • In e x t r e m e l y ; ho t w e a t h e r (over 90°F/32°C) • Ex tens ive id l i ng or l ong pe r i ods of s t o p - a n d - g o d r i v i n g • Tra i le r t o w i n g • On m u d d y , dus ty , or de- iced roads • D r i v i ng in m o u n t a i n o u s cond i t i ons

3,750 m i / 6,000 k m / - • Rep lace o i l a n d f i l te r . 7,500 m i / 1 2 , 0 0 0 k m / — • D o i t e m s in A. 11,250 m i / 1 8 , 0 0 0 k m / — • Rep lace o i l a n d f i l te r . 15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 year

• Clean air c leaner e l emen t w i t h l o w pressure air. • Do i t ems in A and B.

18,750 m i / 30,000 k m / — • Rep lace oi l a n d f i l ter . 22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / 1 1/2 years : • Do i t e m s in A . 26,250 m i / 42,000 k m / • Rep lace oi l and f i l te r 30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 years : • Do i t e m s in A , B, and C 33,750 m i / 54,000 k m / — • Rep lace o i l a n d f i l ter . 37,500 m i / 60,000 km/2 1/2 years : • D o i t e m s in A. 41,250 m i / 66,000 k m / • Rep lace o i l a n d f i l te r . 45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 years :

• Clean air c leaner e l emen t w i t h l o w pressure air. • Replace coo lan t (see page 10-10). Use Honda A l l S e a s o n An t i f r eeze /coo lan t T y p e 2.

Capaci ty : 5.6 fl (5.9 US qt , 4.9 I m p q t ) . • Replace brake f l u id (see page 19-7)* 1 .

• Use Genu ine Honda DOT 3. • Fill t o b e t w e e n marks on reservo i r .

• Do i tems in A and B. 48,750 m i / 78,000 k m / — • Rep lace oi l and f i l ter . 52 ,500mi / 84,000 k m 3 1/2 years : • Do i t ems in A . 56,250 m i / 90,000 k m / — ^ • Replace o i l a n d f i l ter . 60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 years :

• Replace t i m i n g bel t (see page 6-19) a n d inspect t h e w a t e r p u m p (see page 10-9) if the veh ic le is regu la r l y d r i ven in w e a t h e r over 110°F (43°C) or u n d e r - 2 0 ° F ( - 2 9 ° C ) ; If no t , replace the be l ts at 105,000 m i les .

• Do i tems in A , B and C. ; ^ 63,750 mi /102,000 k m / — • Replace o i l and f i l te r . 67,500 mi /108,000 k m 4 1/2 years : • Do i t ems in A. ^ 71,250 mi /114,000 k m — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . ~..~.~Z1S. ' 75,000mi /120,000 k m / 5 years :

• Clean air c leaner e l emen t w i t h l o w pressure air. • Replace coo lan t (see page 10-10). Use H o n d a A l l Season An t i f reeze /coo lan t Type 2.

Capaci ty : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p qt) • Do i t ems in A and B.

78,750 mi /126,000 " k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 82,500 mi /132,000 k m / 5 1/2 years • Do i t e m s in A. ^ 86,250 mi /138,000 k m / — • Replace o i l and f i l ter . "" ~~ 90,000 mi /144,000 k m / 6 years :

• Replace brake f l u id (see page 19-7)* 1 . Use Genu ine H o n d a DOT 3 brake f l u i d ; f i l l t o b e t w e e n marks on reservo i r .

• Do i tems in A , B a n d C. 93,750 mi /150,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 97,500 mi /156,000 k m / 6 1/2 years : • Do i t ems in A. 101,250 mi /162,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . ^ 105,000 mi /168,000 k m / 7 years :

• Clean air c leaner e l e m e n t w i t h l o w pressure air. • Inspect va l ve c learance (cold) (see page 6-13) lntake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.) Exhaust : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.) • Replace spark p lugs . Use N G K (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ16CR-L11). Gap : 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in) (see page 4-24). • Replace t i m i n g bel t (see page 6-19), and inspect the w a t e r p u m p (see page 10-10) on l y if the bel ts w a s no t rep laced at 60,000 mi les . • Check id le speed (see page 11-68): 680 + 50 r p m • Replace coo lan t (see page 10-10). Use H o n d a A l l Season Ant i f reeze /coo lan t Type 2. Capaci ty : 5.6 ft (5.9 US qt , 4.9 I m p qt) . • Do i tems in A and B.

108,750 mi /174,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 112,500 mi /180,000 k m / 7 1/2 years : • Do i t ems in A. 116,250 mi /186,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 120,000 mi /192,000 k m / 8 years : • Do i tems A , B, and C. * 1 : Refer t o '98-01 ACCORD Serv ice M a n u a l (P/N 61S8008)

3-6

Do t h e i t ems in parts A , B, and C as requ i red f o r m i leage / t ime in terva l .

A • Replace eng ine oi l and f i l te r (see page 8-5). — Capaci ty w i t h f i l ter change : 4.4 fi (4.6 US qt , 3.9 I m p qt) • Inspect f r on t and rear brakes, every 6 m o n t h s if veh ic le is d r i ven less t h a n 7,500 m i le per year (see page 19-2).

• Check pads and discs fo r w e a r ( th ickness), d a m a g e , and cracks. • Check cal ipers fo r d a m a g e , leaks, and t ightness<of m o u n t bo l ts .

• Rotate t i res, if the veh ic le has been d r i ven the d is tance l is ted. Fo l l ow the pa t te rn s h o w n in t he O w n e r ' s M a n u a l . (Check t i re in f la t ion and cond i t ion . )

• Inspect t ie rod ends , s teer ing gea rbox , and boo ts (see page 17-12). • Check rack grease and s teer ing l inkage. • Check boots fo r d a m a g e and leaking grease. • Check f lu id l ines fo r d a m a g e and leaks.

• Inspect suspens ion c o m p o n e n t s . • Check bol ts fo r t i gh tness . • Check cond i t i on o f bal l j o i n t boo ts f o r de te r io ra t ion and d a m a g e .

• Inspect dr iveshaf t boo ts . Check boo ts f o r cracks and b o o t bands fo r t i gh tness (see page 16-3)* 1 .

B • Check park ing brake ad jus tmen t . — S h o u l d be fu l l y app l ied w i t h i n 6 to 9 c l icks. • Lubr icate doo r locks and h inges w i t h Honda w h i t e l i t h i um grease. • Inspect brake hoses a n d l ines ( inc lud ing ABS) . Check the mas te r cy l inder , p r o p o r t i o n i n g con t ro l va lve , and A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e and

leakage (see page 19-30)* 1 . • Check f l u id levels and cond i t i on of f l u i ds ; check fo r leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-112), eng ine coo lan t , brake f l u i d , and

w i n d s h i e l d washe r f l u i d . • Inspect coo l ing sys tem hoses and connec t ions .

• Check fo r d a m a g e , leaks, and de te r io ra t i on . • Check fo r p roper f a n ope ra t i on .

• Inspect exhaus t s y s t e m . * Check cata ly t ic conver te r heat sh ie ld , exhaus t p ipe , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, and t i gh tness (see page 9-4). • Inspect fue l l ines a n d connec t i ons . * Check fo r loose connec t i ons , cracks and d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; re t igh ten loose connec t i ons and replace

d a m a g e d parts (see page 11-73). • Check all l ights . Check f unc t i on of all in te r io r and ex ter io r l igh ts , and the pos i t i ons of t h e head l igh ts (see page 22-98)* 1 . • Inspect the vehic le u n d e r b o d y . Check the pa in t f o r d a m a g e , scratches, s tone c h i p p i n g , and dents .

C • Replace air c leaner e l emen t . • Inspect and ad jus t d r i ve bel t . Look fo r cracks and d a m a g e , t h e n check t ens ion by p u s h i n g on each bel t (about 22 lbs) m i d w a y be tween t h e

pu l leys : • P/S p u m p belt : 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see page 17-10)

• Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l ter , every 15,000 mi les if veh ic le is d r i ven m o s t l y w h e r e air has h igh concen t ra t i on of soo t f r o m indus t r y and d iese l -powered veh ic les ; a lso replace it a n y t i m e a i r f l ow is less t han usual (see page 21-26)* 1 .

• Replace t r ansm iss ion f l u i d . Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF).

A c c o r d i n g t o state and federa l regu la t ions , fa i l u re t o do the ma in tenance i t ems m a r k e d w i t h aster isk (*) w i l l no t vo i d cus tomer ' s emiss ions war ran t i es . However , Honda r e c o m m e n d s tha t all ma in tenance serv ices be d o n e at t he r e c o m m e n d e d in terva l to ensure l ong - te rm re l iab i l i ty . * 1 : Refer to '98-00 ACCORD Serv ice Manua l (P/N 61S8005)

3-

Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions (1998-2000 Models)

Listed by Maintenance Item

Serv ice at t he ind ica ted d is tance or t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i r s t . a If d r i ven in n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s , do i t ems w i t h a d o t ( • ) . • If d r i ven in severe c o n d i t i o n s {see page 3-6) or n o r m a l l y d r i v e n in Canada , d o i t ems w i t h a circ le ( O ) and i tems w i t h a do t ( • ) .

Serv ice at t he ind ica ted d is tance o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i rs t .

m i l es x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 Serv ice at t he ind ica ted d is tance o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i rs t .

k m x 1000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60

Serv ice at t he ind ica ted d is tance o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i rs t .

years 1/2 - 1 - 1 1/2 - 2 - 21/2

Replace e n g i n e oi l Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles {12,000 km) or 12 months Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months

Replace e n g i n e oi l f i l te r Normal Conditions: Every other oil change Severe Conditions: Every oil change

Clean air c leaner e l e m e n t o Replace air c leaner e l e m e n t #

Inspect va lve c learance Ad jus t on l y if no isy .

Replace spark p lugs

Replace t i m i n g bel t , N 0 T E 1 and inspect w a t e r p u m p

Inspect and ad jus t d r i ve bel ts • Inspect id le s p e e d *

Replace e n g i n e coo lan t

Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d o Inspect f r o n t and rear brakes o • o • o Replace brake f l u i d

Check park ing brake a d j u s t m e n t # #

Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r N 0 T E 2 m Lubr ica te locks and h inges o Rotate t i res (Check t i re in f la t ion and c o n d i t i o n at least once a m o n t h ) • • • m • Inspect t i e - rod ends , s tee r ing g e a r b o x , and boo ts o m o m o Inspect s u s p e n s i o n c o m p o n e n t s o m o m o Inspect d r i vesha f t boo t s o • o m o Inspect brake hoses and l ines ( i nc lud ing A B S ) #

Inspect all f l u i d levels and c o n d i t i o n of f l u i ds • Inspect c o o l i n g s y s t e m hoses and connec t i ons m #

Inspect exhaus t s y s t e m * • Inspect fue l l ines and c o n n e c t i o n s * #

Check l igh ts and con t ro l s o o Inspect veh ic le unde r b o d y o o

NOTE: 1. If the veh ic le is regu la r l y d r i ven in v e r y ho t or co ld wea the r , over 110°F (43°C) or under - 2 0 ° F ( - 29°C), replace th i s bel t every 60,000 m i les ;

If no t , replace it at 105,000 m i les . 2. Replace the air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l te r eve ry 15,000 m i l es if the vehic le is d r i ven m o s t l y w h e r e air has a h igh concen t ra t i on of soo t f r o m indus t ry

and d i ese l - powered veh ic le ; a lso replace it a n y t i m e a i r f l ow is less t han usua l . * A c c o r d i n g t o state and federa l regu la t i ons , fa i l u re t o d o the ma in tenance i tems marked w i t h an aster isk (*) w i l l no t v o i d cus tomer ' s em iss ions

wa r ran t i es . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all ma in tenance serv ices be d o n e at the r e c o m m e n d e d in terva l t o ensure l ong - t e rm re l iabi l i ty .

3-8

41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 116.25' 120

66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 175 181 187 193

_ 3 31/2 4 _ 41/2 5 51/2 6 - 61/2 7 - 71/2 - 8

N o r m a l Cond i t i ons : Every 7,500 mi les (12,000 k m ) or 12 m o n t h s Severe Cond i t i ons : Every 3,750 mi les (6,000 km) o r 6 m o n t h s

N o r m a l Cond i t i ons : Every o ther oi l change Severe Cond i t i ons : Every oi l change

o o o • • •

A d j u s t on ly if noisy. • • o • o • m o

• • • •

o m o • o • o • o m o • o • • • • • • m • m m

o o o • • • • • Q m • • • ®

• o • o • o m o • o o • o • o m o • o B

• o • o • o m o • o ®

• • • m • • • • • m • m

• • • m • m • • • m • m

m m • m • m

o o o o o o o o o o :

3-9

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (2001 Model)


Serv ice at t he ind ica ted d is tance or t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i rs t .

7,500 m i / 12,000 k m / • Do i t e m s in A . 15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 year • D o i t e m s in A a n d B. 22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / — • Do i t e m s in A . 30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 years • D o i t e m s in A , B, a n d C. 37,500 m i / 60,000 k m / • Do i t e m s in A . 45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 years • Do i t e m s in A , B, a n d D. 52,500 m i / 84,000 k m / — • Do i t e m s in A . 60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 years • Do i t e m s in A , B, and C. 67,500 mi /108,000 k m / — • Do i t e m s in A . 75,000 mi /120,000 k m / 5 years • Do i t ems in A and B. 82,500 mi /132,000 k m / — • Do i t ems in A . 90,000 mi /144,000 k m / 6 years • Do i t e m s in A , B, C, a n d D. 97.500 mi /156.000 k m / — • Do i t e m s in A . 105,000 mi /168,000 k m / 7 years

• Inspect va lve c learance (cold) (see page 6-13). Intake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.) , Exhaust : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)

• Replace spark p lugs (see page 4-24). Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) o r D E N S O (PKJ 16CR-L11). GAP: 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in)

• Replace t i m i n g bel t (see page 6-19) and inspect w a t e r p u m p (see page 10-9). • Check id le speed . S h o u l d be 6 8 0 ± 50 r p m in M or [E pos i t i on (see page 11-68). • Do i t ems in A and B.

112,500 mi /181,000 k m / — • Do i t e m s in A . 120,000 mi /192,000 k m / 8 years • Do t h e i t e m s in A , B, a n d C. 120,000 mi /192,000 k m / 6 yea rs

• Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . Use H o n d a ATF-Z1 (ATF) ( s e e p a g e 14-113), therea f te r eve ry 90,000 mi les (144,000 km) or 5 years 120,000 mi /192,000 km/10 years

• Replace coo lan t (see page 10-10). Use H o n d a A l l Season An t i f r eeze /coo lan t T y p e 2. Capaci ty : 5.6 fl (5.9 US q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) , the rea f te r eve ry 60,000 m i l es (100,000 km) or 5 years .

3-10

Do t h e i t ems in parts A , B, C, and D as requ i red fo r m i leage / t ime interval l is ted.

A • Replace eng ine oi l (see page 8-5). - C a p a c i t y w i t h f i l ter change: 4,4 fl (4.6 US q t , 3.9 I m p qt) • Rotate t i res. Fo l low the pat tern s h o w n in the O w n e r ' s M a n u a l —Check t i re in f la t ion a n d c o n d i t i o n .

• Replace eng ine oi l f i l ter (see page 8-5). • Inspect f r o n t and rear brakes (see page 19-2).

• Check pads and discs fo r w e a r ( th ickness) , d a m a g e , and cracks. • Check cal ipers fo r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i gh tness of m o u n t bol ts .

• Check pa rk ing brake ad jus tmen t . S h o u l d be fu l l y app l ied w i t h i n 6 to 9 cl icks. • Inspect t ie rod ends , s teer ing g e a r b o x , and boo ts (see page 17-12).

• Check rack grease and s teer ing l inkage. • Check boo ts fo r d a m a g e and leak ing grease. • Check f l u id l ine f o r d a m a g e and leaks.

• Inspect suspens ion c o m p o n e n t s . • Check bol ts fo r t igh tness . • Check cond i t i on of bal l j o in t boo t s f o r de te r io ra t ion and d a m a g e .

• Inspect dr iveshaf t boo ts . Check boo t s f o r cracks and b o o t bands fo r t i gh tness (see page 16-3)* 1 . • Inspect brake hoses and l ines ( i nc lud ing ABS) . —Check the mas te r cy l inder , p r o p o r t i o n i n g con t ro l va l ve , and A B S m o d u l a t o r fo r d a m a g e

a n d leakage. • Check all f l u id levels and cond i t i on o f f l u i ds ; check fo r leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-112), eng ine coo lan t , brake f l u i d , and

w i n d s h i e l d w a s h e r f l u i d . • Inspect coo l i ng sys tem hoses a n d connec t i ons .


• Inspect exhaus t s y s t e m * . Check cata ly t ic conver te r heat sh ie ld , exhaus t p ipe , and m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t igh tness (see page 9-4). • Inspect fue l l ines and c o n n e c t i o n s * . Check fo r loose connec t ions , cracks and de te r i o ra t i on ; re t i gh ten loose connec t i ons and replace

d a m a g e d parts (see page 11-73).

C • Replace air c leaner e lement . • Inspect and ad just d r i ve belt .

• Look fo r cracks and d a m a g e , t h e n check bel t de f lec t ion by push ing on it (abou t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n the pu l leys . - P/S p u m p belt : 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see page 17-10).

• Replace the air cond i t i on ing f i l te r (see page 21-26)* 1 . • Replace it tw ice as o f ten (at 15,000 m i le in terva l ) if t he veh ic le is d r i ven m o s t l y in u rban areas tha t have h igh concen t ra t ions of soo t in the

air f r o m indus t ry and d iese l -powered vehic les. • Replace it w h e n e v e r a i r f l ow f r o m the c l imate con t ro l s ys tem is less t h a n n o r m a l .

D • Replace brake f l u id every 3 years ( Independen t o f Dis tance) . Use Genu ine Honda DOT 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n marks on reservo i r (see page 1 1 -

000).

A c c o r d i n g t o state and federa l regu la t i ons , fa i lu re t o d o t h e ma in tenance serv ice i t ems m a r k e d w i t h aster isk (*) w i l l no t v o i d cus tomer ' s em iss ions war ran t ies . Howeve r , Honda r e c o m m e n d s tha t all ma in tenance serv ices be d o n e at the r e c o m m e n d e d in te rva l t o ensure l ong - t e rm re l iab i l i ty . * \ Refer t o '98-01 ACCORD Serv ice M a n u a l (P/N 61S8008)

3-11

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions 12001 Model)


Serv ice at t he ind ica ted d is tance or t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i r s t Use t h i s schedu le if t he veh ic le is d r i ven M A I N L Y in Canada or in any of the f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s ; if o n l y OCCASIONALLY d r i ven in these c o n d i t i o n s , use t h e N o r m a l Cond i t i ons schedu le (see page 3-10). S e v e r e D r i v i n g C o n d i t i o n s . Less t h a n 5 m i les (8 km) per t r i p or , in f reez ing t e m p e r a t u r e s , less t h a n 10 m i l es (16 km) per t r i p • In e x t r e m e l y ; ho t w e a t h e r (over 90°F/32°C) • Ex tens ive id l i ng or l o n g pe r i ods o f s t op -and -go d r i v i ng • Tra i le r t o w i n g • O n m u d d y , dus ty , or de- iced roads • D r i v i ng in m o u n t a i n o u s cond i t i ons

3,750 m i / 6,000 k m / - • Replace o i l and f i l te r . 7,500 m i / 12,000 k m / — • Do i t e m s in A . 11,250 m i / 1 8 , 0 0 0 k m / • Replace o i l and f i l ter . 15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 yea r

• Clean air c leaner e l emen t w i t h l o w pressure air. f l Do i t ems in A and B.

18,750 m i / 30.000 k m / • Replace oi l and f i l te r . 22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / 1 1/2 years : • Do i t e m s in A . 26,250 m i / 42,000 k m / • Replace o i l and f i l te r 30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 years : • Do i t ems in A , B, a n d C 33,750 m i / 54,000 k m / — • Replace oi l a n d f i l te r . 37,500 m i / 60,000 km/2 1/2 years : • Do i t ems in A . 41,250 m i / 66,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 years :

• Clean air c leaner e l e m e n t w i t h l o w pressure air. f l Do i tems in A , B, a n d D.

48,750 m i / 78,000 k m / — • Replace oi l a n d f i l ter . 52 ,500mi / 84,000 k m 3 1/2 years : • Do i t ems in A . 56,250 m i / 90,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 years :

• Replace t i m i n g bel t (see page 6 -19) a n d inspect the w a t e r p u m p (see page 10-9) if t he veh ic le is regu la r ly d r i ven in w e a t h e r over 110°F (43°C) or unde r - 2 0 ° F ( - 2 9 ° C ) ; if no t , rep lace the be l ts at 105,000 m i les .

L J Do i tems in A , B and C. 60,000 mi /96,000 km/3 years

f l Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) (see page 14-xx) , the rea f te r every 90,000 mi les (144,000 km) or 5 years . 63,750 mi /102,000 k m / — I ~i Replace oi l and f i l ter . 67,500 mi /108,000 k m 4 1/2 years : • Do i t ems in A . 71,250 mi /114,000 k m - • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 75,000mi /120,000 km/5 years :

• Clean air c leaner e l e m e n t w i t h l o w pressure air. • Do i tems in A and B.

78,750 mi /126,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 82,500 mi /132,000 km/5 1/2 years • Do i t ems in A . 86,250 mi /138,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 90,000 mi /144,000 k m / 6 years : • Do i t ems in A , B, C. and D. 93,750 mi /150,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 97,500 mi /156,000 km/6 1/2 years : • Do i t ems in A. 101,250 mi /162,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 105,000 mi /168,000 k m / 7 years :

• Clean air c leaner e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p ressure air. • inspect va lve c learance (cold) (see page 6-13) lntake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.) Exhaust : 0.28 -0 .32 m m (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.) • Replace spark p l ugs . Use N G K (PZFR5F-11) or D E N S O (PKJ16CR-L11). Gap : 1 . 0 -1 .1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in) (see page 4-24). • Replace t i m i n g be l t (see page 6-19), a n d inspect t h e w a t e r p u m p (see page 10-9) on ly if the bel ts w a s not rep laced at 60,000 mi les . • Check id le speed (see page 11-68): 6 8 0 ± 5 0 r p m f ] Do i tems in A and B.

108,750 mi /174,000 k m / — • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 112,500 mi /180,000 k m / 7 1/2 years : • Do i t ems in A . 116,250 mi /186,000 km/ • Replace oi l and f i l ter . 120,000 mi /192,000 k m / 8 years : • Do i tems A , B, and C. 120,000 mi /200,000 k m / 6 yea rs

• Replace eng ine coo lan t (see page 10-10). Use H o n d a A l l Season An t i f reeze /coo lan t Type 2. Capaci ty : 5.6 ft (5.9 US q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) , the rea f te r eve ry 60,000 m i les (100,000 km) or 5 years .

• Replace t i m i n g bel t (see page 6-19), and inspect the w a t e r p u m p (see page 10-9) on l y if the belts w a s not rep laced at 60,000 mi les .

3-12

Do the i tems in parts A , B, C, and D as requ i red f o r m i leage / t ime in terva l ,

A • Replace eng ine oi l and f i l te r (see page 8-5). — Capaci ty w i th f i l ter change : 4.4 fl (4.6 US qt , 3.9 Imp qt) • Inspect f r on t and rear brakes, every 6 m o n t h s if veh ic le is d r iven less t h a n 7,500 m i l e per year (see page 19-2).

• Check pads and discs fo r w e a r ( th ickness), d a m a g e , and cracks. • Check cal ipers f o r d a m a g e , leaks, and t i gh tness of m o u n t bol ts .

• Rotate t i res, if the veh ic le has been d r i ven the d is tance l isted. Fo l l ow the pa t te rn s h o w n in the O w n e r ' s M a n u a l . (Check t i re in f la t ion a n d cond i t ion . )

• Inspect t ie r od ends , s teer ing gea rbox , and boo ts (see page 17-12). • Check rack grease and s teer ing l inkage. • Check boo ts fo r d a m a g e and leak ing grease. • Check f l u id l ines fo r d a m a g e and leaks.

• Inspect suspens ion c o m p o n e n t s . • Check bo l ts fo r t i gh tness . • Check cond i t i on o f bal l j o in t boo ts f o r de te r io ra t i on and damage .

• Inspect d r iveshaf t boo ts . Check boo ts f o r cracks and b o o t bands fo r t i gh tness (see page 16-3)* 1 .

B • Check park ing brake ad jus tmen t . — S h o u l d be fu l l y app l ied w i t h i n 6 t o 9 c l icks. • Lubr icate d o o r locks and h inges w i t h Honda w h i t e l i t h ium grease. • Inspect brake hoses a n d l ines ( i nc lud ing ABS) . Check the master cy l i nder , p r o p o r t i o n i n g con t ro l va lve , and A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e and

leakage (see page 19-30)* 1 . • Check f l u i d levels and cond i t i on o f f l u i ds ; check fo r leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-112), eng ine coo lan t , brake f l u i d , and

w i n d s h i e l d w a s h e r f l u i d . • Inspect coo l i ng sys tem hoses and connec t i ons .


• Inspect exhaus t s y s t e m . * Check cata ly t ic conve r te r heat sh ie ld , exhaus t p ipe , and mu f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, and t igh tness (see page 9-4). • Inspect fue l l ines and c o n n e c t i o n s . * Check fo r loose connec t ions , cracks and de te r i o ra t i on ; re t igh ten loose connec t ions and replace

d a m a g e d parts (see page 11-73). • Check all l igh ts . Check f u n c t i o n of all in te r io r and ex ter io r l ights , and the pos i t i ons o f the head l igh ts (see page 22-98)* 1 . • Inspect the vehic le u n d e r b o d y . Check the pa in t fo r damage , scratches, s tone c h i p p i n g , and dents .

C • Replace air c leaner e lemen t . • Inspect and ad jus t d r i ve bel t . Look fo r cracks and d a m a g e , t hen check tens ion by p u s h i n g on each bel t (about 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n the

pu l leys: • P/S p u m p belt : 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see page 17-10)

• Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l ter , every 15,000 mi les if vehic le is d r i ven m o s t l y w h e r e air has h igh concen t ra t i on of soot f r o m indus t r y and d iese l -powered veh ic les ; a lso replace it a n y t i m e a i r f l ow is less t han usual (see page 21-26)* 1 .

• Replace t r ansm iss i on f l u i d . Use Genu ine Honda ATF.

D • Replace brake f l u i d every 3 years ( Independen t of Distance). Use Genu ine DOT 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n marks on reservo i r , (see page 11-000).

A c c o r d i n g t o state and federa l regu la t ions , fa i lu re t o do t he ma in tenance i t ems marked w i t h aster isk (*) w i l l no t v o i d cus tomer ' s em iss ions war ran t ies . Howeve r , Honda r e c o m m e n d s tha t all ma in tenance serv ices be d o n e at t he r e c o m m e n d e d in terva l t o ensure l ong - te rm re l iab i l i ty . * 1 : Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Serv ice M a n u a l (P/N 61S8008)

3-13

Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions (2001 Model)

Listed by Maintenance item

Serv ice at t h e ind ica ted d is tance o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i rs t . • If d r i ven in n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s , d o i t ems w i t h a do t < • ) . • If d r i ven in severe c o n d i t i o n s (see page 3-6) o r n o r m a l l y d r i v e n in Canada , d o i t e m s w i t h a c i rc le (O) and i t ems w i t h a do t ( # ) .

Serv ice at t h e ind ica ted d is tance or t i m e , w h i c h e v e r m i l e s x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 c o m e s f i rs t . k m x 1000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60

years _ 1/2 _ • 1 — 1 1/2 — 2 — 2 1/2 Replace e n g i n e oi l Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months Replace e n g i n e oi l

Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months Replace e n g i n e oi l f i l ter Normal Conditions: Every other oil change Replace e n g i n e oi l f i l ter

Severe Conditions: Every oil change Clean air c leaner e l e m e n t o Replace air c leaner e l e m e n t • Inspect va lve c learance A d j ust on l y if no isy. Replace spark p lugs Replace t i m i n q b e l t , N 0 T E 1 a n d inspect w a t e r p u m p Inspect and ad jus t d r i ve bel ts • Insoect id le s p e e d * Replace e n g i n e coo lan t Normal and Severe Conditions: Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or For engine coolant: Normal and Severe Conditions: Every 120,000 miles 10 years, thereafter every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years (192,000 km) or 10 years, thereafter every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years.

Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d Normal Condition: Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d thereafter every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years Severe Condition: Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, thereafter every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

Inspect f r o n t and rear brakes o m o m o Replace brake f l u i d Every 3 years ( i ndependen t of d istance! Check pa rk inq brake a d j u s t m e n t m # Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r N 0 T E 2

Lubr ica te locks and h i nges o Rotate t i res (Check t i re in f l a t i on a n d c o n d i t i o n at least once a m o n t h ) • m # • Inspect t i e - rod ends , s tee r ing g e a r b o x , a n d boo ts O m o • o Inspect suspens ion c o m p o n e n t s o m o o Inspect d r i vesha f t boo ts o m o o Inspect brake hoses a n d l ines ( i nc lud ing A B S ) m Inspect all f l u i d levels and c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i ds m Inspect c o o l i n q s y s t e m hoses a n d c o n n e c t i o n s • Inspect exhaus t s y s t e m * m Inspect fue l l ines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s * m # Check l iqh ts and con t ro l s o o Inspect veh ic le unde r b o d y o o

NOTE: 1. If t he veh ic le is regu la r l y d r i ven in ve ry ho t o r co ld w e a t h e r , ove r 110°F (43°C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 ° F ( ~ 2 9 ° C ) , replace th is bel t eve ry 60,000 m i l es ;

If no t , replace it at 105,000 m i les . 2. Replace the air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l te r eve ry 15,000 m i les if t he veh ic le is d r i ven m o s t l y w h e r e air has a h igh concen t ra t ion of soo t f r o m indus t r y

and d iese l -powered veh ic le ; a lso rep lace it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n usua l . * A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d federa l r egu la t i ons , fa i l u re t o d o the m a i n t e n a n c e i t ems m a r k e d w i t h an aster isk (*) w i l l no t vo i d cus tomer ' s em iss ions wa r ran t i es . Howeve r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t ha t all m a i n t e n a n c e serv ices be d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d in terva l t o ensure l ong - t e rm re l iab i l i ty .

3-14

41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 116.25 120 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 r 132 ~ 138 144 150 156 162 168 175 181 187 193 — 3 — 31/2 — 4 — 41/2 — 5 — 51/2 6 _ 61/2 _ 7 — 71/2 _ 8

N o r m a l Cond i t i ons : Every 7,500 mi les (12,000 km) or 12 m o n t h s Severe Cond i t i ons : Every 3,750 mi les (6,000 km) or 6 m o n t h s N o r m a l Cond i t i ons : Every o ther oi l change Severe Cond i t i ons : Every oi l change

o o o • • • Ad jus t on ly if no isy. • •

o • :: • • o • N o r m a l and Severe Cond i t ions : Every 120,000 mi les (192,000 km) or 10 years , thereaf te r every 60,000 mi les (96,000 km) or 5 years

• N o r m a l Cond i t i ons : Every 120,000 mi les (192,000 km) or 6 years, thereaf ter every 90,000 mi les (144,000 km) or 5 years Severe Cond i t i ons : Every 60,000 mi les (96,000 km) or 3 years, thereaf ter every 30,000 mi les (48,000 km) or 2 years

I • I I O i I • I I O ! I • I I O ! I • I I O I Q O Every 3 years ( i ndependen t of d is tance) • • • • • o

• © o o o o c m • • • • • m m • 0 m o o • o o # L o o • o o • o • o o Q • o o • o • o o 0 • • 0 m • • o m • • o • • m • o # ® • m # 0 o o o o o o o o o o

3-15

Engine Electrical

Engine Electrical Special Tools 4-2

Starting System Component Location Index 4-3 Circuit Diagram 4-4 Starter Circuit Troubleshooting 4-5 Starter Solenoid Test 4-6 Starter Performance Test 4-7 Starter Replacement 4-8 Starter Overhaul 4-9

Ignition System Component Location Index 4-14 Circuit Diagram 4-16 Ignition Timing Inspection 4-18 Distributor Replacement 4-19 Distributor Disassembly /Reassembly 4-20 ICM (Ignition Control Module) Input Test 4-21 Ignition Coil Test 4-22 Ignition Wire Inspection and Test 4-22 Ignition Coil Troubleshooting 4-23 Spark Plug Inspection/Replacement 4-24

Charging System Component Location Index 4-25 Circuit Diagram 4-26 Charging Circuit Troubleshooting 4-27 Alternator-Compressor Belt

Inspection and Replacement 4-31 Alternator Replacement . 4-31 Auto-Tensioner Inspection 4-33 Alternator Overhaul 4-35

Cruise Control Component Location Index 4-41 Circuit Diagram 4-42 Symptom Troubleshooting Index 4-43 Cruise Control Communicat ion Circuit

Troubleshooting 4-45 Control Unit Input Test 4-46 Main Switch Test /Replacement 4-48 Set /Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement 4-49 Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 4-50 Actuator Solenoid Test 4-50 Actuator Test 4-51 Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement 4-52 Actuator Cable Adjustment 4-54

Engine Mount Control System Component Location Index 4-55 Circuit Diagram 4-56 Troubleshooting 4-57

Engine Electrical

Special Tools

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty ® A973X-041-XXXXX Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 — 30 in.Hg 1 ® 07746-0010400 Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 1 ® 07749-0010000 Driver 1

® © ( D

4-2

Starting System

Component Location Index

S T A R T E R Star ter Circui t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 4-5 S o l e n o i d T e s t page 4-6 P e r f o r m a n c e T e s t , page 4-7 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 4-8 O v e r h a u l , p a g e 4-9

B A T T E R Y

4^3

Starting System

Circuit Diagram

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BATTERY

• BLK •

No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A)

• W H T

IGNITION SWITCH

^ B A T "

ST,

BLK/WHT

No.13(7.5A)

BLK/RED BLU/ORN

• PCM « PGM-FI

MAIN RELAY

BLK/WHT

DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

BLU/WHT

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH /Closed: \ I B and E l position/

BLK

JCL

G101

4-4

• ENGINE •

Starter Circyit Troubleshooting

NOTE: • Air temperature must be between 59° and 100°F (15°

and 38°C) during this procedure. • After this test, or any subsequent repair, reset the

PCM to clear any Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC); refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).

Recommended Procedure: • Use a starter system tester. • Connect and operate the equipment in accordance

wi th the manufacturer's instructions.

Alternate Procedure

1. Hook up the fo l lowing equipment:

• Ammeter, 0 - 4 0 0 A • Voltmeter, 0 - 2 0 V (accurate wi th in 0.1 volt) • Tachometer, 0 - 1 2 0 0 rpm

/I A ®v©

o o

2. Remove the No. 46 (15 A) fuse f rom the under-dash fuse/relay box.

3. With the shift lever in HQ or E, turn the ignition switch to start (III).

Did the starter crank the engine normally?

Y E S - The starting system is OK •

NO - If the starter won' t crank at all, go to step 4. If it cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go to step 7. If it won ' t disengage f rom the torque converter ring gear when you release the key, check for the fo l lowing until you f ind the cause.

• Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction • Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch.

4. Check the battery condit ion. Check electrical connections at the battery and the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then check the starter again.

Did the starter crank the engine?

YES—The starting system is OK.B

N O - G o to step 5.

5. Make sure the transmission is in neutral, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (A) f rom the starter solenoid (B). Connect a jumper wire f rom the battery positive terminal to the solenoid terminal.

Did the starter crank the engine?

Y E S - G o to step 6.

NO —Remove the starter and diagnose its internal problems. •

6. Check the fol lowing items in the order listed until you f ind the open circuit.

• Check the BLK/WHT wire and connectors between the starter cut relay and the ignition switch, and between the starter cut relay and the starter.

• Check the ignition switch, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-55).

• Check the transmission range switch and connector (see page 14-141).

(cont'd)

4-5

Starting System

Starter Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

7. Check engine speed during cranking.

Is engine speed above 100 rpm?


IMO —Remove and disassemble the starter, and check for the fo l lowing until you f ind the cause. •

• Excessively worn starter brushes • Open circuit in commutator brushes • Dirty or damaged helical spline or drive gear • Faulty drive gear clutch

8. Check the cranking voltage and current draw.

Is cranking voltage no less than 8.5 volts, and current draw no more than 380 amps?


NO —Remove and disassemble the starter, and check for the fo l lowing until you f ind the cause. •

• Open circuit in starter armature commutator segments

• Starter armature dragging • Shorted armature winding • Excessive drag in engine

9. Remove the starter and inspect its drive gear and the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Starter Solenoid Test

1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal (A) and the armature housing (ground). There should be continuity.

• If there is continuity, go to step 2. • If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.

A

2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S and M terminals (B). There should be continuity.

• If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK. • If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.

4-6

Starter Performance Test

• ENGINE •

1. Disconnect the wires f rom the S terminal (A) and the M terminal (B).

2. Make a connection as described below using as heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to the wire used for the vehicle).

3. Connect the battery as shown. If the starter pinion pops out, it is working properly. To avoid damaging the starter, do not leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.

© 12 V B A T T E R Y

Disconnect the battery f rom the M terminal. If the pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil is working properly. To avoid damaging the starter, do not leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.

Disconnect the battery also f rom the body. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly. To avoid damaging the starter, do not leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.

6. Clamp the starter f i rmly in a vise.

7. Connect the starter to the battery as described in the diagram below, and conf i rm that the motor starts and keeps rotating.

M EL

12 V B A T T E R Y

If the electric current and motor speed meet the specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working properly.

Specifications:

1.6 kw 80 A or less (Electric current), 2,600 rpm or more (Motor-speed)

4-7

Starting System

Starter Replacement

1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then wri te down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.

2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wai t at least 3 minutes.

3. Remove the ATF cooler hose f rom the clamp on the starter motor.

4. Disconnect the starter cable (A) f rom the B terminal on the solenoid, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (B) f rom the S terminal.

C 10 x 1.25 m m 44 N m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibff t )

6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the cr imped side of the ring terminal (A) is facing out.

A

7. Connect the battery positive cable and negative cable to the battery.

8. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets.

12 x 1.25 m m 64 N m (6.5 kg f -m, 47 Ibf f t )

5. Remove the 2 bolts (C) holding the starter, then remove the starter.

4-8

Starter Overhaul

Disassembly/Reassembly

E N D C O V E R

G E A R H O U S I N G C O V E R

(cont'd)

4-9

Starting System

Starter Overhaul (cont'd)

1. Remove the starter (see page 4-8).

2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning of this procedure.

Armature Inspection and Test

3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage due to contact wi th the permanent magnet. If there is wear or damage, replace the armature.

4. Check commutator (A) surface. If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface wi th emery cloth or a lathe wi th in the fo l lowing specifications, or recondit ion wi th # 500 or # 600 sandpaper (B).

5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is below the service l imit, replace the armature.

Commutator Diameter Standard (New): 28.0-28.1 mm (1.102-1.106 in.) Service Limit: 27.5 mm (1.083 in.)

6. Measure the commutator runout.

• If the commutator runout is wi thin the service l imit, check the commutator for carbon dust or brass chips between the segments.

• If the commutator runout is not within the service l imit, replace the armature.

Commutator Runout Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)

4-10

• ENGINE 1

Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), undercut the mica wi th a hacksaw blade to the proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the commutator segments. The undercut should not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D).

Commutator Mica Depth Standard (New): 0 . 4 0 . 5 mm {0.016 0.020 in.) Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)

8. Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If an open circuit exists between any segments, replace the armature.

9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates whi le the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the armature.

10. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists between the commutator (A) and armature coil core <B), and between the commutator and armature shaft (C). If continuity exists, replace the armature.

(cont'd)

4-11

Starting System

Starter Overhaul (cont'd)

Starter Brush Inspection

1 1 . Measure the brush length. If it is not wi th in the service l i m i t replace the brush holder assembly.

Brush Length Standard (New): 1 5 . 8 1 6 . 2 mm (0.62 0.64 in.) Service Limit: 11.0 mm (0.43 in.)

Starter Brush Holder Test

12. Check that there is no continuity between the ( + ) brush holder (A) and ( —) brush holder (B). If there is continuity, replace the brush holder assembly.

13. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring the brush into contact wi th the commutator, then attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off the brush.

Spring Tension: 15.7-17.7 N (1.6-1.8 kgf, 3 . 5 3 3 . 9 7 ibf)

A

4-12

14. Pry back each brush spring wi th a screwdriver, then position the brush about halfway out of its holder, and release the spring to hold it there.

15. Install the armature in the housing. Next, pry back each brush spring again, and push the brush down until it seats against the commutator, then release the spring against the end of the brush.

NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of # 500 or # 600 sandpaper, wi th the grit side up, between the commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate the armature. The contact surface of the brushes wi l l be sanded to the same contour as the commutator.

16. Install the starter end cover (A) to retain the brush holder (B).

Overrunning Clutch Inspection

17. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft. Replace it if it does not slide smoothly.

18. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) both ways. If it does not lock in either direction or it locks in both directions, replace it.

A

19. If the starter drive gear (B) is worn or damaged, replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not available separately.

Check the condition of the torque converter ring gear if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged.

20. Reassemble the starter in reverse order of disassembly.

A

4-13

Ignition System


'98-99 models:

I G N I T I O N W I R E S Inspect ion a n d T e s t p a g e 4-22

D I S T R I B U T O R R e p l a c e m e n t , page 4-19 O v e r h a u l , page 4-20 Ignition Contro l M o d u l e ( ICM) Input T e s t , page 4-21 Ignition T i m i n g Inspect ion , page 4-18

4-14

"00-01 models:

Ignition System

Circuit Diagram

'98-99 models: UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX

© " • No. 41 (100 A) No. 42 (50 A)

IGNITION SWITCH

B L K / Y E L

) No. 6 (15 A)

DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX

DISTRIBUTOR

IGNITION COIL B L U B L K / Y E L Y E L / G R N

Is I , I ,

IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM) [Has built-in \ I noise condenser J

IGNITION WIRES

4-16

H ENGINE 1

'00-01 models:

BATTERY

0 -

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

No.41 (100A) No.42(50A)

IGNITION SWITCH

BAT K> O f BLK/YEL

IG1

No. 11 (15A)


BRN/WHT BLK/RED BRN

I I

BLK/YEL I.

BLK/YEL

WHT/BLU BLU/RED YEL/GRN

BLK/YEL I. BLK/YEL I.

! 2 No.6

ICM

SL

G101

T

T BLK

ICM ICM

•

IGNITION COILS

SPARK PLUGS

ICM : Ignition Control Module

4-17

Ignition System

Ignition Tinning Inspection

1. Check the idle speed, and adjust it if necessary (see page 11-86).

2. Connect the Honda PGM tester to the Data Link Connector (DLC), and fo l low the tester's prompts in the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual).

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm wi th no load, shift lever in M or GB, until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

4. Connect the t iming light to the No. 1 ignit ion wire (ignition coil wire for '00-01 models).

5. Point the light toward the pointer (A) on the t iming belt cover. Check the ignition t iming under a no load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear w indow defogger, and air conditioner are not operating. If the ignit ion t iming differs f rom the specification below, replace the PCM; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).

Ignition Timing: 10°±2° BTDC (RED mark (B)) during idling in K or m

A

B

6. Disconnect the Honda PGM tester.

4-18

Distributor Replacement - '98-99 models

Removal

1. Disconnect the connector(A) f rom the distributor.

B 22 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )

5. Connect the ignit ion wires to the distributor cap as shown.

N o . 6 N o . 1

6. Connect the 3P connector to the distributor.

2. Disconnect the ignition wires f rom the distributor cap.

3. Remove the distributor mount ing bolts (B) then remove the distributor (C) f rom the cylinder head.

Installation

1. Bring the No. 1 piston to compression stroke TDC.

2. Coat a new O-ring (D) wi th engine oi l , then install it.

3. Slip the distributor into position.

NOTE: The lug on the end of the distributor and its mating grooves in the camshaft end (E) are both offset to eliminate the possibility of install ing the distributor 180° out of t ime.

4. Tighten the mount ing bolts (B).

4-19

ignition System

Distributor Disassembly/Reassembly - '98-99 modeis

4-20

ICM (Ignition Control Module) Input

NOTE: • If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on,

refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual.

• Perform an input test for the ignition control module (ICM) after f inishing the fundamental tests for the ignit ion system and the fuel and emissions systems.

1. Disconnect the 3P connector f rom the distributor.

W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

; - F98-99 models

2. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage.

• If there is no battery voltage, check: - ignit ion coil. - BLK/YEL wire between the ICM and ignit ion

coil. • If there is battery voltage, go to step 3.

3. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the No. 3 terminal and body ground. There should be battery voltage.

• If there is no battery voltage, check: - ignition coil. - BLU wire between the ICM and ignition coil.

• If there is battery voltage, go to step 4.

4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P) and check for continuity on the No. 1 terminal between the ICM connector terminal No. 1 (YEL/GRN) and PCM connector terminal B13. There should be continuity.

5. Check for continuity on the No. 1 terminal to body ground. There should be no continuity. If there is continuity (short to ground), the ICM is probably damaged.

6. Reconnect PCM connector B (25P) and the distributor 3P connector.

7. If all the tests are normal, replace the ICM.

4-21

Ignition System

Ignition Coil Test - '98-99 models

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the 3P connector and the ignition coil wire.

3. Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance between the terminals. Replace the coil if the resistance is not within specifications.

NOTE: Resistance will vary with the coil temperature; specifications are at 68°F (20°C).

Primary Winding Resistance (Between the terminals 1 and 3): 0.34-0.42 Q

Secondary Winding Resistance (Between terminal 2 and secondary winding terminal): 17.1—20.3 kQ

2 I O 1

o o 3

Ignition Wire Inspection and Test - '98-99 models

1 . Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might break them inside.

2. Check the condition of the ignition wire terminals. If any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken or distorted, replace the ignition wire.

c o r r o d e d , o r b e n t t e r m i n a l s .

3. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance.

Ignition Wire Resistance: 25 kQ max. at 68°F (20°C)

4. If resistance exceeds 25 kQ, replace the ignition wire.

4-22

Ignition Coil Troubleshooting - '00-01 models

NOTE: Perform an ignit ion coil test after f inishing the fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel and emissions system.

1. Remove the ignit ion coil cover.

2. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil 3P connectors.

3. Measure the voltage at the No. 3 terminal of each ignition coil 3P connector with the ignition switch ON (II).

IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

2 1G (BLK/YEL)


Is there battery voltage?


NO -Repa i r open in the wire between ignit ion coil and No. 11 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.B


5. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of each ignition coil 3P connector and body ground.


GND (BLK)


Is there continuity?

Y E S - Go to step 6.

NO - Repair open in the wire between ignit ion coil and body ground (G10D.B

6. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P).

7. Check for continuity between the body ground and PCM connector terminals C3, C4, C12, C13, C14, and/or C23 individually.

PCM C O N N E C T O R C (31P)

IGP L S 3 (WHT/BLU) IGP L S I ( Y E L / G R N )

IGP L S 5 (BLK/RED)

23

IGP L S 6 (BRN/ WHT)

2627 30

IGP L S 4 (BRN)

IGP L S 2 ( B L U / RED)


Y E S Repair short in the wire between ignit ion coil and PCM.B

NO - Go to step 8.

8. Connect PCM connector C (31P).

9. Measure the voltage at the No. 1 terminal of each ignition coil 3P connector wi th the ignit ion switch to start (III).

IGNITION COIL 3P C O N N E C T O R

IGP L S I ( Y E L / G R N ) IGP L S 2 ( B L U / R E D ) IGP L S 3 (WHT/BLU) IGP L S 4 (BRN)

, IGP L S 5 (BLK/RED) IGP L S 6 (BRN/WHT)

Wire s ide of f ema le t e rm ina l s

Is there approx. 0.5 V?

Y E S Replace the ignition coil. •

NO Repair open in the wire between ignition coil and PCM.B

4-23

Ignition System

Spark Plug Inspection

1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator.

Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: • Advanced ignit ion t iming • Loose spark plug • Plug heat range too hot • Insufficient cooling

Fouled plug may be caused by: • Retarded ignit ion t iming • Oil in combustion chamber • Incorrect spark plug gap • Plug heat range too cold • Excessive idl ing/ low speed running • Clogged air cleaner element • Deteriorated ignit ion coil

W o r n or d e f o r m e d e l e c t r o d e s

D a m a g e d g a s k e t

C r a c k e d i n s u l a t o r

I m p r o p e r g a p Oi l - fou l ing

> C a r b o n d e p o s i t s C r a c k e d c e n t e r e l e c t r o d e i n s u l a t o r

2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A); replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification.

Electrode Gap: Standard (New): 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039 Service Limit: 1.3 mm (0.05 in.)

0.043 in.)

3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark plugs listed below.

Spark Plugs: NGK: PZFR5F-11 DENSO: PKJ16CR-L11

4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Torque them to 18 N m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf f t ) .

4-24

Charging System


U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y B O X [Has built-in E L E C T R I C A L L O A D [ D E T E C T O R ( E L D ) U N I T

C H A R G I N G S Y S T E M I N D I C A T O R (In t h e g a u g e a s s e m b l y ) T e s t , page 22-29

4-25

Charging System

Circuit Diagram



PCM

WHT/RED

'00-01 models

4-26

- + ENGINE

Charging Circuit Troubleshooting

If the charging system indicator does not come on or does not go off, or the battery is dead or low, test the fo l lowing items in the order listed below: Battery (see page 22-30) Charging system indicator Alternator/regulator circuit Alternator control system

Charging System Indicator Test

1. Check the B terminal, that the 4P connector and under-hood fuse/relay box terminals are securely t ightened.

Are they securely tightened?


NO—Tighten or reconnect. •

2. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II).

Does the charging system indicator come on?



3. Start the engine.

Does the charging system indicator go off?

Y E S —Charging system indicator circuit is OKM

NO Go to step 4.

4. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF.

5. Disconnect the 4P connector f rom the alternator.



YES—Turn the ignit ion switch OFF, and repair the short in the WHT/BLU w i r e . •



8. Disconnect the 4P connector f rom the alternator.

9. Ground the No. 3 terminal of the 4P connector. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II).

A L T E R N A T O R 4P C O N N E C T O R

1 2

3 4


L ( W H T / B L U )



NO —Turn the ignit ion switch OFF. Check for a blown No. 6 (15 A) fuse and a blown charging system light bulb. If the fuse and bulb are OK, repair the open in the WHT/BLU wire. •

10. Measure the voltage at the No. 1 terminal of the alternator 4P connector with the ignition switch ON (ID.


IG ( B L K / Y E L )

1 2

3 4



Y E S — Replace the alternator •

NO -Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the alternator and the under-dash driver's fuse relay box. •

(cont'd)

4-27

Charging System

Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test—'98-99 models

1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged (see page 22 -30).

2 . Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn the selector switch to posit ion 1 (starting). L O A D A D J U S T E R ( C A R B O N P I L E )

F U L L F I E L D T E S T E R L E A D ( B L U )

X ^ .— V O L T M E T E R N E G A T I V E L E A D ( B L K )

V O L T M E T E R P O S I T I V E L E A D ( R E D )

V O L T S E L E C T O R

F I E L D S E L E C T O R

N E G A T I V E T E S T E R C A B L E ( B L K )

P O S I T I V E T E S T E R C A B L E ( R E D )

I N D U C T I V E P I C K - U P ( G R N )

I N D U C T I V E P I C K - U P

B T E R M I N A L W I R E

3. Shift to park or neutral, and start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm, wi th no load until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there.

Is there voltage over 16.0 V?

Y E S Replace the alternator. •

NO Go to step 5.

5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine idle.

6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the selector switch to position 2 (charging).

7. Remove the inductive pick-up, and zero the ammeter.

8. Place the inductive pick-up over the B terminal wire of the alternator so that the arrow points away f rom the alternator.


Is there voltage less than 12.0 V?

Y E S —Replace the alternator. •

NO -Go to step 10.

10. Apply a load wi th the VAT-40 until the battery voltage drops to between 12-13.5 V.

Is the amperage 75 A or more?

YES—The charging system is OK.B

N O - Replace the alternator •

4-28

Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test —'00-01 models

1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged (see page 22-30).

2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn the selector switch to position 1 (starting).

L O A D A D J U S T E R F U L L FIELD T E S T E R ( C A R B O N PILE) L E A D ( B L U )

t ^ - V O L T M E T E R N E G A T I V E L E A D (BLK)

V O L T M E T E R P O S I T I V E L E A D (RED)

V O L T S E L E C T O R

B T E R M I N A L W I R E

F IELD S E L E C T O R

T E S T S E L E C T O R S W I T C H

N E G A T I V E T E S T E R C A B L E (BLK)

P O S I T I V E T E S T E R C A B L E (RED)

I N D U C T I V E P ICK-UP (GRN)

I N D U C T I V E P ICK-UP

3. Shift to park or neutral, and start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm, wi th no load until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.


Is there voltage over 15.1 V?

YES - Repair the voltage regulator •

NO - Go to step 5.

5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine idle.

6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the selector switch to position 2 (charging).

7. Remove the inductive pick-up, and zero the ammeter.

8. Place the inductive pick-up over the B terminal wire of the alternator so that the arrow points away f rom the alternator.


Is there voltage less than 13.5 V?

Y E S —Repair the alternator components (see page 4-35). •

N O G o to step 10.

10. Apply a load wi th the VAT-40 until the battery voltage drops to between 12-13.5 V.

Is the amperage 75 A or more?

Y E S —The charging system is OK •

NO Go to step 11.

11. With the engine speed still at 2,000 rpm, full-f ield the alternator Attach the probe to the VAT-40 ful l -f ield test lead, and insert the probe into the ful l f ield sccess hold at the back of the alternator. Switch the field selector to the " A (Ground)" position momentari ly, and check the amperage reading. Because voltage wi l l rise wi l l rise quickly when the alternator is ful l-f ielded, do not allow the voltage to exceed 18 V: it may damage the electrical system.

R E G U L A T O R ( L o c a t e d i n s i d e t h e e n d c o v e r )

E N D C O V E R

F U L L FIELD A C C E S S H O L E

Is the alternator out put 75 A or more ?

Y E S —Replace the voltage regulator. •

NO —Repair the alternator components (see page 4-35). •

(cont'd)

4-29

Charging System

Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont 'd)

Alternator Control System Test

1. Check for proper operation of the ELD by confirming with the MIL.

2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the alternator.

3. Start the engine and turn the headlights (high beam) ON.

4. Measure voltage between the 4P connector terminal No. 2 and the positive terminal of the battery.

B A T T E R Y

C ( W H T / G R N )



Is there 1 V or less?



5. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF.

6. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P).

7. Check for continuity between the PCM connector terminal C2 and body ground.

P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P)

A L T C (WHT/GRN)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /

Wire side of female terminals


YES—Repair short in the wire between the alternator and PCM. •

NO —Substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck; refer to the '98-'01 Accord Service Manual. If prescribed voltage is now available, replace the original PCM. •

8. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF.

9. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P).

10. Check for continuity between the PCM connector terminal C2 and alternator 4P connector terminal No. 2.

ALTC (WHT/GRN) C (WHT/GRN)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /

rf 3 4 J

ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR C (31P)



YES—Test the alternator/regulator. •

NO—Repair open in the wire between the alternator and PCM. •

4-30

• ENGINE •

Alternator-compressor Belt Inspection and Replacement

1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damaged. If the belt is cracked or damaged, replace it.

2. Check that the pointer (A) on the auto-tensioner housing is not beyond the edge of the indicator rib (B) on the tensioner base.

Alternator Replacement

3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tensioner f rom the alternator belt (B), and remove the alternator belt.

4. Install the new belt in reverse order of removal.

1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.

2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable.

3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension f rom the alternator belt (B), and remove the alternator belt.

(cont'd)

4-31

Charging System

Alternator Replacement (cont'd)

4. Disconnect the condenser fan motor connector (A) f rom the condenser fan shroud.

6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)

7.2 I b f f t )

5. Remove the condenser fan/shroud assembly (B).

6. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and BLK wire (B) f rom the alternator.

' 98 -99 m o d e l s 6 x 1.0 m m 7.8 N m (0.8 kgf -m, 5.8 Ibf f t ) '00-01 m o d e l s 8 x 1.25 m m 12 N m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibfft)

7. Remove the mount bolt (A) and alternator bracket mount ing bolt (B), then remove the harness clamp (C) f rom the alternator bracket.

6 x 1.0 m m

10 x 1.25 m m 44 N m (4.5 kg f -m, 33 Ibff t )

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.


4-32

• ENGINE •

Auto-tensioner Inspection/Replacement

1. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's pointer (A), start the engine, then check the position of the pointer again. If the position changes, go to step 5.

2. Check for abnormal noise f rom the tensioner pulley. If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner pulley.

3. Stop the engine, then remove the alternator belt (see page 4-31).

Check if the auto-tensioner (A) moves smoothly and check for abnormal noise when the pulley is turned counterclockwise wi th the designated tool . If the auto-tensioner does not move smoothly or if the there is abnormal noise. Replace the auto-tensioner. Do not move the auto-tensioner beyond its l imit.

5. Remove the auto-tensioner.

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 kgf .m, 8.7 Ibf ft)

(conf d)

4-33

Charging System

Auto-tensioner Inspection/Replacement (cont'd)

6. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using 2 bolts (6 m m diameter) (B) and vise (C) in a vise as shown. Do not clamp the auto-tensioner itself.

7. Attach a torque wrench (A) to the pulley bolt. Measure the torque when the tensioner is turned counterclockwise. If the torque is less than specified value, replace the auto tensioner.

23 N m (2.3 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft)

8. If necessary, remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand threads), and replace the tensioner pully (B).

A 38 N m (3.9 kgf -m, 28 Ibff t )

4-34

Alternator Overhaul - '00-01 models

Exploded View

S P A C E R R I N G

E N D C O V E R D U S T S E A L

(cont'd)

4-35

Charging System

Alternator Overhaul - "00-01 models (cont'd)

Special Tools Required • Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400

NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed dur ing this procedure.

1. Test the alternator and regulator before you remove them (see step 1 on page 4-27).

2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-31).

3. If the f ront bearing needs replacing, remove the pulley locknut wi th a 10 m m wrench (A) and a 22 m m wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact wrench.

4. Remove the 3 flange nuts (A) and the screw (B) f rom the alternator, then remove the plate terminal (C).

5. Remove the washer nut (A) and insulator (B) f rom the " B " terminal , then remove the end cover (C) and dust seal (D).

D

6. Remove the brush holder.

4-36

(cont'd)

4-37

Charging System

Alternator Overhaul - "00-01 models (cont'd)

11. (If you are not replacing the f ront bearing and/or rear bearing, go to step 18). Remove the rotor f rom the stator drive end housing.

12. Inspect the rotor shaft for gal l ing, and inspect the bearing journal surface in the stator housing for seizure marks.

• If either the rotor or stator housing is damaged, replace the alternator.

• If both the rotor and the stator housing are OK, go to step 13.

13. Remove the rear bearing using a puller as shown.

14. Wi th a hammer and commercial ly available tools shown, install a new rear bearing in the rotor shaft.

15. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.

4-38

16. Support the stator housing in a vise, and drive out the front bearing with a brass drift (A) and hammer.

17. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new front bearing in the stator housing.

07749-0010000

07746-0010400

Rectifier Test

18. Check for continuity in each direction, between the B terminal (A) and P terminals (B), and between the E terminal (C) and P terminals (B) of each diode pair. All diodes should have continuity in only one direction. Because the rectifier diodes are designed to al low current to pass in one direction, and the rectifier is made up of 8 diodes (4 pairs), you must test each diode in both directions for continuity wi th an ohmmeter that has diode checking capability: a total of 16 checks.

• If any diode fai led, replace the rectifier assembly. (Diodes are not available separately.)

• If all the diodes are OK, go to step 19.

A B'i

k k A k A k A k k A k A k A k A k A

J

k A

J

k A i A k A

Bi

B 2

B 3

B 4

(cont'd)

4-39

Charging System

Alternator Overhaul - '00-01 models (cont'd)

Alternator Brush Inspection

19. Measure the length of both brushes (A) wi th a vernier caliper (B).

• If either brush is shorter than the service l imit, replace the brush assembly.

* If brush length is OK, go to step 20.

Alternator Brush Length: Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) Service Limit: ' 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)

Rotor Slip Ring test

20. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings (A).

* If there is continuity, go to step 21 . * If there is no continuity, replace the alternator.

C

21. Then check that there is no continuity between each slip ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).

* If there is no continuity, go to step 22. * If there is continuity, replace the alternator.

Stator Test

22. Check that there is continuity between each pair of leads (A).

• If there is continuity, go to step 23. • If there is no continuity, replace the alternator.

23. Check for no continuity between each lead and the coil core (B).

• If there is no continuity, g o t o step 24. • If there is continuity, replace the alternator.

24. Reassemble the alternator in reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:

• Be careful not to get any grease or oil on the slip rings.

• If you removed the pulley, t ighten its locknut to 111 N-m (11.3 kgf-m, 81.7 Ibf-ft) when you reinstall it.

4-40

Cruise Control


A C T U A T O R T e s t , p a g e 4-51 S o l e n o i d T e s t , page 4-50 A C T U A T O R C A B L E

A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 4-54 T R A N S M I S S I O N R A N G E S W I T C H T e s t , p a g e 14-140

4-41

Cruise Control

Circuit Diagram

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

: 01 model

BATTERY

©-No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A)

COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH

G202 G101 G501

4-42

Symptom Troubleshooting Index

NOTE: • The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence. • Before troubleshooting,

- check that the speedometer works properly. - check for proper engine vacuum at the actuator. - check the No. 9 (7.5A) and No. 6 (15A) fuses in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and No. 47 (20A) fuse in the

under-hood fuse/relay box. - check that the horn sounds. - check the tachometer to see if it works properly.

Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for Cruise control cannot be set. 1. Check main switch (see page 4-48)

2. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49) 3. Check brake pedal position switch and mount ing (see

page 4-50) 4. Check transmission range switch (see page 14-140) 5. Check control unit (see page 4-46)

• Poor ground: G101 • Open circuit, loose

or disconnected terminals: LTGRN, LT GRN/RED, GRY, LT BLU, BLU/WHT

Cruise control can be set, but indicator light does not go on.

1. Check d imming circuit in gauge (see page 22-33) 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)

• Poor ground: G501 • Open circuit, loose

or disconnected terminals: YEL, BLU/BLK

Cruise speed is noticeably higher or lower than what was set.

1. Check actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-51) 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)

Excessive overshooting or undershooting when trying to set speed.


Speed fluctuates on a flat road wi th cruise control set.


Vehicle does not decelerate or accelerate accordingly when SET/RESUME/CANCEL button is pushed.

1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49) 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)

Open circuit, loose or disconnected terminals: LT GRN/RED, LT GRN/BLK

Set speed not cancelled (engine rpm stays high) when shift lever is moved to M position.

1. Check transmission range switch (see page 14-140) 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)

Open circuit, loose or disconnected terminals, short to ground: LT BLU

Set speed is not cancelled when brake pedal is pushed.

1. Check brake pedal position switch and mount ing (see page 4-50)

2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)

Open circuit, loose or disconnected terminals: WHT/BLK

(cont'd)

4-43

Cruise Control

Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for Set speed does not cancelled when main switch is pushed OFF

1. Check main switch (see page 4-48) 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)

Open circuit, loose or disconnected terminals, short to power: LTGRN

Set speed does not cancelled when CANCEL button is pushed

1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49)


Open circuit, loose or disconnected terminals: LTGRN/ RED, LT GRN/BLK

Set speed wi l l not resume when RESUME button is pushed (with main switch on, set speed is temporari ly cancelled).

1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49)


Open circuit, loose or disconnected terminals: LTGRN/ BLK

The transmission shifts down slower than normal when going up a hill wi th the cruise control on.

1. Troubleshoot the cruise control communicat ion circuit (see page 4-45)

4-44

• ENGINE •

Cruise Control Communication Circuit Troubleshooting


2 . Turn on the cruise control main switch, then drive the vehicle to speeds over 2 5 mph (40 km/h) with the cruise control.

Does the cruise control operate?

YES - Go to step 3.

IMO-Check the cruise control unit or cruise control actuator. •


4. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) and cruise control unit 14P connector.

5. Check for continuity between the PCM connector terminal A5 and body ground.

P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)

" B L U / G R N

/ 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10 / 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 32



Y E S - Repair short in the wire between the PCM connector terminal A5 and the cruise control unit 14P connector terminal No. 8. •

NO Go to step 8.

6. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P) and cruise control unit 14P connector.


8. Measure the voltage between the No. 8 terminal of the cruise control unit connector and ground.

C R U I S E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3 / 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

B L U / G R N


Is there approx. 1 V?


NO —Replace the cruise control uni t .B

9. Measure the voltage between the A5 terminal of the PCM connector and ground.


B L U / G R N

/ 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10 / 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 21 28 29 30 32



Y E S -Check for loose connectors. If necessary replace the PCM and recheck, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11 - 3 ) . •

NO —Repair or open in the BLU/GRN wire between the A5 terminal and the cruise control uni t .B

4-45

Cruise Control

Control Unit Input Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-25).

1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.

2. Disconnect the 14P connector f rom the control unit.

3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.

• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.

4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests.

Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained 9 BRN/WHT Under all

conditions Check for resistance to ground: There should be 8 0 - 1 2 0 Q.

• Faulty actuator solenoid • Poor ground(G202) • An open in the wire

1 BRN Under all conditions

Check for resistance to ground: There should be 4 0 - 6 0 Q.


11 BRN/BLK Under all condit ions

Check for resistance to ground: There should be 7 0 - 1 1 0 Q.


4-46

Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained 2 GRY Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to • Faulty brake pedal position switch

(II), main switch ON ground: • An open in the wire and brake pedal There should be 0 V wi th depressed, then released

the pedal depressed and battery voltage wi th the pedal released.

3 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: There should be continuity.

• Poor ground (G501) • An open in the wire

5 WHT/BLK Brake pedal Check for voltage to • Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the depressed, then released

ground: There should be battery voltage wi th the pedal depressed, and 0 V wi th the pedal released.

under-hood fuse/relay box • Faulty brake pedal position switch • An open in the wire

6 LT GRN/ Set button pushed Check for voltage to • Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the RED ground: under-hood fuse/relay box

7 LTGRN/ Resume button There should be battery • Faulty horn relay BLK pushed voltage. • Faulty set/resume/cancel switch

• Faulty cable reel • An open in the wire

10 BLU/BLK Ignition switch ON Attach to ground: • Blown bulb (II) Cruise indicator light in the

gauge assembly should comes on.

• Blown No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash driver's fuse/relay box

• Faulty d imming circuit in the gauge assembly

• An open in the wire 12 BLU/WHT Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between • Faulty vehicle speed sensor

(II) and main switch the BLU/WHT ( + ) and BLK • An open in the wire ON; raise the front of ( — ) terminals: the vehicle, and There should be 0 — 5 V or rotate 1 wheel slowly more while holding the - 0 - 5 V or more other wheel repeatedly.

13 LTGRN Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to • Blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the (II) and main switch ground: under-dash driver's fuse/relay box ON There should be battery

voltage. • Faulty main switch • An open in the wire

14 LT BLU Shift lever in [2], S3 or Check for continuity to • Faulty transmission range switch B ground:

There should be continuity. • Poor ground (G401) • An open in the wire

8 BLU/GRN Reconnect the cruise Check for voltage to • Faulty cruise control unit control unit 14P ground: There should be • Short to ground connector, start the approx. 1V engine, main switch ON and drive the vehicle to speeds over 25 mph (40 km/ h) with the cruise control set.

5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.

4-47

Cruise Control

Main Switch Test/Replacement

'98-00 models:

1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument panel.

T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s

2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) f rom the switch.

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If there is no continuity, replace the switch.

\ ^ T e r m i n a l 1 2 3 4 5

P o s i t i o n \ 1 2 3 4 5

O F F o - o o--@- o

O N o--©- o o a -©-o

'01 model:

1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument panel.


B A

2. Disconnect the 8P connector (B) f rom the switch.

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If there is no continuity, replace the switch.

^ T e r m i n a l 4 7 5 1 2

P o s i t i o n \ 4 7 5 1 2

O F F a o a o O N o- o o o - o

4-48

Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement

1. Carefully remove the set/resume/cancel switch cover (A) by prying between the cover and the switch (B) in the sequence shown.

2. Remove the 2 screws (A), then remove the switch (B).

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table.

• If there is continuity and it matches the table, but switch failure is occurred on the cruise control unit input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit.

• If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch.

T e r m i n a l

P o s i t i o n

S E T (ON)

R E S U M E (ON)

C A N C E L (ON)

O

o o

o

o

o

- o

4-49

Cruise Control

Brake Pedal Position Switch Test

1. Disconnect the 4P connector f rom the switch (A).

: T e r m i n a l s i d e o f / m a l e t e r m i n a l s

2. Remove the brake pedal position switch,

3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table.

\ T e r m i n a l 1 2 3 4

B r a k e S w i t c h \ 1 2 3 4

D E P R E S S E D o— I — O J

R E L E A S E D i r~) R E L E A S E D U

4. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust the pedal height, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 19-5).

Actuator Solenoid Test

1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) f rom the actuator. T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s

2. Check for resistance between the terminals according to the table.

NOTE: Resistance wil l vary slightly wi th temperature; specified resistance is at 70°F (20°C).

\ T e r m i n a l 1 2 3 4

R e s i s t a n c e ( Q ) \ 1 2 3 4

V E N T S O L E N O I D 4 0 — 6 0 Q

r> V E N T S O L E N O I D 4 0 — 6 0 Q KJ

V A C U U M S O L E N O I D 3 0 — 5 0 Q V A C U U M S O L E N O I D 3 0 — 5 0 Q

S A F E T Y S O L E N O I D 4 0 - 6 0 Q S A F E T Y S O L E N O I D 4 0 - 6 0 Q KJ

4 1 3 2

4-50

Actuator Test

Special Tools Required Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 3 0 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX

1. Disconnect the actuator cable f rom the actuator rod and disconnect the 4P connector (A).


A 9 7 3 X - 0 4 1 - X X X X X

2. Connect battery power to the No. 4 terminal and ground the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 terminals.

3. Connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum hose, then apply vacuum to the actuator.

4. The actuator rod (A) should pull in completely. If the rod pulls in only part-way or not at all, check for a leaking vacuum line or defective solenoid.

5. Wi th voltage and vacuum still applied, try to pull the actuator rod out by hand. You should not be able to pull it out. If you can, it is defective.

6. Disconnect ground f rom the No. 3 terminal. The actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly is defective.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 5, and disconnect ground f rom the No. 1 terminal. The actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly is defective.

8. If you replace the solenoid valve assembly, be sure to use new O-rings on each solenoid.

9. Disconnect power and ground f rom the 4P connector. Disconnect the vent hose f rom the actuator. Connect a vacuum pump to the actuator vent hose port, and apply vacuum. The actuator rod should pull in completely. If not, the vacuum valve is stuck open. Replace the actuator.

4-51

Cruise Control

Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement

Removal/Installation 6. Loosen the locknut (A), then disconnect the actuator cable (B) f rom the throttle linkage (C).

1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) f rom the actuator. B

2. Loosen the mount ing bolt (B), and remove the mount ing bolt (C), then remove the actuator wi th the bracket.

3. Disconnect the vacuum hose (D).

4. Remove the 3 nuts (A).

5. Disconnect the actuator cable (B) f rom the actuator rod (C) by releasing the clip (D) f rom the rod wi th a screwdriver.

4-52

S O L E N O I D V A L V E S

4-53

Cruise Control

Actuator Cable Adjustment

1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves smooth ly wi th no binding or sticking.

Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm wi th no load (El or OS position) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

Measure the amount of movement of the output linkage (B) until the engine speed starts to increase. At first, the output linkage should be located at the ful ly closed position (C). The free play (D) should be 3.75 + 0.5 m m (0.15 + 0.02 in.).

If the free play is not wi th in specs, move the cable to the point where the engine speed starts to increase, and t ighten the locknut (A) and adjusting nut (B).

B

5. Turn the adjusting nut (A) until it is 3.75 + 0.5 mm (0.15±0.02 in.) away f rom the bracket (B).

3 . 7 5 ± 0 . 5 m m ( 0 . 1 5 ± 0 . 0 2 in.)

6. Pull the cable so that the adjusting nut (A) touches the bracket, and tighten the locknut (B).

4-54

Engine Mount Control System



Circuit Diagram


BATTERY No.41 (100 A)

—or>oo— No.42 (50A)

WHT

UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S FUSE/RELAY BOX

BLK/YEL

ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

GRN/WHT

BLK

G101

4-56

Troubleshooting

Special Tools Required Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 — 30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX

NOTE: Check the vacuum hoses and lines for damage and proper connections before troubleshooting.

Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively when idl ing.

1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the cooling fan comes on 2 times).

Is the idle speed less than 800 rpm?


NO—Adjust the idle speed (see page 11-86). •

2. Fully depress the brake pedal.

3. Wi th the transmission in gear, have an assistant disconnect and reconnect the 2P connector f rom the engine mount control solenoid valve.

Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness when the 2P connector is disconnected?

Y E S —Reconnect the 2P connector to the solenoid valve. The engine mount control system is OK. •

N O - Go to step 4.

4. Shift to M or E posit ion.

5. Disconnect the 2P connector f rom the engine mount control solenoid valve.

6. Measure voltage between the No. 2 terminal and body ground.

E N G I N E M O U N T C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E C O N N E C T O R

Wi re s ide of f ema le t e rm ina l s



NO —Repair open in BLK/YEL wire between the 2P connector and No. 6 (15A) fuse in the under-dash driver's fuse/relay box. •

7. Measure voltage between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals.

ENGINE M O U N T C O N T R O L SOLENOID V A L V E C O N N E C T O R

ire s ide of na le t e rm ina l s

B L K / Y E L



N O - R e p a i r open in GRN/WHT wire between PCM (A2) and the 2P connector. If the wire is OK, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3). •

(cont'd)

4-57


Troubleshooting (cont'd)

8. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 rpm.

9. Measure voltage between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals.

E N G I N E M O U N T C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E C O N N E C T O R


B L K / Y E L


YES-Repa i r short to body ground in GRN/WHT wire between PCM (A2) and the 2P connector. If the wire is OK, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3 ) . •

NO- Go to step 10.

10. Disconnect the upper vacuum hose (A) f rom the engine mount control solenoid valve (B), and connect a vacuum pump/gauge to the hose. Apply vacuum for 20 seconds.

Does the engine mount hold vacuum?


NO - Either the vacuum hose or one of the engine mounts has a vacuum leak. Repair as needed. •

11. Release the vacuum, then apply vacuum again.

Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness with and without vacuum applied?


NO- Isolate and replace the leaking engine mount. •

12. Disconnect the lower vacuum hose (A) f rom the engine mount control solenoid valve (B) and connect a vacuum pump/gauge to the hose.

Is there manifold vacuum?

YES - Replace the engine mount control solenoid v a l v e . •

NO —Repeir as needed. •

4-58

Engine Mechanical

Engine Assembly Engine Removal 5-2 Engine Installation 5-11

Cylinder Head 6-1

Engine Block 7-1

Engine Lubrication 8-1

Intake Manifold/Exhaust System 9-1

Engine Cooling 10-1

NOTE: Referto the 1998-2001 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for items not shown in this section.

Engine Assembly

Engine Removal

Special Tool Required Belt Tension Release A rm, YA 9317, commercial ly available

NOTE: • Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces. • To avoid damage, unplug the wir ing connectors

carefully whi le holding the connector port ion. • Mark all w i r ing and hoses to avoid misconnection.

Also, be sure that they do not contact other w i r ing or hoses, or interfere wi th other parts.

1. Remove the support struts f rom the hood, then fix the hood in a vertical posit ion.


3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal f irst, then the positive terminal . Remove the battery.

4. Remove the thrott le body cover (A) and intake manifold cover (B).

B A

5. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (A) f rom the throttle body.

C B

6. Remove the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C), then remove the intake air duct (D).

7. Remove the ground cable (A) and harness clamp

F D

8. Remove 6 mounting bolts (C), and loosen the mounting bolt (D), then remove the battery base (E) and battery base bracket (F).

Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care not to bend the cables when removing them. Always replace any kinked cable wi th a new one.

10. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors on the left side of the engine compartment.

11. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88).

12. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose (B).

'98-99 models:

'00-01 models:

13. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the cruise control vacuum hose (B).

(cont'd)

5-3

Engine Assembly

Engine Removal (cont'd)

14. Remove the engine wire harness clamps.

15. Remove the battery cables (A), and disconnect the connector (B) f rom the under-hood fuse/relay box (C).

16. Remove the flange bolt (D), then remove the under-hood fuse/relay box.

17. Remove the harness clamps (E).

18. Remove the starter cable clamps.

19. Disconnect the connectors f rom the PCM.

5-4

20. Remove the grommet (A), then pull out the PCM connectors.

21. Move the auto-tensioner (A) wi th the belt tension release arm (B) to remove tension f rom the alternator belt (C), then remove the alternator belt.

A

22. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), and remove the locknut (B) and mount ing bolt (C), then remove the power steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump wi thout disconnecting the P/S hoses.

C D B

23. Remove the P/S hose clamp (E).

24. Remove the radiator cap.

25. Make sure the hoist brackets are positioned properly. Raise the hoist to full height.

26. Remove the front tires/wheels.

27. Remove the splash shield.

(cont'd)

5-5

Engine Assembly


28. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, drain the engine coolant (see page 10-10).

29. Drain the automatic transmission f luid (ATF). Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer (see page 14-112).

30. Drain the engine oi l . Reinstall the drain bolt using a new washer (see page 8-5).

31 . Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (H02S) connector (A), then remove exhaust pipe A (B).

32. Remove the damper fork, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 18-17).

33. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 18-17).

34. Remove the driveshafts; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 16-3). Coat ail precision-f inished surfaces wi th clean engine oi l . Tie plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.

35. Remove the bolts (A) securing the shift cable holder (B), then remove the shift cable cover (C). To prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure to remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder before removing the bolts securing the shift cable cover.

36. Remove the lock bolt (D) securing the control lever (E), then remove the shift cable (F) wi th the control lever. Take care not to bend the shift cable whi le removing it.

37. Unplug the P/S hose clamps (A), and disconnect the engine mount control vacuum hose (B).

5-6

(cont'd)

5-7

Engine Assembly

5-8

4 4 . Remove the front mount bracket support nut. 4 7 . Make a mark (A) on the front beam (B) and rear beam (C), then remove the front beam.

(cont'd)

Engine Assembly


49. Remove the rear mount.

50. Remove the transmission lower rear mount.

51 . Check that the engine/transmission is completely free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses and electrical w i r ing.

52. Slowly lower the engine approximately 150 m m (6 in.). Check once again that all hoses and wires are disconnected f rom the engine/transmission.

53. Lower the engine all the way, and disconnect the chain hoist f rom the engine.

54. Remove the engine f rom under the vehicle.

5-10

Engine Installation

1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques.

8 x 1.25 m m P / S P U M P 2 2 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

16 Ibfft)

(cont'd)

5-11

Engine Assembly

Engine Installation (cont'd)

2. Position the engine under the vehicle. Attach the chain hoist to the engine, then lift the engine into position in the vehicle.

mJOTICE Reinstall the mount ing bolts/nuts in the sequence given. Failure to fo l low this sequence may cause excessive noise and vibrat ion, and reduce bushing life.

3. Install the transmission lower rear mount.

10 x 1.25 m m 3 8 N m (3.9 kgf -m, 28 Ibf f t )

4. Install the rear mount bracket.

10 x 1.25 m m 3 8 N m (3.9 kg f -m, 28 Ibf f t )

5. Install the A/C compressor.

8 x 1.25 m m 2 2 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )

6. Install the front beam. Al ign mark (A) on the rear beam (B) and front beam (C), then tighten the bolts (D).

10 x 1.25 m m 38 N m (3.9 kgf-ri 28 Ibff t )

10 x 1.25 m m 3 8 N m {3.9 kgf -m, 2 8 Ibff t )

12 x 1.25 m m 64 N m (6.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibf f t )

u 1 4 x 1.5 m m 103 N m (10.5 kgf -m, 76 Ibff t ) R e p l a c e .

7. Tighten the transmission lower rear mount mount ing nuts (E) and transmission lower front mount mounting nuts (F).

5-12

8 . Tighten the flange bolts on the radius rods. 1 4 x 1 . 5 m m 162 N m (16.5 k g f m , 119 I b f f t )

9. Lower the hoist.

10. Tighten the front mount bracket support nut.

12 x 1.25 m m 54 N m (5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibff t )

11. Tighten the rear mount bracket support nut and mounting bolt.

12 x 1.25 m m 54 N m (5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibf f t )

10 x 1.25 m m 38 N m (3.9 kgf -m, 28 Ibff t )

12. Install the side engine mount bracket, then t ighten the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence shown.

© 10 x 1.25 m m 44 N m (4.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibff t )

13. Remove the chain hoist f rom the engine.

(cont'd)

5-13

Engine Assembly


14. Raise the hoist to ful l height.

15. Install a new spring clip on the end of each driveshaft, then install the driveshafts. Make sure each clip "c l icks" into place in the differential and intermediate shaft.

16. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints. Use new cotter pins; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 18-17).

17. Install the damper fork; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 18-17).

18. Install exhaust pipe A (A); use a new gaskets (B) and new self locking nuts (C).

C 10 x 1.25 m m 54 N m (5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibf f t ) R e p l a c e .

19. Install the control lever (A) wi th the shift cable on the control shaft. Do not bend the shift cable any more than is necessary to install the control lever.

6 x 1.0 m m 14 N m (1.4 kgf -m, 10 Ibfft)

20. Install the lock bolt (B) wi th a new lock washer (C), then bend the lock tab of the lock washer.

21 . Install the shift cable cover (D), then install the shift cable holder (E) on the shift cable cover.

22. Install the P/S hose into the clamps (A), and connect the engine mount control vacuum hose (B).

5-14

(cont'd)

5-15

Engine Assembly


27. Install the front tires/wheels.

28. Lower the hoist.

29. Install the alternator belt.

30. Loosely install the P/S pump belt and pump.

31 . Adjust the P/S pump belt (see page 17-13).

32. Push in the PCM connectors, through the bulkhead then install the grommet (A).

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m 8.7 Ibff t )

33. Connect the PCM connectors.

34. Install the starter cable clamps.

35. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box (A) and harness clamps (B).

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibff t )

36. Install the battery cables (C), and connect the connector (D) f rom the under-hood fuse/relay box (A).

5-16

37. Install the engine wire harness clamps.

38. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the cruise control vacuum hose (B).

39. Install the fuel hose (A) and fuel return hose (B) using new washers (C).

'98-99 models;

22 N m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

'00-01 models:

22 N m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

40. Connect the engine wire harness connectors on the left side of the engine compartment

(cont'd)

5-17

Engine Assembly


41. Install the cruise control cable, then adjust the cable (see page 4-54).

42. Install the throttle cable, then adjust the cable (see page 11-98).

43. Install the battery base bracket (A), battery base (B), then install the ground cable (C) and harness clamp (D).

8 x 1 . 2 5 m m

8 x 1.25 m m 2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibf f t )

44. Install the throttle body cover (A) and intake manifold cover (B).

B

45. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C).

C B

46. Install the EVAP canister hose (D) to the throttle body.

47. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.

48. Refill the engine with engine oil (see page 8-5).

49. Refill the transmission with automatic transmission fluid (ATF) (see page 14-113).

50. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air from the cooling system with the heater valve open (see page 10-10).

51. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission range switch.

52. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn on (II) the ignition switch (do not operate the starter) so that the fuel pump runs for approximately 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line. Repeat this operation 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.


5-18

Engine Mechanical

Cylinder Head Special Tools 6-2 Component Location Index 6-3 DTC Troubleshooting - 6-6 V T E C Solenoid Valve Test 6-9 V T E C Rocker A r m s Test 6-10 Valve Clearance Adjustment 6-13 Crankshaft Pulley Removal and

Installation 6-17 Timing Belt Inspection 6-18 Timing Belt Removal 6-19 Timing Belt Installation 6-22 Cylinder Head Removal 6-31 Cylinder Head Inspection for

Warpage - 6-36 Rocker Arm Assembly Removal 6-36 Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly /Reassembly 6-37 Rocker A r m s and Shafts Inspection 6-38 V T E C Lost Motion Assembl ies

Inspection • 6-39 Camshaft Inspection 6-40 Valves, Spr ings, and Valve Sea ls

Removal 6-43 Valve Inspection 6-44 Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Inspection - 6-44 Valve Guide Replacement 6-45 Valve Seat Reconditioning 6-47 Valves, Spr ings, and Valve Sea ls

Installation 6-49 Camshaft /Rocker Arms, Camshaft

Sea l , and Pulley Installation 6-50 Cylinder Head Installation 6-51 T D C Sensor Replacement 6-55 C K P Sensor Replacement 6-56

Cylinder Head

Special Tools

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty ® 07HAH-PJ7010B Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1 ® 07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 1 ® 07JAB-001020A Holder Handle 1 © 07MAB-PY30100 Pulley Holder Attachment, 50 mm Offset 1 © 07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1 © 07VAJ-P8A010A VTEC Air Adapter 1 ® 07VAJ-P8A020A VTEC Air Stopper 1 ® - i 07406-0070300 A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1 ® - 2 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1 ® - 3 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adapter 1 ® 07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 1 @ 07757-PJ1010A Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 1 I

® ®

© © ® - 1 , © - 2 , © - 3

®

6-2


I D L E R P U L L E Y

(cont'd)

6-3

Cylinder Head

Component Location Index (cont'd)

H E A D C O V E R G A S K E T

O I L C O N T R O L O R I F I C E

6-4

R O C K E R A R M A S S E M B L I E S R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-36 I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-37

C A M S H A F T T H R U S T C O V E R

V A L V E K E E P E R S

S P R I N G R E T A I N E R

I N T A K E V A L V E S P R I N G

C A M S H A F T I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-40

V A L V E K E E P E R S


E X H A U S T V A L V E S P R I N G

E X H A U S T V A L V E S E A L I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-49

I N T A K E V A L V E S E A L I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-49

I N T A K E V A L V E G U I D E I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-44

R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 6-45

V A L V E S P R I N G S E A T I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-49

E X H A U S T V A L V E G U I D E I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-44 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 6-45

C Y L I N D E R H E A D R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-31 W a r p a g e , p a g e 6-36 V a l v e sea t r e c o n d i t i o n i n g , p a g e 6-47

I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-51

I N J E C T O R B A S E

E X H A U S T V A L V E

O I L S E A L

I N T A K E V A L V E R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-43 I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-44 I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-49

6-5

Cylinder Head

DTC Troubleshooting

DTC P1259: A problem in the V T E C Oil Pressure Switch circuit or V T E C Solenoid Valve circuit

Special Tools Required • Pressure Gauge Adaptor 07NAJ-P07010A • A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070300 • A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A • A/T Pressure Adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120

1. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) reset procedure; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).


3. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on).

4. Road test the vehicle: Accelerate in \2\ position to an engine speed over 4,000 rpm. Hold that engine speed for at least 2 seconds. If DTC P1259 is not repeated during the 1st road test, repeat this test 2 more t imes.

Is DTC P1259 indicated?


NO —Intermittent fai lure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the VTEC solenoid valve and PCM.H


6. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector.

7. Check for continuity on the VTEC oil pressure switch between the pressure switch connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

V T E C O I L P R E S S U R E S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R




NO —Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch. •

8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

9. Measure the voltage between the VTEC oil pressure switch harness connector No. 1 terminal and body ground.

V T E C O I L P R E S S U R E S W I T C H H A R N E S S C O N N E C T O R




NO —Inspect for an open or short to ground in the wire between the VTEC oil pressure switch and the PCM (C10). If the wire is OK, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.B

6-6

10 . Measure voltage across the VTEC oil pressure switch harness 2P connector.

V T E C O I L P R E S S U R E S W I T C H H A R N E S S 2 P C O N N E C T O R




NO —Repair open in the wire between the VTEC oil pressure switch and G101. If the wire is OK, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.B


12. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector.

13. Check for continuity on the VTEC solenoid valve between the solenoid valve 1P connector terminal and body ground.

V T E C S O L E N O I D V A L V E 1P C O N N E C T O R

T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l

Is there 14-30 Q ?


NO —Replace the VTEC solenoid valve. •

14. Remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (A) and install the special tools as shown, then reinstall the VTEC oil pressure switch.

07406-0070300

0 7 N A J - P 0 7 0 1 0 A

0 7 M A J - P Y 4 0 1 2 0

15. Reconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector and VTEC oil pressure switch 2P connector.

16. Connect a tachometer.

17. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on).

18. Check oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000, 2,000 and 3,000 rpm. Keep measuring t ime as short as possible because the engine is running wi th no load (less than 1 minute).

Is pressure below 49 kPa (0.5 kgf/crrf, 7 psi)?


NO —Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 6-9).B


20. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector.

21 . Attach the battery positive terminal to the VTEC solenoid valve terminal.

22. Start the engine and check oil pressure at an engine speed of 3,000 rpm.

Is pressure above 390 kPa (4.0 kgf/crrf, 57 psi)?


NO —Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 6-9).B

(cont'd)

6-7

Cylinder Head

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)

23. With the battery positive terminal still connected to the VTEC solenoid valve, measure voltage between C10 and body ground.


V T M ( B L U / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ 12 ' 1 6 17 18 19 20 21 / / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /


Is there battery voltage above 4,000 rpm?


NO-Rep lace the VTEC oil pressure s w i t c h . •


25. Disconnect the battery positive terminal f rom the VTEC solenoid valve terminal .

26. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid valve harness 1P connector terminal and the PCM connector terminal B12 .

V T E C S O L E N O I D V A L V E H A R N E S S 1P C O N N E C T O R

V T S ( G R N / Y E L )

1 2 4 5 / 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)




NO —Repair open in the wire between the PCM (B12) and VTEC solenoid valve connector •

27. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector terminal and body ground.

V T E C S O L E N O I D V A L V E H A R N E S S I P C O N N E C T O R

W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l


YES-Repa i r short in the wire between the PCM (B12) and VTEC solenoid valve connector. •

NO-Subs t i t u te a known-good PCM and recheck. If symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM.H

6-8

VTEC Solenoid Valve Test

1. Disconnect the 1 P connector from the VTEC solenoid valve.

2 . Measure resistance between the terminal and body ground.

Resistance: 14 30 Q

3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve/oil filter assembly (A) from the oil pump, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter (B) for clogging. If there is clogging, clean the filter and replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil.

8 x 1.25 m m 2 2 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibff t )

A

4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure.

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)

6

CySinder Head

VTEC Rocker Arm Test

Special Tools Required • VTEC Air Adapter 07VAJ-P8A010A • VTEC Air Stopper 07VAJ-P8A020A

1. '98-99 models: Remove the thrott le body cover (A), ignit ion wire cover (B) and intake manifold covers (C). ' 00 -01 models: Remove the thrott le body cover (A), intake manifold covers (B) and intake manifold cover stay (C).

'98-99 models:

2. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (A) f rom the throttle body.

C B


4. Remove the thrott le cable (A) and cruise control cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care not to bend the cables when removing them. Always replace any kinked cable wi th a new one.

6-10

5. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A), vacuum hoses (B) and positive crankcase venti lation (PCV) hose (C).

B

A

6. Remove the vacuum hose (A) ('98-99 models), breather hose (B) and water bypass hoses (C).

A

B

7. Remove the intake manifold.

8. Remove the cylinder head covers.

9. Remove the front upper cover (see step 2 on page 6-18).

10. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC (see step 10 on page 6-14).

11. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No. 1 cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move independently of the primary rocker arm (B) and secondary rocker arm (C). • If the intake mid rocker arm does not move,

remove the mid, primary, and secondary intake rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary, mid and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and retest.

• If the mid rocker arm moves freely, go to step 12.

B

(cont'd)

6-11

Cylinder Head

VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd)

12. Repeat step 11 on the remaining intake mid rocker arms wi th each piston atTDC. When all the mid rocker arms pass the test, go to step 13.

13. Check that the air pressure on the shop air compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa (7.0 kgf/cm 2, 100 psi).

14. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-13).

15. Cover the t iming belt wi th a shop towel to protect the belt.

16. Remove the 2 intake rocker shaft mount ing bolts, then connect the special tools and Valve Inspection an air pressure regulator wi th a 0 - 1 0 0 psi gauge (A) as shown below.

A

0 7 V A J - P 8 A 0 2 0 A 0 7 V A J - P 8 A 0 1 0 A

18. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A) and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are mechanically connected by the piston and that the mid rocker arm (C) does not move when pushed manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary rocker arms, replace the rocker arms as a set.

A

B C

19. Remove the tools.

20. Check for smooth operation of each lost motion assembly (see page 6-37). Replace the lost motion assembly if it does not move smoothly.

21 . After inspection, check that the MIL does not come on.

17. Loosen the valve on the regulator and apply the specified air pressure.

Specified Air Pressure: 390 kPa (4.0 kgf/cm 2, 57 psi)

NOTE: If the synchronizing pistons A and B do not move after applying air pressure; move the primary or secondary rocker arm up and down manually by rotating the crankshaft clockwise.

6-12

Valve Clearance Adjustment

NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C).

1. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A), ignition wire cover (B) and intake manifold covers (C). '00-01 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A), intake manifold covers (B) and intake manifold cover stay (C).

'98-99 models:

C A

2. Remove the EVAP canister hose (A) f rom the throttle body.

C B


4. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care not to bend the cables when removing them. Always replace any kinked cable wi th a new one.

(cont'd)

6-13

Cylinder Head

Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)

5. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A), vacuum hoses (B) and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (C).

A

6. Remove the vacuum hose (A) ('98-99 models), breather hose (B) and water bypass hoses (C).

A

B C


8. Remove the cylinder head covers.

9. Remove the front upper cover (see step 2 on page 6-18).

10. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. Align the pointer (A) on the back cover with the No. 1 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.

6-14

11. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check.

Intake: 0.20 0.24 mm (0.008 0.009 in.) Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011 0.013 in.)

Adjusting screw locations:

E X H A U S T

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3

R E A R :

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3

INTAKE

No. 4 No. 5 No. 6

F R O N T :

No. 4 No. 5 No. 6

E X H A U S T

12. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it back and for th; you should feel a slight amount of drag.

13. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.

A 7 x 0.75 m m 20 N m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibfft)

14. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment if necessary.

15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Al ign the pointer (A) on the back cover wi th the No. 4 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.

16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 4 cylinder.

(cont'd)

6-15

Cylinder Head

Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)


A B



A B


21 . Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Al ign the pointer (A) on the back cover wi th the No. 3 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.

A B



A B


6-16

Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation

Special Tools Required • Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A • Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset 07MAB-PY3010A • Socket, 19 m m 07JAA-001020A or a commercial ly available 19 mm socket

Removal

1. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B).

0 7 J A B - 0 0 1 0 2 0 A B 0 7 M A B - P Y 3 0 T 0 A

0 7 J A A - 0 0 1 0 2 0 A (o r C o m m e r c i a l l y a v a i l a b l e )

2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and t ighten the bolt to 245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 Ibf f t ) . Do not use an impact wrench.

-1 Hold the pulley wi th holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B).

-2 Tighten the bolt wi th a torque wrench and 19 m m socket (C).

0 7 J A B - 0 0 1 0 2 0 A B 0 7 M A B - P Y 3 0 1 0 A


2. Remove the bolt wi th a heavy duty 19 m m socket (C) and breaker bar.

Installation

1. Remove any oil f rom the pulleys (A), crankshaft (B), bolt (C) and washer (D). Clean and lubricate the points shown below.

O : C lean X : R e m o v e any oil # . Lubricate

6-17

Cylinder Head

Timing Beit Inspection

1. '98-99 models: Remove the thrott le body cover (A), ignit ion wi re cover (B) and intake manifold cover (C). '00-01 models: Remove the thrott le body cover (A) and intake manifold cover (B).

'98-99 models:

2. Remove the front upper cover.

6-18

Timing Belt Removal

Special Tools Required • Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A • Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset 07MAB-PY3010A • Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or a commercial ly available 19 mm socket

• Belt Tension Release Arm, YA9317, commercial ly available

1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up wi th the pointer (B).

2. Check that the rear camshaft pulley mark (A) and rear upper cover mark (B) are aligned.

A

3. Remove the front tires/wheels.

4. Remove the splash shield.

5. Move the auto-tensioner (A) wi th the belt tension release arm (B) to remove tension f rom the alternator belt (C), then remove the alternator belt.

(cont'd)

6-19

Cyfinder Head

Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)

6. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), locknut (B) and mount ing bolt (C), then remove the power steering (P/S) pump belt (D).

7. Support the engine wi th a jack and wood block under the oil pan.

8. Remove the side engine mount bracket.

9. Remove the dipstick and tube (A); discard the O-ring (B).

A

10. Hold the pulley wi th holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B).

B 0 7 M A B - P Y 3 0 1 0 A

(o r C o m m e r c i a l l y a v a i l a b l e )

11. Remove the bolt wi th a heavy duty 19 mm socket (C) and breaker bar.

6-20

12. Remove the front upper cover (A), rear upper cover (B) and lower cover (C).

B

13. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.

14. To hold the timing belt adjuster its current position, screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown. Tighten it by hand, do not use a wrench.

15. Remove the engine mount bracket.

(cont'd)

6-21

Cylinder Head

Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)

16. Loosen the idler pulley bolt (A) about 5 or 6 turns, then remove the timing belt.

6-22

Timing Belt Installation

NOTE; The fol lowing procedure is for installing a new t iming belt. If you are installing a used t iming belt, refer to the next procedure.

New Belt

1. Clean the t iming belt pulleys, and upper and lower covers.

2. Set the t iming belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the t iming belt drive pulley wi th the pointer (B) on the oil pump.

B

3. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys wi th the pointers (B) on the back covers.

FRONT;

4. Remove the battery clamp bolt f rom the back cover.

5. Remove the auto-tensioner.

6. Hold the auto-tensioner (A) wi th the maintenance bolt pointing up. Loosen and remove the maintenance bolt (B).

NOTE: Handle the auto-tensioner carefully so the oil inside does not spill or leak. If any of the oil has spilled or leaked out of the auto-tensioner, refill it wi th 5 W-30 motor oi l . The total capacity is 6.5 mfi (0.22 fl oz).

7. Clamp the boss of the auto-tensioner in a soft-jawed vise. Do not grip the housing of the auto-tensioner.

8. Insert a flat blade screwdriver (C) into the maintenance hole. Place the holder (D) (P/N 14540-P8A-A01) on the auto-tensioner whi le turning the screwdriver clockwise to compress the bottom.

NOTE: Take care not to damage the threads or the gasket contact surface with the screwdriver.

9. Reinstall the maintenance bolt (A). Always use a new gasket (B). A 8 N m (0.8 kgfm, 6 Ibfft)

B

(cont'd)

6-23

Cylinder Head

Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)

10. Make sure no oil is leaking around the maintenance bolt, then install the auto-tensioner (A).

NOTE: Make sure the holder (B) stays in place.

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m ( 1 . 2 k g f m / 8.7 Ibfft)

11. Install the t iming belt in a counter clockwise sequence starting wi th the drive pulley.

- 1 Drive pulley (A). - 2 Idler pulley (B). - 3 Front camshaft pulley (C). - 4 Water pump pulley (D). - 5 Rear camshaft pulley (E). - 6 Adjust ing pulley (F).

D

12. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.

1 0 x 1 . 2 5 m m 44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibff t )

13. Remove the holder.

6-24

14. Install the engine mount bracket.

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 kgf 8.7 Ibff t )

MO x 1.25 m m 4 4 N m (4.5 kg f -m, 33 Ibf f t )

15. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B) and rear upper cover (C).

C

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibff t )

16. Clean the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.

17. Clean all oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (B) and washer (C).

A

18. Install the crankshaft pulley, and t ighten the bolt to 245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 Ibf-ft). Do not use an impact wrench.



0 7 J A B - 0 0 1 0 2 0 A B 0 7 M A B - P Y 3 0 1 0 A


19. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about 5 or 6 turns clockwise so the t iming belt positions on the pulleys.

(cont'd)

6-25

Cylinder Head


20. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its whi te mark (A) lines up wi th the pointer (B).

21 . Check the camshaft pulley marks.

• If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to step 22.

• If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove the t iming belt and repeat steps 2 through 20.

FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY:

REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY:

22. Install the dipstick and tube (A) wi th a new O-ring (B).

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibff t )

23. Install and adjust the P/S pump belt (see page 17-10).


25. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten the mount ing bolts in the numbered sequence shown.

0 10 x 1.25 m m 44 N m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibff t )

6-26

Used Belt

Follow this procedure when installing a used t iming belt.

1. Clean the t iming belt pulleys, and upper and lower covers.

2. Set the t iming belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the t iming belt drive pulley wi th the pointer (B) on the oil pump.

3. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys wi th the pointers (B) on the back covers.

FRONT:

REAR:

(cont'd)

6-27

Cylinder Head


4. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the t im ing belt cannot be installed, remove and compress the auto-tensioner (refer to steps 6-23 of the New Belt Installation Procedure).

5. Install the t iming belt in a counter clockwise sequence starting wi th the drive pulley. Take care not to damage the t iming belt when install ing it.

- 1 Drive pulley (A). - 2 Idler pulley (B). - 3 Front camshaft pulley (C). - 4 Water pump pulley (D). - 5 Rear camshaft pulley (E). - 6 Adjusting pulley (F).

D

6. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.

10 x 1.25 m m 44 N m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibfft)

7. Remove the battery clamp bolt f rom the back cover.

8. Install the engine mount bracket. 6 x 1.0 m m 12 N-m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibff t )

s 1 0 x 1.25 m m 44 N-m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibf f t )

6-28

9. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B) and rear upper cover (C).

C

6 x 1 . 0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )

10. Clean the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.

11. Clean any oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (B) and washer (C).

12. Install the crankshaft pulley, and t ighten the bolt to 245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 lbf-ft). Do not use an impact wrench.



0 7 J A B - 0 0 1 0 2 0 A B 0 7 M A B - P Y 3 0 1 0 A

0 7 J A A - 0 0 1 0 2 0 A ( o r C o m m e r c i a l l y a v a i l a b l e )

13. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about 5 or 6 turns clockwise so the t iming belt positions on the pulleys.

14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) lines up wi th the pointer (B).

(cont'd)

6-29

Cylinder Head


15. Check the camshaft pulley marks (A).

• If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to step 16.

• If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC, remove the t iming belt and repeat steps 2 through 14.

FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY:

REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY:

16. Install the dipstick and tube (A) wi th a new O-ring (B).

A

17. Install and adjust the P/S pump belt (see page 17-10).


19. Install the side engine mount bracket, then t ighten the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence shown.

© 1 0 x 1 . 2 5 m m 44 N m ( 4 . 5 k g f m , 33 Ibff t )

6-30

Cylinder Head Removal

Special Tool Required Belt Tension Release Arm,YA9317, commercial ly available

Engine removal is not required this procedure.

NOTE: • Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces. • To avoid damage, unplug the wir ing connectors

carefully whi le holding the connector portion. • To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the

engine coolant temperature drops below 100°F (38°C) before loosening the retaining bolts.

• Mark all wi r ing and hoses to avoid misconnection. Also, be sure that they do not contact other wir ing or hoses, or interfere with other parts.


2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.

3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-10).

4. '98-99 models: Remove the thrott le body cover (A) , ignition wire cover (B) and intake manifold covers (C).

'00-01 models: Remove the thrott le body cover (A) , intake manifold covers (B) and intake manifold cover stay (C).

'98-99 models:

'00-01 models:

5. Remove the EVAP canister hose (A) f rom the thrott le body.

C B


(cont'd)

6-31

Cylinder Head

Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)

7. Remove the thrott le cable (A) and cruise control cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the cable ends out of the accelerator linkage.Take care not to bend the cables when removing them. Always replace any kinked cable wi th a new one.


9. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose (B).

'98-99 models:

10. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A), vacuum hoses (B) and PCV hose (C).

11. Remove the vacuum hose (A), ('98-99 models) breather hose (B) and water bypass hoses (C).

A

B

6-32

12. Remove the ground cable (A).

D

13. Move the auto-tensioner (B) wi th the belt tension release arm (C) to remove tension f rom the alternator belt (D), then remove the alternator belt.

14. Support the engine wi th a jack and wood block under the oil pan.

15. Remove the side engine mount bracket.

16. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), then remove the locknut (B) and mounting bolt (C). Remove the power steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump wi thout disconnecting the P/S hoses.

C D B 17. Remove the P/S hose clamp (E).


19. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps f rom the cylinder heads and the intake manifold.

• Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector • Idle air control (IAC) valve connector • Throttle position sensor connector • Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor

connector • Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor

connector • Radiator fan switch A connector • Radiator fan switch B connector • Coolant temperature gauge sending unit

connector ('98-99 models) • CKP sensor connector • TDC sensor connector • Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector • Distributor connector ('98-99 models) • VTEC solenoid valve connector • VTEC oil pressure switch connector • Oil pressure switch connector

20. Remove the spark plug caps and distributor f rom the cylinder heads.

(cont'd)

6-33

Cylinder Head

Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)


22. Disconnect the 6 injector connectors.

23. Remove the fuel rails.

'98-99 models:

'00-01 models:

24. Remove the vacuum hoses (A) from the intake air bypass control thermal valve (B).

A

25. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-19).

26. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower radiator hose (B).

A

6-34

27. Remove the heater hoses.

28. Remove the front and rear exhaust manifolds (see page 9-3).

29. Remove the water passage.

30. Remove the camshaft pulleys (A) and back covers (B).

B

31 . Remove the cylinder head covers.

32. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.

CYLINDER HEAD BOLT LOOSENING SEQUENCE:

CD CD CD 0

CD ® CD ®

33. Remove the cylinder heads.

6-35

Cylinder Head

Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage N O T E : If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances (see page 6-40) are not wi th in specifications, the cylinder head cannot be resurfaced.

If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances are wi th in specifications, check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure along the edges, and three ways across the center.

• If warpage is less than 0.05 m m (0.002 in.), cylinder head resurfacing is not required.

• If warpage is between 0.05 m m (0.002 in.) and 0.2 m m (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.

• Max imum resurface l imit is 0.2 m m (0.008 in.) based on a height of 121 m m (4.76 in.).

Cylinder Head Height: Standard (New): 120.95-121.05 mm

(4.762-4.766 in.)

P R E C I S I O N S T R A I G H T E D G E

Rocker Arm Assembly Removal

1. Loosen the adjusting screws (A). A

A

2. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly.

- 1 Unscrew the rocker shaft mount ing bolts 2 turns at a t ime, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly.

-2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts wi l l keep the springs and the rocker arms on the shafts.

CAMSHAFT HOLDER BOLT LOOSENING SEQUENCE: 4

© ' © ' ' ® @ ® ®

© © © ©

6-36

Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly/Reassembly

NOTE: 9 Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations. • Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-38). • Rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused. • When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts wi l l

keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft. • Bundle the rocker arms wi th rubber bands to keep them together as a set. • Prior to reassembling, clean ail the parts in solvent, dry them and apply lubricant to any contact points.

I N T A K E R O C K E R S H A F T I N T A K E R O C K E R A R M A S S E M B L Y

Q l O

TOO lOOOl

E X H A U S T R O C K E R A R M B

S P R I N G

E X H A U S T R O C K E R S H A F T

E X H A U S T R O C K E R A R M A

Le t te r B is s t a m p e d o n r ocke r a r m .

Le t te r A is s t a m p e d o n r ocke r a r m .

6-37

Cylinder Head

Rocker Arms arid Shafts Inspection

Measure the intake rocker shaft and exhaust rocker shaft.

1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location.

2. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.

3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition.

Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance: Standard (New): Intake: 0.026—0.067 mm

(0.0010-0.0026 In.) Service Limit: 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.) Exhaust: 0.026-0.077 mm

(0.0010 0.0030 in.) Service Limit: 0.077 mm (0.0030 in.)

Inspect rocker a r m face for w e a r .

4. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft and all overtolerance rocker arms. If any intake rocker arm needs replacement, replace all 3 rocker arms in that set (primary, mid, and secondary).

6-38

VTEC Rocker Arms

5. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push them manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm assembly.

NOTE: • Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling. • When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B),

carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm.

VTEC Lost Motion Assemblies Inspection Push on the lost motion assembly (A) wi th your finger. If it does not move smoothly, replace it.

A

6-39

Cylinder Head

Camshaft inspection

1. Remove the rocker arms.

2. Put the rocker shafts on the cylinder head, then t ighten the bolts to the specified torque.

Specified torque: 8 X 1 . 2 5 mm 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange

© © ® © ® ®

© © © ©

3. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of the cylinder head.

4. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and read the end play.

Camshaft End Play: Standard (New): 0.05 0.20 mm


6-40

6. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored or excessively worn.

7. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.

8. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.

9. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder head. Measure the inside diameter of each camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of-round condition. 8 If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within

limits, goto step 11. • If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the

service limit and the camshaft has been replaced, replace the cylinder head.

9 If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit and the camshaft has not been replaced, go to step 10.

Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.050 0.089 mm

(0.0020-0.0035 In.) Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)

(cont'd)

6-41

Cylinder Head

Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)

10. Check total runout wi th the camshaft supported on V-blocks.

• If the total runout of the camshaft is wi th in the service l imit, replace the cylinder head.

• If the total runout is beyond the service l imit , replace the camshaft and recheck the oil clearance. If the clearance is still out of tolerance, replace the cylinder head.

Camshaft Total Runout: Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)

R o t a t e c a m s h a f t w h i l e m e a s u r i n g .

11. Measure cam lobe height.

Cam Lobe Height Standard (New):

INTAKE EXHAUST

PRI 34.615 mm (1.3628 in.)

36.076 m m (1.4203 in.)

MID 36.210 m m (1.4256 in.)

36.076 m m (1.4203 in.)

SEC 31.188 mm (1.2279 in.)

36.076 m m (1.4203 in.)

S E C MID PRI

F R O N T B A N K

T / B

R E A R B A N K

E X IN

PRI MID S E C

E X

E X IN E X

- T / B

u

I n s p e c t t h i s a rea f o r w e a r .

6-42

Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal

Special Tools Required • Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 07757-PJ1010A

• Commercially available Valve Spring Compressor KD383 with No.32 jaws

• Commercially available Valve Guide Seal Remover KD3350

Identify the valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position.

1. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic mallet (B), l ightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve keepers.

2. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and remove the valve keepers.

0 7 7 5 7 - P J 1 0 1 0 A

3. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).

A

4. Remove the valve seal.

6-43

Cylinder Head

Valve Inspection

Measure the valve in these areas.

Intake Valve Dimensions A Standard (New);

B Standard (New):

C Standard (New):

C Service Limit: D Standard (New):

D Service Limit:

33.90-34.10 mm (1.335-1.343 in.) 114.85-115.15 mm (4.522-4.533 in.) 5.485-5.495 mm (0.2159-0.2163 In.) 5.455 mm (0.2148 in. 0.85—1.15 mm (0.033-0.045 in.) 0.65 mm (0.026 in.)

Exhaust Valve Dimensions A Standard (New):

B Standard (New):

C Standard (New):

C Service Limit; D Standard (New);

D Service Limit:

28.90-29.10 mm (1.138-1.146 in.) 112.85-113.15 mm (4.443-4.455 In.) 5.450 — 5.460 mm (0.2146-0.2150 in.) 5.420 mm (0.2134 In) 1.05-1.35 mm (0.041 0.053 in.) 0.95 mm (0.037 in.)

• D

Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection

1. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 m m , then measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial indicator whi le rocking the stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble method). • If the measurement exceeds the service limit,

recheck it using a new valve. • If the measurement is now within the service

l imit, reassemble using a new valve. • If the measurement with a new valve still

exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.

Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.04 0.09 mm


Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.11 0.16 mm


2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured wi th a micrometer, f rom the I.D. of the valve guide, measured wi th an inside micrometer or ball gauge. Take the measurements in three places along the valve stem and three places inside the valve guide. The difference between the largest guide measurement and the smallest stem measurement should not exceed the service limit.

Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.020 0.045 mm


Exhaust Valve Stem Standard (New):

Service Limit:

-to-Guide Clearance: 0.055 0.080 mm (0.0022 0.0031 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)

6-44

Valve Guide Replacement

Special Tools Required • Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 m m 07742-0010100 • Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7010B

1. As illustrated below, use a commercial ly available air-impact valve guide driver (A) modif ied to fit the diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure can be done using the special tool and a conventional hammer.

/ 5.3 m m (0.21 in.)

_ 87 m m (3.43 in.]

57 m m (2.24 in.)

10.8 m m (0.42 in.)

2. Select the proper replacement guides and chill them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for about an hour.

3. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder head to 300°F (150°C). Monitor the temperature wi th a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head hotter than 300°F (150°C); Excessive heat may loosen the valve seats.

4. Working f rom the camshaft side, use the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 m m (0.1 in.) towards the combustion chamber. This wi l l knock off some of the carbon and make removal easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line wi th the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear safety goggles or a face shield.

5. Turn the head over and drive the guide out toward the camshaft side of head.

6. If a valve guide won' t move, dril l it out wi th a 8 mm (5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.

7. Remove the new guide(s) f rom the freezer, one at a t ime, as you need them.

(cont'd)

6-45

Cylinder Head

Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)

8. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside of the new valve guide. Install the guide f rom the camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to drive the guide in to the specified installed height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head.

Valve Guide Installed Height: Intake: 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835 0.874 in.) Exhaust: 20.63-21.63 mm (0.812 0.852 in.)

07742-0010100

9. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide wi th cutt ing oi l .

10. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the valve guide bore.

11. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise whi le removing it f rom the bore.

12. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to remove any cutting residue.

13. Check the clearance wi th a valve (see page 6-44). Verify that the valve slides in the intake and exhaust valve guides wi thout exerting pressure.

6-46

Valve Seat Reconditioning

If the valve guides are worn (see page 6-44), replace them (see page 6-45)before cutting the valve seats.

1. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a valve seat cutter.

- 1 Carefully cut a 45° seat, removing only enough material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.

- 2 Bevel the upper edge of the seat wi th the 30° cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the 60° cutter. Check the width of the seat and adjust accordingly.

- 3 Make one more very light pass wi th the 45° cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by the other cutters.

Valve Seat Width: Standard (New): 1.25-1.55 mm


After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the seat several t imes.

3. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.

• If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must make a second cut wi th the 60° cutter to move it down, then one more cut wi th the 45° cutter to restore seat width.

• If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must make a second cut wi th the 30° cutter to move it up, then one more cut wi th the 45° cutter to restore seat width.

NOTE: The final cut should always be made wi th the 45° cutter.

(confd)

6-47

Cylinder Head

Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)

4. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and measure the valve stem installed height (A).

Intake Valve Stem Installed Height: Standard (New): 46.75 47.55 mm


Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height: Standard (New): 46.68 47.48 mm

(1.838-1.869 in.) Service Limit: 47.73 mm (1.879 in.)

5. If the valve stem installed height is over the service l imit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over the service l imit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat in the head is too deep.

6-48

Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Installation

Special Tools Required 9 Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 07757-PJ1010A

9 Commercial ly available Valve Spring Compressor KD383 wi th No.32 jaws, commercial ly available

9 Commercial ly available Valve Guide Seal Remover KD3372, commercial ly available

1. Coat the valve stems wi th engine oil. install the valves in the valve guides.

2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.

3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.

4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide seal installer (B).

NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring (D) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring (F); they are not interchangeable.

F D

5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the end of the valve spring wi th closely wound coils toward the cylinder head.

6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and install the valve keepers.

0 7 7 5 7 - P J 1 0 1 0 A

7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem 2 or 3 t imes wi th a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve keepers. Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem.

A

6-49

Cylinder Head

Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation

1. Apply a l ight coat of oil around the camshaft oi l seal.

2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the cylinder head. - 1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. - 2 Tap the oil seal into the cylinder head about 0.5

- 1 . 5 m m (0.02-0.06 in.) f rom the surface of the cylinder head.

3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then install the camshaft thrust cover (C). A lways use a new O-ring (D).

4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted. 8 x 1.25 m m 22 N m (2.2 kg f -m, 16 Ibff t )

5. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.

6. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems.

7. Tighten each bolt 2 turns at a t ime in the sequence shown below to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves.

Specified torque: 8 x 1 . 2 5 m m 24 N m (2.4 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange

© © © © (D ©

8. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new gasket (B). A

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )

6-50

Cylinder Head Installation

9. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft pulley (B).

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N-m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibff t )

12 x 1.25 m m 90 N-m (9.2 kgf -m, 67 Ibff t ) A p p l y e n g i n e o i l t o t h e b o l t t h r e a d s .

Install the cylinder heads in the reverse order of removal:

1. Clean the cylinder heads and block surface.

2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A) wi th new O-rings (B).

3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head gaskets (D).

D

B

(cont'd)

6-51

Cylinder Head

Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)

4. Clean the t iming belt drive pulley.

5. Set the t iming belt drive pulley to TDC by al igning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the t iming belt drive pulley wi th the pointer (B) on the oil pump.

B

6. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the back covers.

FRONT:

6-52

7. Apply clean engine oil to the threads and flange of the cylinder head bolts.

8. Tighten the cylinder head bolts sequentially in 3 steps. Perform each step twice.

1st step torque; 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibfft) 2nd step torque: 69 N-m (7.0 kgf-m, 51 Ibfft) 3rd step torque: 98.1 N-m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.3 Ibfft)

Use a beam-type torque wrench. When using a preset-type torque wrench, be sure to t ighten slowly and not to overtighten. If a bolt makes any noise whi le you are torquing it, loosen the bolt, and retighten it f rom the 1st step.

CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS TORQUE SEQUENCE: (D ® ® (D

® © ® ®

9. Install the exhaust manifold and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, beginning wi th the inner nut (see page 9-3). Always use a new exhaust manifold gasket.

10. Install exhaust pipe A and bracket, then install the cover (see page 9-4).

11. Install the t iming belt (see page 6-22).

12. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-13).

13. Install the cylinder head covers.

NOTE: • Before installing the cylinder head cover, clean

the cylinder head contacting surfaces wi th a shop towel.

• Take care not to damage the spark plug seals when installing the cylinder head cover.

• Visually check the spark plug seals for damage. • Replace any washer that is damaged or

deteriorated.

(cont'd)

6-53

Cylinder Head

Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)

14. Tighten the nuts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step, t ighten all nuts, in sequence, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf f t ) .

© © ®

15. Install the water passage (A). Always use a new CD-ring (B) and new gaskets (C).

8 x 1.25 mm 2 2 N-m(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

16. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and nuts sequentially in 2 or 3 steps. Always use a new intake manifold gasket.

Specified torque: 8 x 1.25 mm 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)

©

17. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and connectors are installed correctly.


6-54

TDC Sensor Replacement

1. Set the No.1 piston at TDC (see page 6-22).

2. Remove the upper covers.

3. To hold the t iming belt adjuster in its current position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight (see step 14 on page 6-21).

4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about 5 or 6 turns, then remove the t iming belt f rom the front camshaft pulley (see step 16 on page 6-22).

5. Remove the front camshaft pulley.

90 N m (9.2 k g f m , 67 Ibff t ) A p p l y e n g i n e o i l t o t h e b o l t t h r e a d s .

6. Disconnect the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor connector, then remove the back cover.

2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

7. Remove the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor f rom the back cover.

5 x 0.8 m m

8. Install the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor in reverse order of removal. Reinstall the t iming belt and other removed components (see page 6-22).

6-55

Cylinder Head

CKP Sensor Replacement

1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from the alternator belt, then remove the alternator belt (see step 5 on page 6-19).

2. Loosen the adjusting bolt, locknut and mounting bolt, then remove the power steering (P/S) pump belt (see step 6 on page 6-20).

3 . Remove the dipstick and tube (see step 9 on page 6-20).

4. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see step 10 on page 6-20).

5. Remove the upper and lower covers (see step 12 on page 6-21).

6. Remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump.

7 . Install the CKP sensor in the reverse order of removal.

8-5S

Engine Mechanical

Engine Block Special Tools 7-2 Component Location Index 7-3 Drive Plate Removal and Installation 7-6 Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play

Inspection 7-7 Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-8 Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement 7-10 Crankshaft and Pistons Removal 7-12 Crankshaft Inspection 7-14 Block and Piston Inspection 7-15 Cylinder Honing 7-17 Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement 7-18 Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection 7-21 Piston Rings Replacement 7-22 Crankshaft and Piston Installation 7-24 Pulley End Crankshaft Seal Installation-ln-car 7-29 Transmission End Crankshaft Seal Installation-ln-car .7-29

Engine Block

Special Tools

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty ® 07LAD-PT3010A Oil Seal Driver 1 © 07VAD-P8A010A Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 m m I.D. 1 (D 07749-0010000 Driver 1


V T E C S O L E N O I D V A L V E / O I L F I L T E R A S S E M B L Y

Engine Block

Component Location index (cont'd)

M A I N B E A R I N G C A P S

7-4

P I S T O N R I N G S R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 7-22

S N A P R I N G

P I S T O N P IN R e m o v a l , p a g e 7-18 I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 7-18 I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-18

P I S T O N R e m o v a l , p a g e 7 -12 M e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-15

C O N N E C T I N G R O D E n d p l a y , p a g e 7-7 S m a l l e n d m e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-18

E N G I N E B L O C K C y l i n d e r b o r e i n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15 W a r p a g e i n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15 C y l i n d e r b o r e h o n i n g , p a g e 7-17 R i d g e r e m o v a l , p a g e 7-12

C O N N E C T I N G R O D B E A R I N G C l e a r a n c e , p a g e 7-10 S e l e c t i o n , p a g e 7-10

D O W E L PIN

C O N N E C T I N G R O D B E A R I N G C A P I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 7-24

C O N N E C T I N G R O D B O L T I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-21 T i g h t e n i n g , p a g e 7-24

7-5

Engine Block

Drive Plate Removal and Installation

Remove the 8 drive plate bolts, then separate the drive plate from the crankshaft flange. After installation, tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.

7-6

Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection

1, Measure the connecting rod end play wi th a feeler gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and crankshaft (C).

Connecting Rod End Play; Standard (New): 0 .15-0 ,35 mm (0.006 0.014 in.) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)

C A

2. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft (see page 7-12).

3. Push the crankshaft f i rmly away f rom the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft f i rmly back toward the indicator; dial reading should not exceed the service l im i t

Crankshaft End Play: Standard (New): 0 . 1 0 0 . 3 5 mm (0.004 0.014 in.) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)

4. If end play is excessive, inspect the thrust washers and the thrust surface on the crankshaft. Replace parts as necessary. Thrust washer thickness is f ixed and must not be changed either by grinding or sh imming.

7-

Engine Block

Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement

Main Bearing Clearance Inspection

1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, remove the main caps and bearing halves.

2. Clean each main journal and bearing half w i th a clean shop towel .

3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main journal.

NOTE: If the engine is still in the car when you bolt the main cap down to check the clearance, the weight of the crankshaft and drive plate wi l l f latten the plastigage further than just the torque on the cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an accurate reading, support the crank wi th a jack under the counterweights, and check only 1 bearing at a t ime.

4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the bolts (see page 7-24). Do not rotate the crankshaft.

5. Remove the caps and bearing halves, and measure the widest part of the plastigage.

Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.020 0.044 mm


6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, (remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not f i le, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.

7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.

7 8

Main Bearing Selection

Crankshaft Bore Code Location

1 . Letters or Bars have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the 4 main journal bores.

If you cannot read the codes because of an accumulation of dirt and dust do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent.

No. 1 B O R E ( P U L L E Y E N D )

No . 4 B O R E ( D R I V E P L A T E E N D )

Main Journal Code Locations

2. Number or bars have been stamped on the crankshaft No. 1 web as a code for the main journal sizes.

3. Use the crankshaft bore codes and journal codes to select the appropriate main bearings f rom the table.

L a r g e r c r a n k b o r e

1 or I

2 or II

3 or III

4 o r l l l l

5 or Hill

6 or llllll

A o r l B or II C o r III D or llll

• S m a l l e r b e a r i n g (Thicker )

R e d / P ink P ink P i n k /

Y e l l o w Y e l l o w

P ink P i n k / Y e l l o w Y e l l o w Y e l l o w /

G r e e n

P i n k / Y e l l o w Y e l l o w Y e l l o w /

G r e e n G r e e n

Y e l l o w Y e l l o w / G r e e n G r e e n G r e e n /

B r o w n

Y e l l o w / G r e e n G r e e n G r e e n /

B r o w n B r o w n

G r e e n G r e e n / B r o w n B r o w n B r o w n /

B lack

N O T E : S m a l l e r S m a l l e r • W h e n u s i n g b e a r i n g m a i n b e a r i n g h a l v e s of di f ferent c o l o r s , J o u r n a l (Thicker ) it d o e s not m a t t e r w h i c h co lor

is u s e d in t h e t o p or b o t t o m . • C o l o r c o d e is o n t h e d e g e of t h e bear ing .

3 3 3 \

No. 1 J O U R N A L ( P U L L E Y E N D )

No . 4 J O U R N A L ( D R I V E P L A T E E N D )

7-9

Engine Block

Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement

Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection

1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half.

2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half wi th a clean shop towel .

3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal .

4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the bolts (see page 7-24). Do not rotate the crankshaft.

5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure ' the widest part of the plastigage.

Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.020 0.044 mm


6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new, complete bearing wi th the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not f i le, sh im, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.

7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.

7-10

Rod Bearing Selection

1. Inspect the connecting rods for cracks and heat damage.

Connecting Rod Bore/Journal Code Locations 2. Each rod has a tolerance range (from 0 to 0.024 m m

(0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.) increments) depending on the size of its big end bore. It's then stamped wi th a code (1,2,3, or 4/I, II, III,or llll) indicating the range. You may f ind any combination of 1,2,3, or 4/I, II, III, or llll in any engine. Half of the code is stamped on the bearing cap and the other half is stamped on the rod. If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only wi th solvent or detergent.

Normal Bore Size: 56.0 mm (2.20 in.)

Half of n u m b e r or bar is s t a m p e d on b e a r i n g c a p a n d t h e o ther half i s s t a m p e d o n r o d .

4. Use the connecting rod bore codes and journal codes to select the appropriate rod bearing f rom the table.

• L a r g e r big e n d b o r e B e a r i n g Ident i f icat ion

C o l o r c o d e is o n t h e e d g e of t h e b e a r i n g

A or I

B o r II

C or III

D or llll

E or Hill

F or llllll

f

1 o r l 2 or II 3 or III 4 or llll

• S m a l l e r bear ing (Th icker )

Pink P i n k / Y e l l o w

Y e l l o w Y e l l o w / G r e e n

P i n k / Y e l l o w


G r e e n


G r e e n G r e e n / B r o w n

Y e l l o w / G r e e n


B r o w n


B r o w n B r o w n / B l a c k

G r e e n / Brown

B r o w n B r o w n / B l a c k

B l a c k

S m a l l e r S m a l l e r r o d b e a r i n g J o u r n a l (Th icker )

N O T E : W h e n u s i n g b e a r i n g h a l v e s of di f ferent c o l o r s , it d o e s not m a t t e r w h i c h c o l o r is u s e d in t h e t o p or b o t t o m .

7-11

Engine Block

Crankshaft and Piston Removal

1. Remove the CKP sensor (A) f rom the oil pump, then remove the t iming belt drive pulley (B).

2. Remove the oil pan.

3. Remove the engine block end cover.

4. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B) and oil pump (C).

a B

5. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of any cylinder, remove it wi th a ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the piston as it is pushed out.

7-12

Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the crank pin at BDC for each cylinder. Remove the piston assembly by pushing on the connecting rod. Take care not to damage the crank journal or cylinder with the connecting rod.

C O R R E C T

I N C O R R E C T

7. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/ bearings in order.

8. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods and set them aside with their respective caps.

9. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly, reinstall the cap on the rod.

10. To avoid mixup during reassembly, mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number.

11 . Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap side bolts (B), then remove the bearing cap (C).

A

(cont'd)

7-13

Engine Block

Crankshaft and Piston Removal (cont'd) 12. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the cylinder block,

being careful not to damage the journals. A

13. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the cylinder block in the proper order.

Crankshaft Inspection

Straightness

1. Clean the crankshaft oil passages wi th pipe cleaners or a suitable brush.

2. Check the keyway and threads.

3. Support the crankshaft wi th a lathe-type tool or V-blocks.

4. Measure runout on all main journals to make sure the crank is not bent. Rotate the crankshaft 2 complete revolutions. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more that the service limit.

Crankshaft Total Runout: Standard (New): 0.020 mm (0.0008 in.) max. Service Limit: 0.030 mm (0.0012 in.)

7-14

Block and Piston Inspection

Out-of-Round and Taper

1. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod and main journal in 2 places. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit.

Journal Out-of-Round: Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. Service Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)

u

TT 2. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main

journal. The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit.

Journal Taper: Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. Service Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)

1. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.

2. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16.0 mm (0.63 in.) from the bottom of the skirt.

Piston Diameter: Standard (New): 85.975 - 85.985 mm


16.0 m m (0.63 in . )

S K I R T D I A M E T E R

(cont'd)

7-15

Engine Block

Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd)

3. Measure wear and taper in directions X and Y at 3 levels in each cylinder as shown.

• If the measurements in any cylinder are beyond the oversize bore service l imit, replace the cylinder block.

• If the block is to be rebored, refer to Piston Clearance Inspection after reboring (refer to step 5).

Cylinder Bore Size: Standard (New): 86.000 86.015 mm


Reboring Limit: 0.50 mm (0.02 in.)

Oversize 0.25: 86.250 86.265 mm (3.3957 3.3963 in.) 0.50: 86.500-86.515 mm (3.4055 3.4061 in.)

Bore Taper Limit: (Difference between first and third

measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)

4. Check the top of the cylinder block for warpage. Measure along the edges and across the center as shown.

Cylinder Block Warpage: Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)

7-16

Cylinder Honing

5. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore diameter and piston diameter.

Piston-to-Block Clearance: Standard (New): 0.015-0.040 mm


S E R V I C E L IMIT 0.08 m m (0.003 i n )

Oversize Piston Diameter 0.25: 86.225-86.235 mm (3.3947-3.3951 in.) 0.50: 86.475-86.485 mm (3.4045-3.4049 in,)

1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-15). If the cylinder block is to be reused, hone the cylinders and remeasure the bores. Only scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed.

2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine (400 grit) stone in a 60 degree Crosshatch pattern.

NOTE: * Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone,

such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent. 9 Do not use stones that are worn or broken.

3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the cylinder block of all metal particles. Wash the cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the cylinder walls.

4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the cylinder bores after honing to the service limit, rebore the cylinder block. Some light vertical scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep enough to catch your fingernail and does not run the full length of the bore.

7-1

Engine Block

Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement

Disassembly

1. Apply engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A) and turn them in the ring grooves until the end gaps are lined up wi th the cutouts in the piston pin bores (B).

NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.

Remove both snap rings (A). Start at the cutout in the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings carefully so they do not go f ly ing or get lost. Wear eye protection.

A

3. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to approximately 158°F (70°C), then remove the piston pin.

7-18

Inspection

NOTE; Inspect the piston, piston pin and connecting rod when they are at room temperature.

1 . Measure the diameter of the piston pin.

Piston Pin Diameter: Standard (New): 21.962-21.965 mm


2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.

3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston.

Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance: Standard (New): 0.0050 to +0.0010 mm

( 0.00020 to +0.00004 in.) Service Limit: 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)

4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.

Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance: Standard (New): 0.005-0.014 mm


(cont'd)

7-19

Engine Block

Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)

Reassembly

1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A).

2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in the connecting rod, and the piston pin wi th engine oil .

3. Heat the piston to approximately 158°F (70°C).

4. Install the piston pin (A). Assemble the piston (B) and connecting rod (C) wi th the embossed marks (D) on the same side.

5. Install the remaining snap ring.

7-20

Connecting Bod Bolt Inspection

1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at point A and point B.

35 m m (1.38 in.)

20 m m d

(0.79 in.)

2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point A and point B.

Point A—Point B = Difference in Diameter

Difference in Diameter: Specification: 0 0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.)

3. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance, replace the connecting rod bolt.

Engine Block

Piston Ring Replacement

1. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder bore 1 5 - 2 0 m m (0 .6 -0 .8 in.) f rom the bot tom.

2. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) w i th a feeler gauge:

• If the gap is too small , check to see if you have the proper rings for your engine.

• If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore diameter against the wear l imits (see page 7-15).

If the bore is over the service l imit, the cylinder block must be rebored.

3. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston rings (B).

B A

4. Clean all the ring grooves throughly wi th a squared-off broken ring or ring groove cleaner wi th a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the blade if necessary. Top ring groove and 2nd ring grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) wide, and the oil ring groove is 2.8 m m (0.11 in.) wide. Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves deeper wi th the cleaning tool .

NOTE: If the piston is to be separated f rom the connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.

Piston Ring End-Gap:

Top Ring Standard (New): 0.20 0.35 mm


2nd Ring Standard (New): 0.40 0.55 mm


Oil Ring Standard (New): 0.20 0.70 mm


7-22

Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 1B and the 2nd ring (B) is marked 2B. The manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward.

P i s t o n R i n g D i m e n s i o n s :

T o p R i n g ( S t a n d a r d ) A : 3.1 m m (0 .12 i n ) B: 1.2 m m (0 .05 in) 2 n d R i n g ( S t a n d a r d ) A : 3 .4 m m (0 .13 i n ) B: 1.2 m m (0 .05 in)

6. After installing a new set of rings, measure the ring-to-groove clearance:

Top Ring Clearance Standard (New): 0.035—0.060 mm


2nd Ring Clearance Standard (New): 0.030-0.055 mm

(0.0012 0.0022 in.) Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005in.)

(cont'd)

7-23

Engine Block

Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd) Crankshaft and Piston Installation

7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do not bind.

8. Position the ring end gaps as shown:

2 N D R I N G G A P

A p p r o x . 90'

D O N O T p o s i t i o n a n y r ing g a p a t p i s t o n t h r u s t s u r f a c e s .

T O P R I N G G A P

D O N O T p o s i t i o n a n y r i n g g a p in l i n e w i t h p i s t o n p i n h o l e .

O I L R I N G 15° G A P

S P A C E R G A P

O I L R I N G G A P

Special Tools Required • Driver 07749-0010000 • Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 mm I.D.

07VAD-P8A010A

1. Apply engine oil to the main bearings and rod bearings.

2. Install the bearing halves in the cylinder block and connecting rods.

3. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the block.

4. Oil the thrust washer surfaces. Install the thrust washers (A) in the No. 3 journal.

7-24

5. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (B) with the arrow (C) facing the timing belt end of the engine.

o

o C\J

o CO

o o o o

o o o o <? o

10 x 80 m m

10 x 60 m m

10 x 109 m m

1 0 x 8 0 m m 1 0 x 6 0 m m

6. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange, then install the bearing cap bolts (D) and bearing cap side bolts (E).

7. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage (see page 7-8).

8. Set the crankshaft to BDC for the cylinder you are working on.

9. Remove the connecting rod caps. Install the ring compressor, and check that the bearing is securely in place.

10. Install the piston with the arrow (A) facing the timing belt side of the engine.

A

11, Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A). Maintain downward force on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore.

12. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before pushing the piston into place.

(cont'd)

7-25

Engine Block

Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)

13. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance wi th plastigage (see page 7-10).

14. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap, then install the cap.

15. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. Torque the bolts (B) to 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibf f t ) .

16. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (B) as shown.

18. Torque the bearing cap bolts (A), then torque the bearing cap side bolts (B). Follow the numbered sequence shown.

NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod bearing is replaced, it is necessary after reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it reaches normal operating temperature, then continue to run it for approximately 15 minutes.

11 x 1.5 m m 76 N-m (7.8 kgf -m, 56 Ibf f t )

B 10 x 1.25 m m 49 N m (5.0 kgf -m, 36 Ibf f t )

17. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head lines up wi th the mark on the connecting rod (turn the bolt 90°).

7-26

19. The seal mating surface on the engine block end cover should be dry.

20. Drive the crankshaft oil seal sequarely into the left side cover.

21 . Confirm that the clearance is equal all the way around with a feeler gauge.

Clearance: 0 . 5 0 . 8 mm (0.02 0.03 in.)

0.5—0.8 m m ( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 3 in.)

IP

22. Clean and dry the left side cover mating surfaces. Apply a light coat of grease the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal.

23. Apply l iquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of the left side cover and to the inner threads of the bolt holes. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (B) and the engine block end cover (C) on the cylinder block.

NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have elapsed since applying the l iquid gasket. Instead, reapply l iquid gasket after removing the old residue.

A

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf f t )

24. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before f i l l ing the engine wi th oil.

(cont'd)

7-27

Engine Block

Crankshaft and Piston installation (cont'd)

25. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.

26. Install the oil pump (A).

- 1 Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump (see step 15 on page 8-9).

- 2 Apply l iquid gasket part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.

- 3 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to the new O-ring (B).

- 4 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner rotor wi th the crankshaft and install the oil pump.

- 5 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft and check the seal for distort ion.

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf f t )

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf f t )

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf f t )

27. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen (E).

28. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.

29. Apply l iquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.

30. Install the oil pan wi th a new gasket.

A p p l y l iquid g a s k e t a l o n g t h e b r o k e n l ine.

31 . Tighten the bolts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step, t ighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf f t ) .

7-28

Pulley End Crankshaft Seal Installation - In-car

Transmission End Crankshaft Seal installation In-car

Special Tools Required Oil Sea! Driver 07LAD-PT301 OA

1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.

2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal.

3. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.

Special Tools Required • Driver 07749-0010000 • Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 mm I.D.

07VAD-P8A010A

1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.

2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal.

3. Using the special tools, drive the crankshaft oil seal into the engine block end cover until the driver attachment bottoms against the crankshaft. Al ign the hole in the driver attachment wi th the pin on the crankshaft.

07749-0010000

0 7 V A D - P 8 A 0 1 0 A

4. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.

7-29

Engine Mechanical

Engine Lubrication Special Tools 8-2 Component Location Index 8-3 Oil Pressure Switch Test 8-4 Oil Pressure Test 8-4 Engine Oil Replacement 8-5 Engine Oil Filter Replacement 8-5 Oil Pump Overhaul 8-7

Engine Lubrication

Special Tools

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty ® 07GAD-PH70201 Oil Seal Driver 1 (D 07912-6110001 Oil Filter Wrench

... 1

8-2


8-3

Engine Lubrication

Oil Pressure Switch Test

1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) f rom the engine oil pressure switch (B).

B C

2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be continuity w i th the engine stopped. There should be no continuity w i th the engine running.

3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine oil pressure.

Oil Pressure Test

If the oil pressure warning light stays on wi th the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct:


2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch and install an oil pressure gauge (A).

3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing.

4. A l low the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be:

Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm 2,10 psi)

minimum At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm 2,71 psi)

minimum

5. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect the oil pump (see page 8-7).

8-4

Engine Oil Replacement Engine Oil Filter Replacement

NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at every other oil change. Under severe conditions, the oil fi lter should be replaced at each oil change.

Change interval: Every 7,500 miles {12,000 km) or 12 months (Normal conditions) Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months (Severe conditions).

1. Warm up the engine.

2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oi l . B

Special Tools Required Oil Filter Wrench 07912-6110001

1. Remove the oil f i l ter wi th the special oil f i lter wrench.

2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the fi lter rubber seal. Use only filters wi th a built-in bypass system.

A 39 N m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibfft ) D o n o t o v e r t i g h t e n .

3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).

4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).

Capacity 4.0 G (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt) at oil change. 4.4 fi (4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt) at oil change including filter. 5.0 ft (5.3 US qt, 4.4 Imp qt) after engine overhaul.

5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage.

(cont'd)

8-5

Engine Lubrication

Engine Oil Filter Replacement (cont'd)

3. Install the oil fi lter by hand.

4. After the rubber seal seats, t ighten the oil f i l ter clockwise wi th the special tool .

Tighten: 7/8 tu rn clockwise. Tightening torque: 22 N m (2.2 kgfm, 16 Ibfft)

5. If 8 numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the outside of the filter, use the fo l lowing procedure to t ighten the filter.

• Spin the filter on until its seal l ightly seats against the block, and note which number is at the bottom.

• Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise 7 numbers f rom the one you noted. For example, if number 2 is at the bottom when the seal is l ightly seated, t ighten the filter until the number 1 comes around to the bottom.

N u m b e r w h e n rubber N u m b e r af ter t i g h t e n i n g , s e a l is s e a t e d .

Number when rubber seal is seated

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Number after tightening

8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6. After installation, fi l l the engine wi th oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage.

8-6

Oil Pump Overhaul

Exploded View

O I L S E A L R e p l a c e .

' E N G I N E O I L P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 18 N m (1.8 kgf -m, 13 Ibff t ) 1/8 in. B S P T (Bri t ish s t a n d a r d pipe taper) 28 t h r e a d s / i n c h . U s e the proper l iquid sea lan t .

6 x 1.0 m m 6 N-m (0.6 kg f -m, 4 Ibfft)

R E L I E F V A L V E V a l v e m u s t s l ide f reely i n t h e h o u s i n g b o r e . R e p l a c e if it is s c o r e d .

P U M P C O V E R

O U T E R R O T O R

I N N E R R O T O R

P U M P H O U S I N G A p p l y l i q u i d g a s k e t t o t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e o f t h e c y l i n d e r b l o c k w h e n i n s t a l l i n g .

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 kg f -m, 8.7 Ibfft)

S P R I N G

S E A L I N G B O L T 39 N m (4.0 k g f m , 2 9 Ibf f t )

(cont'd)

8-7

Engine Lubrication

Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)

Special Tools Required

Oil Seal Driver 07GAD-PH70201

Removal

1. Drain the engine oi l . 2. Turn the crankshaft so that the No. 1 piston is at

TDC (see page 6-22).

3. Remove the t iming belt (see page 6-19).

4. Remove the idler pulley.

5. Remove the CKP sensor, then remove the t iming belt drive pulley (see page 6-56).

6. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve and oil fi lter assembly (see page 6-9).

7. Remove the oil pan and the oil screen (A).

A

8. Remove the mount ing bolts and the oil pump assembly (B).

9. Remove the screws f rom the pump housing, then separate the housing and cover.

Inspection

10. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (B). If the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the service l imit, replace the oil pump assembly.

Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance Standard (New): 0.04-0.16 mm


11. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between the rotors (A) and pump housing (B). If the housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service l imit, replace the oil pump assembly.

Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance Standard (New): 0.02 0.07 mm


8-8

12. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (B). If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds the service l imit, replace the oil pump assembly.

Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance Standard (New); 0 .14 -0 .19 m m

(0.006-0.007 In.) Service Limit: 0.20 m m (0.008 in.)

13. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for scoring or other damage. Replace parts if necessary.

14. Remove the old oil seal f rom the oil pump.

15. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the special tool bottoms on the pump.

16. Apply liquid thread lock to the pump housing screws.

Installation

17. Reassemble the oil pump.

18. Check that the oil pump turns freely.

19. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.

20. Install the oil pump (A). - 1 Apply l iquid gasket part No. 08718-0001 or

08718-0003 evenly to the block mating surface of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.

-2 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to the new O-rings (B).

- 3 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner rotor wi th the crankshaft and install the oil pump.

- 4 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and check the seal for distort ion.

21 . Install the oil screen (D).

(cont'd)

8-9

Engine Lubrication

Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)

22. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.

23. Apply l iquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.

24. Install the oil pan wi th a new gastet.

A p p l y l iquid g a s k e t a l o n g t h e b r o k e n l ine.

25. Tighten the bolts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step, t ighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf f t ) .

<D @ 0 CD ® ®

8-10

Engine Mechanical

Intake Manifold and Exhaust System Intake Manifold Removal and Installation Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement

Intake Manifold and Exhaust System

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation

NOTE: • Use new O-rings and gaskets when reassembling. • Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets. • Replace wi th a new gasket if damaged.

I N T A K E M A N I F O L D C H A M B E R R e p l a c e if i t is c r a c k e d o r if t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s a re d a m a g e d . 6 x 1.0 m m

12 N m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibff t )

8 x 1.25 m m 2 2 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibff t )

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 kgf -m, 8.7 Ibff t )

I N T A K E A IR T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT) S E N S O R 18 N-m (1.8 kg f -m, 13 Ibff t )

12 x 1.5 m m 26 N m (2.7 kg f -m, 20 Ibff t ) ( '98-99 m o d e l s )

I N T A K E M A N I F O L D R e p l a c e if i t is c r a c k e d o r if t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s a re d a m a g e d .

T H R O T T L E B O D Y

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N-m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibfft)

9-2

Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation

NOTE: • Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. • Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets. • Replace with a new gasket if damaged.

FRONT:

22 N m (2.2 kgfm, 16 Ibfft) R e p l a c e .

Intake Manifold and Exhaust System

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement

NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.

M U F F L E R S

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N-m (1.2 kg f -m, 8.7 Ibfft)

S E L F - L O C K I N G N U T 10 x 1.25 m m 33 N-m (3 .4 kg f -m, 25 Ibff t ) R e p l a c e .

S E L F - L O C K I N G N U T S 1 0 x 1.25 m m 54 N m (5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibff t ) R e p l a c e .

S E C O N D A R Y H E A T E D O X Y G E N S E N S O R 44 N-m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibff t )

G A S K E T R e p l a c e .

E X H A U S T P I P E A

S E L F - L O C K I N G N U T S 10 x 1.25 m m 54 N m (5.5 kgf -m, 40 Ibff t ) R e p l a c e . T H R E E W A Y C A T A L Y T I C

C O N V E R T E R T I G H T E N I N G S E Q U E N C E

T H R E E W A Y C A T A L Y T I C C O N V E R T E R

G A S K E T Rep lace .

6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibfft)

S E L F - L O C K I N G N U T 10 x 1.25 m m

33 N-m 10 x 1 25 m m

R e j l a l e " 1 ' ^ ' " ' ^ 3 8 N m ( 3 9 k 9 f m < 2 8 l b f f t >

9-4

Engine Cooling

Cooling System Component Location Index . 10-2 Coolant Temperature Gauge Testing 10-5 Sending Unit Testing 10-7 Radiator Cap Test 10-7 Radiator Test „ 10-8 Fan Motor Test 10-8 Thermostat Test 10-9 Water Pump Inspection 10-9 Water Pump Replacement 10-10 Coolant Replacement 10-10 Thermostat Replacement 10-12 Radiator and Fans Replacement 10-13

Fan Controls Component Location Index 10-14 Symptom Troubleshooting Index 10-15 Circuit Diagram 10-16 Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting 10-17 Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting 10-19 Fan control Module Input Test 10-20 Radiator Fan Switch (A or B) Test 10-21

Cooling System


U P P E R R A D I A T O R H O S E

R A D I A T O R F A N S H R O U D R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 10-13

10-2

(cont'd)

10-3

Cooling System


O - R I N G

10-4

Coolant Temperature Gauge Test

'98-99 models:

1. Check the No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ relay box before testing.

2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) f rom the coolant temperature gauge sending unit (B), and ground it wi th a jumper wire.

A

Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check that the pointer of the coolant temperature gauge starts moving toward the " H " mark. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF before the pointer reaches " H " on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the gauge.

• If the pointer of the gauge does not move at all, check for an open in the YEL/GRN wire. If the wires are OK, replace the coolant temperature gauge.

• If the coolant temperature gauge works, test the coolant temperature gauge sending unit.

'00-01 models: Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Does Not Move at All

1. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF, and connect PCM connector terminal A1 to body ground wi th a jumper wire.


Y E L / G R N

1 2 3 4 5 6 A 8 9 10

12 13 | 14 15 A 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 32



After 30 seconds or more, does the temperature gauge needle move to the Hot side ?

YES Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original PCM.

NO Go to step 3.

3. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF, and disconnect PCM connector A (32P).

(cont'd)

10-5

Cooling System

Coolant Temperature Gauge Test (cont#d)

4. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), and measure voltage between PCM connector terminal A1 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)

Y E L / G R N

1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10

12 13 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 32


Is there approx. 5V ?

Y E S - R e p l a c e the fuel and temperature gauge assembly. •

NO Go to step 5.

5. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), and measure voltage between PCM connector terminal A1 and body ground.

PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) YEL /GRN

YEL/GRN GAUGE CONNECTOR C (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 X 12 X 14 15 16


Is there continuity ?

Y E S - Replace the fuel and temperature gauge assemb ly . •

NO -Repa i r open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A1 and gauge connector terminal C2.B

Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Goes Past the Hot Mark

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM connector A (32P).

2. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II).and watch the coolant temperature gauge.

Does the temperature gauge needle move at all ? (you may have to watch it for about 30 seconds.)

Y E S - G o to step 3. NO— Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM.B

3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) again, and watch the coolant temperature gauge.

Does the temperature gauge needle immediately go past the Hot mark ?

Y E S —Replace the fuel and temperature gauge assembly. • NO—The temperature gauge needle went past the Hot mark after about 30 seconds or more.Go to step 4.

4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the gauge assembly connector C (16P).

5. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal aaA1 and gauge assembly connector terminal C2.


1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10

12 13 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 32

YEL/GRN GAUGE CONNECTOR C (16P)

1 2 3 2 x T 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 X 12 X 14 15 16



Y E S —Replace short in the wire between PCM connector terminal A1 and gauge connector terminal C2.B NO —Replace the fuel and temperature gauge assembly. •

10-6

Sending Unit Test Radiator Cap Test

'98-99 models: 1. Disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) f rom the coolant

temperature gauge sending unit (B).

2. Using an ohmmeter, measure the change in resistance between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground) wi th the engine cold and with the engine at operating temperature.

Temperature 133°F (56°C) 185°F ( 8 5 ° Q -212°F(100°C)

Resistance ( 0 . ) 137 4 6 - 3 0

3. If the obtained readings are substantially different f rom the specifications above, replace the sending unit.

1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its seal wi th engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester (B) (commercial ly available).

B

2. Apply a pressure of 9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm 2 , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).

3. Check for a drop in pressure.

4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.

10-7

Cooling System

Radiator Test

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the radiator cap and fi l l the radiator wi th engine coolant to the top of the fi l ler neck.

2. Attach the pressure tester (A) (commercial ly available) to the radiator and apply a pressure of 9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa (0 .95-1.25 kgf/cm 2 , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).

A ^

3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure.

4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap.

5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oi l .

Fan Motor Test

1. Disconnect the 2P connectors f rom the radiator fan motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B).


L O C K

2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the B terminal, and ground to the A terminal.

3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly, replace it.

10-8

Thermostat Test

Replace the thermostat if it is open at room temperature.

To test a closed thermostat:

1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of the hot container.

Water Pump Inspection


2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. Check that it turns freely.

3. Check for signs of seal leakage. A small amount of "weep ing " f rom the bleed holes (A) is normal.

A

A

2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a thermometer. Check the temperature at which the thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.

3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is ful ly open.

STANDARD THERMOSTAT Lift height: above 10.0 mm (0.39 in.) Starts opening: '98-00 models: 169~176°F (76 -80°C) '01 model: 163- 171°F (73-77°C) Fully open: '98-00 models: 194°F (90°C) '01 model: 190°F(88°C)

10-9

Cooling System

Water Pump Replacement


2. Remove the t iming belt tensioner.

3. Remove the water pump (A) by removing 5 bolts.

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 kg fm r 8.7 Ibfft)

4. Inspect, repair and clean the O-ring groove and mating surface on the cylinder block.

5. Install the water pump wi th a new O-ring (B) in the reverse order of removal.

6. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.

Coolant Replacement

1. Set the heater temperature control dial to max imum heat. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch.

2. Remove the radiator cap.

3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.

4. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B) located at the rear of the cylinder block, then loosen the drain bolt.

5. When the coolant stops draining, t ighten the drain bolt.

6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.

10-10

7. Remove drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the tank to the MAX mark wi th Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

8. Pour Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the fil ler neck.

NOTE: • Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant

Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail.

• Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Pre-mixing is not required.

Engine Coolant Refill Capacity [including the reservoir capacity of

(0.6 6 (0.6 US qt, 0.5 Imp qt))] : 5.6 £ (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt)

9. Install the radiator cap loosely.

10. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice).

11. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda All Season. Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 if needed.

12. Put the radiator cap on t ightly, then run the engine again and check for leaks.

10-11

Cooling System

Thermostat Replacement

PIN

T H E R M O S T A T C O V E R

10-12

Radiator and Fans Replacement

1. Drain the engine coolant.

2. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, and ATF cooler hoses.

U P P E R R A D I A T O R H O S E R A D I A T O R C A P

6 x 1.0 m m 7 N m (0.7 kgf-m 5 Ibfft)

6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibfft)

U P P E R B R A C K E T A N D C U S H I O N

R A D I A T O R

O - R I N G

D R A I N P L U G

F A N M O T O R

1.0 m m N-m (1.0 kgf -m, Ibff t )

4.4 N-m (0.45 kgf -m, 3.3 Ibff t )

A / C C O N D E N S E R F A N A S S E M B L Y

6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibff t )

F A N C O N N E C T O R S

3. Disconnect the fan motor connectors.

4. Remove the radiator upper brackets, then pull up the radiator.

5. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts f rom radiator.

6. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal.

7. Set the upper and lower cushions securely.

8. Fill the radiator wi th engine coolant and bleed the air.

1

Fan Controls


10-14


Before performing any troubleshooting procedures check:

• Fuses • Grounds • Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors

SYMPTOM PROCEDURE

Radiator fan does not run at all. Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 10-17)

Both fans (radiator and condenser) do not run for engine cool ing, but they do run wi th the A/C on.

Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 10-19)

Both fans do not run with A/C on. Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit Troubleshooting, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual, (see page 21-14)

10-15

Fan Controls

Circuit Diagram


BATTERY No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A)

No.57 (20A)

BLU/BLK

RADIATOR FAN MOTOR

BLK

BLK

A. G201

No.58 (20A)

RADIATOR FAN . RELAY

CONDENSER FAN RELAY

IGNITION SWITCH

- W H T -

YEL BLK/YEL

No.3 (7.5A)

No.6 (15A)


BLK/YEL

BLU/YEL GRN

- G R N

YEL/WHT YEL WHT BLK/YEL BLK/YEL BLK/YEL

RADIATOR FAN CONTROL MODULE

WHT/GRN BLK

GRN

CONDENSER FAN MOTOR ®

RADIATOR FAN SWITCH A f Closed: Above L 199°F (93°C)

BLK BLK BLK

RADIATOR FAN SWITCH B f Closed ; Above 1 L 2 2 5 o F ( 1 0 7 ° C ) J

BLK

G101

v AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

G401

10-16

Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 57 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ relay box.

Is the fuse OK?


NO - Replace the fuse and recheck.B

2. Remove the radiator fan relay f rom the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-52).

Is the relay OK ?


NO —Replace the radiator fan relay. •

3. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the radiator fan relay 4P socket and body ground.

R A D I A T O R F A N R E L A Y 4 P S O C K E T

1 1

2

3 4

T e r m i n a l s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s



NO- Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box 1

4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the radiator fan relay 4P socket w i th a jumper wire.

R A D I A T O R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T

1 1

2 2

3 4


Does the radiator fan run?


N O - G o t o step 5.

5. Disconnect the jumper wire.

6. Disconnect the radiator fan connector.

7. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of the radiator fan relay 4P socket and the No. 2 terminal of the radiator fan connector.



1 2 2

3 4 B L U / B L K


R A D I A T O R F A N C O N N E C T O R



NO - Repair open in the BLU/BLK wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan. •

(cont'd)

10-17

Fan Controls

Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (conf*

8. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of the radiator fan connector and body ground.

R A D I A T O R F A N C O N N E C T O R

1 2

11. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the radiator fan control module and body ground.

R A D I A T O R F A N C O N T R O L M O D U L E 8P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8




Y E S - Replace the radiator fan motor. •

NO —Check for an open in the BLK wire between the radiator fan connector and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for a poor ground at G 2 0 1 . •

9. Disconnect the jumper wire, and turn the ignit ion switch on (II).

10. Measure the voltage between No. 3 terminal of the radiator fan relay 4P socket and body ground.


_1_ 2



Y E S Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .B

NO Go to step 11.


Y E S - R e p a i r open in the YEL wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan control m o d u l e . *

NO - Perform the radiator fan control module input tests (see page 10-20).B

10-18

Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch A connector.


3. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal on the radiator fan switch connector and body ground.

R A D I A T O R F A N S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R



IMO —Repair open in the GRN wire between the radiator fan switch A and under-hood fuse/relay box .B

4. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF, and check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal on the radiator fan switch A connector and body ground.

R A D I A T O R F A N S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R

5. Check the cooling system.

Is the cooling system OK?

YES — Replace the radiator fan switch A. •

NO —Repair the cooling system •



NO —Check for an open in the BLK wire between the radiator fan switch A connector and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G101.B

10-19

Fan Controls

Fan Control Module Input Test

Perform the fo l lowing tests wi th the radiator fan control module 8P connector connected, the ignition switch ON (II) and the A/C switch OFF. If you f ind the cause of a problem, correct it before you continue.

B L K / Y E L 2 Y E L / W H T


Wire color Test condition Desired result Possible cause if desired result is not obtained BLK Check for voltage to body

ground. There should be less than 1V. • Poor ground(G401)

• An open in the wire WHT Check for battery voltage to

body ground. There should be battery voltage.

• Blown No. 58 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box

• An open in the wire BLK/YEL1 Check battery voltage to

body ground: Ignition switch-ON (II)

There should be battery voltage.

• Blown No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash driver's fuse/relay box

• An open in the wire BLK/YEL2 Check battery voltage to



• Blown No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash driver's fuse/relay box

• An open in the wire YEL/WHT Check battery voltage to



• Faulty radiator fan control module • An open in the wire

YEL Check battery voltage to body ground: Ignition switch-ON (III)


• Faulty radiator fan control module • An open in the wire

GRN Connect body ground: Ignition switch-ON (II)

Radiator fan and condenser fan should come on.

• Faulty radiator fan relay or condenser fan relay

• An open in the wire WHT/GRN Check for voltage: Engine

coolant temperature below 225°F(107°C)

There should be approx. 11 V. • Faulty radiator fan switch B • Faulty radiator fan control module

10-20

Radiator Fan Switch (A or B) Test

NOTE; Bleed air f rom the cooling system after installing the radiator fan switch (see page 10-10).

1 . Remove radiator fan switch A f rom the water passage and radiator fan switch B f rom the cylinder head (see page 10-2).

2. Suspend each radiator fan switch (A) in a container of coolant as shown.

3. Heat the coolant and check the temperature with a thermometer (B). Do not let the thermometer touch the bottom of the hot container.

4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (C) and B terminal (D) according to the table.

\ T e r m i n a l A 8

O p e r a t i o n T e m p e r a t u r e \ A 8

S W I T C H A

O N 1 9 6 - 2 0 3 ° F ( 9 1 - 9 5 ° C )

S W I T C H A

O F F 5 - 1 5 ° F ( 3 - 8 ° C ) l o w e r t h a n t h e t e m p e r a t u r e w h e n it g o e s o n

S W I T C H B

O N 2 1 7 - 2 3 2 ° F ( 1 0 3 - 1 1 1 ° C ) !

S W I T C H B

O F F 5 - 2 3 ° ( 3 - 1 3 ° ) l o w e r t h a n t h e t e m p e r a t u r e w h e n it g o e s o n

!

I

Fuel and Emissions Fuel and Emissions Systems Special Tools • • 11-2 DTC Troubleshooting Index • 11-3 Symptom Troubleshooting Index 11-6 System Descriptions ........................................................ 11-7

PGM-FI System Component Location Index 11-50 DTC Troubleshooting 11-52 Injector Replacement 11-80 Primary H02S Replacement 11-84 Secondary H02S Replacement 11-84

Idle Control System Component Location Index 11-85 Idle Speed Adjustment 11-86

Fuel Supply System Component Location Index 11-87 Fuel Pressure Relieving 11-88 Fuel Pressure Test 11-89 Fuel Lines Inspection 11-91 Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement 11-92 Fuel Gauge Test 11-94

Intake Air System Component Location Index 11-95 Throttle Body Test - - 11-96 Air Cleaner Element Replacement 11-97 Throttle Cable Adjustment 11-98 Throttle Body Removal/Installation 11-99 Throttle Body Assembly/Reassembly ............................ 11-100 Intake Air Bypass Control Valve Test 11-101

PCV System PCV Valve Inspection and Test - 11-102

EVAP System Component Location Index 11-103

Refer to the 1998-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for the items not shown in this section.

Outl ine of Accord V6 Model Change J30A1 engine has been added.

Fuel and Emissions Systems

Special Tools

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty ® © ©

A973X-041-XXXXX 07VAJ-0040100 07406-004000A

Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 — 30 in.Hg Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Fuel Pressure Gauge

1 1 1

11-2

DTC Troubleshooting Index

DTC (MIL indication*)

Temporary DTC Detection Item Note

P0107 (3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit Low Voltage

Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-47)

P0108 (3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit High Voltage


P0112 (10) Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Circuit Low Voltage


P0113 (10) Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Circuit High Voltage


P0116 (86) P0116 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Range/Performance Problem


P0117 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage


P0118 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit High Voltage


P0122 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage


P0123 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage


P0131 (1) Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage

(see page 11-55)

P0132 (1) Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage

(see page 11-56)

P0133(61) P0133 Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary H02S) (Sensor 1) Slow Response

(see page 11-57)

P0135 (41) Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary H02S) (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction

(see page 11-61)

P0137 (63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage

(see page 11-58)

P0138 (63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) High Voltage

(see page 11-59)

P0139(63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) Slow Response

(see page 11-60)

P0141 (65) Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction

(see page 11-61)

P0171 (45) P0170 Fuel System Too Lean Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-69)

P0172 (45) P0170 Fuel System Too Rich Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-69)

P0300 and some of P0301 (71) P0302 (72) P0303 (73) P0304 (74) P0305 (75) P0306 (76)

P1399 Random Misfire (see page 11-63)

*: These DTCs wi l l be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS service signal line is jumped wi th the Honda PGM Tester. * * : The D 4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.

(cont'd)

11-3


DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)


Temporary DTC Detection Item Note

P0301 (71) P1339 No. 1 Cylinder Misf ire *1 *2

(see page 11-64) (see page 11-68)

P0302 (72) P1339 No. 2 Cylinder Misfire *1 *2










P0335 (4) Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No Signal

(see page 11-73)

P0336 (4) ! Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Intermittent Interruption

(see page 11-73)

P0401 (80) P0401 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow


P0420 (67) P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold


P0451 (91)* 1 P0451 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/ Performance Problem


P0452 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage


P0453 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage


P0505 (14) P0505 Idle Control System Malfunction Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-99)

P0560 (34) Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Back up Circuit Low Voltage


P0700** (70) P0715** (70) P0720** (70) P0730** (70) P0740** (70) P0753** (70) P0758** (70) P0763** (70) P0780** (70)

Automatic Transaxle System Malfunction

Refer to the Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting Index

P1106(13) P1106 Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Range/Performance Problem


P1107 (13) ! Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low Input


P1108 (13) __ • Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor I Circuit High Input


P1121 (7) P1121 ' Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Lower | I Than Expected

(see page 11-75)

* : These DTCs wi l l be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS service signal line is jumped wi th the Honda PGM Tester. * * : The D4 indicator l ight and the MIL may come on simultaneously. * 1 : '98-99 models *2 : '00-01 models

11-4


Temporary DTC Detection Item Page

P1122 (7) P1122 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Higher Than Expected

(see page 11-75)

P1128 ( 5 ) P1128 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Lower Than Expected


P1129 (5) P1129 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Higher Than Expected


P1259 (22) VTEC System Malfunction (see page 6-6) P1297 (20) Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit

Low Voltage Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-84)

P1298 (20) Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit High Voltage


P1361 (8) Top Dead Center (TDC) 1 Sensor Intermittent Interruption

(see page 11-76)

P1362 (8) Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 1 No Signal

(see page 11-76)

P1366 (58) Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 2 Intermittent Interruption

(see page 11-76)

P1367 (58) Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 2 No Signal

(see page 11-76)

P1456 (90) P1456 (90) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System Leakage (Fuel Tank System)


P1457 (90) P1457 (90) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System Leakage (EVAP Canister System)


P1491 (12) P1491 (12) Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve Insufficient Lift


P1498 (12) Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage


P1519 (14) Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Circuit Malfunction


P1607 ( - ) Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Circuit Malfunction


P1676(35)*3 FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction (see page 11-78) P1678(35)*3 FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction (see page 11-78) P1705** (70) Automatic Transaxle System

Malfunction Refer to the Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting Index

P1706** (70) P1706 Automatic Transaxle System Malfunction

Refer to the Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting Index P1738** (70)

P1739** (70) P1750** (70) P1751** (70) P1753** (70) P1768* # (70) P1773** (70)

Automatic Transaxle System Malfunction

Refer to the Automatic Transmission DTC Troubleshooting Index

*: These DTCs wi l l be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS service signal line is jumped with the Honda PGM Tester. * * : The D4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously. *3 : '01 model

11-5



These s y m p t o m s DO N O T t r i gge r D iagnos t i c T r o u b l e Codes (DTCs) and cause t h e M a l f u n c t i o n Ind icator L a m p (MIL) t o c o m e o n . If the MIL is repo r ted o n , check f o r DTCs. If t he veh ic le has one of these s y m p t o m s , do t he d iagnos t i c p rocedu re fo r it, in t he sequence l is ted, unt i l y o u f i nd the cause.

S y m p t o m Diagnost ic procedure Also check for Engine w i l l no t s tar t (MIL w o r k s OK, no DTCs set)

1. Test t he ba t te ry (see page 22-30). 2. Tes t the s tar ter (see page 4-7). 3. Test the fue l p u m p , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see

page 11-115). 4. Test t he i gn i t i on w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see page 4-22). 5. Test the i gn i t i on co i l f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see page 4-22), or f o r '00-01

m o d e l s (see page 4-23). 6. Check the i g n i t i o n c o n t r o l m o d u l e (ICM) i npu ts fo r '98-99 m o d e l s

(see page 4-21). 7. T r o u b l e s h o o t t he PGM-Fl m a i n re lay c i rcu i t , refer to the '98-01

A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 11-110).

• L o w c o m p r e s s i o n • Intake air leaks • Locked up eng ine • S l i pped /

b roken t i m i n g bel t • C o n t a m i n a t e d fue l

Eng ine w i l l no t s tar t (MIL c o m e s o n and stays o n , or never c o m e s o n at a l l , no DTCs set)

T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e MIL c i rcu i t , re fer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 11-91).

Eng ine w i l l no t s tar t ( immob i l i ze r ! T r o u b l e s h o o t the i m m o b i l i z e r s y s t e m , refer t o the '98-01 Acco rd ind ica tor l iqh t c o m e s on) ) Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-204). Hard s ta r t ing 1. Test the ba t te ry (see page 22-30). (MIL w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set) 2. Check t h e f ue l p ressure (see page 11-89).

i 3. Test t he i gn i t i on w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see page 4-22). i 4. Tes t t he i gn i t i on coi l f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see page 4-22), or f o r '00-01 I m o d e l s (see page 4-23). i 5. Check t h e i gn i t i on c o n t r o l m o d u l e (ICM) i npu t fo r '98-99 m o d e l s

(see page 4-21).

• L o w c o m p r e s s i o n • Intake air leaks • C o n t a m i n a t e d fue l

Co ld fast id le t o o l o w Check/ad jus t t he id le speed (see page 11-86). (MIL w o r k s OK, no DTCs set) Co ld fas t id le t o o h igh ! 1. Check /ad jus t the id le speed (see page 11-86). (MIL w o r k s OK, no DTCs set) j 2. Inspect /ad jus t t he th ro t t l e cable (see page 11-98).

! 3. Inspect and tes t t he t h ro t t l e b o d y (see page 11-96). Idle speed f luc tua tes 1. Check/ad jus t the id le speed (see page 11-86). (MIL w o r k s OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect /ad jus t t he t h ro t t l e cab le (see page 11-98).

| 3. Inspect and test the th ro t t l e b o d y (see page 11-96).

Intake air leaks

L o w p o w e r i 1. Check the fue l p ressure (see page 11-89). (MIL w o r k s OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect and test the th ro t t l e b o d y (see page 11-96).

! 3. Inspect /ad jus t t he th ro t t l e cab le (see page 11-98).

L o w c o m p r e s s i o n

Engine stal ls 1. Check the fue l p ressure (see page 11-89). (MIL w o r k s OK, no DTCs set) ' 2. Test t he i gn i t i on w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see page 4-22).

3. Check /ad jus t the idle speed (see page 11-86). i 4. T r o u b l e s h o o t the brake sw i t ch s igna l c i rcu i t .

• Intake air leaks • Faul ty harness and

sensor connec to rs

Di f f i cu l t t o re fue l (MIL w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)

I 1. Tes t the fue l tank v a p o r c o n t r o l va l ve , refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d ; Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 11-159).

2. Inspect the fue l tank s igna l t ube be tween the fue l p ipe and the fue l t ank vapo r con t ro l va lve .

3. Inspect the fue l tank v a p o r ven t t u b e be tween the EVAP con t ro l can is ter and the fue l tank v a p o r con t ro l va lve .

4. Check the EVAP canister , refer to t he '98-01 Acco rd Serv ice Manua l (see page 11-136).

Fuel o v e r f l o w s d u r i n g re fue l ing (No DTCs set)

Replace the fue l tank vapo r con t ro l va lve , refer to the '98-01 Acco rd Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 11-161).

11-6

System Descriptions

Electronic Control System

The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).

Fail-safe Function When an abnormality occurs in a signal f rom a sensor, the PCM ignores that signal and assumes a pre-programmed value for that sensor that allows the engine to continue to run.

Back-up Function When an abnormality occurs in the PCM, the injectors are controlled by a back-up circuit independent of the system in order to permit minimal driving.

Self-diagnosis When an abnormality occurs in the signal f rom a sensor, the PCM supplies ground for the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) and stores the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in erasable memory. When the ignit ion is first turned on, the PCM supplies ground for the MIL for 2 seconds to check the MIL bulb condit ion.

Two Driving Cycle Detection Method To prevent false indications, the " two driving cycle detection method" is used for some self-diagnostic functions. When an abnormality occurs, the PCM stores it in its memory. When the same abnormality recurs after the ignition switch is turned OFF and ON (II) again, the PCM informs the driver by turning on the MIL.

(cont'd)

11-7


System Descriptions (cont'd)

PCM Data

You can retrieve data f rom the PCM by connecting the OBD II scan tool or the Honda PGM Tester to the Data Link Connector (DLC). The items listed in the table below conform to SAE recommended practice. The Honda PGM Tester also reads data beyond that recommended by SAE. Understanding this data may help you f ind the causes of intermittent problems.

NOTE: • The "operat ing values" listed are approximate and may vary depending on the environment and the individual

vehicle. • Unless noted otherwise, "a t idle speed" means idl ing wi th the engine completely warmed up, transmission in Park

or neutral and the A/C and all accessories turned off.

Data Description Operating Value Freeze Data Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

If the PCM detects a problem, it wi l l store it as a code consisting of one letter and four numbers. Depending on the problem, an SAE-defined code (POxxx) or a Honda-defined code (P1xxx) wi l l be output to the tester.

If no problem is detected, there is no output.

YES

Engine Speed The PCM computes engine speed f rom the signals sent f rom the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. This data is used for determining the t ime and amount of fuel injection.

Nearly the same as tachometer indication At idle speed: 680 + 50 rpm

YES

Vehicle Speed The PCM converts pulse signals f rom the countershaft speed sensor into speed data.

Nearly the same as speedometer indication

YES

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)

The absolute pressure caused in the intake manifold by engine load and speed.

With engine stopped: Nearly the same as atmospheric pressure At idle speed: 2 0 - 3 4 kPa (150 260 mmHg, 6 - 1 0 in.Hg)

YES

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)

The ECT sensor converts coolant temperature into voltage and signals the PCM. The sensor is a thermistor whose internal resistance changes wi th coolant temperature. The PCM uses the voltage signals f rom the ECT sensor to determine the amount of injected fuel.

With cold engine: Same as ambient temperature and I AT With engine warmed up: approx. 176-212°F ( 8 0 -100°C)

YES

Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary H02S) (Sensor 1), Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02 S) (Sensor 2)

The H02S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and sends voltage signals to the PCM. Based on these signals, the PCM controls the air/ fuel ratio. When the oxygen content is high (that is, when the ratio is leaner than the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage signal is lower. When the oxygen content is low (that is, when the ratio is richer than the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage signal is higher.

0 .0-1 .25 V At idle speed: about 0 .1 -0 .9 V

NO

11-8

Data Description Operating Valve Freeze Data Fuel System Fuel system status is indicated as " o p e n " or

"c losed". Closed: Based on the H02S output, the PCM determines the air/fuel ratio and controls the amount of injected fuel. Open: ignoring H02S output, the PCM refers to signals f rom the Throttle Position (TP), Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Barometic Pressure (BAR0) and Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensors to control the amount of injected fuel.

At idle speed: closed YES

Short Term Fuel Tr im

The air/fuel ratio correction coefficient for correcting the amount of injected fuel when Fuel System Status is "c losed" . When the ratio is leaner than the stoichiometric ratio, the PCM increases short tern fuel t r im gradually, and the amount of injected fuel increases. The air/fuel ratio gradually gets richer, causing a lower oxygen content in the exhaust gas. Consequently, the short term fuel t r im is lowered, and the PCM reduces the amount of injected fuel. This cycle keeps the air/fuel ratio close to the stoichiometric ratio when in closed loop status.

0.73—1.47 YES

Long Term Fuel Tr im

Long term fuel t r im is computed f rom short term fuel t r im and indicates changes occuring in the fuel supply system over a long period. If long term fuel t r im is higher than 1.00, the amount of injected fuel must be increased. If it is lower than 1.00, the amount of injected fuel must be reduced.

0.81—1.19 YES

Intake Air Temperature (IAT)

The IAT sensor converts intake air temperature into voltage and signals the PCM. When intake air temperature is low, the internal resistance of the sensor increases, and the voltage signal is higher.

With cold engine: Same as ambient temperature and ECT

YES

Throttle Position

Based on the accelerator pedal position, the opening angle of the throttle valve is indicated.

At idle speed: approx. 10%

YES

Ignition Timing

Ignition t iming is the ignit ion advance angle set by the PCM. The PCM matches ignition t iming to the driving conditions.

At idle speed: 10°±2° BTDC wi th the SCS service signal jumped.

NO

Calculated Load Value (CLV)

CLV is the engine load calculated f rom the MAP data.

At idle speed: 16 33% At 2,500 rpm with no load: 1 7 - 2 5 %

YES

(cont'd)

11-9



PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd) PGM-FI MAIN R E L A Y

rti m

F U S E S : (D B A C K UP, A C C (40A)* A

© S T O P (20A)* A

(DACGS (15A) * A

(D BATTERY (100A) * A

(DIG MAIN (SOA)* A

© N o . 1 FUEL PUMP (15A)* B

<2) No.9 BACK UP LIGHT INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5A)* 8

(D No.6 ECU (PCM) CRUISE CONTROL ( 1 5 A ) * 8

(DNo.11 IG COIL (15A)* © No.13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A)* B

<0) No.13 CLOCK BACKUP (7.5A)* C

* A i n the under-hood fuse/relay box * B : in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box * c : in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box

To E C T G A U G E

* 1 : '98—99 models * 2 : '00 model * 3 : "01 model

11-10

http://DNo.11

Dp

PRIMARY H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)

S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)

1

B R A K E P E D A L POSITION (BPP) SWITCH

V T E C P R E S S U R E SWITCH

> C28 V C C 2 * 1 I C M B 1 3 <

> C27 T P S

> C18 S G 2

> C6 E G R L N E P A 1 9 <

> B 7 E - E G R C R S A 5 <

> A2S PTANK P C S A6 <

» C19 V C C t M C S A 2 <

> C17 MAP V B S O L D 5 <

• C 7 SG1

2 W B S A 3 <

» C 2 6 E C T V S V A 4 <

V T S B 1 2 <

» C 2 5 I AT

> A26 P S P S W

• A32 B K S W *2 , *3 | G P L S 1 C 4 ,

* 2 * 3 I G P L S 2 C14 <

*2 , *3 | G p L S 3 C 3 < > C10 VTM

*2 , *3 | G p L S 3 C 3 < > C10 VTM

*2.*3 I Q P L S 4 C13 < *2.*3 I Q P L S 4 C13 <

I Q P L S 5 C12 <

* 2 * 3 I G P L S 6 C23 <

• C 1 P 0 2 S H T C

> C16 P H 0 2 S

B A R O S E N S O R (Built Into the PCM)

"1 To G A U G E A S S E M B L Y , A B S / T C S * 3

C O N T R O L UNIT

T E S T T A C H O M E T E R C O N N E C T O R w To C R U I S E

C O N T R O L UNIT

E V A P C A N I S T E R P U R G E V A L V E o_^5$\_o- •

ENGINE MOUNT C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E o-r^ lpu-o . .

E V A P B Y P A S S S O L E N O I D V A L V E

E V A P C A N I S T E R V E N T S H U T V A L V E o-^W^—o—

V T E C S O L E N O I D V A L V E o - ^ W ^ - o —

"1

4̂ i c m i * * S P A R K P L U G

No. 1 IGNITION C O I L

To " S P A R K

P L U G


To * * S P A R K

P L U G


6 o->>— •—•**

1 1 i c m p^n^r;

To * * S P A R K

P L U G


a "ft- H-ts_£a-H>t

14 ICM p-^T; No. 5 IGNITION C O I L

S P A R K P L U G

,-4 ICM F 5 ^ ' No. 6 IGNITION C O I L

S P A R K P L U G

(cont'd)

11-11



PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)

To IMMOBILIZER UNIT **

To IMMOBILIZER UNIT "

To M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L UNIT " ( D R I V E R ' S )

G A U G E A S S E M B L Y

m m

5n 11 11

T R A N S M I S S I O N R A N G E S W I T C H

> A25 JMOCD | o P 2 S W B14,' o l f 1

I *1.*2 *3

J A13, A161 MO E N • A 2 8 I L U | O P 3 S W B24 <

L C D 1 <

S H A D 7 <

i A14 D4IND S H B D 2 •

S H C D 3 <

. * 2 , * 3 *1 ' B14, D13 A T P N P

i 0 6 A T P R L S A + B 1 7 <

i D 8 A T P D 4 L S A - B 8 <

» D 8 A T P D 3

> D 1 4 A T P 2 L S B + B 2 5 <

i D15ATP1 L S B - B 1 8 <

NM 011 <

N M S G D 1 2 <

N C D 1 0 (

N C S G D 1 6 <

* 3 A T S F T P A11 i

* 3 V R E F A 7 i

* 3 T H L O U T A31 <

* 3 P F I N H A13 <

* 3 F P T D R A22 <

2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E SWITCH

"1 3 R D C L U T C H P R E S S U R E S W I T C H

"1 T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C L U T C H ( T C C ) S O L E N O I D V A L V E A S S E M B L Y

—o-^Wv-o SHIFT S O L E N O I D ( S S ) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y A

—o—ns$^-o - . —

SHIFT S O L E N O I D ( S S ) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y B

—o—qf^u_o . SHIFT S O L E N O I D ( S S ) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y C

_ o _ q f P — o • .

AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E A S S E M B L Y A

AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E A S S E M B L Y B

El \ MAINSHAFT 7 S P E E D S E N S O R

\ C O U N T E R S H A F T ) S P E E D S E N S O R

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T * 3

PCM A (32P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

PC m c ( 3 i P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1C

/ '12 13 14 '16 17 18 IS 20 21 / 22 / *2l 26 27 ? 2 8 2£ 30 /

PCM B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

20 21 22 23 24 25

PCM D (16P)

1 2 3 / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TERMINAL LOCATIONS

11-12

PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)

1 MTRTW

2 MCS

3 2WBS

4 V S V

5 CRS

6 PCS

7 VREF

8 S02S HTC

9 VSS OUT

10 SCS

11 ATSFTP

12 IMO LMP

13 IMO

EHfflNH

14 D5 IND

15 FLR

16 IMO EN

17 ACC

18 MIL

19 NEP

20 FANC

21 K-LINE

22 FPTDR

23 SHQ2S

24 STS

25 IMO CD

26 PSPSW

27 ACS

28 ILU

29 PTANK

30 ELD

31 THIDUT

32 BKSW

W i r e s ide o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

NOTE: S tanda rd bat te ry vo l tage is 12 V. Terminal number

W i r e co lo r Terminal n a m e Description Signal

YEL/GRN M T R T W Sends eng ine coo lan t t e m p e r a t u r e s igna l .

W i t h i gn i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): pu lses

2 G R N / W H T MCS (ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE)

Dr ives eng ine m o u n t con t ro l so leno id va lve .

A t id le: 0 V A b o v e idle: ba t te ry vo l t age

3 BLU 2 W B S (EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE)

Dr ives EVAP bypass so leno id va lve .

W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): bat tery vo l tage

4 LT GRN/ WHT

VSV (EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE)

Dr ives EVAP canis ter ven t shu t va lve .

W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): ba t tery vo l t age

5 BLU/GRN CRS (CRUISE CONTROL SIGNAL)

Detects cru ise con t ro l s igna l . W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch ON (II): pulses

6 RED/YEL PCS (EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE)

Dr ives EVAP canis ter p u r g e va lve .

W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g , eng ine coo lan t , b e l o w 147°F (64 °C): bat tery vo l t age W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g , eng ine coo lan t , above 147°F (64 °C): du t y con t ro l l ed

ORN/GRN VREF (REFERRENCE VOLTAGE)

Prov ides re ference vo l t age to ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t .

W i t h ign i t ion sw i t ch ON (II): a b o u t 5 V W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch OFF: 0 V

8 BLK /WHT S 0 2 S H T C (SECONDARY HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR HEATER CONTROL)

Dr ives seconda ry heated o x y g e n sensor heater .

W i t h ign i t ion sw i t ch O N (II): ba t tery vo l tage W i t h fu l l y w a r m e d up eng ine r u n n i n g : du t y con t ro l l ed

9 B L U / W H T V S S O U T (VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR O U T P U T S IGNAL)

Sends veh ic le speed sensor s igna l .

Depend ing o n veh ic le speed : pu lses

10 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK SIGNAL)

Detects serv ice check connec to r s igna l ( the s igna l caus ing a DTC ind ica t ion)

W i t h the serv ice check s igna l sho r ted w i t h t h e Honda P G M Tester: 0 V W i t h the serv ice check s ignal o p e n e d : abou t 5 V or bat tery vo l tage

1 1 * 3 LT GRN ATSFTP ( T R A N S M I S S I O N RANGE SWITCH)

Sends t r a n s m i s s i o n gear sw i t ch s igna l .

W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g in park pos i t i on : abou t 4 V W i t h the serv ice check s igna l o p e n e d : abou t 5 V or ba t te ry vo l tage

12 PNK I M O L M P ( IMMOBLIZER INDICATOR LIGHT)

Dr ives i m m o b i l i z e r ind ica to r l ight .

W i t h i m m o b i l i z e r ind ica tor l igh t t u r n e d O N : 0 V With immobilizer indicator light turned OFF: battery voltage

13* 1 * 2 BLU I M O E N ( IMMOBILZER ENABLE SIGNAL)

Sends i m m o b i l i z e r enab le s igna l .

14 GRN/BLK D4IND (D4 INDICATOR) Dr ives D4 ind ica tor l ight . W i t h D4 ind ica tor l ight t u r n e d O N : 0 V W i t h D4 ind ica tor l igh t t u r n e d OFF: ba t te ry vo l tage

15 GRN/YEL FLR ( IMMOBILIZER FUEL P U M P RELAY)

Dr ives fue l p u m p relay. 0 V f o r t w o seconds after t u r n i n g ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II), t h e n bat tery vo l tage

16 * 3 BLU I M O E N ( IMMOBILIZER ENABLE SIGNAL)

Sends i m m o b i l i z e r enab le s ignal

17 RED ACC (A/C CLUTCH RELAY) Dr ives A /C c lu tch relay. W i t h c o m p r e s s o r O N : 0 V W i t h c o m p r e s s o r OFF: bat tery vo l tage

* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s * 2 : '00 m o d e l * 3 : '01 mode l

(cont 'd)

11-1



PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)

1 MTRTW

2 MCS

3 2WBS

4 V S V

5 CRS

6 PCS

7 VREF

8 S02S HTC

9 VSS OUT

10 s c s

11 ATSFTP

12 IMO L M P

13 I M O

ENfRNH

14 D5 IND

15 F L R

16 I M O E N

17 ACC

18 MIL

19 NEP

20 F A N C

21 K-LINE

22 FPTDR

23 SHQ2S

24 STS

25 I M O CD

26 PSPSW

27 ACS

28 I L U

29 PTANK

30 ELD

31 THLOUT

32 BKSW

W i r e s i de o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

N O T E : Standard battery voltage is 12 V.

Terminal number

Wire color Terminal n a m e Descript ion Signal

18 G R N / O R N MIL ( M A L F U N C T I O N INDICATOR LIGHT)

Dr i ves MIL . W i t h MIL t u r n e d O N ; 0 V W i t h M I L t u r n e d OFF: bat tery vo l tage

19 BLU NEP {ENGINE SPEED PULSE) O u t p u t s e n g i n e speed pu lse. W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses 20 G R N FANC (RADIATOR FAN

CONTROL) Dr ives rad ia to r f an re lay. W i t h rad ia tor f an r u n n i n g : 0 V

W i t h rad ia tor f an s t opped : ba t te ry vo l tage 21 GRY K-LINE Sends and rece ives scan

t o o l s igna l . W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): pu lses

2 2 * 3 GRN/RED FPTDR (FRAME T O POWERTRAIN T O R Q U E D O W N REQUEST)

Detects e n g i n e re tard reques t s igna l .

W i t h TCS ope ra t i ng : a b o u t 5 V W i t h TCS no t ope ra t i ng : abou t 2.5 V

23 WHT/RED S H 0 2 S (SECONDARY HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR, SENSOR 2)

Detects seconda ry hea ted o x y g e n sensor (sensor 2) s igna l .

W i t h th ro t t l e fu l l y o p e n e d f r o m idle w i t h fu l l y w a r m e d up eng ine : above 0.6 V W i t h th ro t t l e qu ick ly c losed : b e l o w 0.4 V

24 BLU/ORN STS (STARTER SWITCH S IGNAL)

Detects s tar ter sw i t ch s igna l . W i t h star ter sw i t ch O N (II): ba t te ry vo l tage W i t h s tar ter sw i t ch OFF: 0 V

25 RED IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER CODE) Detects i m m o b i l i z e r s igna l . 26 GRN PSPSW (P/S PRESSURE

SWITCH S IGNAL) Detects PSP sw i t ch s igna l . At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead position: 0 V

A t id le w i t h s teer ing w h e e l at fu l l lock: bat tery vo l tage

27 BLU/RED A C S (A/C SWITCH S IGNAL) Detects A /C sw i t ch s igna l . W i t h A/C sw i t ch O N : 0 V W i t h A/C sw i t ch OFF: abou t 5V

28 WHT/RED ILU ( INTERLOCK CONTROL UNIT)

Sends In ter lock con t ro l s igna l

W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II) and brake pedal dep ressed : abou t 0 V

29 L T G R N PTANK (FUEL T A N K PRESSURE SENSOR)

Detects FTP sensor s igna l . W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II) and fue l f i l l cap: o p e n e d : abou t 2.5 V

30 GRN/RED ELD (ELECTRICAL L O A D DETECTOR)

Detects ELD s igna l . W i t h park ing l ights t u r n e d on at id le: abou t 2.5 — 3.5 V With low beam headlights turned on at idle: about 1.5-2.5 V

31 * 3 Y E L / G R N T H L O U T (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR O U T P U T SIGNAL)

Sends TP sensor s igna l . W i t h th ro t t l e fu l l y o p e n : abou t 4.8 V W i t h th ro t t l e fu l l y c losed : abou t 0.5 V

32 W H T / B L K B K S W (BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH)

Detects brake pedal pos i t i on sw i t ch s igna l .

W i t h brake pedal re leased: 0 V W i t h brake pedal p ressed: ba t te ry vo l tage

* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s * 2 : '00 m o d e l * 3 : '01 m o d e l

11-14

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P)

1 IGP1 PG1

3 INJ5

4 INJ4

5 INJ2

6 INJ6

7 E-EGR

8 USA-

9 I G P 2

10 PG2

11 INJ1

12 VTS

13 ICM

14 OR2SW*! ATPNK

15 I N J 3

17 LSA+

18 LSB-

20 LG1

21 VBU

22 LG2

23 IACV

24 O P

3SW 25

LSB+


NOTE: S t a n d a r d ba t te ry vo l tage is 12 V.

Terminal number

Wire color Terminal n a m e Description Signal

1 YEL/BLK IGP1 (POWER SOURCE) Power source f o r t he PCM circui t .

W i t h t he ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): bat tery vo l t age W i t h t he ign i t i on sw i t ch OFF: a b o u t 0 V

2 BLK PG1 (POWER G R O U N D ) G r o u n d f o r the PCM ci rcui t . Less t han 1.0 V at all t i m e s 3 BLK/RED INJ5 (No. 5 INJECTOR) Dr ives N o . 5 in jector . W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses 4 YEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Dr ives No . 4 in jector .

W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

5 RED INJ2 (No. 2 INJECTOR) Dr ives N o . 2 in jector . 6 W H T / B L U INJ6 (No. 6 INJECTOR) Dr ives N o . 6 in jector . 7 PNK E-EGR Dr ives EGR va lve . W i t h EGR ope ra t i ng : d u t y con t ro l l ed

W i t h EGR no t ope ra t i ng : a b o u t 0 V 8 W H T LSA - (A/T CLUTCH

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A - SIDE)

A /T c lu tch p ressure con t ro l so leno id va lve A p o w e r supp l y negat ive t e r m i n a l

W i t h the ign i t i on sw i t ch ON (II): pu lses

9 YEL/BLK IGP2 (POWER SOURCE) Power source f o r t he PCM circui t .

W i t h the ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): bat tery vo l t age W i t h the ign i t i on sw i t ch OFF: 0 V

10 BLK PG2 (POWER G R O U N D ) G r o u n d f o r the PCM ci rcui t . Less t han 1.0 V at al l t imes 11 BRN INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR) Dr ives No . 1 in jector . W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses 12 GRN/YEL VTS (VTEC SOLENOID

VALVE) Dr ives VTEC so leno id va lve . W i t h eng ine at l o w r p m : 0 V

W i t h eng ine at h igh r p m : ba t te ry vo l tage 13* 1 YEL/GRN ICM ( IGNITION CONTROL

MODULE) Sends i gn i t i on pu lse . W i t h the ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): ba t tery vo l t age

W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : abou t 10 V (depend ing o n eng ine speed)

1 4 * ! BLU/BLK I OP2SW (2ND OIL PRESSURE SWITCH)

Detects 2 n d oi l p ressure sw i t ch .

W i t h the ign i t i on sw i t ch ON (II): bat tery vo l t age

14* : B L U / W H T ATPNP (TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH)

Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range sw i t ch s igna l .

In Park o r Neu t ra l : 0 V In any o ther pos i t i on : bat tery vo l tage

15 BLU INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR) Dr ives No . 3 in jector . W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses 17 RED LSA + (A/T CLUTCH

PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A + SIDE)

A /T c lu tch p ressure con t ro l so leno id va lve A p o w e r supp l y pos i t i ve t e r m i n a l

W i t h the ign i t i on sw i t ch ON (II): pulses

18 GRN LSB - (A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B - SIDE)

A /T c lu tch p ressure con t ro l so leno id va lve B p o w e r supp l y negat ive t e r m i n a l

W i t h the ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): pu lses

20 BRN/BLK LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) G r o u n d fo r the PCM ci rcui t . Less t han 1.0 V at all t i m e s 21 VVHT/YEL V B U (VOLTAGE BACK UP) Power source f o r the PCM

circui t . Power source fo r t he DTC m e m o r y .

Bat tery vo l tage at all t i m e s Power source f o r the PCM circui t . Power source fo r t he DTC m e m o r y .

22 B L K * 1

BRN/BLK* 7

LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) G r o u n d f o r the PCM ci rcui t . Less t han 1.0 V at all t i m e s

23 BLK/BLU IACV (IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE)

Dr ives IAC va lve . W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

24 B L U / W H T OP3SW (3RD OIL PRESSURE SWITCH)

Detects 3 rd oi l p ressure sw i t ch .

W i t h the ign i t ion sw i tch ON (II): bat tery vo l tage

25 ORN LSB + (A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B SIDE)

A /T c lu tch p ressure con t ro l so leno id va lve B p o w e r supp l y pos i t ive t e r m i n a l

W i t h the ign i t i on sw i tch ON (II): pulses

'98-93 m o d e l s * 2 : '00 m o d e l * 3 : '01 m o d e l

(cont 'd)

11-1



PCM Inputs and Outputs at connector C {31P)

1 P02S HTC

2 ALTC

3 IGPLS3

4 IGPLS1

5 ALTF

6 EGRL

7 SG1

8 CKPP

9 CKPM

10 VTM

12 IGPLS5

13 IGPLS4

14 IGPLS2

16 PH02S

17 MAP

18 SG2

19 VCC1

20 TDC1P

21 TDC1M

23 IGPLS6

25 IAT

26 ECT

27 TPS

28 VCC2

29 TDC2P

30 TDC2M /


NOTE: S t a n d a r d ba t te ry vo l t age is 12 V.

Terminal number

W i r e co lor Terminal n a m e Descript ion Signal

1 BLK /WHT P 0 2 S H T C (PRIMARY HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR HEATER CONTROL)

Dr ives p r i m a r y hea ted o x y g e n sensor heater.

W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): ba t tery vo l tage W i t h fu l l y w a r m e d up eng ine r u n n i n g : du t y con t ro l l ed

2 W H T / G R N ALTC (ALTERNATOR CONTROL)

Sends a l te rna to r con t ro l s igna l .

W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : abou t 0 V —5 V (depend ing o n electr ical load)

3*2, *3 W H T / B L U I G P L S 3 (No. 3 IGNITION COIL PULSE)

Dr ives N o . 3 i gn i t i on co i l . W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch ON (II): 0 V W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

4*2, *3 YEL/GRN IGPLS 1 (No. 1 IGNITION COIL PULSE)

Dr ives N o . 1 i gn i t i on co i l .

W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch ON (II): 0 V W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

5 WHT/RED ALTF (ALTERNATOR FR S IGNAL)

Detects a l te rna to r FR s igna l . W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : abou t 0 V — 5 V (depend ing o n electr ical load)

6 W H T / B L K EGRL (EGR VALVE LIFT SENSOR)

Detects EGR va lve l i f t sensor s igna l .

A t id le: abou t 1.2 V

7 G R N / W H T SG1 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) G r o u n d f o r M A P sensor . Less t h a n 1.0 V at al l t i m e s 8 BLU CKPP (CKP SENSOR P SIDE) Detects CKP sensor . W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pulses 9 W H T C K P M (CKP SENSOR M SIDE) G r o u n d f o r CKP sensor . 10 BLU/BLK V T M (VTEC PRESSURE

SWITCH S IGNAL) Detects VTEC pressure sw i t ch s igna l .

W i t h eng ine at l o w r p m : 0 V W i t h eng ine at h igh r p m : bat tery vo l tage

12* 2 ' * 3

BLK/RED IGPLS 5 (No . 5 IGNITION COIL PULSE)

Dr ives No . 5 i gn i t i on co i l . W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): 0V W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

13* 2 ' * 3 BRN IGPLS 4 (No. 4 IGNITION COIL PULSE)

Dr ives N o . 4 ign i t i on co i l .

W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): 0V W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

U * 2 . *3 BLU/RED IGPLS 2 (No . 2 IGNITION COIL PULSE)

Dr ives N o . 2 ign i t ion co i l .

W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): 0V W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

16 W H T P H 0 2 S (PRIMARY HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR, SENSOR 1)

Detects p r i m a r y heated o x y g e n sensor (sensor 1) s iga l .

W i t h th ro t t l e fu l l y o p e n e d f r o m id le w i t h fu l l y , w a r m e d up eng ine : above 0.6 V W i t h th ro t t l e qu ick ly c losed : b e l o w 0.4 V

17 RED/GRN M A P ( M A N I F O L D A B S O L U T E PRESSURE SENSOR)

Detects M A P sensor s igna l . W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): abou t 3 V A t id le: a b o u t 1.0 V (depend ing on eng ine speed)

18 GRN/BLK SG2 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) Sensor g r o u n d . Less t han 1.0 V at all t imes . 19 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Power source t o M A P

sensor. W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): abou t 5 V W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch OFF: 0 V

20 GRN TDC1PCTDC SENSOR 1P SIDE)

Detect TDC sensor 1. W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

21 RED T D C 1 M (TDC SENSOR 1 M SIDE)

G r o u n d fo r TDC sensor 1.

23*2. * 3 B R N / W H T IGPLS 6 (No. 6 IGNITION COIL PULSE)

Dr ives No . 6 ign i t ion co i l . W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch ON (II): 0V W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

25 RED/YEL IAT ( INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR)

Detects IAT sensor s igna l . W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): abou t 0.1 - 4 . 8 V (depend ing on intake air t empera tu re )

26 RED/WHT ECT (ENGINE C O O L A N T TEMPERATURE SENSOR)

Detects ECT sensor s igna l . W i t h i gn i t i on sw i t ch ON (II): abou t 0 . 1 - 4 . 8 V (depend ing o n eng ine coo lan t t empe ra tu re )

27 RED/BLK TPS (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR)

Detects TP sensor s igna l . W i t h th ro t t l e fu l l y o p e n : abou t 4.8 V W i t h th ro t t l e fu l l y c losed : abou t 0.5 V

28 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Prov ides sensor vo l tage . W i t h ign i t ion sw i t ch O N (II): abou t 5 V W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch OFF: 0 V

29 YEL TDC2P (TDC2 SENSOR P SIDE)

Detects TDC sensor 2. W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pulses

30 BLK T D C 2 M (TDC2 SENSOR M SIDE)

G r o u n d f o r TDC sensor 2.

* 2 : '00 m o d e l * 3 : '01 m o d e l

11-16

PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector D (16P)

1 LC

2 SHB

3 SHC

5 VBSOL

6 ATPR

7 SHA

8 ATPD3

9 ATPD4

10 NC

11 NM

12 NMSG

13 A T P N P * 1

OP2SW*2

14 ATPD2

15 ATP1

16 NCSG


NOTE: S tanda rd bat tery vo l tage is 1 2 V .

Terminal number

Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

1 YEL LC (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE)

Dr ives t o r q u e conver te r c lu tch so leno id va lve .

W i t h lock-up O N : ba t te ry vo l tage W i t h lock-up OFF: 0 V

2 GRNAA/HT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B)

Dr ives shi f t so leno id va lve B. W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g in 1st, 2 n d gears : ba t te ry vo l tage W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g in 3 r d , 4th gears : a b o u t 0 V

3 GRN SHC (SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C)

Dr ives shi f t con t ro l so leno id va lve C.

W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g in 1st and 3 rd gears : ba t te ry vo l t age W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g in 2 n d and 4th gears : 0 V

5 BLK/YEL VBSOL (BATTERY VOLTAGE FOR SOLENOID VALVE)

Power source f o r so leno id va lve .

W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II): bat tery vo l t age

6 W H T ATPR (TRANSMISS ION RANGE SWITCH)


In R pos i t i on : 0 V In any o ther pos i t i on : ba t te ry vo l tage

7 BLU/YEL SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A)

Dr ives shi f t so leno id va lve A . W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g in 2 n d , 3 rd gears : ba t te ry vo l tage W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g in 1st, 4th gears: a b o u t 0 V

8 PNK ATPD3 (TRANSMISS ION RANGE SWITCH)


In D3 pos i t i on : 0 V In any o ther pos i t i on : ba t te ry vo l tage

9 YEL ATPD4 (TRANSMISS ION RANGE SWITCH)


In D4 pos i t i on : 0 V In any o ther pos i t i on : a b o u t 5 V or ba t te ry vo l tage

10 BLU NC (COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR)

Detects coun te rsha f t speed sensor s igna ls .

W i t h ign i t i on sw i t ch O N (II), and f r o n t w h e e l s ro ta t i ng : bat tery vo l t age

11 RED N M ( M A I N S H A F T SPEED SENSOR)

Detects ma insha f t speed sensor s igna ls .

W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g : pu lses

12 W H T N M S G ( M A I N S H A F T SPEED SENSOR GROUND)

G r o u n d f o r ma insha f t speed sensor .

1 3 * 2 * 3 B L U / W H T ATPNP ( T R A N S M I S S I O N RANGE SWITCH)

Detects t r ansm iss i on range sw i t ch s igna l .

In Park or Neut ra l : 0 V In any o ther pos i t i on : ba t te ry vo l tage

13*Y* 3 BLU/BLK OP2SW (2ND OIL PRESSURE SWITCH)

Detects 2nd oi l p ressure sw i t ch .

W i t h the ign i t i on sw i t ch ON (II): ba t tery vo l tage

14 BLU ATP2 ( T R A N S M I S S I O N RANGE SWITCH)


In 2nd pos i t i on : 0 V In any o ther pos i t i on : ba t te ry vo l tage

15 BRN ATP1 ( T R A N S M I S S I O N RANGE SWITCH)


In 1st pos i t i on : 0 V In any o ther pos i t i on : ba t te ry vo l tage

16 GRN NCSG (COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR G R O U N D )

G r o u n d f o r coun te rsha f t speed sensor .

* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s * 2 : '00 m o d e l * 3 : '01 m o d e l

(cont 'd)

11-17



Vacuum Hose Routing — '98-99 models:

C R U I S E C O N T R O L D I A P H R A G M

F U E L I N J E C T I O N A IR (FIA) C O N T R O L V A L V E

11-18

'00-01 models: M A N I F O L D A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E

I N T A K E A I R B Y P A S S C O N T R O L V A L V E

(cont'd)

11-19


® P R I M A R Y H E A T E D O X Y G E N S E N S O R { P R I M A R Y H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 1)

(2) S E C O N D A R Y H E A T E D O X Y G E N S E N S O R ( S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 2)

® M A N I F O L D A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R © E N G I N E C O O L A N T T E M P E R A T U R E ( E C T ) S E N S O R ® I N T A K E A I R T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT) S E N S O R (D F U E L I N J E C T I O N AIR (FIA) C O N T R O L V A L V E ® I D L E A I R C O N T R O L (IAC) V A L V E ® T H R O T T L E B O D Y (TB) ® F U E L I N J E C T O R ® F U E L P U L S A T I O N D A M P E R @ F U E L F I L T E R . © F U E L P R E S S U R E R E G U L A T O R ® F U E L P U M P (FP) ® F U E L T A N K ® A IR C L E A N E R ( © R E S O N A T O R (if) E X H A U S T G A S R E C I R C U L A T I O N ( E G R ) V A L V E a n d

L I F T S E N S O R

® P O S I T I V E C R A N K C A S E V E N T I L A T I O N (PCV) V A L V E @ T H R E E W A Y C A T A L Y T I C C O N V E R T E R ® E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) C O N T R O L

C A N I S T E R @ E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) C O N T R O L

C A N I S T E R F I L T E R @ E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) P U R G E C O N T R O L

S O L E N O I D V A L V E @ E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) C O N T R O L

C A N I S T E R V E N T S H U T V A L V E ® E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) T W O W A Y V A L V E © E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) B Y P A S S

S O L E N O I D V A L V E ® F U E L T A N K P R E S S U R E S E N S O R ' ©> O N B O A R D R E F U E L I N G V A P O R R E C O V E R Y ( O R V R )

V E N T S H U T V A L V E @ O N B O A R D R E F U E L I N G V A P O R R E C O V E R Y ( O R V R )

V A P O R R E C I R C U L A T I O N V A L V E (§) E N G I N E M O U N T C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E

11-20

® P R I M A R Y H E A T E D O X Y G E N S E N S O R ( P R I M A R Y H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 1)

® S E C O N D A R Y H E A T E D O X Y G E N S E N S O R ( S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 2)

® M A N I F O L D A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R © E N G I N E C O O L A N T T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) S E N S O R © I N T A K E A I R T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT) S E N S O R ® I N T A K E A I R B Y P A S S C O N T R O L V A L V E © I D L E A I R C O N T R O L (IAC) V A L V E ® T H R O T T L E B O D Y ® I N J E C T O R @ F U E L P U L S A T I O N D A M P E R © F U E L F I L T E R © F U E L P R E S S U R E R E G U L A T O R © F U E L P U M P (FP) ® F U E L T A N K © AIR C L E A N E R © R E S O N A T O R © E X H A U S T G A S R E C I R C U L A T I O N ( E G R ) V A L V E a n d

P O S I T I O N S E N S O R

© P O S I T I V E C R A N K C A S E V E N T I L A T I O N (PCV) V A L V E @ T H R E E W A Y C A T A L Y T I C C O N V E R T E R ® E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) C A N I S T E R © E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) C A N I S T E R F I L T E R ® E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) C A N I S T E R

P U R G E V A L V E @ E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) C A N I S T E R V E N T

S H U T V A L V E ® E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) T W O W A Y V A L V E © E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N ( E V A P ) B Y P A S S

S O L E N O I D V A L V E ® F U E L T A N K P R E S S U R E S E N S O R ® F U E L T A N K V A P O R C O N T R O L V A L V E ® F U E L T A N K V A P O R R E C I R C U L A T I O N V A L V E ® E N G I N E M O U N T C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E

(cont'd)

11-21



PGM-FI S y s t e m

The Programmed Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system is a sequential mult iport fuel injection system.

Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay When the PCM receives a demand for cooling f rom the A/C system, it delays the compressor f rom being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transit ion to the A/C mode.

Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch The A/C switch signals the PCM whenever there is a demand for cool ing.

Alternator Control The alternator signals the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) during charging. The PCM then controls the voltage generated at the alternator assording to the electrical load determined by the Electrical Load Detector (ELD) and driving mode. This reduces engine load to improve fuel economy.

Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor The Baro sensor is inside the PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that modif ies the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge.

Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor determines t iming for fuel injection of each cylinder and also detects engine speed. The PCM detects misf ir ing by using the CKP sensor to monitor f luctuations in crankshaft speed. It wi l l then set DTCs depending on how much misf ir ing occurs.

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as the Engine Coolant temperature increases.

T H E R M I S T O R

Ignition Timing Control The PCM contains the memory for basic ignition t iming at various engine speeds and manifold absolute pressure. It also adjusts the t iming according to engine coolant temperature.

Injector Timing and Duration The PCM contains the memory for basic discharge duration at various engine speeds and manifold pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being read out f rom the memory, is further modif ied by signals sent f rom various sensors to obtain the final discharge duration. By monitor ing long term fuel t r im, the PCM detects long term malfunctions in the fuel system, and wi l l set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).

11-22

Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases.

THERMISTOR

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes)('01 model) The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, these codes are erased. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set If all of them are not set, the test cannot be completed.

To check if the readiness codes are set, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will come on for 15 — 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, the readiness codes are not set completely. To reset each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in the procedures to set them. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-42).

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the PCM.

SENSOR UNIT

3 b r

Primary Heated Oxygen sensor (Primary H02S) The primary H02S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas and sends signals to the PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The primary H02S is installed in the exhaust manifold. By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary H02S and secondary H02S, the deterioration of the primary H02S can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable driving conditions, the sensor is considered deteriorated and the PCM sets a DTC.

Z I R C O N I A E L E M E N T

S E N S O R T E R M I N A L S

H E A T E R H E A T E R T E R M I N A L S

Secondary Heated Oxygen sensor (Secondary H02S) The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWO and sends signals to the PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The secondary H02S is installed in the TWC.

Z I R C O N I A E L E M E N T

S E N S O R T E R M I N A L S

H E A T E R H E A T E R T E R M I N A L S

Starting Control When the engine is started, the PCM provides a rich mixture by increasing injector duration.

(cont'd)

11-23



Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the thrott le valve shaft. As the thrott le posit ion changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the PCM. The TP sensor is not replaceable apart f rom the thrott le body.

B R U S H H O L D E R

B R U S H

R E S I S T O R

T E R M I N A L

Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor The TDC1/TDC2 sensor determines ignit ion t iming at start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal.

TDC2 SENSOR

Idle Control System

When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is depressed, the P/S load is high, or the alternator is charging, the PCM controls current to the I AC valve to maintain the correct idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system.

Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position switch signals the PCM when the brake pedal is pressed.

Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve To maintain the proper idle speed, the IAC valve changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body in response to an electrical signal f rom the PCM.

F r o m A IR T o I N T A K E C L E A N E R M A N I F O L D

Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch signals the PCM when the power steering load is high.

Starter (Ignition) Switch The starter switch signals the PCM when the engine is cranking.

11-24

Fuel Supply System

Fuel Cut-off Control During deceleration wi th the throttle valve closed, current to the fuel injectors is cut off to improve fuel economy at speeds over 1,100 rpm. Fuel cut-off action also occurs when engine speed exceeds 6,600 rpm, regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to protect the engine f rom over-revving. When the vehicle is stopping, then PCM cuts the fuel at engine speed over 5,000 rpm.

Fuel Pump Control When the ignition is turned on, the PCM grounds the PGM-FI main relay which feeds current to the fuel pump for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With the engine running, the PCM grounds the PGM-FI main relay and feeds current to the fuel pump. When the engine is not running and the ignition is on, the PCM cuts ground to the PGM-FI main relay which cuts current to the fuel pump.

PGM-FI Main Relay The PGM-FI relay contains 2 separate relays. One is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies battery voltage to the PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when the engine is running.

Intake Air System

Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system.

Intake Air Bypass Control System (Fuel Air (FIA) Control System) When the engine is running, the Intake Air Bypass control valve sends air to the fuel injectors.

'98-99 models.

(cont'd)

11-25



Throttle Body The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine coolant from the cylinder head. The idle adjusting screw, which increases/decreases bypass air, is located on the top of the throttle body.

I D L E A D J U S T I N G T H R O T T L E S C R E W P O S I T I O N (TP)

S E N S O R

Catalytic Converter System

Three-Way Catalytic Converter {TWO The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02), dinitrogen (N2), and water vapor.

HOUSING

THREE-WAY CATALYSTS

Exhaust Gas Recirculation System

Refer to System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system.

EGR Valve The EGR valve is designed to lower peak combustion temperatures and reduce oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold and into the combustion chambers.

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake manifold.

<- : B L O W - B Y VAPOR : F R E S H AIR PCV

V A L V E

Evaporative Emission Control System

Refer to System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system.

EVAP Canister The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine and burned (Refer to System Diagram to see the functional layout of the system).

EVAP Canister Purge Valve When the engine coolant temperature is above 167°F (75°C), the PCM controls the EVAP canister purge valve which provides vacuum to the EVAP canister.

Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the PCM.

S E N S O R C H I P

11-26

Idle Control System Diagram

The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the IAC (Idle Air Control) valve:

• After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of t ime. The amount of air is increased to raise the idle speed by about 150^-300 rpm.

• When the engine coolant temperature is low, the IAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature.

S E N S O R S

BLK

Intake Air System Diagram

This system supplies air to the engine. A resonator in the intake air pipe provides additional silencing as air is drawn into the system.

'98-99 models: I N T A K E M A N I F O L D T H R O T T L E B O D Y

A C L

AIR I N T A K E D U C T

R E S O N A T O R

F r o m P G M - F I M A I N R E L A Y

V A R I O U S S E N S O R S

(cont'd)

11-27

FueS and Emissions Systems


'00-01 models:

" 1 BLK

I *1: '00 model — *2: '01 model

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram

The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and the intake manifold into the combust ion chambers. The PCM memory includes the ideal EGR valve position for varying operating condit ions. The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve posit ion and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then compares it wi th the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent f rom other sensors). If there is any difference between the two, the PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.

YEL /

VARIOUS SENSORS

11-28

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram

The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor f rom the fuel tank is temporari ly stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged f rom the canister into the engine and burned.

• The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold. The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which is open whenever engine coolant temperature is above 147°F (64°C).

• When vapor pressure in the fuel tank is higher than the set value of the EVAP two way valve, the valve opens and regulates the f low of fuel vapor to the EVAP control canister.

• During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens wi th the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds the fuel vapor to the EVAP canister.

EVAP CANISTER V E N T SHUT V A L V E

/ EVAP CANISTER P U R G E V A L V E

F U E L TANK VAPOR RECIRCULATION V A L V E

B L K / Y E L

F U E L TANK SIGNAL T U B E

Y E L / BLU

Q R N / ™ BLK

From No. 6 ECU(PCM) CRUISE CONTROL (15 A) (in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box)

I V A R I O U S | S E N S O R S

11-29


Circuit Diagram

PCM Circuit Diagram - '98-99 models.

T 1 Y E L /

B L U

a

J T

a

f T o C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT

J U N C T I O N C O N N E C T O R


- Y E L / 8 L U 2 -- W H T / B L K o " - G R N / B L K -

* 5

—!

E G R V A L V E L I F T S E N S O R

3

( T o p a g e 11-31 )

11-30

(cont'd)

11-31


Circuit Diagram (cont'd)

PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) - '98-99 models:

A L T

A ^ CLUTCH P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D O V A L V E B

11-32

'—K

'—K

>—IT

» — i t

r -V INJ2 B 5 J — R E D -

<B15) B L U -

I A C V 'B23) B L K / B L U •

- Y E L / B L K 1 -

I G P 2 , - \ B 9 ) Y E L / B L K -

No. 1 F U E L I N J E C T O R




- Y E L / B L K 1 -




•

(cont'd)

11-33




A/T G E A R POSITION SWITCH

11-34

- B L K / W H T 1 -

/Ni l !£T~

- G R N / W H T 1 -

a" C302 1

- — R E D Y E L 1

ba

- G R N / B L K -- B L K / Y E L • - B L K / W H T -

z

1 S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)

- B L K / Y E L

- G R N / W H T ' n o : E N G I N E MOUNT C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E

R E D / Y E L

B L K / Y E L ' H E E V A P P U R G E C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E

C R U I S E C O N T R O L UNIT

a"' — ® -IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR L I G H T

To T A C H O M E T E R


r T E S T —I T A C H O M E T E R

C O N N E C T O R

M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L UNIT (DRIVER'S )

C204

- G R N -

- B L K -

A F From R A D I A T O R FAN R E L A Y , R A D I A T O R FAN S W I T C H

(cont'd)

11-35




0 0 0 0 0 JST jKT jST jKT

G R N Y E L B L K 2 B L U

.J L.

L T GRM/WHT -

- B L K / Y E L J E V A P C O N T R O L C A N I S T E R VENT SHUT V A L V E

- Y E L / B L U •

- L T G R N — 3 F U E L T A N K P R E S S U R E S E N S O R

3 E V A P B Y P A S S S O L E N O I D V A L V E

D R I V E R S U N D E R - D A S H C O N N E C T O R F F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

— B L K / Y E L

— G R N / B L K 2 —

— Y E L / B L U

C O N N E C T O R D

— Y E L / B L U -

— G R N / B L K 2 -

— B L K / Y E L -

— B L K / Y E L -

— W H T / Y E L -C O N N E C T O R

— G R N / B L K 2 -

— Y E L

— B L K / Y E L -

C O N N E C T O R K

IGNITION SWITCH

C O N N E C T O R A

F U S E S A : No. 9 B A C K UP L IGHT

INSTRUMENT L IGHT (7.5A) B I No. 6 E C U (PCM)

C R U I S E C O N T R O L (15A) C : No. 13 S T A R T E R S I G N A L

(7.5A) D : No. 1 F U E L PUMP (15A)

A

B

C

S T A R T E R C U T R E L A Y

( T o page 11-37 )

11-36

m a n C 1 0 3 C 1 0 4

a

a

C O N N E C T O R I

- B R N 1

- B L U / O R N

C O N N E C T O R M^Z

- R E D / W H T

- B L K / Y E L

- W H T / B L K '

- W H T / Y E L

C O N N E C T O R N

- W H T — — \

C O N N E C T O R E

• - [

( From page 11-36 )

D R I V E R S U N D E R - D A S H

F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

- B R N

B R N / B L K 1 -

- W H T / G R N -

r D A T A L I N K

C O N N E C T O R

W H T / B L K -

- W H T / Y E L -

B R A K E S W I T C H

C 2 0 1

- W H T / G R N | — W H T / G R N -

- Y E L / B L K 1 -

- B L K 1

- B R N / B L K ' -

— Y E L / B L K 1 -

— B L K *

— B R N / B L K 1 -

' C 3 0 1

r B L K / Y E L

B L K — =0

• H - B L U / O R N -

- G R N / Y E L -

- B L K / Y E L -

a P G M - F I

M A I N R E L A Y

(cont'd)

11-37




X

m

A30) G R N / R E D -

C O N N E C T O R B

- B L K / Y E L

- B L K / Y E L

- Y E L

^ B R N / B L K

T o A / C -4 B L U R E D P R E S S U R E S W I T C H

C O N N E C T O R G

B L U R E D

- B R N / B L K 1

- W H T / Y E L

C O N N E C T O R H - B L K / Y E L • — - £

C O N N E C T O R I

- W H T / Y E L

- B R N / B L K 1

P A S S E N G E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

5 CONNECTOR C

- W H T £

C O N N E C T O R A - W H T / G R N — — £

C O N N E C T O R B

- W H T / Y E L —

- Y E L

- B L K / Y E L

- G R N / R E D

- B L K

C O N N E C T O R D

. T o A / C C L U T C H R E L A Y

U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

F U S E S E : No. 13 C L O C K B A C K U P (7.5A) F I I G MAIN (50A) G : A C G S (15A) H: S T O P (20A) I: B A C K U P A C C (40A)

J : B A T T E R Y (100A)

11-38

'00-01 models:

) — * • toj)

- GRN/WHT 2 —-

f a (C27>-

7 Y E L / B L U


T o C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT

a


- Y E L / B L U - W H T / B L I C -- G R N / B L K —


3= M A P S E N S O R

1

E C T S E N S O R

-frte 1

3

E G R V A L V E P O S I T I O N S E N S O R

5

( T o page 11-40 )

(cont'd)

11-39




, . P H 0 2 S .

I (as)" WHT*—

B L K / W H T 3 —

(eM2}-

I — 0 *

W H T 2 -

( F rom page 11-39 )

B L K / Y E L -

C104


- G R N / B L K -- B L K / Y E L -

PRIMARY H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)

1RP 1 ~vric X

S O L E N O I D V A L V E

V T E C P R E S S U R E S W I T C H


B L K C107


3 3

3

TDC SENSOR 1

TDC SENSOR 2

C K P SENSOR

11-40

- G R N / W H T 3 -

- G R N 5 -

T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C L U T C H ( T C C ) S O L E N O I D V A L V E A S S E M B L Y

0 SHIFT S O L E N O I D ( S S ) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y A

SHIFT S O L E N O I D ( S S ) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y B

I S H I F T S O L E N O I D ( S S ) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y C

3 MAINSHAFT S P E E D S E N S O R

3 C O U N T E R S H A F T S P E E D S E N S O R

AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D O V A L V E A S S E M B L Y A

AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D O V A L V E A S S E M B L Y B

(cont'd)

11-41

FueS and Emissions Systems



' K

> £

'—K

' — I ?

e lNJ3 , B L U

•

3 No. 1 I N J E C T O R

3 No. 2 I N J E C T O R

- Y E L / B L K 1 -

No. 3 I N J E C T O R

- Y E L / B L K 1 -


- Y E L / B L K 1 -


1 3 No. 6 I N J E C T O R

JUNCTION C O N N E C T O R

11-42

2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E — S W I T C H

3 R D C L U T C H P R E S S U R E — S W I T C H

To V IMMOBILIZER

UNIT

1 1


* 1 : '00 model * 2 : '01 model

(cont'd)

11-43




- B L K / W H T 1 -

. . s • .

e C 3 0 2

• i

R E D / Y E L 1

( A 5 > I

h L

x / \ F

- G R N / B L K -B L K / Y E L -

- B L K / W H T -

S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)

- B L K / Y E L -

- G R N / W H T 1 -E N G I N E MOUNT C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E

R E D / Y E L 1 -

B L K / Y E L -

a E V A P C A N I S T E R P U R G E A L V E

[I I C R U I S E C O N T R O L UNIT

— ® -IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR LIGHT

To - > T A C H O M E T E R

- B L U 4 —


C T E S T T A C H O M E T E R C O N N E C T O R

- B L U 4 -

M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L UNIT (DRIVER'S )

- G R N -

- B L K -

From RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y , RADIATOR FAN S W I T C H

* 2 : '01 model

11-44

a

• 0 0 E 0 G R N / Y E L / B L K 2 B L U

a

IGNITION SWITCH I ST O -

\ + B

- L T G R N / W H T -

- B L K / Y E L *

- Y E L / ' B L U -

- L T G R N 2

- G R N / B L K 2 —

E V A P C A N I S T E R V E N T S H U T V A L V E

* 5 F T P S E N S O R

3 E V A P B Y P A S S S O L E N O I D V A L V E

D R I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H C O N N E C T O R F F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

— B L K / Y E L —

— G R N / B L K '

— Y E L / B L U -

C O N N E C T O R D

— Y E L / B L U -

— G R N / B L K '

— B L K / Y E L —

— B L K / Y E L

B L K / Y E L

- W H T / Y E L -C O N N E C T O R J

— - G R N / B L K '

— Y E L •

— B L K / Y E L

C O N N E C T O R K

C O N N E C T O R A

F U S E S A : No. 11 IG C O I L (15 A) B : No. 9 B A C K UP L IGHT

INSTRUMENT U G H T (7.5A) C : No. 6 E C U ( P C M )

C R U I S E C O N T R O L (15A) D ! No. 13 S T A R T E R S I G N A L

(7.5A) E : No. 1 F U E L PUMP (15A)

-o<\>o— c

S T A R T E R C U T R E L A Y

( T o page 11-46 )

(conf

11-




"1

np a n

a

a

~ 1 C

^ — { A T j } - ^ ? G R N / Y E L

C O N N E C T O R I

- B R N 1 — - B L U / O R N

C O N N E C T O R M - R E D / W H T - B L K / Y E L - W H T / B L K ' - W H T / Y E L

C O N N E C T O R N

- WHT

C O N N E C T O R E

( From page 11-45 )

D R I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

r

B R N / B L K 1 -W H T / G R N -

B L K -

DATA LINK C O N N E C T O R

- W H T / B L K 1 —

- W H T / Y E L -

B R A K E P E D A L POSITION (BPP) S W I T C H

C201

r - W H T / G R N A I W H T / G R N —

- B L K '

- B R N / B L K 1

Y E L B L K •

— B L K 1

B R N B L K -

1 — C301

r

B L K / Y E L -

B L K

- B L U / O R N -- G R N / Y E L -- B L K / Y E L -

a PGM-FI MAIN R E L A Y

11-46

X

0

•

t—

C O N N E C T O R B

B L K / Y E L

- B L K / Y E L •

- Y E L

1 B R N / B L K '

To A /C B L U / R E D -P R E S S U R E SWITCH

99 t

9 C O N N E C T O R H

B L U / R E D

B R N / B L K 1

— W H T / Y E L -

C O N N E C T O R I - B L K / Y E L ^ £

C O N N E C T O R J

- W H T / Y E L

P A S S E N G E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

9

- 0 -

C O N N E C T O R C WHT £

C O N N E C T O R A - W H T / G R N £

C O N N E C T O R B

- W H T / Y E L

- Y E L

B L K / Y E L -

G R N / R E D -

r — B L K

C O N N E C T O R D

_ L L _

G202

F U S E S F : No. 13 C L O C K B A C K UP (7.5A) G : i G MAIN (50A) H I A C G S (15A) I: S T O P (20A)

J : B A C K U P A C C (40A) K : B A T T E R Y (100A)

G

H O—wO 1

I

J o--»—o

E L D J >

w To A / C " " ^ C L U T C H R E L A Y

U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

I

(cont'd)

11-47





11-48

- LT G R N 1 -

"L .

3L J .

r A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT

PGM-FI System


NOTE: The il lustration shows '00 model .

/ E L E C T R I C A L L O A D ' D E T E C T O R ( E L D )

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-84 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

T O P D E A D C E N T E R 1 ( T D C 1 ) / T O P D E A D C E N T E R 2 (TDC2) S E N S O R T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-76

I N T A K E A I R T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT) S E N S O R T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-50 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

M A N I F O L D A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-47 "n t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

T H R O T T L E P O S I T I O N (TP) S E N S O R T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-54 a n d p a g e 11-56 n t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d

S e r v i c e M a n u a l

C R A N K S H A F T P O S I T I O N (CKP) S E N S O R T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-73

E N G I N E C O O L A N T T E M P E R A T U R E ( E C T ) S E N S O R T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-52 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

11-50

NOTE: The illustration shows '00 model.

D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (DLC) G e n e r a l T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g I n f o r m a t i o n , p a g e 11-3 i n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

P O W E R T R A I N C O N T R O L M O D U L E (PCM) G e n e r a l T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g I n f o r m a t i o n , p a g e 11-3 i n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-90 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

PGM-FI System

DTC Troubleshooting

D T C P0122: ?TP S e n s o r Circuit Low Voltage

1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm w i th no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then turn the ignit ion switch OFF.

2. Turn the ignit ion switch ON(II).

3. Check the thrott le posit ion wi th the scan tool .

Is there approx. 10% or 0.5 V when the throttle is fully closed and approx. 90% or 0.5 V when the throttle is fully opened?

Y E S — Intermittent fai lure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the TP sensor and the PCM. •

NO Go to step 4.


5. Disconnect the TP sensor connector.


7. Measure voltage between the TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.

T P S E N S O R 3 P C O N N E C T O R

S G 2 ( G R N / B L K ) V C C 2 ( Y E L / B L U )




NO Go to step 19.

Turn the ignit ion switch OFF.

9. At the sensor side, measure resistance between the TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i th the throttle ful ly closed.

T P S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R

Terminal side of male terminals

Is there approx. 0.5~ 0.9 kQ?


NO Replace the throttle body.B

10. Measure resistance between the TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3 with the throttle ful ly closed.


V C C 2


Is there approx. 4.5kQ?

Y E S Go to step 11.

NO-Replace the throttle body. •

11. Disconnec the PCM connector C (31P) connector.

11-52

12. At the wire harness side, check for continuity between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and body ground.


T P S ( R E D / B L K )



Y E S - Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C 27) and the TP sensor. •

NO Go to step 13 {'01 model). Go to step 17 {'98-00 models).

13. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P).

14. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM connector terminal A31 .


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 T H L O U T ( Y E L / G R N )





15. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector.

16. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM connector terminal A31.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 T H L O U T ( Y E L / G R N )



YES-Repa i r short in the wire between the ABS/ TCS control unit and PCM (A31). •

IMO-Subst i tute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original ABS/TCS control unit. I

17. Connect PCM connector terminal C27 and body ground wi th a jumper wire.

P C M C O N N E C T O R C {3 IP)-

T P S ( R E D / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /

J U M P E R W I R E


(cont'd)

11-53

PGM-FI System


18. At the wire harness side, check for continuity between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and body ground.


W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s


Y E S —Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-'01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If prescribed voltage is now available, replace the original PCM. •

NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C 27) and the TP sensor. •

19. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminals C18 and C28.


S G 2 ( G R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 r 8 9 10

/ 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 / V C C 2 ( Y E L / B L U )



YES Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C 28) and the TP sensor. •

NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-'01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If voltage is normal, replace the original PCM.B

11-54

DTC P0131: Primary H02S(Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage

1. Do the PCM Reset Procedure.

2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.

3. Check the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage wi th the scan tool during acceleration using wide open throttle.

Does the voltage stay at 0.5 V or less?

YES- Go to step 4.

N O - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the PCM.H

4. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-89).

Is It normal?


NO Repair the fuel supply system. •


6. Disconnect the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P connector.

7. Start the engine and let it idle.

8. Check the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage wi th the scan tool .

Does it stay at 0.5 V or less?

YES Go to step 9.

NO -Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1).B



11. Check for continuity between the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

P R I M A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1) 4P C O N N E C T O R

P H 0 2 S (WHT) 1 2

3 4



YES-Repa i r short in the wire between the PCM (C16) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1).B

NO —Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM. •

11-55

PGM-FI System


DTC P0132: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage


2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm wi th no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.

3. Check the pr imary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage wi th the scan tool .

Does the voltage stay at 0.9 V or more?


IMO — Intermittent fai lure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the PCM .B


5. Disconnect the pr imary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P connector.

6. Connect the pr imary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 wi th a jumper wire.

P R I M A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1) 4 P C O N N E C T O R

J U M P E R W I R E


10. Connect PCM connector terminals C16 and C18 wi th a jumper wire.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 / 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21

23 / 25 2 6 27 2 S 29 30 P H 0 2 S (WHT) S G 2 ( G R N / B L K )

J U M P E R W I R E



12. Check the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage wi th the scan tool .

Is there 0.9 V or more?

Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM .B

NO —Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C16 or C18) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1). B

P H 0 2 S (WHT)

1 2

3 4 S G 2 ( G R N / B L K )



8. Check the pr imary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage wi th the scan tool .



NO-Rep lace the primary H02S (Sensor 1 ) .B

11-56

DTC P0133: Primary H02S {Sensor 1) Circuit Slow Response

NOTE: If DTC P0131, P0132 and/or P0135 are stored at the same t ime as DTC P0133, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0133.


2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.

3. Test-drive under fol lowing conditions.

• 55 mph (89 km/h) steady speed • Transmission in D4 position • Until readiness code or Temporary DTC P0133

comes on

4. Check for a Temporary DTC with the scan tool.

Is Temporary DTC P0133 indicated?

YES - Replace the primary H02S (Sensor \)M

NO — Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at C104 (located at the right side of the engine compartment), the primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the PCM.B

PGM-FI System


D T C P0137: Secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage



3. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output voltage at 3,000 rpm wi th the scan tool .



NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at C204 (located under the right side of the dash), C104 (located at the right side of the engine compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM.B


5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector.


7. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output voltage wi th the scan tool.



NO-Rep lace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) . f l



10. Check for continuity between the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.

S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2) 4P C O N N E C T O R

S H 0 2 S ( W H T / R E D )



Y E S - R e p a i r short in the wire between the PCM (A23) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2). •

NO —Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original PCM.

11-58

DTC P0138: Secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage



3. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output voltage at 3,000 rpm with the scan tool.

Does the voltage stay at 0.8 V or more?


NO —Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at C204 (located under the right side of the dash), C104 (located at the right side of the engine compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM.B


5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector.

6. Connect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 wi th a jumper wire.

S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2) 4P C O N N E C T O R

J U M P E R W I R E

S G 2 ( G R N / B L K ) S H 0 2 S ( W H T / R E D )



8. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output voltage with the scan tool .



NO-Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2). I


10. Connect PCM connector terminals A23 and C18 wi th a jumper wire.

P C M C O N N E C T O R S

A (32P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 32 S H 0 2 S ( W H T / R E D )

J U M P E R W I R E

C ( 3 1 P ) S G 2 ( G R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /



12. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output voltage wi th the scan tool .


Y E S —Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM.B

NO- Repair short in the wire between the PCM (A23 or C18) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2). I

11-59

PGM-FI System


D T C P0139: Secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) Circuit S low Response



3. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output voltage at 3,000 rpm wi th the scan tool .

Does the voltage stay within 0.3— 0.8 V for two minutes?

YES-Rep lace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2). •

NO —Intermittent fai lure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at C204 (located under the right side of the dash), C104 (located at the right side of the engine compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM.B

11-60

DTC P013§: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Heater circuit Malfunction

DTC P0141: Secondary H02S(Sensor 2) Heater circuit Malfunction

NOTE; Information marked wi th an asterisk ( * ) applies to DTC P0141.



Is DTC P0135 or P0141 indicated?


NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at C204 (located under the right side of the dash), C104 (located at the right side of the engine compartment), the primary H02S (Sensor 1), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM .B


4. Disconnect the H02S (primary or secondary * ) (Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.

5. At the H02S side, measure resistance between the H02S 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.

H 0 2 S 4P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 - 3 4 -

1 2 3 4



Is there 5~ 15 Q (10-40 &)* ?


NO-Rep lace the primary H02S (Sensor 1) or secondary H02S (Sensor 2) * .B

6. Check continuity between body ground and the H02S 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4 individually.

H 0 2 S 4P C O N N E C T O R

T e r m i n a l s i d e o f W i r e s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s


Y E S - R e p l a c e the H02S (primary or secondary * ) (Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) . B



8. Measure voltage between the H02S 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.

P R I M A R Y / S E C O N D A R Y * H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1/ S E N S O R 2* ) 4P C O N N E C T O R

IG1 ( B L K / Y E L )

IG1 ( B L K / Y E L )

W i r e s i d e o f T e r m i n a l s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s m a l e t e r m i n a l s



NO —Repair open in the wire between the No. 6 ECU (PCM) CRUISE CONTROL (15A) fuse and the H 0 2 S .B

(cont'd)

11-61

PGM-FI System



10. Check for continuity between the H02S 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

P R I M A R Y / S E C O N D A R Y * H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1/ S E N S O R 2 * ) 4P C O N N E C T O R

P 0 2 S H T C ( B L K / W H T )

S 0 2 S H T C ( B L K / W H T )

1 2 - 3 4

W i r e s i d e o f T e r m i n a l s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s m a l e t e r m i n a l s



NO Go to step 13.

11 . Disconnect PCM connector C (31P) (PCM connector A, 32P) * .

12. Check for continuity between the H02S 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

P R I M A R Y / S E C O N D A R Y * H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1/ S E N S O R 2* ) 4P C O N N E C T O R

P 0 2 S H T C ( B L K / W H T )

S 0 2 S H T C ( B L K / W H T )

1 2 - 3 4



13. Reconnect the H02S (primary or secondary * ) (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.

14. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P) (PCM connector A, 32P) * .


16. Measure voltage between the PCM connector terminal C1 (A8) * and body ground.


P 0 2 S H T C ^

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 / 25 28 27 28 29 30 /

S 0 2 S H T C ( B L K / W H T )

1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 | 32



Y E S - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM .B

NO —Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C1, A8 * ) and the H02S (primary or secondary * ) (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) . B


Y E S Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C1, A8 * ) and H02S (primary or secondary * ) (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) . B

NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original PCM .B

11-62

DTC P0300: Random misfire

and any combination of the following:

DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder misfire






NOTE: • If the misf ir ing is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during two consecutive driving cycles,

the MIL wi l l come on, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) wi l l be stored. • If the misf ir ing is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL wi l l blink whenever the misf ir ing occurs, and DTC

P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) wi l l be stored. When the misfir ing stops, the MIL wi l l remain on.

1. Troubleshoot the fo l lowing DTCs first if any of them were stored along wi th the random misfire DTC(s): P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP Sensor P0131, P0132: Primary H02S P0171, P0172: Fuel metering P 0 4 0 1 , P1491, P1498: EGR System P0505: Idle control system P1259: VTEC System P1361, P1362, P1366, P1367: TDC 1/TDC 2 Sensor P1519: IAC Valve

2. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the symptom.

3. Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the sequence listed, until you f ind the cause.

Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for: Random misfire only at low RPM and under load

1. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-89). 2. Inspect the distributor ignit ion housing.*

• Low compression. • Low quality fuel.

Random misfire only during acceleration

1. Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-22).* 2. Inspect the distributor ignit ion housing.* 3. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-89). 4. Test the ignit ion coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22), or

for '00-01 models (see page 4-23). 5 . Test the ignit ion control module (see page 4-19).*

Malfunction in the VTEC system (see page 6-9).

Random misfire at high RPM and under load, or under random conditions

1. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-89). 2. Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-22).* 3 . Inspect the distributor ignit ion housing.* 4. Test the ignit ion coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22), or

for '00-01 models (see page 4-23). 5 . Test the ignit ion control module (see page 4-21).*

Correct valve clearance (see page 6-13).

*: '98-99 models

11-63

PGM-FI System


DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99 models)



DTC P0304; No. 4 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99 models)

DTC P0305; No. 5 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99 models)


1. Remove the intake manifold cover (see step 4 on page 6-31).

2. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset the PCM. If there is no freeze data of misf i r ing, just clear the DTC.

3. Start the engine, listen for a clicking sound at the injector in the problem cylinder.

Does it click?

Y E S - G o t o step 4.



5. Inspect the ignit ion wire on the problem cylinder (see page 4-22).

Is it OK?


NO -Rep lace the faulty ignit ion wire •

6. Check the distributor cap for cracks, wear, damage, and faul ing.

Is it OK?


NO —Clean or replace the distributor cap. •

7. Exchange the spark plug f rom the problem cylinder wi th one f rom another cylinder.

8. Test-drive the vehicle several t imes in the range of the freeze data or under various conditions if there was no freeze data.

9. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC wi th the scan tool.

Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or P0306, or Temporary DTC P1399 indicated?


NO —Intermittent misfire due to spark plug foul ing, etc. (no misfire at this t ime). •

10. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.

Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose spark plug was exchanged?

Y E S —Replace the faulty spark p lug .a



12. Exchange the injector f rom the problem cylinder wi th one f rom the another cylinder.

13. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.


15. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC wi th the scan tool .



NO — Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the injector connector (no misfire at this time) •

11-64


Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose injector was exchanged?

Y E S — Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-80). •



18. Check the engine compression.

Is the engine compression OK ?

Y E S —Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM .B

NO- Repair the engine. •


20. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).


22. Measure voltage between body ground and the PCM connector terminal (see table).

P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P) I N J 4 ( Y E L ) I N J 2 ( R E D )

I N J 5 INJ1 ( B L K / (BRN) R E D )

•1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18

20 21 22 2 3 24 25 INJ3 (BLU)

I N J 6 ( W H T / B L U )

X X X X W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

Cv) Cv)

PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR

No. 1 P0301 B11 BRN No. 2 P0302 B5 RED No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU No. 4 P0304 B4 YEL No. 5 P0305 B3 BLK/RED No. 6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU



N O - G o to step 31 .


24. Disconnect the injector 2 P connector on the problem cylinder.

25. Measure resistance between the injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R

1 2

INJ IGP


Is there 10 Q - 13 Q ?


N O - Replace the injector (see page 11 -80). •

26. Exchange the injector f rom the problem cylinder wi th one f rom another cylinder.






NO Intermittent misfire due to injector foul ing, etc.B

(cont'd)

11-65

PGM-FI System




Y E S —Replace the faulty injector. •

NO —Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original PCM.B

31 . Turn the ignit ion switch OFF.

32. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the problem cylinder.


34. Measure voltage between the injector 2P connector terminals No. 2 and body ground.

I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 IGP ( Y E L / B L K )

Wi re s ide of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s



NO —Repair open in the wire between the injector and the PGM-FI main relay.®


36. Check for continuity between body ground and the PCM connector terminal (see table).

PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) INJ4 (YEL) INJ2 (RED)

INJ5 (BLK/ RED)

INJ1 (BRN)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18

20 21 22 2 3 24 25

INJ3 (BLU)

INJ6 (WHT/ BLU)

X X X X W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s




Y E S - Repair short in the wire between the PCM and the injector. •


37. Connect the injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground wi th a jumper wire (see table).

INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR

INJ

JUMPER WIRE


PROBLEM DTC WIRE CYLINDER COLOR

No. 1 P0301 BRN No. 2 P0302 RED No. 3 P0303 BLU No. 4 P0304 YEL No. 5 P0305 BLK/RED No. 6 P0306 WHT/BLU

11-66

38. Check for continuity between body ground and the PCM connector terminals (see table).


10

20

INJ5 1NJ1 (BLK/ (BRN) RED)

3 4 5

12 13

21 22

14 15

23

INJ3 (BLU)

6 7

17

24 25

INJ6 (WHT/ BLU)

W i r e side of f ema le t e r m i n a l s




YES —Replace the injector (see page 11-80). then recheck. •

NO —Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the injector.®

11-

PGM-FI System








1. Remove the intake manifold cover and the ignit ion coil cover (see step 4 on page 6-31).

2. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset the PCM. If there is no freeze data of misf ir ing, just clear the DTC.

3. Start the engine, listen for a clicking sound at the injector in the problem cylinder.

Does it click?

YES - Go to step 4.

N O - Go to step 31 .


5. Exchange the ignit ion coil f rom the problem cylinder wi th one f rom another cylinder.


7. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC with the scan tool .



NO Intermittent misfire due to ignit ion coil foul ing, etc. (no misfire at this t ime). •


Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose ignition coil was exchanged?

Y E S - Replace the faulty ignition coil. •

NO Go to step 9.


10. Exchange the spark plug f rom the problem cylinder w i th one f rom another cylinder.


12. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC wi th the scan tool.

Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or P0306, or Temporary DTC PI399 indicated?


NO - Intermittent misfire due to spark plug foul ing, etc. (no misfire at this t ime). •


Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose spark plug was exchanged?

Y E S - Replace the faulty spark plug. •

NO Go to step 14.


15. Exchange the injector f rom the problem cylinder wi th one f rom the another cylinder.



11-68

18. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC with the scan tool.

Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or P0306, or Temporary DTC PI399 indicated?


NO —Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the injector connector (no misfire at this t ime).B



Y E S —Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-82) •



21. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector f rom the problem cylinder.


23. Measure voltage between the ignit ion coil 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

I G N I T I O N C O I L 3P C O N N E C T O R

•I—1,

IG1 ( B L K / Y E L )




NO —Repair open or short in the wire between the No. 11 COIL (15 A) fuse and the ignition coi l .S


25. Check for continuity between the ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.


GND (BLK)


Js there continuity?


NO —Repair open in the wire between the ignition coil and G101 (or G102).B



PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU) IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)

IGPLS5 (BLK/ RED) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 /

/ 2 5 26 27 28 29 30 /


No. 1 P0301 C4 YEL/GRN No. 2 P0302 C14 BLU/RED No. 3 P0303 C3 WHT/BLU No. 4 P0304 C13 BRN No. 5 P0305 C12 BLK/RED No. 6 P0306 C23 BRN/WHT


Y E S —Repair short in the wire between the PCM and the ignition coi l .H


(cont'd)

11-69

PGM-FI System


28. Connect the ignit ion coil 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground wi th a jumper wire (see table).


JUMPER WIRE

W i r e s i d e o f female t e r m i n a l s

PROBLEM ! DTC WIRE CYLINDER COLOR

No. 1 P0301 YEL/GRN No. 2 i P0302 BLU/RED No. 3 | P0303 WHT/BLU No. 4 I P0304 BRN No. 5 | P0305 BLK/RED No. 6 : P0306 BRN/WHT


PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU) IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)


No. 1 P0301 C4 YEL/GRN P0302 C14~ 1 BLU/RED^

No. 3 P0303 C3 WHT/BLU No. 4 P0304 C13 BRN No. 5 P0305 C12 BLK/RED No. 6 P0306 C23 BRN/WHT



NO Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the ignit ion co i l .a

30. Check the engine compression.

7s the engine compression OK?

Y E S - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original PCM.B

NO Repair the engine. •

31 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.



34. Measure voltage between body ground and the PCM connector terminal (see table).

P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P) I N J 4 ( Y E L ) INJ2 ( R E D )

10 20

11

I N J 5 ( B L K / R E D )

INJ1 (BRN)

12 21

13 14 22 I N J 3 (BLU)

23 24 17 25

I N J 6 ( W H T / B L U )

(V) (V) (V) (Y)


PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE CYLINDER i TERMINAL COLOR

No. 1 P0301 B11 BRN No. 2 P0302 B5 RED No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU No. 4 P0304 B4 YEL No. 5 I P0305 B3 BLK/RED No. 6 ! P0306 B6 WHT/BLU






11-70

37. Measure resistance between the injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.



Is there 10 Q - 13 Q?

YES Go to step 38. NO- Replace the injector (see page 11-82). •

38. Exchange the injector f rom the problem cylinder with one f rom another cylinder.





YES Go to step 42. NO- Intermittent misfire due to injector foul ing, etc.B


Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose injector was exchanged ?

YES - Replace the faulty injector. • NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original PCM.B




46. Measure voltage between the injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and body ground.


IGP (YEL/BLK)




NO —Repair open in the wire between the injector and the PGM-FI main relay. B




INJ5 INJ1 (BLK/ (BRN) RED)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

20 | 21 22 2 3 24 25

INJ3 (BLU)

INJ6 (WHT/ BLU)





Y E S Repair short in the wire between the PCM and the injector. B

NO Goto step 49.

(cont'd)

11 71

PGM-FI System


49. Connect the injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground wi th a jumper wire (see table).


INJ

JUMPER WIRE


PROBLEM DTC WIRE CYLINDER COLOR

No. 1 P0301 BRN No. 2 P0302 RED No. 3 P0303 BLU No. 4 P0304 YEL No. 5 P0305 BLK/RED No. 6 P0306 WHT/BLU

50. Check for continuity between body ground and the PCM connector terminals (see table).

P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P) INJ4 (YEL)

INJ5 (BLK/ RED)

(o) (a)

INJ2 (RED)

INJ1 (BRN)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

20 21 22 2 3 24 25

INJ3 (BLU)

INJ6 (WHT/ BLU)

W i r e s ide of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s


No. 1 P0301 B11 BRN No. 2 P0302 B5 RED No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU No 4 P0304 B4 YEL No. 5 P0305 B3 BLK/RED No. 6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU


YES - Replace the injector (see page 11-82). then recheck. •

NO- Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the in jec to r . •

11-72

DTC P0335; CKP Sensor No Signal

DTC P0336: CKP Sensor intermittent

interruption



Is DTC P0335 and/or P0336 indicated?

Y E S - G o to step 3. N O - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the CKP sensor and the PCM. •


4. Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.

5. Measure resistance between the CKP sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

C K P S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R

C K P P C K P M


Is there 1,850-2,450 Q ?


NO - Replace the CKP sensor (see page 6-56).

6. Check for continuity between body ground and CKP sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 individually.

C K P S E N S O R 2P C O N K l E C T O R

C K P P C K P M


is there continuity?

Y E S - R e p l a c e the CKP sensor (see page 6-56).


7. Reconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.


9. Measure resistance between PCM connector terminals C8 and C9.


C K P P C K P M

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 /


Is there 1,850-2,450 Q ?


NO -Repa i r open in the wire between the PCM (C8, C9) and the CKP sensor. •

(cont'd)

11-73

PGM-FI System


10. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM connector terminal C8.


C K P P ( B L U ) C K P P ( B L U )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 /



YES —Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C 8) and the CKPsensor.B

NO —Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original PCM.B

11-74

DTC P1121: TP Sensor Lower Than Expected


2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool.

Is 13.7 % or higher indicated when the throttle is fully opened?

YES —Intermittent fai lure, system is OK at this t ime.H

NO —Replace the TP sensor. •

DTC P1122: TP Sensor Higher Than Expected


2. Check the throttle position wi th the scan tool .

Is 16.9 % or less indicated when the throttle is fully closed?

YES-In termi t ten t failure, system is OK at this t ime.H

NO —Replace the TP sensor •

11-75

PGM-FI System


DTC P1361: TDC1 Sensor Intermittent Interruption

DTC P1362: TDC1 Sensor No Signal

DTC PI366: TDC2 Sensor Intermittent Interruption

DTC P1367: TDC2 Sensor No Signal



Is DTC P1361, P1362, P1366 or P1367 indicated?

Y E S - G o to step3.

NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor and the PCM. •


4. Disconnect the TDC 1/TDC2 sensor 4P connector.

5. Measure resistance between the terminals of the indicated sensor (see table).

TDC1/TDC2 SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR

TDC1P

TDC2P

TDC1M

TDC2M

T e r m i n a l s ide o f ma le t e r m i n a l s

SENSOR DTC SENSOR PCM WIRE TERMINAL TERMINAL COLOR

TDC1 P1361 1 C20 GRN P1362 2 C21 RED

TDC2 P1366 3 C29 YEL P1367 4 C30 BLK

Is there 1,850-2,450 Q ?


NO-Rep lace the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor (see page 6-5 5 ) . •

6. Check for continuity to body ground on both terminals of the indicated sensor individually.

T D C 1 / T D C 2 S E N S O R 4P C O N N E C T O R

T D C 1 P T D C 1 M



Y E S - R e p l a c e the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor (see page 6-5 5 ) . •


7. Reconnect the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor 4P connector.


9. Measure resistance between the terminals of the indicated sensor on the PCM connector (see table).



Is there 1,850-2,450 Q ?

Y E S - Goto step 10.

NO —Repair open in the indicated sensor wires (see table) . •

11-76

10. Check for continuity between body ground and PCM connector terminals C20 and/or C29 individually.

PCM CONNECTOR C (31P)

T D C 1 P (GRN)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I 5 9 10 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /



YES —Repair short in the indicated sensor wires (see t ab l e ) . •

NO —Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM.B

11-77

PGM-FI System


DTC P1676: FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction


2. Start the engine and wait 10 seconds.



NO — Intermittent failure system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the ABS/TCS control unit and at the PCM.B


4. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) and the ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector.

5. Check for continuity between body gound and PCM connector terminal A22.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

FPTDR (GRN/RED)



YES —Repair short in the wire between the ABS/ TCS control unit and the PCM (A22). •

NO- Go to step 6.

6. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector terminal A22.


1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16

5 6 7 17 18 19

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 20

9 10 11 22 23

32 24

FPTDR (GRN/RED)

„ ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT 16P 0 ) CONNECTOR

1 2 / 4 / / 9 10 11 13 14 15 16




NO —Repair open in the wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the PCM (A22). •

7. Reconnect PCM connector E (32).

8. Connect PCM connector terminals A22 and C28 wi th a jumper wire.

PCM CONNECTORS

A (32P) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12(13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

JUMPER WIRE

C(31P) FPTDR (GRN/RED)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /

VCC2 (YEL/BLU)





YES-Subst i tu te a known-good ABS/TCS control unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original ABS/TCS control un i t •

NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM.B

11-78

DTC P1678: FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction




YES —Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit and recheck. If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original ABS/TCS control unit. •

NO —Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t ime. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the ABS/TCS control unit and at the PCM.

PGM-FI System

Injector Replacement

'98-99 models:


2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake manifold.

3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).

4. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose from the fuel pressure regulator (B). Place a rag or shop towel over the hoses before disconnecting them.

5. Disconnect the fuel hose (C) from the fuel rail (D).

6. Remove the retainer bolts (E) from the fuel rails and harness holders (F), then replace the O-rings (G).

7. Disconnect the fuel rails.

8. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.

11-80

9. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B).

10. Coat new O-rings (C) with clean engine oi l , and put them on the injectors.

11. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D) first.

12. Coat new seal rings (E) with clean engine oi l , and press them into the intake manifold.

13. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the injectors in the fuel rails first, then install them in the intake manifold.

14. Install and t ighten the retainer bolts.

15. Connect the fuel hose to the fuel rail wi th new washers.

16. Connect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose to the fuel pressure regulator.

17. Install the connectors on the injectors and harness holders.

18. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.

19. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for approximately 2 seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 t imes, then check for fuel leakage.

11-81

PGM-FI System

Injector Replacement (cont'd)

'00-01 models:


2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake mani fo ld.

3. Disconnect the connectors f rom the injectors (A).

4. Remove the retainer bolts (D) f rom the fuel rails (C) and harness holders (E), then replace the O-rings (F).

5. Disconnect the fuel rails.

6. Remove the injectors f rom the fuel rails.

11-82

7. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B).

D

8. Coat new O-rings (C) wi th clean engine oi l , and put them on the injectors.

9. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D) first.

10. Coat new seal rings (E) wi th clean engine oi l , and press them into the intake manifold.

11. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the fuel injectors in the fuel rails first, then install them in the intake manifold.

12. Install bolts.

13. Install the connectors on the injectors.

14. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.

15. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for approximately 2 seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 t imes, then check for fuel leakage.

11-83

PGM-FI Sy stem

Primary H02S Replacement

Special Tools Required Commercial ly available 0 2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875 or SP Tools 93750 or equivalent

1. Disconnect the primary H02S 4P connector (A), then remove the primary H02S (B).

B 44 N m (4.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfft)

2. Install the pr imary H02S in reverse order of removal.

Secondary H02S Replacement

Special Tools Required Commercial ly available 02 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875 or SP Tools 93750 or equivalent

1. Disconnect the secondary H02S 4P connector (A), then remove the secondary H02S (B).

Ibfft)

2. Install the secondary H02S in the reverse order of removal.

11-84

Idle Control System


NOTE: The illustration shows '00-01 models.

11-85

Idle Control System

Idle Speed Adjustment

Adjust the idle speed using the Honda PGM Tester procedure if possible. If not, use the fo l lowing procedure:

NOTE: • Leave the IAC valve connected. • Before setting the idle speed, check these items:

- The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition t iming - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system

1. Disconnect the EVAP purge control solenoid valve 2P connector.


3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm wi th no load (transmission in Park or neutral position) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

4. Check the idle speed wi th no-load condit ions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air condit ioner are not operating.

Idle speed should be: 680 + 50 rpm (in Park or neutral)

5. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the idle adjusting screw (A) 1/4-turn clockwise or counterclockwise.

NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more than 1/4-turn wi thout checking the idle speed.

6. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn, check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn again.

7. Idle the engine for one minute wi th heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed.

Idle speed should be: 680 + 50 rpm (in Park or neutral)

NOTE: • Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air

conditioner is on. • If the idle speed is not within specification, see

the Symptom Troubleshooting Index.

8. Reconnect the EVAP purge control solenoid valve 2P connector.

11-86

Fuel Supply System


NOTE: The il lustration shows '00-01 models.

F U E L F E E D P I P E F U E L F I L L C A P

F U E L V A P O R P IPE

F U E L R A I L F U E L P U M P Tes t , p a g e 11-115

n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-122 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

F U E L F I L T E R R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-121

n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

F U E L T A N K R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-123 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

F U E L G A U G E S E N D I N G U N I T T e s t , p a g e 11-94 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-127 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

F U E L T U B E / Q U I C K - C O N N E C T F I T T I N G S P r e c a u t i o n s , p a g e 11-118 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e m o v a l , p a g e 11-118 n t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 11-119 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

F U E L R E T U R N P IPE

F U E L P R E S S U R E R E G U L A T O R R e p l a c e m e n t f o r ' 9 8 - 9 9 m o d e l s , p a g e 11-92 R e p l a c e m e n t f o r ' 0 0 - 0 1 m o d e l s , p a g e 11-93

in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

11-87

Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Relieving

Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the fuel pulsation damper on top of the fuel rail.

1 . Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.

2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal.

3. Remove the fuel fill cap.

4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at the fuel rail.

A 2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibf f t )

B

5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation damper.

6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper (A) one complete turn.

NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the fuel pulsation damper is loosened or removed.

11-88

Fuel Pressure Test

Special Tools Required • Fuel pressure gauge 07406-0040001 • Fuel pressure gauge attachment 07VAJ-0040100


2. Disconnect the battery negative cable f rom the battery negative terminal.

3. Remove the fuel fi l l cap.

4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at the fuel rail.

B 5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation

damper.

6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper 1 complete turn.

7. Remove the fuel pulsation damper f rom its f i t t ing, and attach the fuel pressure gauge attachment.

8. Attach the fuel pressure gauge.

'98-99 models: 07406-0040001

9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) of the fuel pressure regulator and pinch it closed wi th a clamp <B).


• If the engine starts, go to step 12. • If the engine does not start, go to step 11.

11. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: remove the fuel fi l l cap and listen to the fuel fi l l port while an assistant turns the ignition switch ON (ll)-you should hear the pump run for about 2 seconds when the ignit ion turned ON (II).

• If the pump runs, go to step 12. • If the pump does not run, test it, refer to

the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-115).B

(cont'd)

11-89

Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Test (cont'd)

12. Read the pressure gauge (with the fuel pressure regulator vacuum hose disconnected and clamped). The pressure should be: '98-00 models: 280-330 kPa (2 .9 -3 .4 kgf/cm 2 , 41 -48 psi). '01 model: 320 -370 kPa (3.3-3.8 kgf/cm 2 , 4 8 - 5 4 psi).

• If the pressure is OK and engine is running, go to step 13. If not running, repair the cause, then continue this test.

• If the pressure is out of spec, go to step 14.

13. With the engine running, reconnect the vacuum hose and read the gauge again. The pressure should be: '98-00 models: 220 -270 kPa (2.25-2.75 kgf/cm 2 , 3 2 - 4 0 psi). '01 model: 260 -310 kPa (2.7-3.2 kgf/cm 2 , 3 8 - 4 6 psi).

• If the fuel pressure is OK, the test is complete. Go to step 15.

• If the pressure is out of spec, go to step 14.

14. Disconnect the vacuum hose f rom the pressure regulator again whi le you watch the pressure gauge. The pressure should rise when you disconnect the hose.

• If the pressure did not rise, replace the fuel pressure regulator for '98-99 models (see page 11-92) or for '00-01 models (see page 11-93), and recheck the fuel pressure.

• If the pressure rose, and all your readings were wi th in spec, go to step 15.

• If the pressure rose, but your readings were out of spec, check for these problems: - If the pressure is too low, check for a clogged

fuel fi lter and for leaks in the fuel l i n e s . • - If the pressure is too high, check for a pinched

or clogged fuel return hose or line. •

15. Reconnect the vacuum hose, remove the pressure gauge, and reinstall the fuel pulsation damper and a new washer.Tighten the fuel pulsation damper to 22 N-m (2.2kgf-m, 16 Ibf f t ) .

NOTE: Disassemble and clean the fuel pressure gauge attachment thoroughly after use.

11-90

Fuel Lines Inspection

Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, and deterioration, and replace if necessa


Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement

'98-99 models:

1. Remove the intake manifold cover and intake manifold.

2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure regulator, then relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88).

3. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and fuel return hose (B).

E

4. Loosen the locking nut (C), and remove the fuel pressure regulator (D).

5. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (E), and carefully install it into its proper posit ion.

6. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel rail. Turn it by hand until stops.

7. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A) counterclockwise to set the angle as shown.

A

8. Tighten the locking nut to 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibf f t ) .

NOTE: • Replace the O-ring. • When assembling the fuel pressure regulator,

apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble it into its proper posit ion, taking care not to damage the O-ring.

11-92

'00-01 models:

1. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure regulator, then relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88).

2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and fuel return hose (B).

6. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A) counterclockwise to set the angle as shown.

7. Tighten the locking nut to 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft).

NOTE: • Replace the O-ring. • When assembling the fuel pressure regulator,

apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble it into its proper posit ion, taking care not to damage the O-ring.

3. Loosen the locking nut (C), and remove the fuel pressure regulator (D).

4. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (E), and carefully install it into its proper position.

5. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel joint. Turn it by hand until stops.

11-93

Fuel Supply System

Fuel Gauge Test

NOTE; For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram , refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-60).

1. Check the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/ relay box before testing.

2. Remove the spare tire l id.

3. Remove the access panel f rom the floor.

4. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF, then disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector.

5. Measure voltage between the fuel pump 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 wi th the ignit ion switch ON (II). There should be between 5 and 8 V.

• If the voltage is as specified, go to step 6. • If the voltage is not as specified, check for:

- an open in the YEL/BLU or BLK wire. - poor ground (G552).

F U E L P U M P 5P C O N N E C T O R



7. Install a 2 Q, resistor between the fuel pump 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, then turn the ignit ion switch ON (II).

F U E L P U M P 5P C O N N E C T O R

J U M P E R W I R E

V V V 2Q R E S I S T O R ( Y E L / B L U )

J U M P E R W I R E

( B L K ) I 1 2 3 J \ 4 5 /


8. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts moving toward the " F " mark.

• If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at al l , replace the gauge.

• If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-127).

NOTE: • Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer

reaches " F " on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the fuel gauge.

• The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, so the fuel level is continuously indicated even when the ignition switch is OFF, and the pointer moves more slowly than that of a bimetal type.

11-94

4T> Intake Air System



T H R O T T L E B O D Y Tes t , p a g e 11-96 R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 11-99 D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y , p a g e 11-100

11-95

Intake Air System

Throttle Body Test

Special Tools Required Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0. -30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX

5, Operate the throttle lever by hand to see if the thrott le valve and/or shaft are too loose or too tight.

1. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) between the top of the thrott le body at the intake air bypass control valve, and connect it to a vacuum gauge.

• If there is excessive play in the thrott le valve shaft or the throttle valve binds at the ful ly closed position, replace the throttle body.

• If the throttle valve and shaft are OK, go to step 6.

A 9 7 3 X - 0 4 1 - X X X X X

6, Check for clearance (A) between the thrott le stop screw (B) and the throttle lever (C) at the ful ly closed position. If there is any clearance, replace the thrott le body (see page 11-99). Do not adjust the thrott le stop screw.

2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm wi th no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. The gauge should not indicate any vacuum.

• If the gauge indicates vacuum, check and if necessary adjust the thrott le cable (see page 11-98), then go to step 3.

• If the gauge does not indicate vacuum, go to step 3.

3. Open the thrott le slightly f rom idle and check the gauge again. The gauge should indicate vacuum.

• If the gauge indicates vacuum, go to step 4. • If the gauge does not indicate vacuum, check the

thrott le body port. If it's clogged, clean it wi th carburetor cleaner, then go to step 4.

4. With the engine OFF, check the throttle cable operation. The cable should operate wi thout binding or sticking.

• If the cable is OK, go to step 5. • If the cable binds or sticks, check it and its routing.

If it's faulty, reroute it or replace it and adjust it (see page 11-98), then go to step 5.

11-96

Air Cleaner Element Replacement

AIR C L E A N E R H O U S I N G C O V E R

11-97

Intake Air System

Throttle Cable Adjustment

1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm wi th no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

2. Hold the thrott le link (A) to the thrott le lever (B). There should be no clearance.

3. Check cable free play at the thrott le linkage. Cable deflection (A) should be 10 12 m m (3 /8 -1 /2 in.)

A

4. If deflection is not wi th in spec (10—12 m m , 3/8 — 1/2 in.) loosen the locknut (B), turn the adjusting nut (C) until the deflection is as specif ied, then retighten the locknut.

5. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle valve to be sure it opens ful ly when you push the accelerator pedal to the f loor. Also check the thrott le valve to be sure it returns to the idle position whenever you release the accelerator pedal.

11-98

Throttle Body Removal/Installation

NOTE: • Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. 9 After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable (see page 4-54) and the throttle cable (see page 11 -98). • The TP sensor is not removable.

'98-99 models:

11-99

Intake Air System

Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly

'98-99 models:

'00-01 models:

11-100

Intake Air (IA) Bypass Control Valve Test

Special Tools Required; Vacuum pump gauge, 0 — 30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX

"98-99 models:

1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm wi th no load (in Park or neutral position) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

2. Remove the vacuum hose (A) f rom the install pipe, and connect a vacuum gauge to the hose.

A

3. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure the vacuum gauge reading changes as the rpm changes. If the vacuum reading does not change check for these problems:

* Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air bypass control system vacuum lines.

• A cracked or damaged intake air bypass control valve.

'00-01 models:

1. Start the engine, then let it idle.

NOTE: Engine coolant temperature must be below 104°F(40°C).

2. Remove the vacuum hose (A) f rom the install pipe, and connect a vacuum gauge to the hose.

3. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure the vacuum gauge reading changes as the rpm changes.

If the vacuum reading does not change, check for these problems:

• Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air bypass control system vacuum lines.

• A cracked or damage intake air bypass control valve.

4. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm wi th no load (in Park or neutral position) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

5. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure the vacuum gauge reading does not change as the rpm changes.

If the vacuum reading changes check for these problems:

• Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air bypass control system vacuum lines.

• A cracked or damage intake air bypass control valve.

11-101

PCV System

PCV Valve Inspection and Test

1. Check the PCV valve (A) and hoses (B) and connections for leaks and restrictions.

'98-99 models:

B

2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound f rom the PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve and intake manifold is l ightly pinched (A) wi th your f ingers or pliers. If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck.

'98-99 models:

A

'00-01 models:

11-102

Evaporative Emission Control System


NOTE: The illustration shows '00-01 models.

E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R P U R G E V A L V E

F U E L T A N K P R E S S U R E S E N S O R F U E L T A N K V A P O R C O N T R O L V A L V E T e s t , p a g e 11 -159 "n the ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e p l a c e m e n t , page 11-161 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R

E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R V E N T S H U T V A L V E

E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) B Y P A S S S O L E N O I D V A L V E

E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) T W O - W A Y V A L V E Tes t , p a g e 11-158 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

11-103

Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission

Special Tools 14-2 G e n e r a l T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g I n f o r m a t i o n 14-3 D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g I n d e x 14-7 S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g I n d e x 14-8 System Description 14 -18 D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 14-64 S Ind ica tor L i g h t C i r c u i t

T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 14 -93 Inter lock S y s t e m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

Sh i f t L o c k S y s t e m C i r c u i t 14 -96 Key Interlock System Circuit 14 -99

R o a d T e s t 14-101 Sta l l Speed Test 14 -103 Pressure Tests 14 -104 T o r q u e C o n v e r t e r C l u t c h S o l e n o i d V a l v e -

Sh i f t S o l e n o i d V a l v e A T e s t 14 -106 T o r q u e C o n v e r t e r C l u t c h S o l e n o i d V a l v e -

Shi f t S o l e n o i d V a l v e A R e p l a c e m e n t ........ 14 -106 Sh i f t S o l e n o i d V a l v e s B a n d C T e s t 14-107 Shi f t S o l e n o i d V a l v e s B a n d C

R e p l a c e m e n t 14-107 A / T C l u t c h P r e s s u r e C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d

V a l v e s A a n d B T e s t 14 -108 A / T C l u t c h P r e s s u r e C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d

V a l v e s A a n d B R e p l a c e m e n t 14 -109 S p e e d S e n s o r R e p l a c e m e n t 14 -110 2 n d C l u t c h P r e s s u r e S w i t c h

R e p l a c e m e n t 14-111 3 rd C l u t c h P r e s s u r e S w i t c h

R e p l a c e m e n t 14-111 A T F L e v e l C h e c k 14 -112 A T F Replacement 14 -113 Transmission Removal 14 -114 T r a n s m i s s i o n Ins ta l l a t ion 14-121 ATF Cooler Flushing 14 -127 ATF Cooler Hoses R e p l a c e m e n t 14 -128 Sh i f t L e v e r R e m o v a l 14 -129 Sh i f t L e v e r Ins ta l l a t ion 14 -130 Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly 14 -132 Shi f t C a b l e R e p l a c e m e n t 14 -133 Shift Cable Adjustment 14 -136

A/T Gear Position Indicator C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x 14 -138 Circuit Diagram 14 -139 T r a n s m i s s i o n R a n g e S w i t c h T e s t 14 -140 Transmission Range Switch

Replacement 14-141 Ind ica to r Input T e s t 1 4 - 1 4 3 Indicator Bulb Replacement 14 -144

A/T interlock System C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x 14 -145 Circuit Diagram 1 4 - 1 4 6 C o n t r o l U n i t Input T e s t 14 -147 Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test 14 -149 Shift Lock Solenoid Test 14 -149 Shi f t L o c k S o l e n o i d R e p l a c e m e n t 14 -150 Park Pin S w i t c h Test 14 -150

Transmission End Cover E n d C o v e r R e m o v a l 14-151 Park Lever Stop Inspection and Adjustment 1 4 - 1 5 3 End Cover and Idler Gears Instllation 1 4 - 1 9 5

Transmission Housing Housing and Shaft Assembl ies Removal 1 4 - 1 5 4 B e a r i n g R e p l a c e m e n t 1 4 - 1 5 6 Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation 1 4 - 1 9 2

Valve Body Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal 14 -157 V a l v e B o d y R e p a i r 1 4 - 1 5 9 V a l v e B o d y V a l v e Ins ta l l a t ion 14 -160 M a i n V a l v e Body D i s a s s e m b l y ,

I n s p e c t i o n a n d R e a s s e m b l y 14-161 A T F P u m p I n s p e c t i o n 1 4 - 1 6 3 R e g u l a t o r V a l v e B o d y D i s a s s e m b l y ,

I n s p e c t i o n a n d R e a s s e m b l y 1 4 - 1 6 4 S e r v o B o d y D i s a s s e m b l y ,

I n s p e c t i o n and R e a s s e m b l y 1 4 - 1 6 5 A c c u m u l a t o r B o d y D i s a s s e m b l y , I n s p e c t i o n

a n d R e a s s e m b l y 1 4 - 1 6 6 V a l v e B o d i e s a n d A T F S t r a i n e r

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1 4 - 1 9 0

Torque Converter Housing M a i n s h a f t B e a r i n g / O i l S e a l

R e p l a c e m e n t 14 -167 C o u n t e r s h a f t B e a r i n g R e p l a c e m e n t 1 4 - 1 6 8 S e c o n d a r y Shaft B e a r i n g R e p a c e m e n t 1 4 - 1 6 8

Shafts and Clutches M a i n s h a f t D i s a s s e m b l y , I n s p e c t i o n ,

a n d R e a s s e m b l y 1 4 - 1 6 9 3 r d / 4 t h C l u t c h C l e a r a n c e I n s p e c t i o n 14 -170 M a i n s h a f t S e a l i n g R i n g s R e p l a c e m e n t 14-171 C o u n t e r s h a f t D i s a s s e m b l y ,

I n s p e c t i o n , a n d R e a s s e m b l y 1 4 - 1 7 2 C o u n t e r s h a f t R e v e r s e S e l e c t o r Hub,

3 r d G e a r , a n d 1st G e a r R e p l a c e m e n t 1 4 - 1 7 3 C o u n t e r s h a f t B e a r i n g Hub /Bear ing

R e p l a c e m e n t 1 4 - 1 7 5 S e c o n d a r y S h a f t D i s a s s e m b l y , I n s p e c t i o n ,

and R e a s s e m b l y 1 4 - 1 7 6 S e c o n d a r y S h a f t C l e a r a n c e I n s p e c t i o n 14 -177 S e c o n d a r y S h a f t Id ler G e a r B e a r i n g

R e p l a c e m e n t 1 4 - 1 7 9 C l u t c h D i s a s s e m b l y 14 -180 C l u t c h I n s p e c t i o n 1 4 - 1 8 3 C l u t c h R e a s s e m b l y . - 1 4 - 1 8 5

A/T Differential C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x 14-201 Backlash I n s p e c t i o n 14-201 Final Driven Gear/Carr ier Replacement 14 -202 C a r r i e r B e a r i n g R e p l a c e m e n t 1 4 - 2 0 2 Oi l S e a l R e p l a c e m e n t 1 4 - 2 0 3 Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement 14 -204 C a r r i e r B e a r i n g P r e l o a d I n s p e c t i o n 1 4 - 2 0 5

Outline of V6 Model Change

T h e B 7 X A a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n h a s b e e n a d d e d .

Automatic Transmission

Special Tools

Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty ® 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 Mainshaft Holder 1 ® 07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG4010G Seal Driver Attachment 1 ® 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 1

07HAC-PK40102 Housing Puller 1 © 07HAJ-PK40201 Preload Inspection Tool 1 ® 07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1 ® 07JAD-PH80400 Pilot 28x30 mm 1 ® 07LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 1

**® 07LAE-PX40100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment 2 © 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 4 ® 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adapter 4 © 07NAD-PX40100 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1 © 07SAZ-001000A BackprobeSet 2 ® 07WAZ-002010A S C S Service Connector (DLC) 1 © 07406-0020400 A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set W/Panel 1

***© 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2 5 - 4 0 mm 1 © 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1 © 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1 © 07746-0010600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1 © 07746-0030100 Driver 40 mm I.D. 1 ® 07749-0010000 Driver 1 © 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1

© © ® © © @

© © © ® @@® ©

14-2

< 3 ® General Troubleshooting Information

How to Check for DTCs with the PGM Tester/Scan Tool

When the PCM senses an abnormali ty in the input or output systems, the (H indicator l ight in the gauge assembly wi l l blink. When the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (located next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the OBD II Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester as shown, the scan tool or tester wi l l indicate the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) when the ignition switch is turned ON(II).

HONDA PGM T E S T E R or OBD II S C A N T O O L

If the E indicator l ight or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveabil ity problem is suspected, fo l low this procedure:

1. Connect the OBD II Scan Tool (conforming to SAE J1978) or Honda PGM Tester to the 16P DLC. (See the OBD II Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific instructions. If you are using the Honda PGM Tester, make sure it is set to the SAE DTC type.)

2. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), and observe the DTC on the screen.

3. Record all fuel and emission DTCs, A/T DTCs, and freeze data.

4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for DTC P0700). DTC P0700 means there is one or more A/T DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and emissions circuit of the PCM.

5. Get the anti-theft code for the radio, then wri te down the radio station presets.

6. Reset the memory wi th the PGM Tester or by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/ relay box for more than 10 seconds.

7. Drive the vehicle for several minuites in the freeze data conditions or at speeds over 30mph (50 km/hr), and then recheck for DTCs. If the A/T DTC returns, go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index on page 14-7. If the DTC does not return, there was an intermittent problem wi th in the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, and then go to step 8.

8. Enter the radio code, reset the radio preset stations, and set the clock.

(cont'd)

14-3


General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)

How to Check for DTCs

When the PCM senses an abnormali ty in the input or output systems, the H indicator l ight in the gauge assembly wi l l usually blink and/or the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may come on. When the Data Link Connector (DLC) (located next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the Honda PGM Tester, the B indicator light wi l l blink the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) when the ignit ion switch is turned ON (II). When the B indicator light has been reported on, connect the Honda PGM Tester to the DLC. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select Honda Systems, and then the SCS mode, then observe the H indicator light.

IS I N D I C A T O R L I G H T

Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks. Codes 10 and above are indicated by a series of long and short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. Add the long and short blinks together to determine the code. After determining the code, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.

S h o r t bl ink (once)

O F F • S e e D T C 1

O F F S e e D T C 2

L o n g blink S h o r t b l inks (five t imes)

O F F • S e e D T C 15

If the IS indicator light or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem, fol low this procedure: 1. Record all fuel/emissions DTCs, A/T DTCs, and freeze data. 2. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for

DTC P0700), DTC P0700 means there is one or more A/T DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and emissions circuit of the PCM.

3. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write down the numbers of the radio station presets. 4. Reset the memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10

seconds. 5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed over 30 mph (50 km/h), and then recheck for DTCs.

If the DTC returns, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index. If the DTC does no return, there was an intermittent problem wi th in the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, then go to step 6.

6. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and reset the clock.

14-4

How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM

Special Tools Required Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS components locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).

1. Pull back the carpet from the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM.

2. Inspect the circuit on the PCM, according to the DTC troubleshooting, with the special tools and a digital

3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a multimeter (C). Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire side until it comes in contact with the terminal end of the wire.

multimeter.

0 7 S A Z - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A

A 0 7 S A Z - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A

(cont'd)

14-5



How to Reset the PCM

1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then wri te down the radio station presets.


3. Use one of these methods to reset the PCM memory: • Use the OBD II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester. • Remove the BACK UP fuse (7.5 A)(A) f rom the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (B) for 10 seconds.

How to End a Troubleshooting Session

This procedure must be done after any troubleshoot ing.


2. Disconnect the OBD II Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester (C) f rom the DLC (D).

3. Reset the PCM.


5. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and set the clock.

6. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minuites at speeds over 30 mph (48km/h).

14-6


NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.

DTC* H Indicator Light

MIL

r 8

Detection Item Page

P0715O5) Blinks ON Mainshaft speed sensor (see page 14-77)

P0720 (9) Blinks ON Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-76)

P0730(41) OFF ON Shift control system (see page 14-90)

P0740 (40) OFF ON Lock-up control system (see page 14-89)

P0753 (7) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-72)

P0758 (8) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-74)

P0763 (22) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-81)

P0780 (45) Blinks ON Mechanical problem in hydraulic system (see page 14-91)

P1705 (5) Blinks ON Transmission range switch (short to ground) (see page 14-66)

P1706 (6) OFF ON Transmission range switch (open) (see page 14-69)

P1738 (25) OFF OFF 2nd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-85)

P1739 (26) OFF OFF 3rd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-87)

P1750(46) Blinks ON Mechanical problem in hydraulic system (see page 14-92)

P1751 (47) Blinks ON Mechanical problem in hydraulic system (see page 14-92)

P1753 0 ) Blinks ON Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (see page 14-64)

P1768(16) Blinks ON A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-79)

P1773 (23) Blinks ON A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-83)

The DTC in the parentheses is the flash code the H indicator light indicates when the Data Link Connector (DLC) is connected to the Honda PGM Tester. NOTE: Codes P0780 (45), P1750 (46), and P1751 (47) are applied to the '00-01 models.

14-7



These symptoms DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or cause the E indicator light to blink. If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) was reported ON or the S indicator l ight has been blinking, check for DTCs. But if the vehicle has one of the symptoms in the fo l lowing chart, check the probable causes(s) for it, in the sequence listed, until you f ind the problem.

Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes

When you turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), the B indicator light comes on and stays on or never comes on at all

A problem in the B indicator l ight circuit

Check the B indicator light circuit (see page 14-93).

Shift lever cannot be moved f rom B position whi le you're pushing on the brake pedal

A problem in shift lock system of interlock system

Check interlock system — shift lock system circuit (see page 14-96).

Ignition key cannot be moved f rom ACC (1) posit ion to LOCK (0) posit ion whi le you're pushing the ignit ion key wi th the shift lever in I B position

A problem in key interlock system of interlock system

Check interlock system — key interlock system circuit (see page 14-99).

14-8


Engine runs, but vehicle does not move in any gear

1. Low ATF level 2. Shift cable broken or out of

adjustment 3. Joint in shift cable and

transmission or body worn 4. ATF pump worn or binding 5. Regulator valve stuck or

spring worn 6. ATF strainer clogged 7. Mainshaft worn or

damaged 8. Final gears worn or

damaged 9. Transmission-to-engine

assembly error 10. Axle disengaged

• Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage and loose connections. If necessary, f lush ATF cooler lines.

• Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the transmission control shaft.

• Improper al ignment of ATF pump and torque converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.

• Measure line pressure. • If the strainer is clogged, f ind the damaged

components that caused debris. • Inspect the differential pinion shaft for wear under the

pinion gears. If the differential pinion shaft is worn , overhaul the differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer, thoroughly clean the transmission, and flush the torque converter, cooler, and lines.

• Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing when replacing the main ball bearing. You may also damage the ATF pump when you torque down the main valve body. This wi l l result in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.

• Install the main seal f lush wi th the torque converter housing. If you push it into the torque converter housing until it bottoms out, it wi l l block the f luid return passage and result in damage.

Vehicle moves in \2\ and ID, but not in H , IE, or HI position

1. 1st accumulator defective 2. 1st gears worn or damaged 3. 1st clutch defective

• Inspect 1st clutch pressure. • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch

assembly for wear and damage. • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the

spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.

(cont'd)

14-9




Vehicle moves in S3, H, [EEL but not in [3 position

1. Shift solenoid valve A defective

2. Shift valve A defective 3. 2nd accumulator defective 4. 2nd gears worn or

damaged 5. 2nd clutch defective

• Check the SI indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.

• Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch assembly for wear and damage.

• Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.

Vehicle moves in H, HI/but not in

SI posit ion

1. Shift fork shaft stuck 2. Modulator valve defective 3. Reverse CPC valve

defective 4. 4th accumulator defective 5. 4th clutch defective 6. Reverse gears worn or

damaged

• Measure line pressure and 4th clutch pressure. • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork

shaft. • If the ATF strainer is clogged wi th particles of steel or

a luminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK, and no cause for the contamination is found, replace the torque converter.

• Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and inspect engagement teeth chamfers of the countershaft 4th gear and reverse gear. Replace the reverse gears and the reverse selector if they are worn or damaged. If the transmission makes clicking, gr inding, or whirr ing noises, also replace the mainshaft 4th gear, reverse idler gear, and countershaft 4th gear.

• If the 4th clutch feed pipe guide in the end cover is scored by the mainshaft, inspect the ball bearing for excessive movement in the transmission housing. If the ball bearing is OK, replace the end cover as it is dented. The O-ring under the guide is probably worn.

• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd and 4th clutch feed pipes are loose or damaged. If the 4th clutch feed pipe is damaged or out of round, replace the end cover.

• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance wi th the clutch end plate.

14-10


Poor acceleration; flares on starting off in fi and H positions: Stall speed high in E , E, HI, and \%1 positions

1. Low ATF level 2. Shift cable broken or out of

adjustment 3. ATF pump worn or binding 4. Regulator valve stuck or

spring worn 5. ATF strainer clogged 6. Torque converter check

valve defective

• Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush ATF cooler lines.


• Check line pressure. • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque

converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The symptoms are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.

• Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing when replacing the main ball bearing. You may also damage the ATF pump when you torque down the main valve body. This will result in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.

Poor acceleration; flares on starting off in B and H positions: Stall speed high in S , fi, and GO positions

1. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment

2, 1st clutch defective


• Check 1st clutch pressure. • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the


Poor acceleration-flares on starting off in 03 position: Stall speed high in 1JD position


2. 2nd clutch defective


• Check 2nd clutch pressure. • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the


Poor acceleration; flares on starting off in M position: Stall speed is in specification in E , S , 1JD, and US positions, but high in El position

4th clutch defective • Check 4th clutch pressure. • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,

and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.

(cont'd)

14-11




Poor acceleration; Stall speed low

1. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve defective

2. Torque converter one-way clutch defective

3. Engine output low 4. Lock-up clutch piston

defective 5. Lock-up shift valve

defective 6. Restricted cooler

Check ATF cooling system for restriction.

Engine idle v ibrat ion 1. Low ATF level 2. Torque converter clutch

solenoid valve defective 3. Drive plate defective or

transmission misassembed 4. Engine output low 5. Lock-up clutch piston

defective 6. ATF pump worn or binding 7. Lock-up shift valve

defective 8. Restricted cooler

• Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still no good, adjust the engine mounts as outl ined in the engine section of this service manual.

• Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage and loose connections. If necessary, f lush ATF cooler lines.

• Check ATF cooling system for restriction.

Vehicle moves in El posit ion

1. Excessive ATF 2. Foreign material in

separator plate orifice 3. 1st clutch defective 4. 2nd clutch defective 5. 3rd clutch defective 6. 4th clutch defective 7. Clutch clearance incorrect 8. Needle bearing seized up,

worn , or damaged 9. Thrust washer seized up,

worn , or damaged

• Check ATF level, and drain ATF if necessary. • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,


• Check for clutch pressure in neutral.

14-12

< 2 ®


Late shift f rom M position to H and E positions

1. Shift solenoid valve C defective

2. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B defective


4. Joint in shift cable and transmission or body worn

5. Shift fork shaft stuck 6. CPC valve A stuck 7. Foreign material in

separator plate orifice 8. Shift valve C defective 9. Servo control valve

defective 10. 1st accumulator defective 11. 1st check ball stuck 12. 1st clutch defective

• Check the S indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.

• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.


• If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or a luminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK, and no cause for the contamination is found, replace the torque converter.

• Check 1st clutch pressure. • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,


Late shift from ED position to SI position





5. Shift fork shaft stuck 6. Foreign material in

separator plate orifice 7. Reverse CPC valve

defective 8. 4th accumulator defective 9. 4th clutch defective

• Check the S indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.

• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.


• If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or a luminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK, and no cause for the contamination is found, replace the torque converter.

• Check 4th clutch pressure. • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,


(cont'd)

14-13




No shift Modulator valve defective Measure line pressure.

Erratic shift ing gears; Fails to shift in I B posit ion; does not upshift to 4th

1. Shift solenoid valve A defective

2. Mainshaft speed sensor defective

3. Countershaft speed sensor defective

4. Shift valve A defective 5. Shift valve D defective

• Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.

• Check the B indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.

Erratic shift ing gears: Fails to shift in Band B posit ions; does not upshift to 3rd and 4th

1. Shift solenoid valve B defective

2. Shift fork shaft stuck 3. Shift valve B defective 4. Servo control valve

defective

• Check the B indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.

• Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.

Erratic shift ing gears: Fails to shift in B , B and [D positions; starts off in 3rd

1. Shift solenoid valve B defective

2. Shift valve B defective 3. Shift valve E defective

Check the B indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.

Excessive shock, or flares on all upshifts and downshifts


2. CPC valve A defective 3. CPC valve B defective 4. Foreign material in

separator plate orifice

• Check the B indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.

• If the ATF strainer is clogged wi th particles of steel or a luminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK, and no cause for the contamination is found, replace the torque converter.

Excessive shock or flares on 1-2 upshift or 2-1 downshif t


2. 2nd clutch pressure switch defective

3. Foreign material in separator plate orifice

4. Shift valve C defective 5. 1st accumulator defective 6. 2nd accumulator defective 7. 1st check ball stuck 8. 2nd check ball stuck 9. 1st clutch defective

10. 2nd clutch defective

• Check the B indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.

• Check the B indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Check that the outlet is not clogged inside of the connector.

• Check 1st and 2nd clutch pressures. • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the


14-14


Excessive shock, or flares on 2-3 upshift or 3-2 downshift


2. 3rd clutch pressure switch defective


4. Shift valve C defective 5. 2nd accumulator defective 6. 3rd accumulator defective 7. 2nd check ball stuck 8. 2nd clutch defective 9. 3rd clutch defective

• Check the H indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.

• Check 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures. • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,


Excessive shock, or flares on 3-4 upshift or 4-3 downshift



3. Shift valve C defective 4. 3rd accumulator defective 5. 4th accumulator defective 6. 3rd clutch defective 7. 4th clutch defective

• Check the H indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid valve for seizure.

• Check 3rd and 4th clutch pressures. • If the ATF strainer is clogged wi th particles of steel or

a luminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK, and no cause for the contamination is found, replace the torque converter, and check the stall speed.

• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.

Noise f rom transmission in all shift lever positions

1. ATF pump worn or binding 2. Torque converter housing

or transmission housing bearing worn or damaged

• Improper al ignment of ATF pump and torque converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The symptoms are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.

• Inspect the contact of the countershaft and secondary shaft wi th the bearings. Check the ATF guide plates for damage and wear. Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe for damage and out of round. If the 1st clutch feed pipe is damaged or out of round, replace it. Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 1st clutch feed pipe is damaged or out of round.

Vehicle does not accelerate more than 31 mph (50 km/h)

Torque converter one-way clutch defective

Replace torque converter.

(cont'd)

14-15




Vibration in all shift lever positions

Drive plate defective or transmission misassembled

• Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still no good, adjust the engine mounts as outl ined in the engine section of the service manual.

• Check the stall speed.

Shift lever does not operate smoothly

1. A/T gear posit ion switch defective or out of adjustment



• Check the S3 indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.


Transmission does not shift into E posit ion



3. Park mechanism defective


• Check the park pawl spring installation and the park lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect, install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park lever stop is not installed upside down. Check the distance between the park pawl and the park lever roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust the distance wi th the park lever stop.

Lock-up clutch does not disengage



3. Lock-up clutch piston defective

4. Lock-up shift valve defective

5. Lock-up control valve defective

6. Lock-up t iming valve defective

7. Restricted cooler

• Check the H indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.

• Check ATF cooling system for restriction.

14-16


Lock-up clutch does not operate smoothly




4. Torque converter check valve defective



7. Lock-up t iming valve defective

• Check the B indicator l ight indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.

• Center all engine mounts.

Lock-up clutch does not engage



3. Mainshaft speed sensor defective

4. Countershaft speed sensor defective


6. Torque converter check valve defective



Check the E indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.

A/T gear position indicator does not indicate shift lever positions

1. Transmission range switch defective or out of adjustment



• Check the E indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.


Speedometer does not operate

Countershaft speed sensor defective

Check the B indicator light indication, and check for loose connectors.

14-17


System Description

General Operation The automatic transmission is a combinat ion of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled automatic transmission which provides 4 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line wi th the engine.

Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. They are connected to the engine crankshaft so they turn together as a unit as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a ring gear which meshes wi th the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly serves as a f lywheel t ransmit t ing power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has three parallel shafts: the mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line wi th the engine crankshaft. The mainshaft includes the 3rd and 4th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, reverse, and idler (reverse gear is integral wi th the 4th gear). The countershaft includes the final drive, 1st, 3rd, 4th, reverse, 2nd, park, and idler gears (the final drive gear is integral wi th the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st and 2nd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd and idler. The countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its center, providing 4th gear or reverse, depending wi th which way the selector moved. The gears on the mainshaft and the secondary shaft are in constant mesh wi th those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted f rom the mainshaft and the secondary shaft to the countershaft to provide H, 33, HI, LE and El positions.

Electronic Control The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves. Shift ing and lock-up are electronically control led for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located below the dashboard, under the f ront lower panel behind the center console.

Hydraulic Control The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body, and the accumulator body. They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve E, the servo control valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, the cooler check valve, and the ATF pump gears. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up t iming valve, and the lock-up control valve. The servo body contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, the CPC valves A and B, and 3rd and 4th accumulators. The accumulator body contains the 1st and 2nd accumulators and lubrication check valve. Fluid f rom the regulator passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The 1st, 3rd, and 4th clutches receive f lu id f rom their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd clutch receives f luid f rom the internal hydraulic circuit.

Shift Control Mechanism The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B whi le receiving input signal f rom various sensors located throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B control the CPC valves A and B to shift smoothly between lower gear and higher gear. This pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.

Lock-up Mechanism In H position (3rd and 4th), and S3 posit ion (3rd), pressurized f luid is drained f rom the back of the torque converter through a f luid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together wi th hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the t iming of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure changes to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up t iming valve control the range of lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the transmission housing. They are all control led by the PCM.

14-18

Gear Selection The shift lever has seven positions: B PARK, S REVERSE, M NEUTRAL, B 1st through 4th gear ranges, H 1st through 3rd gear ranges, [2] 2nd gear, and |T) 1st gear.

Position Description

E PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. Al l clutches released.

mREVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged wi th countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch locked.

I I NEUTRAL All clutches released.

B DRIVE (1st through 4th)

General dr iv ing; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th, depending on vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gears.

B DRIVE (1st through 3rd)

Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general dr iving; up-hill and down-hil l dr iv ing; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd gear.

(U SECOND Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces; stays in 2nd gear; does not shift up or down.

DO FIRST Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear; does not shift up.

Starting is possible only in OB and M positions through the use of a slide-type, neutral-safety switch.

Automatic Transaxle (A/T) Gear Position Indicator The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which gear has been selected without having to look down at the console.

(cont'd)

14-19


System Description (cont'd)

Clutches

The four-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.

1st Clutch The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft.

2nd Clutch The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.

3rd Clutch The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 3rd clutch is joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.

4th Clutch The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.

14-20

Transmission Sectional View

P I T O T F L A N G E ('00-01 m o d e l s

M A I N S H A F T 4TH G E A R

4 T H C L U T C H

3 R D C L U T C H

L U B R I C A T I O N P I T O T PIPE ('00-01 m o d e l s

C O U N T E R S H A F T R E V E R S E G E A R

P I T O T PIPE ('00-01 m o d e l s )

C O U N T E R S H A F T 2 N D G E A R

C O U N T E R S H A F T

R E V E R S E S E L E C T O R H U B

C O U N T E R S H A F T IDLER G E A R

R E V E R S E S E L E C T O R

C O U N T E R S H A F T 4 T H G E A R

S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T IDLER G E A R

S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T 2 N D G E A R

2 N D C L U T C H

S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T 1 S T G E A R

A T F P U M P D R I V E N G E A R

R I N G G E A R

T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R

L O C K - U P C L U T C H P I S T O N

D R I V E P L A T E

F I N A L D R I V E G E A R

C O U N T E R S H A F T 3 R D G E A R

C O U N T E R S H A F T 1 S T G E A R

F I N A L D R I V E N G E A R

D I F F E R E N T I A L A S S E M B L Y

(cont'd)

14-21



Power Flow

POSITION PART POSITION TORQUE

CONVERTER 1ST GEAR

1ST CLUTCH 2ND GEAR

2ND CLUTCH

3RD GEAR 3RD

CLUTCH

4TH REVERSE GEAR

PARK GEAR

POSITION TORQUE

CONVERTER 1ST GEAR

1ST CLUTCH 2ND GEAR

2ND CLUTCH

3RD GEAR 3RD

CLUTCH GEAR CLUTCH

REVERSE GEAR

PARK GEAR

O S o X X X X X X O

m o X X X X O O X

m o X X X X X X X

B 1ST O X X X X X X B

2ND O X O X X X X X

B

3RD O X X o X X X X

B

4TH O X X X o O X X

B 1ST O O X X X X X X B

2ND O X O X X X X X

B

3RD O X X O X X X X

m o X O X X X X X

m o O X X X X X X

OiOperates X-.Doesn't operate

Gear Operation

Gears on the mainshaft:

• The 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged wi th the mainshaft by the 3rd clutch. • The 4th gear is engaged/disengaged wi th the mainshaft by the 4th clutch. • The reverse gear is engaged/disengaged wi th the mainshaft by the 4th clutch. • The idler gear is splined wi th the mainshaft and rotates wi th the mainshaft.

Gears on the countershaft

• The final drive gear is integral w i th the countershaft. • The 1st gear, 3rd gear, 2nd gear, and park gear are splined wi th the countershaft and rotate wi th the countershaft. • The 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely f rom the countershaft. The reverse selector engages the 4th gear or the

reverse gear wi th the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined wi th the countershaft so that the 4th gear or reverse gear engage wi th the countershaft.

• The idler gear rotates freely f rom the countershaft.

Gears on the secondary shaft

• The 1st gear is engaged/disengaged wi th the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch. • The 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged wi th the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch. • The idler gear is splined wi th the secondary shaft and rotates wi th the secondary shaft.

14-22

OB Position Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.

HI Position Engine power transmitted f rom the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the countershaft idler gear, and the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear is engaged with the reverse selector hub and the countershaft by the reverse selector, when the shift lever is shifted in E l position f rom B position. The countershaft reverse gear is engaged when shifted f rom E position.


(cont'd)

14-23



Power Flow (cont'd)

In H or H posit ion, the opt imum gear is automatical ly selected f rom the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears, according to conditions such as the balance between the thrott le opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.

S or H Position in 1st gear and 0Q Position • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear wi th the

secondary shaft. • The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear. • The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft. • Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.

14-24

El or S Position in 2nd gear and OB Position • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the

secondary shaft. • The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear. • The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft. • Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.


(cont'd)

14-25



Power Flow (cont'd)

B or B Position in 3rd gear • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear wi th the

mainshaft. • The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft. • Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.


F I N A L D R I V E N G E A R

14-26

S Position in 4th gear • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector wi th the countershaft 4th gear whi le

the shift lever is in the forward range (B, B, U] and Q] position). • Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear wi th the

mainshaft. • The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft. • Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.


(cont'd)

14-27



Power Flow (cont'd)

SB Position • Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector wi th the countershaft (reverse gear

whi le the shift lever is in the OH position). • Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear wi th the

mainshaft. • The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear. • The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed via the reverse idler gear. • The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub. • Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.

M A I N S H A F T R E V E R S E G E A R


M A I N S H A F T

C O U N T E R S H A F T


C O U N T E R S H A F T R E V E R S E G E A R C O U N T E R S H A F T



R E V E R S E I D L E R G E A R F I N A L D R I V E N G E A R

14-28

Electronic Control System

Functional Diagram The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Model (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves. Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located below the dashboard, under the front lower panel behind the center console.

P C M

Throttle Position Sensor Signal

Engine Coolant Temperature S e n s o r Signal

INTERLOCK CONTROL UNIT

D4

D3

H Indicator Light

Self -Diagnosis Signal

PGM-FI Control S y s t e m

A / T Control S y s t e m

Shift Control

Lock-up Control

Self -Diagnosis Function

> 4

Data Link Connector

Shift Solenoid Va lve A

Shift Solenoid Valve B

Shift Solenoid Valve C

Automatic Transaxle Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A

Automatic Transaxle Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B

2nd Clutch Pressure Swi tch

3rd Clutch Pressure Swi tch

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Va lve

Mainshaft S p e e d S e n s o r Signal

Countershaft S p e e d Sensor Signal

(cont'd)

14-29



Electronic Control System (cont'd)

Electronic Controls Location

K E Y I N T E R L O C K S O L E N O I D

S H I F T L O C K S O L E N O I D

2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E S W I T C H

S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E C

14-30

Shift Control Shifting is related to engine torque through the solenoid valves, which are controlled by the PCM. The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent f rom sensors, and actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, and C to control shifting. Also, a Grade Logic Control System to controls shift ing in E and B positions whi le the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed. The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, and C is shown in the table below.

Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves Position Gear position A B C

B,S Shifting f rom M position ON ON ON B,S Stays in 1st OFF ON ON

B,S Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd ON ON ON

B,S

Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF

B,S

Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd ON OFF OFF

B,S

Stays in 3rd ON OFF ON

B Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF ON B Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF

m 2nd ON ON OFF

m 1st OFF ON ON

m Shifting f rom E and M position OFF ON ON m Stays in reverse OFF ON OFF

m

Reverse inhibit OFF ON ON

m Park OFF ON OFF

m Neutral OFF ON OFF NOTE: For a description of the reverse inhibit mode, refer to page 14-56.

Lock-up Control The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls modulator pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and OFF. The PCM controls the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON, the condit ion of lock-up starts. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B regulate A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure, and apply the pressure to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up t iming valve. The lock-up control mechanism operates in 3rd, and 4th gear in B and in 3rd gear in B positions.

(cont'd)

14-31

automatic Transmission


Electronic Control System (cont 'd)

Grade Logic Control System

How it works: The PCM compares actual dr iving condit ions wi th memorized dr iv ing conditions, based on the input f rom the countershaft speed sensor, the thrott le position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the brake pedal posit ion switch signal, and the shift level posit ion signal, to control shifting whi le the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed.

S E N S O R S / S W I T C H E S S I G N A L S D E T E C T E D P C M

o o o c

">

a

C o u n t e r s h a f t S p e e d S e n s o r

Thro t t l e Pos i t ion S e n s o r Driving R e s i s t a n c e

E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r

C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e

T r a n s m i s s i o n R a n g e S w i t c h

B or IPJI P o s i t i o n

C a l c u l a t i o n of ac tua l a c c e l e r a t i o n

De tec t ion of s t a n d a r d a c c e l e r a t i o n (in M e m o r y )

C a l c u l a t i o n of d e c e l e r a t ion

C a l c u l a t i o n of g rad ien t

S e l e c t i o n of Sh i f t ing M o d e

X » N o r m a l M o d e (Flat r o a d m o d e ) • A s c e n d i n g M o d e • F u z z y L o g i c » D e s c e n d i n g M o d e > G r a d u a l D e s c e n d i n g M o d e • S t e e p D e s c e n d i n g M o d e • Dece le ra t ion M o d e

A u t o m a t i c 4 S p e e d s

14-32

Ascending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is cl imbing a hill in B and E positions, the system extends the engagement area of 2nd gear and 3rd gear to prevent the transmission f rom frequently shift ing between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power when needed.

NOTE: • Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, enable the PCM's

fuzzy logic to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient. • Fuzzy logic is a form of artificial intelligence that lets computers respond to changing conditions much like a human

mind would.

100%

ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule

FLAT ROAD MODE GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE STEEP ASCENDING MODE

3RD-4TH SHIFTING CHARACTERISTICS CONTROL AREA

Vehicle speed

Descending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in B and B positions, the shift-up speed f rom 3rd to 4th gear and f rom 2nd to 3rd (when the thrott le is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to widen the 3rd gear and 2nd gear dr iving areas. This, in combination wi th engine braking f rom the deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are two descending modes wi th different 3rd gear driving areas and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When the vehicle is in 4th gear, and you are decelerating when you are applying the brakes on a steep hil l, the transmission wi l l downshift to 3rd gear. When you accelerate, the transmission wi l l then return to higher gear.

100% 3RD44TH

DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule

FLAT ROAD MODE

GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE

STEEP DESCENDING MODE

Vehicle speed

Deceleration Control

When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for deceleration control to reduce the number of t imes the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating f rom speeds above 27 mph (43 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission f rom 4th to 2nd earlier than normal to cope wi th upcoming acceleration.

(cont'd)

14-33




PCM Electrical Connections

BATTERY

(+)

IGNITION SWITCH

IG1

PGM-FI MAIN RELAY

£ 3 -

TTT

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

77T IGNITION SWITCH

IG1 -»

PG1

PG2

IGP1

1GP2

VBU

VCC2 TPS SG2

PGM-FI CONTROL SYSTEM AUTOMATIC

TRANSAXLE CONTROL SYSTEM

LG1

LG2

GAUGE ASSEMBLY

(b d) <h <k <& 0

VBSOL

VSS OUT

. LS A—

LSB4-

LS B—

SHA

NMSG

NC

NCSG

ILU

I A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID

» VALVE A

, A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE j CONTROL SOLENOID 1 VALVE B

I TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID

' VALVE

COUNTERSHAFT 'SPEED SENSOR*

MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DRIVER'S)

2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH

3RD CLUTCH 824 C98-99l PRESSURE SWITCH D13 (00-01)

('01 model)

PCM Connector Terminal Locations

(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 § 10 (11)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 (31) 32

A (32P) 3 (25P)

2 / 5 6 7 8 9 10

A / / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / / / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /

C(31P) D(16P)

4-34

PCM Inputs and Outputs

The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals related to the A/T control system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in section 1 1 .

P C M C o n n e c t o r T e r m i n a l L o c a t i o n s

/ 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10 / 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 / 32

A (32P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

B (25P) C ( 3 1 P )

1 2 / 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ / / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /

1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

D (16P)


Terminal Number

Wire Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage

A5 BLU/GRN CRS Downshift signal input f rom cruise control unit

When cruise control is used: Pulsing signal

A9 BLU/WHT VSSOUT Vehicle speed signal detected f rom countershaft speed sensor

Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal

A10 BRN SCS Timing and adjustment service check signal

With ignit ion switch ON (II) and data link connector open: 5 V With ignit ion switch ON (II) and data link connector connected with Honda PGM tester: 0 V

A14 GRN/BLK D4IND D4 indicator light control When ignit ion switch is first turned ON (II): Battery voltage for two seconds In 11 position: Battery voltage

A28 WHT/RED ILU Interlock control When ignit ion switch ON (II), brake pedal pressed, and accelerator pedal released: Battery voltage

A32 WHT/BLK BKSW Brake pedal position switch signal output

Brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage Brake pedal released: 0 V

(cont'd)

14-35






(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 (31) 32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

1 2 / 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ / / / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / / A 25 26 27 28 29 30 /

1 2 3 / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

A (32P) B (25P) C ( 3 1 P ) D(16P)

PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)

Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage Number

B1 YEL/BLK IGP1 Power supply circuit f rom main relay

With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage With ignit ion switch OFF: 0 V

B2 BLK PG1 Ground B8 WHT LS A - A/T clutch pressure control

solenoid valve A power supply negative electrode

B9 YEL/BLK IGP2 Power supply circuit f rom main relay

With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage With ignition switch OFF: 0 V

B10 BLK PG2 Ground B14 BLU/BLK OP2SW A/T 2nd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage

C98-99) switch signal input (No 2nd clutch pressure) B14 BLU/BLK ATPNP Transmission range switch [P] In IE and \M positions: 0 V

('00-01) and ID positions input In other than 00 and fNj position: Battery voltage

B17 RED LSA+ A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A power supply positive electrode

With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal

B18 GRN LSB - A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B power supply negative electrode

B20 BRN/BLK LG1 Ground B21 WHT/YEL VBU Back-up power supply Always battery voltage B22 BLK

C98-99) BRN/BLK ('00-01)

LG2 Ground

B24 BLU/WHT OP3SW A/T 3rd clutch pressure switch signal input

With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage (No 3rd clutch pressure)

B25 ORN LSB + A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B power supply positive electrode

With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal

14-36

< S 0

PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)

Terminal Number


D1 YEL LC Torque converter clutch solenoid valve control

During lock-up condit ions: Battery voltage During no lock-up condit ion: 0 V

D2 GRN/WHT SHB Shift solenoid valve B control Battery voltage in fo l lowing positions: • H , BO positions. • E, and S positions in 1st and 2nd gear • OB, \E\, and M positions 0 V in fo l lowing positions: • E, and S3 positions in 3rd gear • E position in 4th gear

D3 GRN SHC Shift solenoid valve C control Battery voltage in fo l lowing positions: • 111 position • E, and B positions in 1st and 3rd gear 0 V in fo l lowing positions: • H] position • E, and H positions in 2nd gear • S position in 4th gear • H, OB, and M positions

D4 Not used D5 BLK/YEL VBSOL Power supply for solenoid

valves (Fuse No.6 in driver's under-dash fuse/relay box)

With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage With ignition switch OFF: 0 V

D6 WHT ATPR Transmission range switch H position input

In OH posit ion: 0 V

In other than El posit ion: Battery voltage D7 BLU/YEL SHA Shift solenoid valve A control Battery voltage in fo l lowing positions: • S] position • H, and E positions in 2nd and 3rd gear 0 V in fo l lowing positions: • H] position • E, and B positions in 1st gear • B position in 4th gear • B, M, and M positions

(cont'd)

14-37






(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 / 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 / 5

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22) 23 24 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

25 26 27 28 29 30 (31) 32 A 20 21 22 23 24 25 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 / 13 14 15 16

A (32P) B (25P) C ( 3 1 P ) D (16P)

PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)

Terminal Number


D8 PNK ATPD3 Transmission range switch B position input

In H position: 0 V In other than E posit ion: Battery voltage

D9 YEL ATPD4 Transmission range switch E position input

In B position: 0 V In other than B position: Battery voltage

D10 BLU NC Countershaft speed sensor input

Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal When vehicle is stopped: Approx. 0 V

D11 RED NM Mainshaft speed sensor input Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal When engine is stopped: Approx. 0 V

D12 WHT NMSG Mainshaft speed sensor ground

D13 C98-99)

BLU/WHT ATPNP Transmission range switch OS and 03] positions input

In E and H positions: 0 V In other than [Pj and M posit ion: Battery voltage

D13 ('00-01)

BLU/BLK OP2SW A/T 2nd clutch pressure switch signal input

With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage (No 2nd clutch pressure)

D14 BLU ATP2 Transmission range switch [2] position input

In [JO position: 0 V In other than \2\ posit ion: Battery voltage

D15 BRN ATP1 Transmission range switch CD position input

In [T| position: 0 V In other than \T\ position: Battery voltage

D16 GRN NCSG Countershaft speed sensor ground

14-38

Hydraulic Controls

The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body and the accumulator body. The ATF pump is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid f lows through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve directing pressure to each of the clutches. The shift solenoid valves B and C are mounted on the outside of the torque converter housing. The shift solenoid valve A and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve are mounted on the torque converter housing as an assembly. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the transmission housing.

(cont'd)

14-39


System Description (cont 'd)

Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)

Main Valve Body The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve E, the servo control valve, the cooler check valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, and the ATF pump gears. The pr imary function of the main valve body are to switch f luid pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.

M O D U L A T O R V A L V E S H I F T V A L V E D

S H I F T V A L V E C

R E V E R S E C P C V A L V E

M A N U A L V A L V E

S H I F T V A L V E E

R E L I E F V A L V E

L O C K - U P S H I F T V A L V E

M A I N V A L V E B O D Y

C O O L E R C H E C K V A L V E

S E R V O C O N T R O L V A L V E T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C H E C K V A L V E

Regulator Valve Body The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up t iming valve and the lock-up control valve.

R E G U L A T O R V A L V E B O D Y

R E G U L A T O R V A L V E

L O C K - U P T I M I N G V A L V E L O C K - U P C O N T R O L V A L V E

14-40

Regulator Valve The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure f rom the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, whi le also furnishing f lu id to the lubricating system and torque converter. Fluid f rom the ATF pump f lows through B and B\ Fluid entering f rom B f lows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the f luid port to the torque converter and the relief valve. The f luid f lows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve moves to the left side. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes, and the amount of f luid f rom B' through torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the line pressure.

NOTE: When used, " le f t " or " r i gh t " indicates direction on the il lustration below.

From A T F PUMP

To T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R T o LUBRICATION


Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction. The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap. When the vehicle is accelerating or cl imbing (Torque Converter Range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft, and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its max imum when the stator torque reaction reaches its max imum.

R E G U L A T O R V A L V E BODY


R E G U L A T O R SPRING C A P

S T A T O R S H A F T A R M

S T A T O R


S T A T O R S H A F T

(cont'd)

14-41



Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)

Servo Body The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, shift valve A, shift valve B, CPC valves A and B, and the 3rd and 4th accumulators.

C P C V A L V E A

Accumulator Body The accumulator body is on the torque converter housing, next to the main valve body. It contains the 1st and 2nd accumulators and the lubrication check valve.

14-42

Hydraulic Flow

Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission f luid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF f lowing f rom the ATF pump becomes line pressure that's regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure f rom the regulator valve enters the torque converter through the lock-up shift valve and it is discharged f rom the torque converter. The torque converter check valve prevents torque converter pressure f rom rising. The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves. Apply ing shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulated the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure and apply the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure to CPC valves A and B. When shifting between upper gear and lower gear, the clutch is engaged by pressure f rom the CPC pressure mode. The PCM controls one of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement switches the port of the CPC and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and the CPC pressure is intercepted. Engaging the clutch wi th line pressure happens when shifting is completed.

Hydraulic pressure at the parts is as fol lows:

PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE

1 LINE 5H CPC B or LINE 57 LS B 3 LINE 5J CPC B or LINE 58 LS A o r LS B 3' LINE 5K CPC B or LINE 90 TORQUE CONVERTER 3" LINE 5K' CPC B or LINE 90' TORQUE CONVERTER 4 LINE 6 MODULATE 91 TORQUE CONVERTER 4' LINE SA S H A 9 1 ' TORQUE CONVERTER 4 " LINE SB SH B 92 TORQUE CONVERTER

4A CPC A SC SHC 93 ATF COOLER 4B CPC B LA LC 94 TORQUE CONVERTER 5A CPC A 9 LINE 95 LUBRICATION 5D CPC B 10 1ST CLUTCH 95' LUBRICATION 5B CPC A or LINE 20 2ND CLUTCH 96 TORQUE CONVERTER 5E CPC A or LINE 25 LINE 97 TORQUE CONVERTER 5F CPC A or LINE 30 3RD CLUTCH 99 SUCTION 5F' CPC A or LINE 40 4TH CLUTCH X DRAIN 5C CPC B or LINE 41 4TH CLUTCH HX HIGH POSITION DRAIN 5G CPC B or LINE 56 LS A AX AIR DRAIN

NOTE: • CPC: Clutch Pressure Control pressure • SH: Shift Solenoid pressure • LS: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid pressure • LC: Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid pressure

(cont'd)

14-43



Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)

SO Position

The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The condit ions of the shift solenoid valve and positions of the shift valve are as fol lows: • The shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A is moved to the left side. • The shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and the shift valve B remains in the right side. • The shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C remains in the left side. Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve and stops at shift valve D. Line pressure (1) also f lows to the modulator valve, and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) f lows to the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. Under this condit ion, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.

14-44

H Posit ion; 1st gear shift ing f rom M posit ion

The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves A and C ON when shift ing to S position f rom SO. Shift solenoid valve B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of the shift valve C is released, then the shift valve C is moved to the right side. Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the left side of the shift valve A is released, then shift valve A is moved to the right side. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A regulates LS A pressure (56) and applies it to CPC valve A. Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (4) at the manual valve, and f lows to shift valve C and CPC valve A. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) and passes through shift valve C, A, and B, then CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve B. 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch is engaged wi th pressure of the CPC pressure mode. Line pressure (4) passes through shift valve A and B, then stops at shift valve B.

NOTE: • When used, " le f t " or " r igh t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit. • Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.

(cont'd)

14-45




H Position: Driving in 1st gear

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, but shift solenoid valves B and C remain ON. SH A pressure (SA) is applied to the left side of shift valve A, then shift valve A is moved to the left side. This movement switches the port of line pressure and CPC pressure on shift valve A. The 1st clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 1st clutch is engaged securely. CPC A pressure (5E) stops at shift valve B.

NOTE: • When used, " le f t " or " r i gh t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit. • Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.

1ST ACCUMULATOR 4TH ACCUMULATOR 3RD CLUTCH *TH CLUTCH

SOLENOID VALVE A

A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE a

A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

14-46

B Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, Shift solenoid valves B and C remain ON. Then shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the left side of the shift valve A is released. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The PCM also controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B apply their pressure to the CPC valves A and B. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at the CPC valve B, and CPC B pressure passes through shift valves C, B, and A, to become 2nd clutch pressure. The 1st and 2nd clutches are engaged with the CPC pressure mode.

NOTE: * When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit. * Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.

(cont'd)

14-47




B Position: Driving in 2nd gear

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Releasing LS A pressure in the CPC valve A releases CPC A pressure in the 1st clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is t u m d OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely. The CPC B pressure (5D) stops at shift valve B.


14-48

E Position: Shift ing between 2nd gear and 3rd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF. The PCM also control A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and C remains OFF. Shift solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and SH B pressure (SB) is applied to the right side of shift valve B. Then shift valve B is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at the CPC valve A. The CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve B, and f lows to the 3rd clutch. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by switching the position of shift valve B.


(cont'd)

14-49




S3 Position; Driving in 3rd gear

The PCM turns the shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release LS B pressure (57). Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and B remains OFF. Releasing LS B pressure in the CPC valve B releases CPC B pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged securely. The CPC A pressure (4A) stops at shift valve E.

NOTE: • When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit. • Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.

14 -50

IE Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valve B remains OFF, and C remains ON. Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and SH A pressure (SA) is applied to the left side of shift valve A. Then shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch line pressure and CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at CPC valve B. The CPC B pressure (4B) becomes 4th clutch pressure (41) at shift valve D, and f lows to the 4th clutch via the manual valve. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by switching the position of shift valve A.

NOTE: • When used, ' l e f t " or " r i gh t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit. • Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.

(cont'd)

14-51




E Position: Driving in 4th gear

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) releases CPC A pressure in the 3 rd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The CPC B pressure (5B) changes to line pressure (5B) at shift valve C, and f lows to the 4th clutch via shift valve B, shift valve C, shift valve D, and the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode by switching the posit ion of shift valve C, and 4th clutch is engaged securely. The CPC B pressure (5D) stops at shift valve A.

14-52

OH Position

The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as fol lows: • Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and the shift valve A is in the right side. • Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and the shift valve B is in the right side. • Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C is moved to the left side. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Line pressure (4) f rom the manual valve becomes line pressure (5C) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) f lows to shift valve A via shift valve B, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20). The 2nd clutch pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, and 2nd clutch is engaged.


(cont'd)

14-53




H] Position

The PCM the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as fo l lows: • Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift valve A is moved to the left side. • Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and shift valve B is in the right side. • Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and shift valve C is in the right side. Line pressure (4) becomes line pressure (5B) at shift valve C. Line pressure <5C) f lows to shift valve B via shift valve A, and becomes 1st clutch pressure (10). 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then 1st clutch is engaged.

14-54

El Position: Shifting to E position from E or H position

Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and f lows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3) is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes line pressure (3'). Line pressure (3') pushes the servo valve to the reverse posit ion, passes through the servo valve, and f lows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') becomes 4th clutch pressure (40). The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied to the 4th clutch, and 4th clutch is engaged wi th the reverse CPC pressure mode.


(cont'd)

14-5




El Position: Driving in reverse gear

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure. Line pressure to the 4th clutch is same as shifting to El position, and 4th clutch pressure increases. The 4th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.

14-56

OS Position

Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SO is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the servo valve. Line pressure (3'} passes through the servo valve and f lows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') is intercepted at the manual valve, and is not applied to the clutches.

NOTE: • When used, " le f t " or " r igh t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit. . Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.

(cont'd)

14-57



Lock-up System

In H position (3rd and 4th), and S position (3rd), pressurized f luid is drained f rom the back of the torque converter through a f luid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together wi th hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the t iming of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure changes to switch lock-up ON and OFF. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up t iming valve control the range of lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the transmission housing. They are controlled by the PCM.

General Operation

1. Operation (clutch on) Wi th the lock-up clutch on, f luid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the lock-up piston is drained off, and the converter f luid exerts pressure through the piston against the torque converter cover. As a result, the converter turbine is locked to the converter cover. The effect is to bypass the converter, placing the vehicle in direct drive.

M A I N S H A F T

2. Operation (clutch off) With the lock-up clutch off, f lu id f lows in the reverse of CLUTCH ON. As a result, the lock-up piston moves away f rom the converter cover, and torque converter lock-up is released.

MAINSHAFT

14-58

No Lock-up

The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA) on the left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92) becomes torque converter pressure (94), and enters into the left side of the torque converter to disengage the lock-up clutch. The lock-up clutch is OFF.


TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

(cont'd)

14-59



Lock-up System (cont'd)

Partial Lock-up

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM to release LC pressure (LA) in the left side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to the left side to switch the port leading torque converter pressure to the left side and right side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92) f lows to the right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, and LS A or LS B pressure is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up t iming valve. The posit ion of the lock-up control valve depends on torque converter pressure and LS A or LS B pressure. When LS A or LS B pressure (58) is lower, torque converter pressure (91) f rom the lock-up t iming valve is lower. The lock-up clutch is engaged partially. LS A or LS B (58) increases, and the lock-up t iming valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure to high. The lock-up clutch is then engaged securely. Under this condit ion, the lock-up clutch is engaged by pressure f rom the right side of the torque converter; this condit ion is partial lock-up.


14-60

Full Lock-up

When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to increase LS A o r LS B pressure (58). The LS A or LS B pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up t iming valve, and moves them to the left side. Under this condit ion, torque converter back pressure is released fully, causing the lock-up clutch to be ful ly engaged.


(cont'd)

14-61



Circuit Diagram

QNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

14-62

' KEY INTERLOCK SWITCH

KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID

STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY

PARK PIN SWITCH

MAINSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR SPEED SENSOR

CRUISE CONTROL BSU UNIT UNIT

V

BLK

A WHT/BLK

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH .

BRN BLU/GRN

r©i ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

H

H

RED WHT BLU GRN RED/WHT

3

STOP SW

Li I CPS

H NM NMSG NC NCSG

T LT

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

LS1P LC SHA SHB SHC

B25 D1 ' >D7 C D2 D3

WHT RED GRN ORN YEL BLU/YEL GRN/WHT

BLU/YEL GRN/WHT

A/T CLUTCH A/T CLUTCH . PRESSURE CONTROL PRESSURE CONTROL TORQUE SOLENOID VALVE A SOLENOID VALVE B CONVERTER

CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

SHIFT SOLENOID SHIFT VALVE B SOLENOID VALVE A

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVEC

BRN/BLK BLK {'98-99) BRN/BLK COO 01)

G101

Q 2ND CLUTCH Q \ PRESSURE \

r » \ SWITCH n \

3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH

2 1

BRN/BLK BRN/BLK

G101 G101

PCM Connector Terminal Locations

(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) e 9 10 (11)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 (22) 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 (31) 32

A(32P)

1 2 3 / 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ / 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 20 21 / / / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /

C(31P)

2 3 / Fl 6 7 a 9 10 "hi 13 14 15 16

D(16P)

14


DTC Troubleshooting

D T C P1753: Problem in Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit



2. Disconnect the B (25P) and D (16P) connectors f rom the PCM.


4. Measure the voltage between the D1 and B20 or B22 terminals.

P C M C O N N E C T O R S L C ( Y E L )

B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

D (16P)

1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )


Is there voltage?

Y E S -Repair short to power in the wire between the D1 terminal and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve. •



6. Measure the resistance between the D1 and B20 or B22 terminals.


fr^\ LC (YEL)

B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

D (16P)

1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ^ ( B R N / B L K )


Is the resistance 12-250, ?



7. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22 terminals and body ground.


LG1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)




NO- Repair open in the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and ground (G101).B

14-64

8. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A 3P connector.

9. Check for continuity between the D1 and B20 or B22 terminals.

P C M C O N N E C T O R S / ^ x L C ( Y E L )

B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

D ( 1 6 P )

1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

LG1 ( B R N / B L K )



Y E S - Repair short to ground in the wire between the D1 terminal and the torque converter clutch solenoid v a l v e . •


10. Measure the resistance between the No.3 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A connector and body ground.

T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C L U T C H S O L E N O I D V A L V E / S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E A C O N N E C T O R (3P)



P C M C O N N E C T O R S V B S O L ( B L K / Y E L )

B (25P) D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )



Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

NO - Check for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b o x . •


Is the resistance 12-250, ?

YES —Check for open in the wire between the D1 terminal and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve. •

NO —Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A . H

14-65



DTC P1705: Short In Transmission Range Switch Circuit



2. Observe the A/T gear position indicator, and shift each position separately.

Do any indicators stay on when the shift lever is not in that position?

Y E S - G o to step 3. NO The system is OK at this t ime. Check the wi re harness for damage. •

3. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector.

Do all gear position indicators go out?

Y E S —Replace the transmission range switch. • N O - G o to step 4.

4. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF, and connect the transmission range switch connector.


6. Shift to all positions other than El.



L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

( B R N / B L K )



Y E S - G o to step 8. NO —Check for short in the wire between the D6 terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T gear position indicator, and check for an open in the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and body ground (G101). If wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

8. Shift to all positions other than \E or H.

9. Measure ATP NP voltage between these terminals:

• '98-99 models: Between terminals D13 and B20 or B22.

• '00-01 models: Between terminals B14 and B20 or B22.

'98-99 models

B (25P)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13

L G 2 (BLK)

14 15

10

16

12

A T P N P ( B L U / W H T )

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )


'00-01 models:


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )





N O C h e c k for short in the wire between the D13 terminal and the transmission range switch, and in the OB and M position signal wires between the A/T gear position indicator and the transmission range switch. If wires are OK, check for loose terminal f it in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.•

10. Shift to all positions other than H.

14-66

Measure the voltage between the D9 and B20 or B22 terminals.

B (25P)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 14 15

L G 2 ( B L K : ' 9 8 - 9 9 ) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

10 12

A T P D 4 ( Y E L )




NO—Check for short in the wire between the D9 terminal and the transmission range switch. If wire is OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

12. Shift to all positions other than H .


B (2SP)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

A 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

10 12

16

A T P D3 (PNK)



YES - Go to step 14.

NO —Check for short in the wire between the D8 terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T gear position indicator. If wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

(cont'd)

14-67



14. Shift to all positions other than HI.


B (25P)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 14

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : ' 00 -01 )

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

15

10

16

12

A T P 2 ( B L U )




NO —Check for short in the wire between the D14 terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T gear position indicator. If wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. H


B (25P)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

10 12

16

A T P 1 (BRN)



YES-Check for loose terminal f i t in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

N O - Check for short in the wire between the D15 terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T gear position indicator. If wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

16. Shift to all positions other than [TQ.

14-68

DTC P1706: Open In Transmiss ion Range Switch Circuit (no gear position inputs)

NOTE: Record ail freeze data before you troubleshoot.

1. Test the transmission range switch (see page 14-

140).

Is the switch OK?


NO —Replace the transmission range switch. •




L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)




NO -Repair open in the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and ground (G101), or repair poor ground (G10D.B


5. Shift to B posit ion.


B (25P)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A 17 18

20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

10 12

16

A T P D 4 ( Y E L )


Is there voltage?

Y E S —Repair open in the wire between the D9 terminal and the transmission range switch. •


7. Shift to OB posit ion.


B (25P)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

14 15

10

16

12

A T P R (WHT)


Is there voltage?

Y E S — Repair open in the wire between the D6 terminal and the transmission range switch. •


9. Shift to B or 1 ] position.

(cont'd)

14-69



10. Measure ATP NP voltage between these terminals:

• '98-99 models: Between terminals D13 and B20 or B22.

• '00-01 models: Between terminals B14 and B20 or B22.

'98-99 models:


B (25P) D ( 1 6 P )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13

L G 2 ( B L K )

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

14

8 9

15

11 12



'00-01 models:


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )



Is there voltage?

Y E S —Repair open in the wire between the D13 C98-99) or B14 ('00-01) terminal and the transmission range switch. •


11. Shift to E position.


B (25P)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

10 12

16

A T P D3 (PNK)


Is there voltage?

Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the D8 terminal and the transmission range switch. •


13. Shift to [2 position.


B (25P)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14

L G 2 (BLK: '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

15

10

16

12

A T P 2 ( B L U )


Is there voltage?

Y E S —Repair open in the wire between the D14 terminal and the transmission range switch. •


14-70

15. Shift to Q] position.


B (25P)


D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

10 12

16

A T P 1 (BRN)


Is there voltage?

YES —Repair open in the wire between the D15 terminal and the transmission range switch. •

IMO - Check for loose terminal f it in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

14-71



DTC P0753: Problem In Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit



2. Disconnect PCM connectors B (25P) and D (16P).



P C M C O N N E C T O R S S H A ( B L U / Y E L )

B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

D(16P)

14 15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )


Is there voltage?

Y E S —Repair short to power in the wire between the D7 terminal and the shift solenoid valve A. •





B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13

D (16P)

14 15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ^ ( B R N / B L K )


Is the resistance 12-25 Q ?





L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)




NO —Repair open in the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and ground (G101).B

14-72

< 3 ®

8. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A 3P connector.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13

D (16P)

14 15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

LG1 ( B R N / B L K )



Y E S — Repair short to ground in the wire between the D7 terminal and shift solenoid valve A H


10. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A connector and body ground.

T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C L U T C H S O L E N O I D V A L V E / S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E A C O N N E C T O R (3P)




B (25P) D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15

10

16

12

LG2IBLK: '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

LG1 ( B R N / B L K )




NO -Check for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.B

S H A (WHT)



Y E S —Check for open in the wire between the D7 terminal and shift solenoid valve AM

NO —Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A. •

14-73



D T C P0758: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit




3. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II)*


P C M C O N N E C T O R S S H B ( G R N / W H T )

B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14

D (16P)

15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : ' 9 8 - 9 9 ) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )


Is there voltage? Y E S - Repair short to power in the wire between the D2 terminal and the shift solenoid valve B. •





B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14

D (16P)

15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )





7. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22 terminals and body ground individually.


L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : ' 9 8 - 9 9 ) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)




NO -Repa i r open in the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and ground (G10D.H

14-74

® 0

8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector.



B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14

D (16P)

15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

LG1 ^ ( B R N / B L K )


Is there continuity ? YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between the D2 terminal and the shift solenoid valve B •

NO - Go to step 10.

10. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the solenoid valve connector.

S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E B C O N N E C T O R



YES —Check for open in the wires between the D2 terminal and the shift solenoid valve B and between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve B connector and ground (G101). •

NO —Replace the shift solenoid valve B. •




B (25P) D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15

10 12

L G 2 ( B L K ; ' 9 8 - 9 9 ) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 w

( B R N / B L K )


Is there approx. battery voltage? YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

N O - C h e c k f o r blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.H

14-75



D T C P0720: Problem in Countershaft S p e e d S e n s o r Circuit

NOTE: Record ail freeze data before you troubleshoot.

1. Check the countershaft speed sensor instal lat ion.

Is the countershaft speed sensor installed properly?


NO—Reinstall and recheck •

2. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor 2P connector.

3. Measure countershaft speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector.

C O U N T E R S H A F T S P E E D S E N S O R C O N N E C T O R

T e r m i n a l s i d e of m a l e t e r m i n a l s

Is the resistance 400- 600 Q ?


NO —Replace the countershaft speed sensor. •

4. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P).

5. Check for continuity between body ground and the D10 terminal and D16 terminal individually.

P C M C O N N E C T O R D (16P)

N C ( B L U )

N C S G ( G R N )



YES —Repair short to ground in the wires between the D10 and D16 terminals and the countershaft speed sensor. •


6. Connect the countershaft speed sensor connector.

7. Measure the resistance between the D10 and D16 terminals.


N C ( B L U )

13 14 15 16

N C S G ( G R N )

11 12



YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

NO — Repair loose terminal or open in the wires between the D10 and D16 terminals and the countershaft speed sensor. •

14-76

DTC P0715: Problem in Mainshaft Speed Sensor Circuit

NOTE; • Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot, * Code P0715 (15) on the PCM doesn't always mean

there's an electrical problem in the mainshaft or countershaft speed sensor circuit; code P0715 (15) may also indicate a mechanical problem in the transmission. Any problem causing irregular countershaft to mainshaft speed difference can cause this code.

1. Check the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensor installation.

Are the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensor installed properly?


NO —Reinstall and recheck. •

2. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor 2P connector.

3. Measure mainshaft speed sensor resistance at the sensor connector.

M A I N S H A F T S P E E D S E N S O R C O N N E C T O R

1 2




NO —Replace the mainshaft speed sensor. •


5. Check for continuity between body ground and the D11 terminal and D12 terminal individually.


1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 N M S G (WHT)

N M (RED)



Y E S —Repair short to ground in the wires between the D11 and D12 terminals and the mainshaft speed senso r . •


6. Connect the mainshaft speed sensor connector.

7. Measure the resistance between the D11 and D12 terminals.


1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 N M S G (WHT)

N M (RED)



Y E S —Run the Electrical Troubleshooting Flowchart for code P0720 (code 9). Check for loose terminal f i t in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •


(cont'd)

14-77



8. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor 2P connector.

9. Check for continuity between the D11 terminal and the No. 1 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor connector.


1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 N M ( R E D )

M A I N S H A F T S P E E D R E D S E N S O R C O N N E C T O R f



YES— Go to step 10.

NO— Repair open in the wire between the D11 terminal and the mainshaft speed sensor. •

10. Check for continuity between the D12 terminal and the No. 2 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor connector.


1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 N M S G (WHT)

M A I N S H A F T S P E E D S E N S O R C O N N E C T O R

1 2



YES- Check for loose terminal f it in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

NO —Repair open in the wire between the D12 terminal and the mainshaft speed sensor. •

14-78

DTC P1768: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit

NOTE; Record all freeze data before you t roubleshoot

1. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A 2P connector.

2. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid resistance at the solenoid valve connector.

A / T C L U T C H P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E A C O N N E C T O R


Is the resistance approx. 5 Q?

YES —Go to step3. NO Replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A •


4. Check for continuity between body ground and the B8 terminal and the B17 terminal individually.


L S A - (WHT)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 2 5

L S A + (RED)



YES —Repair short to ground in the wires between the B8 and B17 terminals and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A • NO - Go to step 5.

5. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector.

6. Measure the resistance between the B8 and B17 terminals.


L S A - (WHT)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L S A + ( R E D )


Is the resistance approx. 5 Q ?

YES- Go to step 7. NO —Repair loose terminal or open in the wires between the B8 and B17 terminals and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A •





B (25P) D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15

10 12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )


Is there approx. battery voltage?

Y E S - Go to step 10. NO -Check for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box •

(cont'd)

14-79






L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 (BLK: '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)



YES-Check for loose terminal f it in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

NO —Repair open in the wire between the B2, B10, B20 and B22 terminals and ground (G101). Repair poor ground (G10D.H

14-80

0 0

DTC P0763: Problem In Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit

NOTE; Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.





P C M C O N N E C T O R S S H C (GRN)

B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

D ( 1 6 P )

1

13 14 15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )


Is there voltage?

Y E S - Repair short to power in the wire between the D3 terminal and the shift solenoid valve CM

NO Go to step 5.



P C M C O N N E C T O R S S H C ( G R N )

B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

D (16P)

1

14 15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : ' 9 8 - 9 9 ) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )




NO - Go to step 7.



L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)




NO —Repair open in the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and ground (G10D.B

(cont'd)

14-81



8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector.


P C M C O N N E C T O R S S H C ( G R N )

B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

D (16P)

1

13 14 15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )



Y E S —Repair short to ground in the wire between the D3 terminal and the shift solenoid valve C. •


10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid valve connector.

S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E C C O N N E C T O R



Y E S —Check for open in the wires between the D3 terminal and the shift solenoid valve C and between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid valve C connector and ground (G101).H

NO —Replace shift solenoid valve C.B




B (25P) D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

A 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ^ ( B R N / B L K )



Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.•

NO -Check for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.H

14-82

DTC P1773: Problem in A /T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit


1. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B 2P connector.

2. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid resistance at the solenoid valve connector.

A / T C L U T C H P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E B C O N N E C T O R

1 2

L


Is the resistance approx. 5 q?


NO - Replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B .B


4. Check for continuity between body ground and the B18 terminal and the B25 terminal individually.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 L

L S B + (ORN)



Y E S - Repair short to ground in the wires between the B18 and B25 terminals and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B.M

NO Go to step 5.

5. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B 2P connector.

6. Measure the resistance between the B18 and B25 terminals.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 1

L S B + (ORN)

L S B - (GRN)


Is the resistance approx. 5 q?


N O - Repair loose terminal or open in the wires between the B18 and B25 terminals and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B . B

(cont'd)

14-83







B (25P) D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 15

10

16

12

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )



Y E S - G o to step 10. N O - C h e c k for b lown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. a


11. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22 terminals and body ground individually.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K ) L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)



YES-Check for loose terminal f it in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

NO —Repair open in the wire between the B2, B10, B20 and B22 terminals and ground (G101). Repair poor ground (G10D.B

14-84

DTC P1738: Problem In 2nd Clutch Pressure Switch Circuit

NOTE; Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.


2. Measure OP2SW voltage between these terminals.

• '98-99 models; Terminals B14 and B20 or B22. • '00-01 models: Terminals D13 and B20 or B22.

'98-99 models: P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

O P 2 S W ( B L U / B L K )

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )


'00-01 models:

PCM C O N N E C T O R S

B (25P) D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13

L G 2 ( B R N / B L K )

14 15

10 12

O P 2 S W ( B L U / B L K )

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K ) ^



YES - Go to step 7.

NO - G o t o step 3.


4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P) ('98-99) or D (16P) COO-01).

5. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch connector.

6. Check OP2SW for continuity to ground:

• '98-99 models: Between B14 terminal and body ground.

• '00-01 models: Between D13 terminal and body ground.

'98-99 models:


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

O P 2 S W ( B L U / B L K )


'00-01 models:


1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

O P 2 S W (BLU/BLK)

r W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s


YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between the B14 C98-99) or D13 ('00-01) terminal and the 2nd clutch pressure s w i t c h . •

N O - C h e c k f o r loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

(cont'd)

14-85



7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.

8. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels securely.

9. Start the engine, then shift to \H position and drive for more than f ive seconds.

10. Measure OP2SW voltage between these terminals:

• '98-99 models: Terminals B14 and B20 or B22. • '00-01 models: Terminals D13 and B20 or B22.

'98-99 models:


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

O P 2 S W ( B L U / B L K )


'00-01 models:


B (25P) D (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13

L G 2 ( B R N / B L K )

14 15

10

16

12

O P 2 S W ( B L U / B L K )

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )



Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal f i t in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

NO - Go to step 11.




14. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch pressure switch connector terminal and body ground.

2 N D C L U T C H P R E S S U R E S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R

1

B L U / B L K

W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l



N O - Repair open in the wire between the 2nd clutch pressure switch and the PCM. •

15. Measure the resistance between the 2nd clutch pressure switch connector terminal and body ground.

2 N D C L U T C H P R E S S U R E S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R


Is the resistance 10 MQ or more?


NO—Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch. •

14-86

DTC PI739: Problem in 3rd Clutch Pressure Switch Circuit



2. Measure the voltage between the B24 and B20 or B22 terminals.


L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 (BLK: ' 98 -99 ) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

O P 3 S W ( B L U / W H T )



YES ~ G o to step 7.




5. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch connector.

6. Check for continuity between the B24 terminal and body ground.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

O P 3 S W ( B L U / W H T )



YES —Repair short to ground in the wire between the B24 terminal and the 3rd clutch pressure switch. •

NO- Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

(cont'd)

14-87





9. Start the engine, then shift to E position and drive in 3rd gear for more than five seconds.

10. Measure the voltage between the B24 and B20 or B22 terminals.

PCM C O N N E C T O R B (25P)

LG1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

— & -

O P 3 S W ( B L U / W H T )



YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •





14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch pressure switch connector terminal and body ground.

3RD C L U T C H P R E S S U R E S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R

B L U / W H T

Wi re s i d e of f e m a l e te rmina l



NO —Repair open in the wire between the 3rd clutch pressure switch and the PCM .B

15. Measure the resistance between the 3rd clutch pressure switch connector terminal and body ground.

3 R D C L U T C H P R E S S U R E S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R

T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l

Is the resistance 10 MQ or more?

YES -Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

NO —Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch. •

14-88

DTC P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control System


1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates another code.

Does the OBD II scan tool indicate another code?

Y E S —Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0740 after troubleshooting. •

N O - G o to step 2. NOTE: Do not continue with this troubleshooting until the causes of any other DTCs have been corrected.

2. Measure the line pressure.

Is the line pressure within the service limit?


NO—Repair the hydraulic system as necessary (see page 14-104).•

3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (lock-up control solenoid valve)/shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-106).

4. Replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B (see page 14-109).

5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and reset the PCM memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds.

6. Using the scan tool , check to be sure that the engine coolant temperature is in 176°F (80°C) and above.

7. Drive the vehicle at 55 mph (88 km/h) constantly for more than one minute.

8. Recheck for code P0740.

Does the OBD II scan tool indicate code P0740?

YES Replace the transmission and torque converter. •

N O - T h e system is OK at this t ime.H



DTC P0730: Problem in Shift Control S y s t e m




Y E S —Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0730 after troubleshooting •

N O - G o to step 2. NOTE: Do not continue wi th this troubleshooting until the causes of any other DTCs have been corrected.

2. Measure the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutch pressure (see page 14-104).

Is each clutch pressure within the service limit?


NO —Repair the hydraulic system as necessary •

3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (lock-up control solenoid valve)/shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-106).

4. Replace the shift solenoid valves B and C (see page 14-107).


6. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF and reset the PCM memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10 seconds.

7. Drive the vehicle at a speed over 12 mph (20 km/h) in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th gear in H position for more than 30 seconds.



YES —Replace the transmission. •

NO - The system is OK at this t ime. •

14-90

DTC P0780: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic Control Sys tem for Shift Solenoid Valve A and A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B, or Problem in Hydraulic Control Sys tem




YES —Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0780 after troubleshooting. •



3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/ shift solenoid valve A assembly (see page 14-106), and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B assembly (see page 14-109).

4. Reset the PCM memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse relay box for more than 10 seconds.

5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears in H position.



YES —Replace the transmission. •

NO—The problem has been corrected. •



DTC P1750: Mechanical Problem In Hydraulic Control System for A /T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B, or Problem in Hydraulic Control Sys tem




Y E S Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P1750 after t roubleshoot ing.H

NO Go to step 2.



4. Reset the PCM memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse relay box for more than 10 seconds.

5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears in E] posit ion.



Y E S - R e p l a c e the transmission. •

NO The problem has been co r rec ted . *

DTC P1751: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic Control System for Shift Solenoid Valve B and A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B, or Problem in Hydraulic Control System




Y E S - Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P1751 after troubleshooting H

N O - Go to step 2.


3. Replace the shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-107), and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B (see page 14-109).

4. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears in E position.



Y E S - Replace the transmission. H

NO The problem has been corrected. •

14-92

D4 Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), and watch the H indicator light.

Does the E indicator light come on and stay on?


NO —If the light comes on for about two seconds and then goes off, it's OK. If it doesn't come on at all, go to step 11.




5. Measure the voltage between the A14 terminal and body ground.


/ 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10 / 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 24

2 5 26 27 28 29 30 / 32

D4 IND (GRN/BLK)


Is there voltage?

YES —Repair short to power in the wire between the A14 terminal and the gauge assemb ly . •



7. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P).


9. Shift to any position other than &

10. Measure the voltage between the D9 terminal and body ground.


1 2 3 / 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

A T P D 4 ( Y E L )



YES —Faulty PCM or the gauge assembly. •

NO —Check for short to ground in the wire between the D9 terminal and the transmission range switch. If wire is OK, check the transmission range switch. •

11. Make sure the Honda PGM Tester is not connected to the DLC.

12. Shift t o S position.

Does the B indicator light come on?

YES-Check for loose terminal f it in the PCM connectors and recheck the B indicator l ight several t imes. If the problem is intermittent, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. If the light then works OK every t ime, replace the original PCM.B



(cont'd)

14-93


U S Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)


15. Check for continuity between body ground and B20 and B22 terminals.


LG1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)


Is there continuity between ground and each terminal?


NO —Repair open in the wire(s) between the B20 or B22 terminal and ground (G101) B


17. Measure the voltage between terminals B1 and B22, and between terminals B9 and B20.


IGP1 ( Y E L / B L K )

I G P 2 ( Y E L / B L K ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

y 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )


LG2 (BLK:'98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)


19. Reconnect PCM connector B (25P).

20. Connect the digital mult imeter between the A14 and B20 or B22 terminals.



A (32P) B (25P)

(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

26 27 28 29 30 (311 32

D 4 IND ( G R N / B L K )

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 1415 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)


Is there voltage for at least 2 seconds?

YES — Check for open in the wire between the A14 terminal and the gauge assembly. If wire is OK, check for a faulty B indicator light bulb or a faulty printed circuit board in the gauge assembly.B

NO Goto step 22.



NO —Repair open or short in the wire between the B1 or B9 terminal and the PGM-FI main relay and f rom fuse No. 46 in the under-hood fuse/relay box to the PGM-FI main relay. B

14-94



24. Check for continuity between the A14 terminal and No. 12 terminal of the gauge assembly C (16P) connector.


( G R N / B L K )

(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 (313 32

G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C (16P) C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 X 12 / 14 15 16

D 4 IND ( G R N / B L K )



YES-Check for loose terminal f i t in the PCM connectors. Check the transmission range switch. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck H

NO—Repair open in the wire between the A14 terminal and the gauge assembly. •


Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Press the brake pedal.

Are the brake lights ON?


NO —Repair faulty brake light circuit, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 19-8).B

2. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), and shift to IB posit ion.

3. Press the brake pedal, and release the accelerator pedal.

4. Measure the voltage between the A28 terminal and body ground.


(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 (31] 32

I L U ( W H T / R E D )





5. Measure the voltage between the B12 terminal of the multiplex control unit, driver's B (22P) connector and body ground wi th the throttle released and the brake pedal pressed.

M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L U N I T , D R I V E R ' S B (22P) C O N N E C T O R

1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 X X X 22

I L U ( W H T / R E D )




NO —Repair open in the wire between the A28 terminal of the PCM and B12 terminal of the driver's multiplex control unit. H

6. Measure the voltage between the B22, terminal of the multiplex control unit, driver's B (22P) connector and body ground.

M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L U N I T , D R I V E R ' S B (22P) C O N N E C T O R

1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X 11 12 13 14 15 1 6 X 17 X X X X 22 S H I F T L O C K S O L E N O I D (GRN)




NO —Repair open in the wire between the B22 terminal of the driver's mult iplex control unit and the driver's under-dash fuse No. 9 (via the shift lock so leno id) . •

14-96

Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and move the shift lever to E position.

Dose the OB indicator in the gauge assembly illuminate?

YES—Check for loose terminal fit to the driver's multiplex control unit B12 and B22 terminal wires. If necessary, substitute a known-good driver's multiplex control unit.B

NO —Repair open in the IB position switch circuit from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box K10 (BLK/BLU) wire to ground (G10D.B


9. Disconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and B (25P).

10. Measure the voltage between the A32 and B20 or B22 terminals while pressing the brake pedal.

A (32P)


B (25P)

(1) 2 3 4 5 6 (7) 8 9 10 (11)

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 (31 32

B K S W ( W H T / B L K )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)




NO —Repair open in the wire between the A32 terminal and the brake pedal position switch (brake switch). •

(cont'd)

14-97


Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

11. Reconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and B (25P).


13. Measure the voltage between the C27 and B20 or B22 terminals.

B (25P)


C (31P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K ; '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /

T P S ( R E D / B L K )


Is there approx. 0.5 V (throttle fully closed)?

Y E S - C h e c k f o r loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

NO - G o t o step 14.


15. Disconnect the thrott le posit ion sensor connector.

16. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of the throttle position sensor and the B20 or B22 terminal of the PCM.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

20 21 22 23 24 25

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K ) L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99) ( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

T H R O T T L E P O S I T I O N S E N S O R C O N N E C T O R

S G 1 ( G R N / B L K ) 1



Y E S - Replace the throttle body. •

NO Go to step 17.

17. Check for continuity between the C18 and B20 or B22 terminals.

B (25P)


C ( 3 1 P )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 / 17 18

/ 20 21 22 23 24 25

1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 10

/ / / 16 17 18 19 20 21 / / 25 26 27 21 29 30 V L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)

( B R N / B L K : '00-01)

L G 1 ( B R N / B L K )

S G 2 ( G R N / B L K )



Y E S —Repair open in the wire between the C18 terminal and the throttle position sensor. •

NO — Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. •

14-98

Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the A/T shift cable adjustment (see page 14-136).

2. Disconnect the key switch 7P connector f rom the steering lock assembly.

3. Connect the No. 7 terminal of the key switch connector to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 5 terminal to the battery negative terminal.

K E Y S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R (7P)

1 / 3 / 5 6 7

e e T e r m i n a l s i d e o f m a l e t e r m i n a l s

4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), then push the ignit ion key.

5. Check the key interlock solenoid operation. A clicking sound should be heard while pushing the ignit ion key, and no sound should be heard when releasing the key.

Does the key interlock solenoid operate properly?


NO -Faulty key interlock solenoid/switch. Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock assembly.H

NOTE: Do not re-key the new ignition switch. Re-key the other lock cylinder to match the new switch.

6. Measure the voltage between the No. 7 terminal and body ground.


W H T / Y E L




N O - C h e c k f o r blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the unde r-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open or short in the wire between the No. 7 terminal of the key switch connector and under-hood fuse/ relay box.H

7. Disconnect the park pin switch 4P connector on the front side of the shift lever.

8. With the shift lever in Park, check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the park pin switch 4P connector.

P A R K PIN S W I T C H 4P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3 4

B L K W H T / R E D




NO —Repair open in the wires between the park pin switch and the 4P connector. If wires are OK, replace the park pin switch. •

(cont'd)

14-99


Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

9. Check for continuity between the No. 4 terminal of the park pin switch 4P connector and the No. 5 terminal of the key switch connector.


1 / 3 / 5 6 7

P A R K PIN S W I T C H 4P C O N N E C T O R

W H T / R E D

W H T / R E D

1 2 3 4




NO —Repair open in the wire between No. 4 terminal of the park pin switch 4P connector and the No. 5 terminal of the key switch connector •

10. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of the 4P connector and body ground.

P A R K P IN S W I T C H 4 P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3 4

i B L K

J)



YES —Check for loose key switch connector and park pin switch connector. If necessary, substitute a known-good steering lock assemb ly . •

NO Repair open in the wire between the No. 3 terminal of the 4P connector and ground (G10D.B

14-100

<3& Road Test

Special Tools Required Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)

1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).

2. Apply the parking brake, and block rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to B position whi le pressing the brake pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should not stall.

3. Repeat the same test in B position.

4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A), and go to the PGM-FI Data List; then g o t o step 1. If you don't have a PGM Tester, go to step 5.

5. Pull back the carpet f rom the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM (A).

6. Connect the digital mult imeter (B) and the special tools (C) to check voltage between the C27 ( + ) terminal and B20 ( - ) or B22 ( - ) terminal of the PCM.


(cont'd)

14-101


Road Test (cont'd)

7. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the E posit ion. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage. While dr iv ing, check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by moni tor ing the throttle position sensor voltage and comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position sensor voltage represents the thrott le opening.)

Upshift-El position

Throttle Opening Unit of Speed 1st — 2nd 2nd — 3rd 3rd — 4th Lock-up ON Throttle position sensor voltage: 0.7 V

mph 9 - 1 0 2 1 - 2 3 3 0 - 3 4 45 48 Throttle position sensor voltage: 0.7 V km/h 1 4 - 1 6 3 3 - 3 7 4 8 - 5 4 73 -77 Throttle position sensor voltage: 2.25 V

mph 2 4 - 2 7 4 5 - 4 8 6 5 - 6 8 7 7 - 8 1 Throttle position sensor voltage: 2.25 V km/h 3 9 - 4 3 7 2 - 7 8 104-110 124 -130 Fully-opened thrott le. Throttle posit ion sensor voltage: 4.5 V

mph 3 5 - 3 9 6 5 - 6 8 9 8 - 1 0 1 9 9 - 1 0 3 Fully-opened thrott le. Throttle posit ion sensor voltage: 4.5 V

km/h 5 7 - 6 3 104 -110 157 -163 160 -166

Downshift-IB position

Throttle Opening Unit of Speed Lock-up OFF 4th — 3rd 3rd — 2nd 2nd — 1st Throttle posit ion sensor voltage: 0.8 V

mph 4 4 - 4 7 1 7 - 1 9 6 - 8 (3rd — 1st) Throttle posit ion sensor voltage: 0.8 V km/h 7 1 - 7 5 2 7 - 3 1 9 - 1 3 (3rd — 1st) Throttle posit ion sensor voltage: 2.25 V

mph 6 8 - 7 1 Throttle posit ion sensor voltage: 2.25 V km/h 1 0 9 - 1 1 5 Fully-opened thrott le. Throttle posit ion sensor voltage: 4.5 V

mph 9 0 - 9 4 8 9 - 9 2 5 4 - 5 8 2 7 - 3 1 Fully-opened thrott le. Throttle posit ion sensor voltage: 4.5 V

km/h 1 4 5 - 1 5 1 142 -148 8 7 - 9 3 4 4 - 5 0

8. Accelerate to about 35 mph (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th, then shift f rom B position to [2] position. The vehicle should immediately begin slowing down f rom engine braking.

9. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the fo l lowing positions.

0D (1st Gear) Position Accelerate f rom a stop at ful l thrott le. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts should not occur wi th the shift lever in this posit ion.

SO (2nd Gear) Position Accelerate f rom a stop at ful l thrott le. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts and downshifts should not occur wi th the shift lever in this position.

I B (Reverse) Position Accelerate f rom a stop at full thrott le, and check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage.

10. Test in E (Park) Position. Park the vehicle on a slope (approx. 16°), apply the parking brake, and shift into B position. Release the brake; the vehicle should not move.

14-102

Stall Speed Test

1. Set the parking brake, and block the front wheels.

2. Connect a tachometer to the engine, and start the engine.

3. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.

4. After the engine has warmed up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), shift to \2\ posit ion.

5. Fully press the brake pedal and accelerator for 6 to 8 seconds, and note engine speed. Do not move the shift lever whi le raising engine speed.

6. Al low two minutes for cool ing, then repeat the test in H, CU, and SB positions.

NOTE: • Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a t ime. • Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only. • Stall speed should be the same in H, [2], H , and BE positions. • Do not test stall speed wi th the A/T pressure gauges installed.

Stall Speed rpm: Specification: 2,400 rpm Service Limit: 2,250 2,550 rpm

TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE

Stall rpm high in H, CU, [J, and IE positions • Low fluid level or ATF pump output • Clogged ATF strainer • Pressure regulator valve stuck closed • Slipping clutch

Stall rpm high in CD position Slippage of 1st clutch

Stall rpm high in [JD position Slippage of 2nd clutch

Stall rpm high in OH position Slippage of 4th clutch

Stall rpm low in H, [2], IS, and IE positions • Engine output low • Torque converter one-way clutch slipping

14-103


Pressure Tests

S p e c i a l T o o l s R e q u i r e d

• A/T oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020400 • A/T pressure hose, 2210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A • A/T pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120

1. Before testing, be sure the transmission f lu id is f i l led to the proper level.



4. Al low the front wheels to rotate freely.

5. Warm up the engine (the radiator fan comes on), then stop it and connect the tachometer.

6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to each inspection hole securely, and do not al low dust or other foreign particles to enter the holes.

TORQUE: 18 N m (1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )

A / T OIL PRESSURE GAUGE A / T PRESSURE HOSE, 2210 m m A / T PRESSURE HOSE ADAPTER SET W/PANEL 07MAJ-PY4011A 07MAJ-PY40120 07406-0020400 (4 Required) (4 Required)

I N S P E C T I O N H O L E I N S P E C T I O N H O L E I N S P E C T I O N H O L E

14-104

0® 7. Start the engine, and run it at 1,500 rpm.

8. Shift to H or E position, and measure line pressure at line pressure inspection hole (A).

NOTE; Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift lever positions other than H or [0 .

9. Shift to QQ posit ion, and measure 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole (B).

10. Shift to [2] posit ion, and measure 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole (C).

11. Shift to [B posit ion, then press the brake pedal and hold it.

12. Shift to H posit ion, and release the brake pedal (the transmission is in 1st gear).

13. Accelerate the engine to 2,500 rpm (the transmission wi l l be shifted to 2nd gear).

14. Release the accelerator for more than 5 seconds after the transmission is shifted to 2nd gear, the engine speed wil l decrease to about 1,000 rpm.

15. Press the accelerator very slowly (so it takes at least 5 seconds to raise the engine speed to 2,000rpm), then hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.

16. Measure 3rd and 4th clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection hole (D), and the 4th clutch pressure inspection hole (E), as the transmission wi l l shifted 2nd gear to 3rd gear, then to 4th gear.

PRESSURE SHIFT LEVER

POSITION

SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE FLUID PRESSURE PRESSURE SHIFT LEVER

POSITION

SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE

Standard Service Limit

Line (A)

05] or E No (or low) line pressure

Torque converter, ATF pump, pressure regulator valve, torque converter check valve

800 860 kPa (8 .2 -8 .8 kgf/cm 2, 120 -130 psi)

760 kPa (7.7 kgf/cm 2 , 110 psi)

1st clutch (B)

m No or low 1st pressure

1st clutch 790 870 kPa (8 .1-8 .9 kgf/cm 2, 120 130 psi)

750 kPa (7.6 kgf/cm 2, 110 psi)

2nd clutch (C)

m No or low 2nd pressure

2nd clutch

790 870 kPa (8 .1-8 .9 kgf/cm 2, 120 130 psi)

750 kPa (7.6 kgf/cm 2, 110 psi)

3rd clutch (D)

S3 No or low 3rd pressure

3rd clutch

790 870 kPa (8 .1-8 .9 kgf/cm 2, 120 130 psi)

750 kPa (7.6 kgf/cm 2, 110 psi)

4th clutch (E)

S3

No or low 4th pressure

4th clutch

790 870 kPa (8 .1-8 .9 kgf/cm 2, 120 130 psi)

750 kPa (7.6 kgf/cm 2, 110 psi)

4th clutch (E)

m

No or low 4th pressure

Servo valve or 4th clutch

790 870 kPa (8 .1-8 .9 kgf/cm 2, 120 130 psi)

750 kPa (7.6 kgf/cm 2, 110 psi)

17. Install the inspection hole bolts wi th new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. TORQUE: 18 N m (1.8 kgf.m,13 Ibfft)

NOTE: Do not reuse old sealing washers.

14-105


Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A Test

1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve 3P connector/shift solenoid valve A.

2. Measure the resistance of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve between the No. 3 terminal of the 3P connector and body ground.

STANDARD: 1 2 - 2 5 Q

3. Measure the resistance of the shift solenoid valve A between the No. 1 terminal of the 3P connector and body ground.


4. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/ shift solenoid valve A if either resistance is out of specification.

5. If the resistance is wi th in the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the 3P connector to the battery positive terminal . A clicking sound should be heard. Connect the No. 3 terminal to the battery positive terminal . A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/ shift solenoid valve A if no sound is heard when connecting either terminal to the battery positive terminal.

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement

NOTE: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A assembly must be removed/replaced as an assembly.

1. Remove the bolts securing the ignition coil bracket ('98-99 models), then remove the harness cover f rom the transmission hanger.

2. Remove the mounting bolts and torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A.

3. Clean the mount ing surface and f luid passage of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A, and install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A wi th a new filter/gasket (B).

4. Install the harness cover on the transmission hanger, and install the ignition coil bracket bolts ('98-99 models).

5. Install the male terminal connector (C) of the solenoid connector on the harness cover.

6. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oi l , then reconnect the connector securely.

14-106

Shift Solenoid Valves B and C Test

1. Remove the starter.

2. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B or C connector.

3. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the shift solenoid valve B or C.


4. Replace the shift solenoid valve B or C if the resistance is out of standard.

5. If the resistance is wi th in the standard, connect the No. 2 terminal of the shift solenoid valve B or C connector to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. Replace the shift solenoid valve B or C if no sound is heard.

Shift Solenoid Valves B and C Replacement

NOTE: If the shift solenoid valve B and C are replaced or removed at the same t ime, be sure to reinstall them correctly. The connector color of shift solenoid valve B is black, and the connector color of shift solenoid valve C is brown.

1. Remove the starter.

NOTE: If you are only replacing shift solenoid valve C, starter removal is not needed.

2. Remove the mounting bolt and the shift solenoid valve B.

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)

3. Remove the mounting bolt and the shift solenoid valve C.

4. Install a new shift control solenoid valve B or C wi th new O-rings (A). While installing the valves, do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission.

5. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then reconnect the connector securely.

6. Install the starter.

14-107


A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test

1. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B 2P connectors.

A

2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of each connector.

STANDARD: Approx. 5.0 Q

3. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure control solenoid is out of standard, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.

4. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the battery positive terminal , and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal . A clicking sound should be heard.

5. If not, remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.

Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the battery positive terminal , and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B move.

8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check valve movement.

NOTE: You can see the valve movement through the f luid passage in the mounting surface of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B body (C).

9. If either valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or if the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid does not operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.

6. Check the f luid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust and dirt.

14-108

A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement

1. Remove the ATF cooler hose (outlet line) at the ATF cooler line. Turn the end of the cooler hose up to prevent ATF f rom f lowing o u t then plug the line and hose.

2. Remove the ATF cooler line (outlet line) f rom the transmission housing.

3. Remove the mount ing bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B (A).

6x 1.0 mm 12 N m (1.2 kg fm, 8.7 Ibfft)

4. Clean the mount ing surface and f luid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B and the transmission housing.

5. Place the new gasket (B) on the transmission housing, then install the 8 x 1 8 m m ATF feed pipe (C), 8 x 2 6 m m pipe (D) and 8 x 36 m m pipe (E) wi th their fi lter side into the transmission housing.

6. Install the new O-rings (F) over the feed pipes, and install the 8 x 40 m m ATF feed pipe (G).

7. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B and harness clamp bracket (H).

8. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oi l , then connect them securely.

9. Install the ATF cooler line (outlet line), and connect the ATF cooler hose to the cooler line.

14-109


Speed Sensor Replacement

1 . Disconnect the connectors from the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensors.

2. Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed sensor/then remove the mainshaft speed sensor from the end cover.

3. Remove the bolt securing the countershaft speed sensor, then remove the countershaft speed sensor from the transmission housing.

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf f t )

4. Replace the O-rings with new ones before installing the sensors.

5. Install the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensors, then connect the connectors.

14-110

2nd Clutch Pressure Switch Replacement


20 N m (2.0 k g f m , 14 Ibf f t )

2. Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch, then install a new one wi th a new sealing washer. Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.

3. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no water, oi l , dust, or other foreign particles inside it.

3rd Clutch Pressure Switch Replacement


20 N m (2.0 k g f m , 14 Ibff t )

2. Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch, then install a new one wi th a new sealing washer. Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.

3. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no water, oi l , dust, or other foreign particles inside it.

14-111


ATF Level Check

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.

1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).

2. Park the vehicle on the level ground. Turn off the engine.

3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) f rom the transmission, and wipe it wi th a clean cloth.

A

4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission.

5. Remove the dipstick and check the f luid level. It should be between the upper mark (B) and lower mark (C).

6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the recommended f luid into the fil ler hole (A) to bring it to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.

B 24 x 1.5 m m 44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibff t )

A 7. Install the ATF fil ler bolt (B) wi th a new sealing

washer (C).

8. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission.

14-112

ATF Replacement

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.

1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle.

2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the engine off.

3. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug, and drain the automatic transmission f luid (ATF).

NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF Cooler Flushing (see page 14-127).

18 x 1.5 m m 49 N m (5.0 k g f m , 36 Ibff t )

4. Reinstall the drain plug wi th a new sealing washer.

5. Refill the transmission wi th the recommended f luid into the fi l ler hole (A) to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.

Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 2.9 fl (3.1 US qt, 2.6 Imp qt) at changing 7.2 fl (7.6 US qt, 6.3 Imp qt) at overhaul

B 24 x 1.5 m m 44 N m (4.5 kg fm, 33 Ibf f t )

A 6. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) wi th a new sealing

washer (C).

14-113


Transmission Removal

1. Before disconnecting power, make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then wri te down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations.

2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal , then remove the positive terminal.

3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery and battery tray.

4. Remove the battery cable clamps f rom the battery base.

5. Loosen the mount ing bolts securing the battery base bracket, then remove the battery base bracket and battery base.

6. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing assembly.

7. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. Remove the drain plug, and drain the automatic transmission f luid (ATF). Reinstall the drain plug wi th a new sealing washer.

8. Remove the ATF cooler hose (A) f rom the clamp (B) on the starter.

B A

9. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) f rom the ATF cooler lines (C). Turn the ends of the ATF cooler hoses up to prevent ATF f rom f lowing out, then plug the ATF cooler hoses and lines.

NOTE: Check for any signs of leakage at the hose joints.

10. Remove the starter cables (A) f rom the starter (B) and clamp bracket (C), then remove the starter.

11. Remove the transmission ground terminal (D).

12. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B connector (E), and C connector (F), then remove the harness clamp f rom the clamp bracket.

14-114

< 3 ®

13. Disconnect the connectors from the 3rd clutch pressure switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (B), and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B (C), then remove the harness clamps from the clamp brackets.

B

14. Disconnect the connector from the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A assembly (A), then remove the connector from harness cover (B).

B

15. Remove the two bolts securing the harness cover and the ignition coil bracket, and remove the ignition coil (C). ('98-99 models)

16. Push the harness cover rearward to remove from the transmission hanger (D).

17. Disconnect the connectors from the countershaft speed sensor (A), and 2nd clutch pressure switch (B).

18. Remove the transmission range switch connector (C) from the connector bracket (D), then disconnect it.

19. Remove the nut from the front mount.

(cont'd)

14-115


Transmission Removal (cont'd)

20. Lift and support the engine/transmission assembly wi th an engine hanger (P/N AAR-T-1256, available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment program, or equivalent).

21 . Remove the splash shield.

22. Remove the cotter pins <A) and castle nuts (hex nuts) (B), and remove the damper forks (C), then separate the ball joints f rom the lower arms (D), refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 18-17).

C

23. Remove the bolts securing the radius rods (E), then separate the radius rods f rom the lower arms (D).

24. Pry the driveshafts out of the differential and the intermediate shaft, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see step 10 on page 16-4).

14-116

25. Make reference marks (A) across both the front beam (B) and the rear beam (C).

B

26. Disconnect the vacuum tube (A) on the front beam (B), and unclamp the power steering fluid pipe (C) from the clamps on the front beam.

A

27. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower mounts, then remove the front beam (B).

28. Remove the transmission lower rear mount (A) from the transmission.

A 29. Pull on the inboard joints to remove the left

driveshaft from the differential and to remove the right driveshaft from the intermediate shaft.

30. Move the left driveshaft to the front side. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil, then tie the plastic bags (B) over the driveshaft ends.

31. Remove the intermediate shaft.

32. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil, then tie the plastic bags over the both ends of intermediate shaft.

(cont'd)

14-117



33. Remove the bolts securing shift cable holder (A), then remove shift cable cover (B).

NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever jo int , remove the bolts securing the holder before removing the bolts securing the cover.

34. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever (D), then remove the shift cable (E) wi th the control lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively.

35. Install a 6 x 1.0 x 14 m m bolt (A) and nut (B) on the shift cable cover (C), then reinstall the shift cable cover to the torque converter housing. (The torque converter may stay on the engine, and the bolt head wi l l support the torque converter, when the transmission is removed.)

B

36. Remove the torque converter cover (A), then remove the eight drive plate bolts (B) one at a t ime whi le rotating the crankshaft pulley.

37. Remove the engine stiffener bolts (C).

38. Remove the front mount bracket.

14-118

39. Place a transmission jack under the transmission.

40. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts.

41. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts (A) and connector bracket bolt (B).

B A

42. Pull the transmission away from the engine until it clears the dowel pins, then lower it on the transmission jack.

NOTE: If the torque converter is stuck to the drive plate, reach through the starter opening, and pull it toward the transmission housing.

43. Remove the shift cable cover, then remove the torque converter assembly from the torque converter housing.

44. Remove the transmission lower front mount.

(cont'd)

14-119



45. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it 's damaged.

46. Remove the 6 x 1.0 x 14 m m bolt (A) and nut (B) f rom the shift cable cover (C).

B

A

14-120

Transmission Installation

1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-127).

2. Install the transmission lower front m o u n t

10 x 1.25 m m 38 N-m (3.9 kgf -m, 2 8 Ibff t )

3. Install the torque converter assembly (A) on the mainshaft (B) with a new O-ring (C).

D

E

4. Install the 14 mm dowel pin (D) and 10 m m dowel pin (E) in the torque converter housing (F).

5. Place the transmission on a transmission jack, and raise it to engine level.

6. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install the transmission housing mount ing bolts (A) and connector bracket bolt (B).

B 12 x 1.25 m m 64 N m (6.5 kgf m , 47 Ibfft)

A 12 x 1.25 m m 64 N m (6.5 kgf -m, 47 Ibff t )

7. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts.

12 x 1.25 m m 64 N m (6.5 kgf -m, 47 Ibff t )

(cont'd)

14-121


Transmission Installation (cont'd)

8. Install the front mount bracket.

10 x 1.25 m m 3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 28 Ibff t )

9. Install the engine stiffener mount ing bolts (A). C 6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf f t )

B

A 10 x 1.25 m m 3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 Ibf f t )

10. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (B) wi th eight bolts (C). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as necessary to t ighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross pattern. After t ightening the last bolt, check that the crankshaft rotates freely.

11. Install the torque converter cover (D).

12. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt as necessary (see page 6-17).

13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B) on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable excessively.

6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)

14 N m (1.4 k g f m , 10 Ibff t )

14. Install the lock bolt (D) wi th a new lock washer (E), then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.

15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift cable holder (G) on the shift cable cover.

NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure to install the shift cable holder after installing the shift cable cover to the torque converter housing.

16. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft contacts the transmission (differential) wi th solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry wi th compressed air. Then install the intermediate shaft in the differential. While installing the intermediate shaft, be sure not to al low dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission.

10 x 1.25 m m 39 N m (4.0 k g f m , 30 Ibff t )

14-122

17. Install new set rings on the right and left driveshafts.

18. Install the right and left driveshaft, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 16-20). Whi le installing the left driveshaft in the differential, be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the transmission.

NOTE: • Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts

the transmission (differential) w i th solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry wi th compressed air.

• Turn the right and left steering knuckle ful ly outward, and slide the left driveshaft into the differential until you feel its spring clip engage the side gear. Slide the right driveshaft into the intermediate shaft until you feel its spring clip engage the intermediate shaft.

19. Install the transmission lower rear mount on the transmission.

10 x 1.25 m m 38 N-m (3.9 kg f -m, 2 8 Ibf f t )

20. Install the front beam (A) by aligning both reference marks (B) on both rear beam (C), and t ighten the bolts.

A

21. Install the transmission lower mount nuts (D).

22. Connect the vacuum tube (E), and install the power steering f luid pipe (F) on its clamps.

(cont'd)

14-123



2 3 . Install the damper forks (A), then install the ball joints on each lower arms (B) with the castle nuts (hex nuts) (C) and new cotter pins (D).

10 x 1.25 m m 43 N m (4.4 kg f -m, 3 2 Ibf f t )

A

12 x 1.25 m m 4 9 ~ 5 9 N m ( 5 . 0 - 6 . 0 k g f m , 3 6 - 4 3 Ibf f t )

24. Install the radius rods (E) on each lower arm.

25. Remove the jack from the transmission.

26. Install the splash shield.

2 7 . Install and tighten the nut on the front mount.

12 x 1.25 m m 5 4 N m (5.5 kg f -m, 40 Ibff t )

28. Remove the hoist, then remove the hoist bracket from the engine.

29. Connect the transmission range switch connector (A), then install it on its connector bracket (B).

C

30. Connect the connectors to the countershaft speed sensor (C) and 2nd clutch pressure switch (D). Do not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign particles to enter the 2nd clutch pressure switch connector.

14-124

0 ®

31. Install the harness cover (A) on the transmission hanger (B), then install the ignit ion coil (C). ('98-99 models)

32. Install the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/ shift solenoid valve A assembly connector (D) on the harness cover, then connect the connector.

33. Connect the connectors to the 3rd clutch pressure switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (B), and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B (C), then install the clamps on the clamp brackets. Do not allow water, f lu id, oi l , dust, or other foreign particles to enter the 3rd clutch pressure switch connector.

B

34. Connect the connectors to the shift solenoid valve B (A) and shift solenoid valve C (B), then install the clamp on the clamp bracket.

10 x 1.25 mm

35. Install the transmission ground terminal (C).

36. Install the starter (D) on the torque converter housing. Connect the starter cables (E) to the starter, and install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket. Make sure the crimped side of the starter cable ring terminal is facing out.

37. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler lines (B) (see page 14-128). Clamp the ATF cooler hose wi th the clamp (C) on the starter.

I!

(cont'd)

14-125



38. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.

39. Install the battery cable clamps on the battery base.

40. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket.

41. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing assembly.

42. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-113).

43. Connect the battery positive terminal, then connect the negative terminal.

44. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift the transmission through all gears three times.

45. Check the shift lever operation, A/T gear position indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.

46. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 18-

47. Start the engine and let it reach normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on) with the transmission in OS or OB position, then turn it off and check the ATF level (see page 14-112).

48. Perform a road test (see page 14-101).


50. Loosen the front mount nut after the road test, then retighten the nut to the specified torque.

1 2 x 1 . 2 5 m m 54 N m (5.5 k g f m , 40 Ibf f t )

5).

14-126

ATF Cooler Flushing

Special Tools Required Commercially available transmission cooler flusher Kent-Moore J38405-A or equivalent

This procedure should be performed before reinstalling the transmission.

1. Check the equipment for wear and cracks before using it. Replace any worn or cracked components.

2. Using the measuring cup, fi l l the flusher (A) with 21 ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable flushing f luid (J35944-20). Do not substitute with any other f lu id. Follow the handling procedure on the f luid container.

3. Secure the flusher fil ler cap, and pressurize the flusher wi th compressed air to 550- 829 kpa (5.6 -8.45 kgf/cm 2, 8 0 - 1 2 0 psi). The air line should be equipped wi th a water trap to ensure a dry air system.

4. Hang the flusher under the vehicle.

5. Attach the flusher discharge hose (B) to the return line of the ATF cooler using a clamp.

6. Connect the drain hose (C) to the inlet line on the ATF cooler using a clamp. Securely clamp the opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket (D) or f loor drain.

7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if available.)

8. Turn on the water valve for 10 seconds. If water does not f low through the cooler, it is completely plugged, cannot be f lushed, and must be replaced.

9. Depress the tr igger to mix the f lushing f luid into the water f low. Use the wire clip to hold the tr igger down.

10. While f lushing wi th the water and f lushing f luid for two minutes, turn the air valve on for five seconds every 15 — 20 seconds to create a surging action.

AIR PRESSURE: MAX 845 kPa (8.45 kgf /cm 2 , 120 psi)

11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger, then reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10.

12. Release the trigger, and rinse the cooler wi th water for one minute.

13. Turn the water valve and the water supply off.

14. Turn the air valve on for two minutes, or until no moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. Residual moisture in the cooler or lines can damage the transmission.

15. Remove the flusher f rom the cooler line. Attach the drain hose to an ATF container.

16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose attached to the cooler line.

(cont'd)

14-127


ATF Cooler Flushing (cont'd)

17. Make sure the transmission is in OS posit ion. Fill the transmission wi th ATF, and run the engine for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 fi (1.0 US qt., 0.8 Imp qt.) is discharged.

18. Remove the drain hose, and reconnect the cooler return hose to the transmission.

19. Refill the transmission wi th ATF to the proper level (see page 14-113).

ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement

1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (B) and the ATF cooler, and secure them wi th the clips (C).

A E D

2. Clamp the ATF cooler hose wi th the yel low mark (D) on the clamp (E).

14-128

Shift Lever Removal

1. Shift the transmission into SB posit ion.

2. Remove the center console, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-83).

3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A), then separate the shift cable end f rom the shift lever assembly.

\ ;

A

4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the holder to remove the shift cable f rom the shift lever bracket base (C).

5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A) and park pin switch 4P connector (B).

6. Remove the four bolts (C) securing the shift lever bracket base, then remove the shift lever assembly.

NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twist ing the shift cable guide pipe (D).

14-129


Shift Lever Installation

1. Install the shift lever assembly.

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the El position indicator l ight comes on.

3. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then release your hand. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift posit ion is in E .

+ + + + «


5. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the posit ioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base through the positioning hole on the shift lever assembly.

Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C). Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) wi th the square shape (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the shift cable.

NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twist ing the shift cable guide (H).

14-130

7. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly installed on the mounting stud (B).

Proper ly Insta l led:

A B

Not Proper ly Ins ta l led:

C a b l e e n d r i d e s o n t h e b o t t o m o f t h e m o u n t i n g s t u d .

8. If not properly installed, remove the shift cable f rom the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the mounting stud whi le the shift cable is on the shift cable bracket base.

9. Install and tighten the nut.

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibff t )

10. Remove the 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin that was installed to hold the shift lever.

11. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector and park pin switch 4P connector.

12. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator fol lows the transmission range switch.

13. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift lever releases.

14-131


Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).

Apply silicone grease to these parts:

• Movable parts of the shift lever. • Movable parts of the shift lock mechanism. • Sl iding surfaces on the detent spring.

P U S H B U T T O N

S P R I N G

S H I F T L O C K S O L E N O I D P L U N G E R

P L U N G E R S P R I N G

S H I F T L O C K S O L E N O I D C L A M P

S H I F T L O C K S O L E N O I D

S H I F T L E V E R K N O B

S C R E W 3 N m (0.3 kgf -m, 2 Ibfft) A p p l y n o n - h a r d e n i n g t h r e a d lock s e a l a n t .

A / T G E A R P O S I T I O N I N D I C A T O R P A N E L

A / T G E A R P O S I T I O N I N D I C A T O R P A N E L L I G H T H O U S I N G

L E V E R C O V E R

A / T G E A R P O S I T I O N I N D I C A T O R L I G H T

S H I F T L O C K S T O P C U S H I O N

D E T E N T S P R I N G

8 x 1 .25mm 22 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibfft)

S H I F T L E V E R B R A C K E T B A S E

S H I F T C A B L E

8 x 1 .25mm 22 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibfft)

14-132

Shift Cable Replacement

1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 1-15).


3. Shift the transmission into El posit ion.

4. Remove the center console, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-83).


A


NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twist ing the shift cable guide pipe (D).

7. Remove the f loor heat shield.

8. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and grommet (B).

9. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (A), then remove the shift cable cover (B).

NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint, remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder before removing the bolts securing the shift cable cover.

C

10. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever (D), then remove the shift cable (E) wi th the control lever.

(cont'd)

14-133


Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)

11. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket.

12. Verify that the transmission is in E position on the control shaft.

13. Install the control lever (A) wi th the shift cable (B) on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable excessively.

6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N-m (1.0 kg f -m, 7.2 Ibf f t )

6 x 1.0 m m 14 N m (1.4 kgf -m, 10 Ibff t )

14. Install the lock bolt (D) wi th a new lock washer (E), then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.

15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift cable holder (G) on the cover.

NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure to install the shift cable holder after installing the shift cable cover to the torque converter housing.

16. Install the floor heat shield.

17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the E position indicator light comes on.

18. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then release your hand. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift position is in E.


20. Insert a 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base through the positioning hole on the shift lever assembly.

14-134

21. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C). Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the square shape (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the shift cable.

NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (H).

22. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly installed on the mounting stud (B).

Proper ly Insta l led:

Cable end rides on the bottom of the mounting stud.

23. If not properly installed, remove the shift cable from the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift cable bracket base.

24. Install and tighten the nut.

8 x 1 . 2 5 m m 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibf f t )

25. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed to hold the shift lever.

26. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows the transmission range switch.

27. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation in all gears.

14-135


Shift Cable Adjustment

1. Shift the transmission into E posit ion.

2. Remove the center console, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-83).



NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twist ing the shift cable guide (D).

5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release your hand. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift posit ion is in EL

+ + + + +

6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the E position indicator light comes on.


8. Insert a 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the posit ioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base through the positioning hole on the shift lever assembly.

14-136

< 2 ®

9. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C). Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) wi th the square shape (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the shift cable.

NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twist ing the shift cable guide (H).

10. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly installed on the mount ing stud (B).

Proper ly Ins ta l led:

A B

Not Proper ly Ins ta l l ed :

C a b l e e n d r i d e s o n t h e b o t t o m o f t h e m o u n t i n g s t u d .

11. If not properly installed, remove the shift cable f rom the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the mount ing stud whi le the shift cable is on the shift cable bracket base.

12. Install and t ighten the nut.

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)

13. Remove the 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin that was installed to hold the shift lever.

14. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator fol lows the transmission range switch.

15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift lever releases.

14-137

A/T Gear Position Indicator

Component Location index

A / T G E A R P O S I T I O N I N D I C A T O R Indicator Input T e s t , p a g e 14-143 I n d i c a t o r B u l b R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 14-144

T R A N S M I S S I O N R A N G E S W I T C H T e s t , page 14-140 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 14-141

14-138

Circuit Diagram

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH


No 41 (100A) No.42 (50A) CTNjO CTNJD—

No.9 (15A)

y

YEL

POWEPTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

[71

VSP OUT

GAUGE ASSEMBLY

1

DIMMING CIRCUIT

- ® —

-©-

•Wr-

D4 IND


ATP R

D15| D13 ('96-99 models) B14 ('00-01 models)

<3 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S

r— BLK/BLU — i

- PNK -

- BLU -

- B R N -

— RED/BLK —| — RED/BLK —•

- PNK -

- BLU -

-BRN-

- BLU —

- BRN —

— LT BLU —P>

STARTER CUT RELAY

CRUISE CONTROL UNIT


14-139

A/T Gear Position Indicator

Transmission Range Switch Test

1. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) f rom the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the transmission range switch connector.

2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch posit ion according to the table below.

NOTE: Terminal No.1: Neutral position switch

T r a n s m i s s i o n R a n g e S w i t c h C o n t i n u i t y C h e c k

\ T e r m i n a l

P o s i t i o n \ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

E c% E KJ — u

m CS. /~\ m w ~ - KJ

m m KJ KJ - KJ

B r\ rs

B KJ KJ • KJ

B B KJ KJ KJ

a s~\ r> /-\ a KJ KJ

m o — O

14-140

Transmission Range Switch Replacement

1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 1-15).

2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels securely.

3. Shift to ED position.

4. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) f rom the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the transmission range switch connector.

5. Remove the clamp f rom the harness clamp bracket on the transmission housing, and remove the harness clamp (A) f rom the end cover (B).

6. Remove the transmission range switch cover (C), then remove the transmission range switch (D) f rom the end cover.

7. Set the transmission range switch to [ED posit ion.

NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in OS position.

8. Set the control shaft to HI posit ion.

(cont'd)

14-141

A/T Gear Position indicator

Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont'd)

9. Install the transmission range switch (A) on the control shaft (B), then secure it wi th the bolts.

NOTE: Do not move the transmission range switch when t ightening the bolts.

6 x 1.0 m m 1 2 N - m ( 1 . 2 kg fm, 8.7 Ibf f t )

6 x 1.0 m m 12 N m {1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf f t )

10. Install the transmission range switch cover (C), and the harness clamp (D) on the end cover (E).

11. Connect the transmission range switch connector (A), then install it on the connector bracket (B).

12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever through all gears, and check the transmission range switch synchronization wi th the A/T gear posit ion indicator (A).

13. Move the shift lever through all gears, and verify the fo l lowing:

• The engine wi l l not start in any position other than M or B .

• The back-up lights come on when the shift lever is in ID position.

A

14-142

0® Indicator Input Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).

1. Remove the instrument panel, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-84).

2. Remove the gauge assembly f rom the dashboard, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-68), then disconnect the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.

3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. • If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals look OK, make the fo l lowing input tests at the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.

- If a test indicates a problem, f ind a correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board.

GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTORS

B ( 2 2 P )

1 2 / 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 / / / 1 6 | X I / / 19 20 21 22

C(16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11|X112 / 14 15 16


Cavity Wire Color Test Condition Test: Desired Result Possible Cause (If result is not obtained)

B11 YEL Ignition switch ON (II)

Check for voltage to ground: There should be battery voltage.

• Blown No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box

• An open in the wire B16 BLK Under all

conditions Check for continuity to ground: There should be continuity.

• Poor ground(G501) • An open in the wire

C4 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) and shift lever in E

Check for voltage to ground: There should be 1 V or less. There should be battery voltage in any other shift lever position.

• Faulty transmission range switch

• An open in the wire C5 BRN Ignition switch

ON (II) and shift lever in [ J



• An open in the wire

C6 PNK Ignition switch ON (II) and shift lever in B




C7 BLU Ignition switch ON (II) and shift lever in [2]




C12 GRN/BLK Ignition switch ON (II) and shift lever in S3



• Faulty PCM • An open in the wire

C15 BLK/BLU Shift lever in LB Check for continuity to ground: There should be no continuity in any other shift lever position.


• An open in the wire C16 RED/BLK Ignition switch

ON (II) and shift lever in \M




14-143

A/T Gear Position indicator

Indicator Bulb Replacement


1. Remove the instrument panel, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-84).

2. Remove the gauge assembly, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-68).

3. Disassemble the gauge assembly, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-68).

NOTE: Disassembly is not required on all models.

4. Replace the bulbs (A) at the reverse side of the gauge assembly (B).

14-144

0 0 A/T Interlock System


14-145

A/T Interlock System

Circuit Diagram


BATTERY No.47 (20A)

No.41 (100A) No.42(50A)

WHT/YEL

IGNITION SWITCH

BAT


O C H IG1

No.9 (7.5A) WHT/YEL

Y E L STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY

GRN WHT/RED

IG1 SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S

PG LG ATP P ILU

BLK

A 1 5

BLK BLK/BLU

B12

WHT/RED

"o^|\ PARK /IJJK PEDAL

i i / SWITCH W POSITION ™ SWITCH


BLK

A G501

WHT/BLK

G401

14-146

Control Unit Input Test


1. Disconnect the 22P connector f rom the multiplex control unit (driver's), then remove the mult iplex control unit (driver's) f rom the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.

2. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.

• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. • If the terminals look OK, go to step 3.

NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignit ion switch is turned ON (II) whi le depressing the brake pedal wi th the shift lever in B posit ion, the shift lock system is OK. If the shift lever cannot be shifted f rom E posit ion, test the transmission range switch.

3. With the driver's unit still disconnected f rom its connector and the fuse/relay box, make these input tests at its connector or its fuse/relay box socket.

• If a test indicates a problem, f ind and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 4.

(cont'd)

14-147


Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)

MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S CONNECTORS

24P

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 / 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 11 12 13 14 15 1 6 N" / / / / 22

Terminal side o f male terminals Wire side of female terminals

Mult ip lex Control Unit (Driver's) 24P Connector Cavity Wire Color Test Condition Test: Desired Result Possible Cause

(If result is not obtained) A3 Shift lever in B Check for continuity to ground:

There should be continuity. • Faulty transmission range switch • Poor ground (G101) • An open in the wire

A12 Under all condit ions


• Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/ relay box

• Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box

• An open in the wire A14 Under all

condit ions Check for continuity to ground: There should be continuity.


A24 Ignition switch turned ON (II)


• Blown No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box


Multiplex Control Unit (Driver's) 22P Connector Cavity Wire Color Test Condition Test: Desired Result Possible Cause

(If result is not obtained) B11 BLK Under all

condit ions Check for continuity to ground: There should be continuity.


B22 GRN Ignition switch ON (II)


• Blown No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box

• Faulty shift lock solenoid • An open in the wire

4. Reconnect the connectors to the mult iplex control unit (driver's), and make this input test.

B12 WHT/RED Ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal pushed


• Faulty brake pedal position switch

• Faulty PCM • Faulty multiplex control unit

(driver's) • An open in the wire

B12 WHT/RED

Ignition switch ON (II), brake pedal and accelerator pedal pressed at the same t ime

Check for voltage to ground: There should be 1 V or less.

• Faulty brake pedal position switch

• Faulty PCM • Faulty multiplex control unit

(driver's) • An open in the wire

• If a test indicates a problem, f ind and correct the cause, then recheck the system. • |f all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good mult iplex control unit (driver's), and recheck the system.

If the system is OK, the mult iplex control unit (driver's) must be faulty; replace it.

14-148

Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test


1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-84).

2. Disconnect the key switch 7P connector from the steering lock assembly.

3. Check for continuity between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals when the key is pushed, and check for no continuity when the key is released.

KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P)

1 / 3 / 5 5 6 7

5>.


4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power connected to the No. 7 terminal and ground connected to the No. 3 terminals.

• If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK.

• If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the key interlock solenoid is not available separately).

<5® Shift Lock Solenoid Test


2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector.

3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal.

4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the E position. Release the battery terminals from the shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever back to the B position, and make sure it locks.

NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid.

5. Check that the shift lock releases when the release lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the release lever is released.

6. If the solenoid does not work, replace it.

14-149


Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement


2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector.

3. Pry the shift lock solenoid clamp (A) with a screwdriver, then remove the shift lock solenoid (B).

E

A

4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (C) and plunger spring (D) in the new shift lock solenoid.

5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid with the tip of the shift lock stop (E).

6. Secure the shift lock solenoid with the clamp, then connect the shift lock solenoid connector.

Park Pin Switch Test


2. Disconnect the park pin 4P connector.

3. Shift the shift lever into the \E position, then check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals. There should be no continuity.

4. Shift the shift lever out of the OB position, and check for continuity between the terminals in step 3. There should be continuity.

5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace the shift lever bracket base.

NOTE: The park pin switch is not available separately from the shift lever bracket base.

14-150

Transmission End Cower

End Cover Removal

Exploded View

H A R N E S S C L A M P B R A C K E T E N D C O V E R

T R A N S M I S S I O N R A N G E S W I T C H C O V E R

T R A N S M I S S I O N R A N G E S W I T C H

E N D C O V E R G A S K E T R e p l a c e . S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T

L O C K N U T R e p l a c e .

M A I N S H A F T L O C K N U T R e p l a c e .

P ITOT PIPE ' 0 0 - 0 1 m o d e l s )

L U B R I C A T I O N P I T O T PIPE

00-01 m o d e l s )

B E A R I N G H U B / B A L L B E A R I N G A S S E M B L Y

T H R U S T N E E D L E B E A R I N G

C O U N T E R S H A F T IDLER G E A R

N E E D L E B E A R I N G

C O N I C A L S P R I N G W A S H E R R e p l a c e .

P ITOT F L A N G E ( '00-01 m o d e l s )

M A I N S H A F T IDLER G E A R

C O N I C A L S P R I N G W A S H E R Rep lace .


B R E A T H E R T U B E

A T F C O O L E R L I N E

P A R K P A W L S H A F T

S E A L I N G W A S H E R S Rep lace .

L I N E B O L T

A T F C O O L E R L I N E

L I N E B O L T

(cont'd)

14-151

Transmission End Cower

End Cover Removal (cont'd)

Special Tools Required Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed dur ing the fo l lowing procedure.

1. Remove the transmission range switch cover.

2. Remove the bolts securing the harness clamp (one bolt) and transmission range switch (two bolts), then remove the transmission range switch.

3. Remove the bolts securing the end cover (sixteen bolts), then remove the end cover.

4. For '00-01 models: Remove the pitot pipe (A) and the lubrication pitot pipe ( B ) f rom the transmission housing (C), then remove the pitot f lange (D) f rom the mainshaft idler gear (E).

5. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.

0 7 G A B - P F 5 0 1 0 1 or 0 7 G A B - P F 5 0 1 0 0

6. Engage the park pawl wi th the park gear.

7. Cut the lock tabs (A) of each shaft locknut (B) using a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and conical spring washers f rom each shaft.

NOTE: • Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have

left-hand threads. • Clean the old locknuts; they are used to install the

press fit idler gears on the mainshaft and secondary shaft, and the park gear and bearing hub on the countershaft.

• Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the transmission.

8. Remove the special tool (mainshaft holder) f rom the mainshaft.

14-152

Remove the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the secondary shaft idler gear (B) with a puller (C).

C

10. Remove the bearing hub ( D ) with the puller from the countershaft then remove the countershaft idler gear (E) and bearings.

11. Remove the park gear (F) with the puller.

12. Remove the park pawl, spring, shaft, and shaft stop.

13. Remove the park lever from the control shaft.

14. Remove the line bolts, then remove the ATF cooler lines.

Park Lever Stop Inspection and Adjustment

1 . Set the park lever (A) in the B position.

6 x 1.0 m m 14 N m (1.4 kgf -m, 10 Ibff t )

2. Measure the distance (B) between the park pawl shaft (C) and the park lever roller pin (D).

STANDARD: 84.6 85.6 m m ( 3 . 3 3 3 . 3 7 in.)

3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and install the appropriate park lever stop (E) from the table below.

L2

PARK LEVER STOP

Mark Part Number L1 L2 1 24537-PA9-003 11.00 mm

(0.433 in.) 11.00 mm (0.433 in.)

2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm (0.425 in.)

10.65'mm (0.419 in.)

3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm (0.417 in.)

10.30 mm (0.406 in.)

4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the distance is within tolerance.

14-153

Transmission Housing

Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal

Exploded View

R E V E R S E I D L E R G E A R S H A F T H O L D E R

R E V E R S E I D L E R G E A R S H A F T

C O U N T E R S H A F T 2ND G E A R

T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G M O U N T I N G B O L T S

a ^ H A R N E S S C L A M P B R A C K E T TT © / 4


S H I F T F O R K

T R A N S M I S S I O N H A N G E R / H A R N E S S C L A M P B R A C K E T

T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G

T R A N S M I S S I O N H A N G E R

T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G G A S K E T R e p l a c e .

M A I N S H A F T S U B - A S S E M B L Y

S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T S U B - A S S E M B L Y

C O U N T E R S H A F T S U B - A S S E M B L Y

T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R H O U S I N G

14-154

Special Tools Required Housing puller 07HAC-PK40102

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the fo l lowing procedure.

1. Remove the two bolts securing the reverse idler gear shaft holder, then remove the reverse idler gear shaft holder (A), shaft (B), and washer (C).

2. Remove the transmission housing mount ing bolts, transmission hangers, and harness clamp bracket.

3. Move the reverse idler gear (A) to disengage it f rom the mainshaft and countershaft reverse gears.

NOTE: The transmission housing wi l l not separate f rom the torque converter housing if the reverse idler gear is not moved.

4. Al ign the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) wi th the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the control shaft.

A C 0 7 H A C - P K 4 0 1 0 2

5. Install the special tool over the mainshaft, then remove the transmission housing (D).

NOTE: If the top arm of your housing puller is too short, replace it wi th Housing Puller A rm, 205 m m , 07SAC-P0Z0101.

6. Remove the reverse idler gear, needle bearings, and thrust washer f rom the transmission housing.

7. Remove the countershaft 2nd gear, then remove the countershaft reverse gear and the needle bearing.

8. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then remove the shift fork wi th the reverse selector, reverse selector hub, and countershaft 4th gear. If the reverse selector hub is press-fitted, leave it and 4th gear on the countershaft.

9. Remove the secondary shaft sub-assembly. If the reverse selector hub is press-fitted, remove the secondary shaft sub-assembly, countershaft sub-assembly and mainshaft sub-assembly together.

10. Remove the countershaft sub-assembly.

11. Remove the mainshaft sub-assembly.

12. Remove the differential assembly.

14-155


Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required • Driver 07749-0010000 • Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 • Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 • Attachment, 72 x 75 m m 07746-0010600

NOTE: Coat all parts wi th ATF before assembly.

1. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A), countershaft bearing (B) and secondary shaft bearing (C) f rom the transmission housing, expand each snap r ing wi th the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out.

NOTE: Do not remove the snap rings unless it's necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.

2. Install the bearings in the direction shown.

3. Expand each snap ring wi th the snap ring pliers, and insert the bearing part-way into the housing.

4. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into the housing until the snap ring snaps in place around it.

5. After installing the bearings verify the fo l lowing:

• The snap rings (A) are seated in the bearing and housing grooves.

• The ring end gaps (B) are correct.

B: 0—7 mm ( 0 - 0 . 2 8 in.)

14-156

Valve Body

Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal

Exploded View

S E R V O D E T E N T B A S E

A T F S T R A I N E R

A T F FEED PIPE, 8 x 198 m m

A T F FEED P IPES, 8 x 85 m m 3 P i p e s

S E R V O B O D Y

D O W E L P I N S , 2

S E R V O S E P A R A T O R P L A T E

S J A T O R S H A F T

S T A T O R S H A F T S T O P


R E G U L A T O R S E P A R A T O R P L A T E

6x 1.0 m m , 1 Bolt


C O O L E R C H E C K V A L V E S P R I N G


A T F P U M P D R I V E N G E A R S H A F T

A T F P U M P D R I V E G E A R


M A I N S E P A R A T O R P L A T E

A C C U M U L A T O R B O D Y



T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C H E C K V A L V E

T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C H E C K V A L V E S P R I N G

(cont'd)

14-157

Valve Body

Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal (cont'd)

NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed dur ing the fo l lowing procedure.

1. Remove the ATF feed pipes f rom the regulator valve body, servo body, and accumulator body.

2. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts).

3. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts).

4. Remove the accumulator cover (two bolts).

NOTE: The accumulator cover is spring loaded. To prevent stripping the threads in the servo body, press down on the accumulator cover whi le unscrewing the bolts in a crisscross pattern.

5. Remove the bolts securing the servo body (nine bolts), then remove the servo body, servo separator plate and dowel pins (two).

6. Remove the accumulator body (six bolts).

7. Remove the regulator valve body (eight bolts).

8. Remove the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.

9. Remove the regulator separator plate and dowel pins (two).

10. Unhook the detent spring f rom the detent arm, then remove the detent arm shaft, detent arm, and control shaft.

11. Remove the cooler check valve spring and cooler check valve (steel ball).

16. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B). thoroughly wi th compressed air, then check that it is in good condit ion, and the inlet opening is not clogged.

A

17. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or damaged.

12. Remove the main valve body (four bolts).

13. Remove the torque converter check valve and spring.

14. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then remove the ATF pump gears.

15. Remove the main separator plate and dowel pins (three).

14-158

Valve Body Repair

NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their bores. Use this procedure to free the valves.

1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for about 30 minutes.

2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful not to scratch the bore wi th the screwdriver.

3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and dry it wi th compressed air.

4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked # 600 paper and insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve. Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits the bore t ightly, then polish the bore by twist ing the paper as you push it in and out.

NOTE: The valve body is a luminum and doesn't require much polishing to remove any burrs.

5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the entire valve body in solvent, then dry it wi th compressed air.

6. Coat the valve wi th ATF, then drop it into its bore. It should drop to the bottom of the bore under its own weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. If the valve still sticks, replace the valve body.

7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the valve body with solvent. Dry all parts wi th compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a lubricant.

14-159

Valve Body

Valve Body Valve Reassembly

1. Coat all parts wi th ATF before assembly.

2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence shown for the main valve body (see page 14-161), regulator valve body (see page 14-164), and servo body (see page 14-165). Refer to the fo l lowing valve cap il lustrations, and install each valve cap so the end shown facing up wi l l be facing the outside of the valve body.

3. Install all the springs and seats. Insert the spring (A) in the valve, then install the valve in the valve body (B). Push the spring in wi th a screwdriver, then install the spring seat (C).

C

14-160

Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them wi th compressed air. Blow out all passages.

2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check valve ball; it may magnetize the ball.

3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).

4. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts worn or damaged.

5. Coat all parts wi th ATF during assembly.

6. Install the filter in the direction shown.

(cont'd)

14-161

Valve Body

Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)

Sectional V iew

M A N U A L V A L V E

SPRING SPECIFICATIONS

No. Spring Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.) No. Spring Wire Dia. O.D. Free Length No. of Coils

CD Modulator valve spring 1.6(0.063) 10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) 9.8 © Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7

Shift valve D spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2 © Shift valve E spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 32.2 (1.268) 13.4 © Relief valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.6 (0.339) 30.1 (1.185) 10.7 ® Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 7.6 (0.299) 63.0 (2.480) 22.4 © Cooler check valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 5.8(0.228) 14.5(0.571) 6.8 © Torque converter check valve 1.2 (0.047) 8.6 (0.339) 35.1 (1.382) 14.3 © Servo control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2 @ Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9

14-162

ATF Pomp inspection

1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B) and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main valve body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered side facing up.

D

2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive gear (A) and driven gear (B).

ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance; Standard (New): ATF Pump Drive Gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083 0.00104 in.) ATF Pump Driven Gear 0.035-0.063 mm (0.0014-0.0025 in.)

3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge (C) and a feeler gauge (D).

ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial) Clearance: Standard (New): 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001 -0 .002 in.) Service Limit: 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)

C

14-163

Valve Body

Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages.

2. Check all valves for free movement, If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).

3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged.

4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place whi le removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded. Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.

5. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly. Install the fi l ter in the direction shown.

6. Coat all parts wi th ATF during reassembly.

7. Al ign the hole in the regulator spring cap wi th the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve body, and t ighten the stop bolt.

V A L V E S L E E V E L O C K - U P C O N T R O L V A L V E



© Stator reaction spring 5.5(0.217) 37.4(1.472) 30.3 (1.193) 2.12 © Regulator valve spring A 1.8 (0.071) 14.7 (0.579) 87.5 (3.445) 16.5 ® Regulator valve spring B 1.7 (0.067) 9.4 (0.370) 44.0(1.732) 13.4 © Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.9 (1.689) 14.2 © Lock-up t iming valve spring 0.65 (0.026) 6.6 (0.260) 34.8 (1.370) 15.6

14-164

< 2 ® Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1 . Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages.

2. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).

3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts worn or damaged.

4. Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly.

R e p l a c e .



® Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4(1.591) 16.9 © Shift valve A spring 0 8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4(1.591) 16.9 © CPC valve A spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9

CPC valve B spring 0 7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9 © 4th accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 19.6(0.772) 66.4(2.614) 9.7 © 4th accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.8 (0.504) 51.5 (2.028) 11.5 ® 3rd accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 19.6(0.772) 66.4(2.614) 9.7 © 3rd accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.8(0.504) 51.5 (2.028) 11.5

14-165

Valve Body

Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls: it may magnetize the balls.

2. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages.

3. Coat all parts wi th ATF during reassembly.

S N A P R I N G S


No. Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.) No. Springs Wire Dia. O.D. Free Length No. of Coils

© 1st accumulator spring B 2.7 (0.106) 15.0 (0.591) 52.5 (2.067) 10.3 © 1st accumulator spring A 2.5 (0.098) 21.6 (0.850) 87.5(3.445) 11.8 © 2nd accumulator spring B 2.4(0.094) 12.6 (0.496) 53.5(2.106) 12.9 ® 2nd accumulator spring A 2.7 (0.106) 19.6 (0.772) 66.3 (2.610) 9.9

14-166

Torque Converter Housing < 3 © Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required • Adjustable bearing puller, 25—40 mm 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A

•Driver 07749-0010000 • Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 • Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600

1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the special tool and a commercially available 3/8"-16 slide hammer (A).

0 7 7 3 6 - A 0 1 0 0 0 B o r 0 7 7 3 6 - A 0 1 0 0 0 A

2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in the housing with the special tools.

07749-0010000

3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing with the special tools.

07749 -0010000

07746-0010600

14-167

Torque Converter Housing

Countershaft Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required • Adjustable bearing puller, 25 — 40 mm

07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A • Driver 07749-0010000 • Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500

1. Remove the countershaft bearing (A) wi th the special tool and a commercial ly available 3/8"-16 slide hammer (B).

2. Install the ATF guide plate (A).

3. Install the new bearing (B) into the housing (C) wi th the special tools.

Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required • Adjustable bearing puller, 2 5 - 4 0 m m

07736-A01000B or07736-A01000A • Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver attachment 07947-6340500

1. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) wi th the special tool and a commercial ly available 3/8"-16 slide hammer (B).

2. Install the ATF guide plate <A).

_ 07749-0010000

17-6340500

B

0—0.03 m m / | ^ tA\ ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 1 i n . ) I .hQ^f)

C A

3. Install the new bearing (B) into the housing (C) wi th the special tools.

14-168

Shafts and Clutches

Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Lubricate all parts wi th ATF during reassembly.

T H R U S T W A S H E R , 27 x 47 x 5 m m


4 T H G E A R

S E A L I N G R I N G S , 3 2 m m

S E A L I N G R I N G S 2 9 mm


L O C K N U T ( F L A N G E N U T ) R e p l a c e . 226 Nm (23.0 kgf -m, 166 I b f f t ) — 0 -167 N-m (17.0 kgf -m, 123 Ibfft )


6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf f t ) ( '00-01 m o d e l s )

P I T O T F L A N G E 00-01 m o d e l s )

I D L E R G E A R

T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G B E A R I N G

3 R D / 4 T H C L U T C H A S S E M B L Y

O - R I N G S R e p l a c e .

T H R U S T S H I M , 41 x 73 m m S e l e c t i v e part


3 R D G E A R



S E T R I N G

2. Check the clearance of the 3rd/4th clutch assembly (see page 14-170). 3. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for gall ing and rough movement. 4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage. 5. Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear. 6. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines wi th tape to prevent damage to the O-rings. 7. Install the conical spring washer and 41 x 73 mm thrust shim in the direction shown. 8. Inspect condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are worn , distorted, or damaged, replace them (see page

14-171).

14-169

Shafts and Clutches

3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection

1. Remove the O-rings f rom the mainshaft.

2. Assemble the 41 x 73 m m thrust shim (A), 3rd/4th clutch assembly (B), and 4th gear collar (C) on the mainshaft (D).

3. Hold the 4th gear collar (C) against the clutch assembly (B), then measure the clearance between the clutch guide (E) and the 4th gear collar wi th a feeler gauge (F) in at least three places. Use the average as the actual clearance.

STANDARD: 0 . 0 3 0 . 1 1 m m (0.001 0.004 in.)

C

4. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the thrust shim and measure its thickness.

5. Select and install a new shim, then recheck.

THRUST SHIM, 41 x 73 m m

No. Part Number Thickness 1 90414-P7X-000 7.85 mm (0.309 in.) 2 90415-P7X-000 7.90 mm (0.311 in.) 3 90416-P7X-000 7.95 m m (0.313 in.) 4 90417-P7X-000 8.00 m m (0.315 in.)

90418-P7X-000 8.05 m m (0.317 in.) 6 90419-P7X-000 8.10 mm (0.319 in.)

6. After replacing the thrust shim, make sure the clearance is wi th in standard.

14-170

Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement

The sealing rings are synthetic resin wi th chamfered ends. Check condition of the sealing rings, and replace them only if they are worn, distorted, or damaged.

1. For a better f it, squeeze the sealing rings (A) together slightly before installing them.

2. Apply ATF to the new sealing rings then install them on the mainshaft.

3. After installing the sealing rings, verify the fol lowing:

• The rings are ful ly seated in the groove. • The rings are not twisted. • The chamfered ends of the rings are properly

joined.

Shafts and Clutches

Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Remove the locknut, and take off components down to the reverse selector hub.

L O C K N U T ( F L A N G E N U T ) R e p l a c e . L e f t - h a n d t h r e a d s 226 N-m (23.0 kgf -m, 166 l b f f t ) - 0 — 167 N m (17.0 kgf -m, 123 Ibfft)

2. Remove the reverse selector hub, 3rd gear, and 1st gear (see page 14-173).

3. Check the bearing in the bearing hub for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it (see page 14-175).

4. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for gall ing and rough movement.

5. Check the splines for excessive wear and damage.

6. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.

7. Lubricate all parts wi th ATF, and reassemble the shafts and gears.

8. Install the conical spring washer, reverse selector, reverse selector hub, and distance collar in the direction shown.

14-172

Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement

Special Tools Required Driver 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100

Removal

1. Remove the reverse selector hub (A) and the 4th gear (B) wi th a universal two- jaw (or three-jaw) puller (C). Place a shaft protector (D) between the puller and countershaft (E) to prevent damaging the countershaft.

NOTE: Some of the reverse selector hubs are not press-fitted, and can be removed wi thout using a puller.

2. Remove the needle bearing, snap ring, distance collar, and 31 m m cotters f rom the countershaft.

3. Remove the 1st gear (A) and 3rd gear (B) together f rom the countershaft (C) wi th a puller (D). Place a shaft protector (E) between the puller and countershaft to prevent damaging the countershaft.

(cont'd)

14-173

Shafts and Clutches

Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement (cont'd) Installation

1. Apply ATF to the parts.

2. Install the 1st gear on the countershaft by hand.

3. Al ign the shaft splines wi th those on 3rd gear, then press the countershaft (A) into the 3rd gear w i th press.

• Place an attachment (B) between the press and countershaft to prevent damaging the countershaft.

• Stop pressing the countershaft when the 3rd gear contacts the 1st gear (C).

4. Install the 31 m m cotters, distance collar, snap ring, needle bearing, and 4th gear (A) on the countershaft.

5. Slide the reverse selector hub (B) over the countershaft (C), and then press it into place wi th the special tool and a press.

NOTE: Some of the reverse selector hubs are not press-fitted and can be installed without using the special tool and a press.

07746-0030100

14-174

Countershaft Bearing Huh/Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required •Driver 07749-0010000 • Attachment 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 • Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500

1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it.

2. Remove the bearing (A) from the bearing hub with the special tools, a bearing separator (B), and a press.

3. Install the new bearing on the bearing hub with the special tools and a press.

Shafts and Clutches

Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Remove the locknut, and disassemble the shaft and gears.


S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T



S P L I N E D W A S H E R , 38 x 56.5 mm S e l e c t i v e p a r t


2 N D G E A R


T H R U S T N E E D L E ^ ( H j B E A R I N G v 1 1


1ST G E A R

C O T T E R S , 32 m m

C O T T E R R E T A I N E R

S N A P R I N G

S E A L I N G R I N G S , 25 m m

L O C K N U T ( F L A N G E N U T ) R e p l a c e . L e f t - h a n d t h r e a d s 226 N m (23.0 kgf -m, 166 Ib f f t )—0-167 N m (17.0 kgf -m, 123 Ibfft)

B A L L B E A R I N G

I D L E R G E A R

T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G B E A R I N G

T H R U S T S H I M , 37 x 55 m m S e l e c t i v e p a r t

1 S T / 2 N D C L U T C H A S S E M B L Y


2. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for gall ing and rough movement. 3. Check clearance of the secondary shaft assembly (see page 14-177). 4. Check the splines for excessive wear and damage. 5. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear. 6. Check the idler gear bearing for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it (see

page 14-179). 7. Before install ing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines wi th tape to prevent damage to the O-rings. 8. Lubricate all parts w i th ATF during reassembly. 9. Install the conical spring washer and 38 x 56.5 m m splined washer in the direction shown.

14-176

<S0 Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection

1. Remove the O-rings f rom the shaft.

2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing (B), 1st gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D), 38 x 56.5 m m splined washer (E), 32 mm cotters (F), cotter retainer (G), and snap ring (H) on the secondary shaft (I).

3. Measure the clearance between the 38 x 56.5 m m splined washer (E) and cotters (F) wi th a feeler gauge (J) in at least three places. Use the average as the actual clearance.

STANDARD: 0.07 0.15 m m (0.003-0.006 in.)

4. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the splined washer, and measure its thickness.

5. Select and install a new splined washer, then recheck.

SPLINED WASHER, 38 x 56.5 m m

No. | Part Number Thickness 1 j 90502-P0Z-000 6.85 m m (0.270 in.) 2 ; 90503-P0Z-000 6.90 mm (0.272 in.) 3 j 90504-P0Z-000 6.95 mm (0.274 in.) 4 I 90505-P0Z-000 7.00 mm (0.276 in.) 5 ! 90506-P0Z-000 7.05 mm (0.278 in.) 6 i 90507-P0Z-000 7.10 mm (0.280 in.)

(cont'd)

14-177

Shafts and Clutches

Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection (cont'd)

6. Remove the 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer f rom the mainshaft.

7. Assemble the 1st/2nd clutch assembly (A), 37 x 55 m m thrust shim (B), thrust needle bearing (C), needle bearing (D), 2nd gear (E), thrust needle bearing (F), and 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer (removed f rom mainshaft ) (G) on the secondary shaft (H).

Set the dial indicator (I) on 2nd gear (E). E »

9. Hold the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer (G) against the clutch assembly (A), and measure the 2nd gear axial clearance in at least three places while moving the 2nd gear (E). Use the average as the actual clearance.

STANDARD: 0 .04-0 .12 m m (0.002 0.005 in.)

10. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 37 x 55 m m thrust shim and measure its thickness.

11. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck.

THRUST SHIM, 37 x 55 m m

No. Part Number Thickness 1 90406-P0Z-000 4.90 mm (0.193 in.) 2 90407-P0Z-000 4.95 mm (0.195 in.) 3 90408-P0Z-000 5.00 m m (0.197 in.) 4 90409-P0Z-000 5.05 m m (0.199 in.) 5 90410-P0Z-000 5.10 m m (0.201 in.) 6 90411-P0Z-000 5.15 m m (0.203 in.) 7 90412-P0Z-000 5.20 m m (0.205 in.)

12. Disassemble the shaft and gears.

13. Reinstall the 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer on the mainshaft.

14-178

Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required • Driver 07749-0010000 • At tachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500

1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, go to step 2.

2. Place the secondary shaft idler gear in a vise with soft jaws.

3. Remove the bearing (A) f rom the secondary shaft idler gear (B) wi th a commercial ly available 3-jaw slide hammer (C).

C

4. Install the bearing on the secondary shaft idler gear with the special tool and a press.

14-179

Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Disassembly

Special Tools Required • Clutch spring compressor attachment 07LAE-PX40100

• Clutch spring compressor attachment 07HAE-PL50101

• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A

1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch end plate, the clutch discs, and the plates wi th a screwdriver (B).

A

2. Remove the disc spring (A) f rom the 1st, 3rd and 4th clutches.

NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.

A

3. Install the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch assembly.

0 7 L A E - P X 4 0 1 0 0

4. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and 4th clutches.

14-180

5. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the special tool works on the clutch return spring (C).

7. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be removed.

(cont'd)

14-181

Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)

9. For 3rd and 4th clutch: Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum (A), and apply air pressure to the f lu id passage to remove the piston (B). Place a f inger t ip on the other end whi le applying air pressure.

B

14-182

Clutch Inspection

1ST/2ND CLUTCH

NOTE: There are two types of spring retainer, you may f ind either type in the clutch assembly. Some spring retainers have seal lips, and do not have O-rings. The seal lip is undetachable f rom the spring retainer.


C L U T C H P I S T O N

D I S C S P R I N G

R E T U R N S P R I N G

O - R I N G Rep lace ,


S N A P R I N G

C L U T C H P L A T E S S t a n d a r d t h i c k n e s s : 2.0 m m (0 .079 i n .

C L U T C H D I S C S S t a n d a r d t h i c k n e s s : 1.94 m m (0 .076 in . )

C L U T C H D I S C S S t a n d a r d t h i c k n e s s : 1.94 m m (0 .076 in.)

- S N A P R I N G

- C L U T C H E N D P L A T E

- C L U T C H P L A T E S S t a n d a r d t h i c k n e s s : 2.0 m m (0 .079 in.)

- S N A P R I N G

- S P R I N G R E T A I N E R

- O - R I N G R e p l a c e .

- R E T U R N S P R I N G


C L U T C H E N D P L A T E - S N A P R I N G

' O - R I N G S Rep lace .

2ND C L U T C H D R U M

1 S T C L U T C H D R U M

(cont'd)

14-183

Shafts and Clutches

Clutch inspection (cont'd)

3RD/4TH CLUTCH


C H E C K V A L V E


D I S C S P R I N G



S N A P R I N G

C L U T C H D I S C S S t a n d a r d t h i c k n e s s 1.94 m m (0 .076 i n .

C L U T C H E N D P L A T E

C L U T C H D I S C S S t a n d a r d t h i c k n e s s : 1.94 m m (0 .076 in . )

S N A P R I N G

C L U T C H E N D P L A T E

C L U T C H P L A T E S S t a n d a r d t h i c k n e s s : 2.0 m m (0 .079 in . )

S N A P R I N G



D I S C S P R I N G


O - R I N G S Replace.

4TH C L U T C H D R U M

3RD C L U T C H D R U M

S N A P R I N G

14-184

Clutch Reassembly

Special Tools Required • Clutch spring compressor attachment

07LAE-PX40100 • Clutch spring compressor attachment 07HAE-PL50101

• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A

Note these items during reassembly:

• Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them wi th compressed air.

• Blow out all passages. • Apply ATF to all parts before assembly.

1. Inspect the check valve (A) on the 3rd and 4th clutch pistons (B); if it's loose, replace the piston.

A

2. Install new O-rings (A) on the piston (B) and the spring retainer (1st and 2nd clutches).

NOTE: Some spring retainers of the 1st and 2nd clutch have seal lips and do not have O-rings.

3. Install the piston (A) in the clutch drum (B). Apply pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating. Lubricate the piston O-ring wi th ATF before installing.

NOTE: Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the piston with too much force.

A

(cont'd)

14-185

Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)

4. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B), and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer.

C

5. Install the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch assembly.

0 7 L A E - P X 4 0 1 0 Q

0 7 L A E - P X 4 0 1 0 0 or 0 7 H A E - P L 5 0 1 0 1

0 7 G A E - P G 4 0 2 0 0 or 0 7 G A E - P G 4 0 2 0 A

6. Be sure the special too (A) is adjusted to have full contact wi th the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and 4th clutches.

7. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the special tool work on the clutch return spring (C).

14-186

8. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of the spring retainer which is unsupported by the return spring, the retainer may be damaged.

9. Compress the return spring.

10. Install the snap ring (A).

11. Remove the special tools.

12. Install the disc spring in the 1st, 3rd, and 4th clutches in the direction shown.

NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.

(cont'd)

14-187

Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)

13. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a min imum of 30 minutes. Before install ing the plates and discs, make sure the inside of the clutch drum is free of dirt and other foreign matter.

14. Starting wi th a clutch plate, alternately install the clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate (A) wi th the flat side toward the disc (B).

15. Install the snap ring (A) wi th a screwdriver (B).

16. Measure the clearance between the clutch end plate (A) and top disc (B) wi th a dial indicator (C). Zero the dial indicator wi th the clutch end plate lowered, and lift it up to the snap ring (D). The distance that the clutch end plate moves is the clearance between the clutch end plate and top disc.

NOTE: Take measurement in at least 3 places, and use the average as the actual clearance.

Clutch End Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance:

Clutch Service Limit 1st 1.2-1.4 mm (0.047- 0.055 in.)

2nd 0.85 -1.05 mm (0.033-0.041 in.) 3rd 0.55 0.75 mm (0.022 0.030 in.) 4th 0.55 0.75 mm (0.022-0.030 in.)

14-188

17. If the clearance is not within the service limit, select a new clutch end plate from the following table.

NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed, but the clearance is still over the standard, replace the clutch discs and clutch plates as a set.

1ST and 2ND CLUTCH END PLATES

Mark Part Number Thickness 6 22551-P7Z-003 2.6mm (0.102 in.) 7 22552-P7Z-003 2.7 m m (0.106 in.) 8 22553-P7Z-003 2.8 m m (0.110 in.) 9 22554-P7Z-003 2.9 m m (0.114 in.) 0 22555-P7Z-003 3.0 m m (0.118 in.) 1 22556-P7Z-003 3.1 m m (0.122 in.) 2 22557-P7Z-003 3.2 m m (0.126 in.) 3 22558-P7Z-003 3.3 m m (0.130 in.) 4 22559-P7Z-003 3.4 m m (0.134 in.)

3RD and 4TH CLUTCH END PLATES

Mark Part Number Thickness 1 22551-PX4-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.) 2 22552-PX4-003 2.2 m m (0.087 in.) 3 22553-PX4-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) 4 22554-PX4-003 2.4 m m (0.094 in.) 5 22555-PX4-003 2.5 m m (0.098 in.) 6 22556-PX4-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.) 7 22557-PX4-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.) 8 22558-PX4-003 2.8 m m (0.110 in.) 9 22559-PX4-003 2.9 m m (0.114 in.)

14-189

Valve Body

Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation

Exploded View

T o r q u e : — 6 x 1.0 m m : 12 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibff t ) — 8 x 1.25 m m : 18 N - m (1.8 kgf -m, 13 Ibff t )

6 x 1.0 m m , 8 B o l t s

S E R V O D E T E N T B A S E

A T F S T R A I N E R

O - R I N G R e p l a c e

6 x 1.0 m m 2 B o l t s

6 x 1.0 m m 9 B o l t s

S E R V O B O D Y


S E R V O S E P A R A T O R P L A T E

- A T F F E E D P I P E , 8 x 198 m m

A T F F E E D P I P E S , 8 x 85 mm 3 P i p e s

S T A J O R S H A F T

S T A T O R S H A F T S T O P


R E G U L A T O R S E P A R A T O R P L A T E

6 x 1.0 m m , 1 Bol t


C O O L E R C H E C K V A L V E S P R I N G


A T F P U M P D R I V E N G E A R S H A F T

A T F P U M P D R I V E G E A R


M A I N S E P A R A T O R P L A T E


A C C U M U L A T O R B O D Y

T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R H O U S I N G T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C H E C K V A L V E

T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C H E C K V A L V E S P R I N G

14-190

NOTE: Refer to the exploded view as needed during the fol lowing procedure.

1. Install the main separator plate (A) and three dowel pins on the torque converter housing. Then install the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C) and ATF pump driven gear shaft (D). Install the ATF pump driven gear wi th its grooved and chamfered side facing down.

2. Install the torque converter check valve and spring, then install the main valve body (one 6 mm bolt and three 8 m m bolts). Make sure the ATF pump drive gear (B) rotates smoothly in the normal operating direction, and the ATF pump driven gear shaft (D) moves smoothly in the axial and normal operating direction.

3. If the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driven gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified torque, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF pump driven gear shaft correctly wi l l result in a seized ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven gear shaft.

4. Install the cooler check valve and spring on the main valve body, then install the two dowel pins and the regulator separator plate.

5. Install the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.

6. Install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).

7. Install the two dowel pins and the servo separator plate on the main valve body.

8. Install the control shaft (A) in the torque converter housing along wi th the manual valve (B).

B E

9. Install the detent arm (C) and arm shaft (D) in the main valve body (E), then hook the detent arm spring (F) to the detent arm.

10. Install the servo body (G) (nine bolts).

11. Install the accumulator cover (two bolts).

12. Install the ATF strainer (two bolts).

13. Install the servo detent base (two bolts).

14. Install the accumulator body (six bolts).

15. Install the two ATF feed pipes in the servo body, four pipes in the regulator valve body, and one pipe in the accumulator body.

14-191


Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation

Exploded V i e w

8 x 1.25 m m 26 N-m (2.7 kg f -m, 20 Ib f f t )

R E V E R S E I D L E R G E A R S H A F T

T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G M O U N T I N G B O L T S 10 x 1.25 mm 44 N m (4.5 kgf -m, 3 3 Ibff t )

H A R N E S S C L A M P B R A C K E T

C O U N T E R S H A F T 2 N D G E A R


6 x 1.0 m m 14 N-m (1.4 kgf-m 10 Ibff t )

L O C K W A S H E R R e p l a c e .

S H I F T F O R K



C O U N T E R S H A F T 4 T H G E A R ' / ' -

S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T S U B - A S S E M B L Y

T R A N S M I S S I O N H A N G E R / H A R N E S S C L A M P B R A C K E T

T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G

T R A N S M I S S I O N H A N G E R

T R A N S M I S S I O N H O U S I N G G A S K E T Rep lace .

R E V E R S E I D L E R G E A R

M A I N S H A F T S U B - A S S E M B L Y

C O U N T E R S H A F T S U B - A S S E M B L Y D I F F E R E N T I A L A S S E M B L Y


14-192

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the following procedure.

1. Install the differential assembly, countershaft subassembly, mainshaft sub-assembly, and secondary shaft sub-assembly in the torque converter housing.

2. Install the countershaft 4th gear and reverse selector hub on the countershaft. If the reverse selector hub is a press-fitted type, refer to the installation procedure (see page 14-173).

3. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered hole is facing the fork bolt hole. Then install the shift fork (B) and reverse selector (C) together on the shift fork shaft and countershaft (D). Secure the shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt (E) and a new lock washer (F), then bend the lock washer against the bolt head.

E 6 x 1.0 m m 14 N m (1.4 kgf -m, 10 Ibf f t )

Install the needle bearing, countershaft reverse gear, and countershaft 2nd gear on the countershaft.

5. Place the thrust washer (A) in the transmission housing.

Place the reverse idler gear (A) in the transmission housing as shown, then slide it in the direction shown.

(cont'd)

14-193


Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation (cont'd)

7. Al ign the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) wi th the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the control shaft.

A

8. Install three dowel pins and a new gasket on the torque converter housing.

9. Place the transmission housing on the torque converter housing, then install the transmission housing mount ing bolts along wi th the harness clamp bracket (A), transmission hanger (B) and transmission hanger/harness clamp bracket (C). Tighten the bolts in two or more steps in the sequence shown.

TORQUE: 4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ib f f t ) C B

10. Engage the reverse idler gear with the countershaft reverse gear and the mainshaft reverse gear. Then install the needle bearings (A), reverse idler gear shaft (B) and thrust washer (C) in the reverse idler gear, and install the reverse idler gear shaft holder (D) on the transmission housing.

8 x 1.25 m m 26 N m (2.7 k g f m , 20 Ibff t )

14-194

Transmission End Cover

End Cower and Idler Gears Installation

Special Tools Required Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100

1. Install the park lever (A) and park lever stop (B) on the control shaft (C), then install the lock bolt (D) wi th a new lock washer (E). Do not bend the lock tab of the lock washer in this step; bend it after checking park pawl engagement.

2. Lubricate the fol lowing parts wi th ATF:

• Splines of the countershaft, the park gear, and the old locknut.

• Threads of the countershaft and the old locknut. • Old conical spring washer.

3® 3. Install the park gear (A) using the old locknut (B)

and a collar (C). Hold the park pawl (D) to engage wi th the park gear, then tighten the old locknut until the shaft splines come out slightly over the park gear splines.

NOTE: • Do not use an impact wrench. • Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.

D

4. Remove the locknut and the collar, then install only the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) and old conical spring washer (B). Tighten the old locknut (C) to seat the park gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m, 166 Ibf ft), then remove the locknut and conical spring washer.

(cont/d)

14-195


End Cover and Idler Gears Installation

5. Remove the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) with a puller (B).

6. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing (B), countershaft idler gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D), bearing hub/bearing assembly (E), and the old conical spring washer (F). Then tighten the old locknut (G) to seat the bearing hub/bearing assembly to 164 N-m (17.0 kgfm, 123 Ibfft).

NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench, always use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut.

(cont'd)

7. Set the dial indicator (A) to the countershaft idler gear (B) as shown.

8. Measure the countershaft idler gear axial clearance in at least three places, while moving the countershaft idler gear (A). Use the average as the actual clearance.

STANDARD: 0.015-0.045 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.)

A

14-196

9. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the bearing hub/bearing assembly using a puller as described on the previous page.

10. Select and install the new bearing hub/bearing assembly, then recheck.

BEARING HUB

Mark Part Number Difference A 90520-P6H-000 3.503 mm (0.1379 in.) B 90521-P6H-000 3.490 m m (0.1374 in.) C 90522-P6H-000 3.477 m m (0.1369 in.) D 90523-P6H-000 3.464 m m (0.1364 in.)

11. After replacing the bearing hub/bearing assembly make sure the clearance is within standard.

12. Remove the old locknut and old conical spring washer f rom the countershaft.

13. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft.

14. Lubricate the fo l lowing parts wi th ATF: • Splines of the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and

idler gears. • Threads of the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and

new locknuts. • Old conical spring washers.

15. Install the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the old conical spring washer (B) on the mainshaft (C). Tighten the old locknut (D) to seat the mainshaft idler gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m, 166 Ibf-ft).

NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench, always use a torque wrench to t ighten the locknut.

16. Install the secondary shaft idler gear (E) and the old conical spring washer (F) on the secondary shaft (G). Tighten the old locknut (H) to seat the secondary shaft idler gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m, 166 I bf-ft)

NOTE: • Do not use an impact wrench, always use a

torque wrench to tighten the locknut. • Secondary shaft locknut has left-hand threads.

17. Remove the old locknuts and old conical spring washer f rom the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.

(cont'd)

14-197


End Cover and Idler Gears Installation

18. Lubricate the threads of each shaft and new locknuts, and new conical spring washers wi th ATF.

19. Install the new conical spring washers (A) in the direction shown, and install the new locknuts (B).

20. Tighten the locknuts to 167 N-m (17.0 kgf-m, 123 ib f f t ) .

NOTE: • Do not use an impact wrench, always use a

torque wrench to t ighten the locknut. • Coutershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have

left-hand threads.

21 . Stake each locknut into its shaft using a 3.5 m m punch.

(cont'd)

22. For '00-01 models: Install the pitot flange (A) on the mainshaft idler gear (B), then install the lubrication pitot pipe (C) and the pitot pipe (D) on the transmission housing.

23. Set the park lever in the E posit ion, then verify that the park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).

B

24. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the distance between the pawl shaft (C) and the park lever roller pin (D) (see page 14-153).

25. Tighten the lock bolt (E), and bend the lock tab of the lock washer (F) against the lock bolt head.

14-198

0® 26. Install the end cover (A) along wi th two dowel pins,

new O-rings, new gasket, and harness clamp bracket (B). Tighten the 16 bolts to 12 N-m, (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft).

B

27. Set the transmission range switch to \S\ position.

NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in M position.

28. Set the control shaft (A) to the H position by turning it.

NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the control shaft t ips together when turning into position. If the tips are squeezed together it wi l l cause a faulty shift signal or position due to the play between the control shaft and the switch.

A

(cont'd)

14-199


End Cover and Idler Gears Installation (cont'd)

29. Install the transmission range switch (A) loosely on the control shaft (B), then secure it wi th the bolts. Do not move the transmission range switch when t ightening the bolts.

30. Install the transmission range switch cover (C), and install the harness clamp (D) on the clamp bracket (E) on the transmission housing, then install the harness clamp (F) on the end cover (G).

31. Install the ATF cooler lines and new sealing washers. Tighten the line f i t t ings to 28 N-m (2.9 kgf-m, 21 Ibf-ft)

32. Install the breather tube.

33. Install the ATF dipstick.

14-200

A/T Differential 0© Component Location Index Backlash Inspection

T H R U S T S H I M , 76 m m

T H R U S T W A S H E R

B E A R I N G O U T E R R A C E Replacement , page 14-204

C A R R I E R B E A R I N G Replacement , page 14-202

FINAL D R I V E N G E A R Replacement , page 14-202

D I F F E R E N T I A L C A R R I E R Backlash Inspection, page 14-201

C A R R I E R B E A R I N G Replacement , page 14-202

B E A R I N G O U T E R R A C E Replacement , page 14-204

^ T H R U S T W A S H E R

1. Install both axles, and place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A).

2. Check the backlash of both pinion gears (B) wi th a dial indicator (C).

STANDARD: 0.05 0.15 m m (0.002 0.006 in.)

3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the differential carrier.

14-201

A/T Differential

Final Driven Gear/Carrier Replacement

1. Remove the final driven gear f rom the differential carrier.

NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand threads.

2. Install the final driven gear wi th the chamfered side on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.

3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a crisscross pattern.

TORQUE: 101 N-m (10.3 k g f m , 74.5 Ib f f t )

Carrier Bearing Replacement

Special Tools Required Attachment, 40 x 50 m m 07LAD-PW50601

NOTE: • The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a

set. • Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever

bearing is replaced. • Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the

bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.

1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) wi th a commercial ly available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C), and stepped adapter (D).

2. Install the new carrier bearings with the special tool and a press.

NOTE: • Press the bearings on until they bottom. • Use the small end of the special tool to install the

bearing. • Press the bearings on securely so there is no

clearance between the bearings and the differential carrier.

14-202

Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tools Required •Driver 07749-0010000 • Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 or

07GAD-PG40100 • Pi lot 28 x 30 m m 07JAD-PH80400 • Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101

1. Remove the differential assembly.

2. Remove the oil seal (A) f rom the transmission housing (B).

A B

3. Remove the oil seal (A) f rom the torque converter housing (B).

B

4. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing wi th the special tools.

0 7 J A D - P H 8 0 4 0 0

14-203

A/T Differential

Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement

Special Tools Required •Driver 07749-0010000 • Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NA1D-PX40100

NOTE: • Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the

outer race is to be replaced. • Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing

side. • Adjust preload after replacing the bearing and outer

race. • Coat all parts with ATF during installation.

1. Remove the bearing outer race from the transmission housing by heating the housing to about 212°F (100°C) with a heat gun. Do not heat the housing more than 212°F (100°C).

2. Remove the bearing outer race from the torque converter housing.

3. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B) and outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D) with the special tools.

14-204

4. Install the thrust washer (A) and outer race (B) in the torque converter housing (C), and be sure to install the outer race until it bottoms in the housing with the special tools.

B

0 7 N A D - P X 4 0 1 0 0

Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection

Special Tools Required •Dr iver 07749-0010000 • At tachment 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 • Preload inspection tool 07HAJ-PK40201

NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing, outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing preload must be adjusted.

1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), thrust washer (B) and thrust shim (C) f rom the transmission housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212°F (100°C) wi th a heat gun (E). Do not heat the housing more than 212°F (100°C).

NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.

E

2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer race is to be replaced.

3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing side.

4. Select the 2.60 m m (0.102 in.) thrust shim f rom the middle of the table below.

THRUST SHIM, 7 6 m m

No. Part Number Thickness S 41438-PX4-700 2.05 m m (0.081 in.) T 41439-PX4-700 2.01 mm (0.083 in.) U 41440-PX4-700 2.15 m m (0.085 in.) A 41441-PK4-000 2.20 m m (0.087 in.) B 41442-PK4-000 2.25 m m (0.089 in.) C 41443-PK4-000 2.30 m m (0.091 in.) D E

41444-PK4-000 2.35 m m (0.093 in.) D E 41445-PK4-000 2.40 m m (0.094 in.) F 41446-PK4-000 2.45 m m (0.096 in.) G 41447-PK4-000 2.50 m m (0.098 in.) H 41448-PK4-000 2.55 m m (0.100 in.) I 41449-PK4-000 2.60 m m (0.102 in.) J 41450-PK4-000 2.65 m m (0.104 in.) K 41451-PK4-000 2.70 m m (0.106 in.) L 41452-PK4-000 2.75 m m (0.108 in.) M 41453-PK4-000 2.80 m m (0.110 in.) N 41454-PK4-000 2.85 m m (0.112 in.) O 41455-PK4-000 2.90 m m (0.114 in.) P 41456-PK4-000 2.95 m m (0.116 in.) Q 41457-PK4-000 3.00 m m (0.118 in.) R 41458-PK4-000 3.05 m m (0.120 in.)

(cont'd)

14-205

A/T Differentia!

Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection

5. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B), and bearing outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D).

6. Drive the outer race wi th the special tools, and install it securely in the transmission housing.

7. Check that there is no clearance between the thrust washer, outer race, sh im, and transmission housing.

:'d)

8. Install the differential assembly (A), gasket (B), and dowel pins (C) on the torque converter housing (D). Al ign the spring pin on the control shaft <E) wi th the transmission housing groove.

10 x 1.25 m m 44 N-m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibf f t )

A C D

9. Install the transmission housing (F) wi th the transmission hangers (G) and harness clamp bracket (H), and tighten the bolts.

14-206

10. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions to seat the bearings.

11. Measure the starting torque of the differential assembly wi th the special tool and a torque wrench (A). Measure the starting torque at normal room temperature in both directions.

STANDARD: New bearing: 2 .7-3 .9 N m

(28-40 kgf-cm, 2 4 - 3 5 Ibf-in.) Reused bearings: 2.5 — 3.6 N-m

(25-37 kgf-cm, 2 2 - 3 2 Ibf-in.)

0 7 H A J - P K 4 0 2 0 1

12. To increase the starting torque, increase the thickness of the shim. To decrease the starting torque, decrease the thickness of the shim. Changing the shim to the next size wi l l increase or decrease starting torque about 0 .3 -0 .4 N-m (3 4 kgf-cm, 3 - 3 Ibf-in.).

14-207

Transaxle

Driveline/Axle Special Tools 16-2 Driveshafts Reassembly 16-3 Intermediate Shaft Removal 16-14 Intermediate Shaft Disassembly 16-14 Intermediate Shaft Resassembly 16-16 Intermediate Shaft Installation 16-18

NOTE: Refer to the '98 01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for the items not shown in this section.

Outline of Model Changes

'98 model: • The installation length of the driveshafts is different; installation instructions and specifications are

included.

• The installation position of the intermediate shaft is different; related service information is included.

'99 model:

• The Thermoplastic Polyester Elastomer (TPE) outboard boot has been added. • The replacement procedure for ear clamp type boot bands has been added. • The outboard joint disassembly/reassembly procedure has been added. '01 model: • The replacement procedure for low profile type boot bands has been added.

Driveline/Axle

Special Tools

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty © 07LAF-SM40300 Support Base Attachment 1 ® 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1

07749-0010000 Driver 1 © 07947-SD90101 Oil Seal Driver, Attachment 1 © 07947-4630100 Fork Seal Driver, 39.2x49.5x15 mm 1 ® 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1 ® 07965-SD90100 Support Base 1

®

16-2

Driveshafts Reassembly

Exploded View

'98-00 model

I N B O A R D J O I N T

C I R C L I P R O L L E R

S E T R I N G R e p l a c e .

D O U B L E L O O P B A N D R e p l a c e .

P a c k cav i ty w i t h g r e a s e

S P I D E R I N B O A R D B O O T

c—ShMmm P a c k cav i ty w i t h g r e a s e .

D R I V E S H A F T

(Rubber t y p e )

S T O P R I N G R e p l a c e .


O U T B O A R D B O O T (Rubber )

E A R C L A M P B A N D R e p l a c e .


O U T B O A R D J O I N T

O U T B O A R D B O O T (TPE)

P a c k cav i ty w i t h g r e a s e .

E A R C L A M P B A N D R e p l a c e .

(cont'd)

16-3

Driveline/Axle

Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)

' 0 1 model

Pack c a v i t y w i t h g r e a s e .

16-4

Special Tools Required • Boot band tool , KD-3191 or equivalent commercial ly available

• Boot band pincers, KENT-MOORE J-35910 or equivalent commercial ly available

• Boot band pincers, commercial ly available

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure.

Inboard Joint Side

1. Wrap the splines wi th vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the inboard boot.

A

2. Install the inboard boot to the driveshaft, then remove the vinyl tape.Take care not to damage the inboard boot.

3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks (B) on the spider and the end of the driveshaft.

4. Fit the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always rotate the circlip in its groove to be sure it is ful ly seated.

5. Fit the rollers (A or B) onto the spider (C) wi th their high shoulders facing outward, and note these items:

• Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on the spider by aligning the marks (D).

• Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the rollers f rom fall ing off.

• Roller (A) is used on '98-00 A/T models and all '01 models.

• Roller (B) is used on '98-00 M/T models.

(cont'd)

16-5

Driveline/Axle


6. Pack the inboard joint w i th the joint grease included in the new driveshaft set.

Grease quantity Inboard joint; 120-130 g (4.2-4.6 oz)

('98-00 models) 150-160 g (5.3 5.6 oz) ('01 model)

7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note these items:

• Reinstall the inboard joint (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks (B) on the inboard joint and the rollers.

• Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint points up to prevent it f rom fal l ing off.

• For M/T models, align the roller holders (C) wi th the grooves in the inboard joint ('98-00 models).

Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the f igure below, then adjust the boots to halfway between ful l compression and ful l extension. Make sure the ends of the boots seat in the grooves of the driveshaft and joint.

Left driveshaft: 554 Right driveshaft: 544

559 mm (21.8 549 mm (21.4

22.0 in.) 21.6 in.)

9. Install the boot bands.

• For the double loop type, go to step 13. • For the low profile type, go to step 11.

16-6

10. I n s t a l l t h e n e w l o w p r o f i l e b a n d (A) o n t o t h e b o o t

(B) a n d d y n a m i c d a m p e r , t h e n h o o k t h e t a b (C) o f

t h e b a n d .

12. F i t t h e b o o t e n d s o n t o t h e d r i v e s h a f t a n d t h e

i n b o a r d j o i n t , t h e n i n s t a l l t h e b a n d (A) o n t o t h e b o o t

(B).

(cont'd)

16-7

Driveline/Axfe


15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose section of the commercial ly available boot band tool KD-3191 or equvialent (A), and into the slot on the wind ing mandrel (B).

16. Place a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot band tool , and t ighten the band until the marked spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.

17. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center punch the clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.

18. Unwind the boot band tool , and cut off the excess free end of the band to leave a 5 - 1 0 m m (0 .2 -0 .4 in.) tail protruding f rom the clip.

19. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down wi th a hammer.

NOTE: • Make sure the band and clip do not interfere wi th

anything and the band does not move. • Remove any grease remaining on the

surrounding surfaces

16-8

20. Install the new set ring. Outboard Joint Side:

1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the outboard boot.

Rubber type

2. Install the new boot band (B) (TPE type).

3. Install the outboard boot. Take care not to damage the outboard boot.

4 . Remove the vinyl tape.

(cont'd)

Driveline/Axle


5. Install the new stop ring (A) into the driveshaft groove (B).

6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B) until the stop ring (C) is close on the joint.

P u s h .

7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the driveshaft and joint, and drop them f rom about 10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do not use a hammer as excessive force may damage the driveshaft.

10 cm (4 In.)

8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the outboard joint end (B).

16-10

9. Pack the outboard joint with the joint grease included in the new joint boot set.

Grease quantity Outboard joint (Rubber): 130-140 g (4.6-4.9 oz) Outboard joint (TPE): 140-150 g (4.9-5.3 oz)

10. Install the outboard boot and boot bands.

8 For TPE type boot, go to step 20. • For rubber type boot, go to step 11.

11. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and outboard joint (C).

B

12. Set the new double loop band (A) onto the boot.

I T A

13. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.

14. Mark a position (A) on the band 1 0 - 1 4 mm (0.4 — 0.6 in.) from the clip (B).

(cont'd)

16-11

Driveline/Axle


15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose section of a commercial ly available boot band tool KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the winding mandrel (B).

16. Place a wrench on the wind ing mandrel of the boot band tool , and t ighten the band until the marked spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.

17. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90° to the clip. Center punch the clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.

18. Unwind the boot band tool , and cut off the excess free end of the band to leave a 5 - 1 0 mm (0 .2 -0 .4 in.) tail protruding f rom the clip.

19. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a hammer.

NOTE: • Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with

anything, and the band does not move. • Remove any grease remaining on the

surrounding surfaces.

A

16-12

20. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and outboard joint (C).

2 1 . Close the ear port ion (A) of the band wi th a commercial ly available boot band pincers (B).

2 2 . Check the clearance between the closed ear portion of the band. If the clearance is not within the standard, close the ear portion of the band further.

16-13

Driveline/Axle

Intermediate Shaft Removal

1. Drain the ATF, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 14-113).

2. Remove the left driveshaft; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 16-3).

3. Remove the flange bolt (A) and 2 dowel bolts (B).

4. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal until it is clear of the differential to prevent damage to the differential oil seal (B).

A

B

Intermediate Shaft Disassembly

Special Tools Required •Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver attachment 07947-6340500 • Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300 • Support base 07965-SD90100 • Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300

1. Remove the heat shield (A) and intermediate shaft outer seal (B) from the bearing support (C).

C

A

D

2. Remove the external snap ring (D).

3. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the special tools and a press. Be careful not to damage the metal rings (C) on the intermediate shaft during disassembly.

Press

16-14

4. Remove the internal snap ring.

Driveline/Axle

Intermediate Shaft Reassembly

Exploded View

F L A N G E B O L T S 6 x 1.0 m m 10 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 ibfft)

R I N G

P a c k t h e inter ior of t h e ou te r s e a l . 3 . 0 - 4 . 0 g ( 0 . 1 1 - 0 . 1 4 oz)

16-16

Special Tools Required • Driver 07749-0010000 • Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300 • Support base 07965-SD90100 • Oil seal driver attachment 07947-SD90101 • Fork seal driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x15 mm 07947-4630100

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this procedure.

1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent.

2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the bearing support (B) using the special tools and a press.

07749-0010000

3. Seat the internal snap ring in the groove of the bearing support.

4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft bearing using the special tool and a press.

07947-4630100

5. Seat the external snap ring (A) into the groove of the intermediate shaft (B).

(cont'd)

16-17

Driveline/Axle

Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)

6. Pack the interior of the outer seal (A). Install the outer seal into the bearing support (B) using the special tools and a press.

7. Install the heat shield onto the bearing support.

Intermediate Shaft Installation

1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft (A) contacts the transmission (differential) thoroughly with solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft assembly into the differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal to prevent damage to the differential oil seal (B).

B A

2. Install the flange bolt (A) and 2 dowel bolts (B).

A 10 x 1.25 m m 39 N-m (4.0 kgf -m, 2 9 Ibff t )

3. Refill the transmisson with recommended ATF, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 14-113).

16-18

Steering

Power Steering Special Tools 17-2 Component Location Index 17-3 Symptom Troubleshooting Index 17-4 Symptom Troubleshooting 17-6 Pump Pressure Test-with T/N 07406-0010001 ..... 17-7 Pump Pressure Test-with T/N 0 7 4 0 6 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A .... 17-8 Fluid Leakage Inspection 17-9 Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment 17-10 Hoses and Lines Replacement 17-12 Pump Replacement 17-13 Pump Overhaul 17-14 Rack Guide Adjustment 17-19 Steering Gearbox Overhaul 17-20

NOTE; Refer to the 1998-2001 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 for items not shown in this section.

Outline of V6 Model Changes

The Steering System has been changed to suit the V6 engine.

Power Steering

Special Tools

Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty © 07LAG-SM40100 or 07LAG-SM401 OA Piston Seal Ring Guide © 07LAG-SM40200 or 07LAG-SM4020A Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1

07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge 1 ® 07TAF-SZ50100 Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment 1 © 07RAK-S040122 P/S Joint Adaptor (Hose) 1 © 07VAK-P8A011A P/S Joint Adaptor (Pump) 1 © 07VAK-P8A012B P/S Joint Adaptor Plate (Pump) 1 © 07406-0010001 or 07406-001000A P/S Pressure Gauge 1 © 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 m m 1 ® 07749-0010000 Driver 1

i n c l u d e d in the Belt Tension Gauge Set, 07TGG — 001000A.

® ®

17-2


P O W E R S T E E R I N G G E A R B O X Rack G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 17-19 S t e e r i n g G e a r b o x O v e r h a u l , p a g e 17-20

17-3

Power Steering


Find the s y m p t o m in t he cha r t b e l o w , and d o the re lated p r o c e d u r e s in t h e o rde r l is ted unt i l y o u f i nd the cause.

S y m p t o m Procedure(s) Also check for: Hard S teer ing T r o u b l e s h o o t the sys tem {see page 17-6). • M o d i f i e d suspens ion

• T i re sizes, t i re var ie t ies , and air p ressure

• Power s teer ing p u m p bel t a d j u s t m e n t

Ass is t (excess ive ly l i gh t s tee r ing at h igh speed)

Check the rack gu ide a d j u s t m e n t (see page 17-19). Front w h e e l a l i g n m e n t ; refer to t he '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 18-5).

Shock or v i b ra t i on w h e n the w h e e l is t u r n e d t o fu l l lock

1. Check the rack gu ide a d j u s t m e n t (see page 17-19). 2. Check the p o w e r s tee r ing p u m p bel t f o r s l i p p a g e and ad jus t as necessary (see

page 17-10). 3. Replace the s teer ing g e a r b o x ; refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see

page 17-30). S tee r i ng w h e e l w i l l no t re tu rn s m o o t h l y

1. Check cy l i nder l ines A a n d B f o r d e f o r m a t i o n . 2. Check w h e e l a l i g n m e n t ; refer t o t h e '98-00 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page

18-5). 3. Replace the s teer ing g e a r b o x ; refer t o the '98-99 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see

page 17-30). U n e v e n or r o u g h s teer ing 1. Check the rack gu ide a d j u s t m e n t (see page 17-19).

2. Check p o w e r s tee r ing p u m p bel t a d j u s t m e n t (see page 17-10). 3. Check fo r l o w or errat ic e n g i n e idle speed (see page 11-86). 4. Check fo r air in t he p o w e r s tee r ing s y s t e m d u e t o l o w f l u i d level . 5. Check fo r l o w f l u i d level in t h e p o w e r s tee r i ng reservo i r due t o poss ib le leaks

in s y s t e m . 6. Replace the s teer ing g e a r b o x ; refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see

page 17-30). S tee r ing w h e e l kicks back d u r i n g w i d e t u r n s

1. Check p o w e r s teer ing p u m p bel t a d j u s t m e n t (see page 17-10). 2. Check the p o w e r s tee r ing p u m p f l u i d p ressu re w i t h T /N 07406-0010001 (see

page 17-7), w i t h T /N 07406-001000A (see page 17-8). H u m m i n g 1. Check w h e n the noise occu rs

• If t he noise happens 2 — 3 m i n u t e s af ter s ta r t i ng the eng ine in co ld wea the r , th is is n o r m a l .

• If t he noise happens w h e n the w h e e l is t u r n w i t h the veh ic le s t o p p e d , th is is n o r m a l due t o the f l u i d pu l sa t i on .

2. Check f o r the h igh -p ressu re hose t o u c h i n g t h e sub - f r ame or body . 3. Check fo r au toma t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n c o n v e r t o r no ise . R e m o v e the p o w e r

s tee r ing bel t , and recheck.

17-4

Rattle or cha t te r i ng 1. Check fo r loose s teer ing c o m p o n e n t s ( t ie- rod and bal l jo in ts ) . T i g h t e n or replace as necessary.

2. Check the s teer ing c o l u m n shaf t fo r w o b b l i n g . If t he s teer ing c o l u m n s w o b b l e s , replace the s teer ing c o l u m n assemb ly , refer to t he '98- '01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 17-25).

3. Check the rack gu ide a d j u s t m e n t (see page 17-19). 4. Check the p o w e r s teer ing p u m p pu l ley .

• If t he pu l ley is loose, t i g h t e n it (see page 17-14). • If t he p u m p shaf t is loose, replace the p u m p (see page 17-13).

Hiss ing • Check the f l u i d level . If l ow , f i l l t he reservo i r to t he p roper level and check fo r leaks.

• Check the reservoi r fo r leaks. • Check fo r c rushed in let hose o r loose hose c l a m p a l l o w i n g air in to the suc t ion

side of the sys tem. • Check the power s teer ing p u m p shaf t oi l seal fo r leaks.

P u m p no ise • C o m p a r e the p u m p noise at n o r m a l ope ra t i ng t e m p e r a t u r e t o ano the r veh ic le , ( p u m p noise up to 2 - 3 m i n u t e s af ter s ta r t ing the eng ine in co ld w e a t h e r is no rma l ) .

• Remove and inspect the p u m p fo r w e a r and d a m a g e (see step 1 on page 17-15). Squeak ing Check the p o w e r s teer ing belt t ens ion and ad jus t as necessary (see page 1 7 - 1 0 ) . F lu id Leaks f r o m the s teer ing g e a r b o x

• Flu id leaks f r o m the t o p of the va l ve b o d y uni t : Replace the va lve b o d y uni t .

• F lu id leaks f r o m the left t i e - rod boo t : Replace the va lve oi l seal on t h e p in i on shaf t . Replace the cy l inder end seal o n t h e g e a r b o x s ide.

• F lu id leaks f r o m the r igh t t i e - rod boo t : Replace the cy l inder end seal . • F lu id leaks f r o m p in ion shaf t near the l o w e r s teer ing j o in t bol t : Replace the va lve

b o d y uni t . Fluid leaks f r o m l ine • Flu id leaks f r o m the cy l i nder l ine A or B connec t i ons (f lare nuts) :

T igh ten the connec t i on and retest. If it st i l l leaks, replace the f i t t i ng O-r ings. • F lu id leaks f r o m a d a m a g e d cy l inder l ine A or B:

Replace the cy l inder l ine. • F lu id leaks f r o m the p u m p ou t le t hose or re turn l ine f i t t i ng on the va lve b o d y

un i t (f lair nuts) : T igh ten the f i t t i ng and retest. If it st i l l leaks, replace the hose, the l ine, or va lve body un i t as necessary.

Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p • F lu id leaks f r o m the f r o n t o i l sea l : Replace the f r o n t oi l seal. • F lu id leaks f r o m the p o w e r s teer ing p u m p h o u s i n g :

Replace the leaking O-r ings or seals (see page 17-14), and if necessary replace (see page 1 7 - 1 3 )

Fluid leaks f r o m reservo i r • Fluid leaks f r o m a r o u n d the reservo i r cap: Flu id level is t oo h i gh : d ra in t he reservo i r to the p rope r level . Ae ra ted f l u i d : check fo r an air leak on t h e in let s ide of p u m p .

• F lu id leaks f r o m reservo i r : Check fo r t he reservo i r fo r cracks and replace as necessary.

Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p out le t hose (h igh-pressure)

• Check the f i t t i ng fo r loose bo l ts . If t he bo l ts are t i gh t , replace the f i t t i ng O- r ing . • F lu id leaks at the s w a g g e d jo in t : Replace the ou t le t hose.

Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p in let hose ( low-pressure)

Check the hose fo r d a m a g e , de te r i o ra t i on , or i m p r o p e r assembly . Replace or repair as necessary.

17-5

Power Steering

Symptom Troubleshooting

Hard Steering

1. Check the power assist refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-7).

Is the power assist more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)?


N O - Power assist is OK.B

2. Measure steady-state f luid pressure f rom the pump at idle wi th T/N 07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or wi th T/N 07406-001000A (see page 17-8).

Is the pressure 1,500 kPa (15 kgf/cm2,213 psi) or less?


NO Go to step 7.

3. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle wi th T/N 07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or wi th T/N 07406-001000A (see page 17-8).

Is the pressure 7,600- 8,300 kPa (78- 85 kgf/cm 2, 1,100- 1,210 psi) or less?


NO Go to step 8.

4. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in both directions, to the left and to the right.

Are the two measurements within 5.0 N (0.51 kgf, 1.12 Ibf) of each other?


NO Go to step 9.

5. Measure the f luid pressure wi th T/N 07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or wi th T/N 07406-001000A (see page 17-8) wi th both pressure gauge valves open (if so equipped), wheel turning the steering wheel ful ly to the left and ful ly to the right.

Is the pressure 7,600- 8,300 kPa (78-85 kgf/crrf, 1,100- 1,210 psi) or less?


NO —Faulty g e a r b o x . •

6. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-19), and retest.

Is the steering OK?

Y E S —Repair is completed. •

NO —Faulty gearbox. •

7. Check for feed and return lines between the pump and the gearbox for clogging and deformation.

Are the lines clogged or deformed?

Y E S —Repair or replace the lines. •

NO —Faulty valve body uni t .B

8. Check the f low control valve, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-17) for smooth movement and leaks.

Is the flow control valve OK?

Y E S —Faulty pump assemb ly . •

N O - F a u l t y f low control valve. •

9. Check the cylinder lines A and B for deformation (see page 17-12).

Are the Aor B lines deformed?

Y E S —Replace the l i n e s . •


10. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack guide (to tight).

Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted too tight?

Y E S - R e p l a c e the rack shaft or readjust the rack g u i d e . •

NO —Faulty valve body uni t .B

17-6

Pump Pressure Test w i th T/N 07406-0010001

Special Tools Required • P/S joint adapter (pump), 07VAK-P8A011A • P/S joint adapter plate (pump), 07VAK-P8A012B • P/S joint adapter (hose), 07RAK-S040122 • P/S pressure gauge, 07406-0010001

Check the f luid pressure as fol lows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.

1. Check the power steering f luid level; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-14) and pump belt tension (see page 17-10).

2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) f rom the pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B) wi th the P/S joint outlet plate.

0 7 R A K - S 0 4 0 1 2 2

07406-0010001

0 7 V A K - P 8 A 0 1 1 A

6 x 1.0 m m 11 N m (1.1 kgfm, 8 Ibfft)

3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose (A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose).

4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump).

5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).

11.

6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).


8. Turn the steering wheel f rom lock-to-lock several t imes to warm the f luid to operating temperature.

9. Measure steady-state f luid pressure whi le the engine is idl ing. If the pump is in good condit ion, the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa (15 kgf/cm 2, 213 psi). If it reads high, check the outlet hose or valve body unit (see Steering System Troubleshooting).

10. Close the pressure control valve, then close the shut-off valve gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure.

[NOTICE] Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by over-heating.

Immediately open the pressure control valve fully. If the pump is in good condit ion, the gauge should read at least 7,600-8,300 kPa ( 7 8 - 8 5 kgf/cm 2, 1,110—1,210 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump.

17-7

Power Steering

Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A

Special Tools Required • P/S joint adapter (pump), 07VAK-P8A011A • P/S joint adapter plate (pump), 07VAK-P8A012B • P/S joint adapter (hose), 07RAK-S040122 • P/S pressure gauge, 07406-001000A

Check the f luid pressure as fol lows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.

1. Check the power steering f luid level; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-14) and pump belt tension (see page 17-10).

2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) f rom the pump outlet wi th care so as not to spill the power steering f luid on the frame and other parts, then install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B) wi th the P/S joint outlet plate.

(1.1 kgf-m, 8 Ibfft)

3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose (A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose).

4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump).

5. Open the pressure control valve (A) ful ly. A


7. Turn the steering wheel f rom lock-to-lock several t imes to warm the f luid to operating temperature.

8. Measure steady-state f luid pressure whi le the engine is idl ing. If the pump is in good condit ion, the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa (15 kgf/cm 2 , 213 psi). If it reads high, check the outlet hose or valve body unit (see Steering System Troubleshooting).

9. Close the pressure control valve gradually and read the pressure.

I NOTICE I Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by over-heating.

10. Immediatery open the pressure control valve fully. If the pump is in good condit ion, the gauge should read at least 7,600 -8,300 kPa (78- 85 kgf/cm 2, 1,110 —1,210 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump.

17-8

Fluid Leakage Inspection

PUMP A S S E M B L Y C h e c k f o r leaks at t h e p u m p s e a l , inlet and outlet f i tt ings. G E A R B O X a n d V A L V E B O D Y U N I T ' C h e c k f o r l eaks at t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e

a n d f l a r e n u t c o n n e c t i o n s .

H O S E S a n d L I N E S I n s p e c t h o s e s f o r d a m a g e , l eaks , i n t e r f e r e n c e a n d t w i s t i n g I n s p e c t f l u i d l i n e s f o r d a m a g e , r u s t i n g a n d l e a k a g e . C h e c k f o r l eaks at h o s e a n d l i ne j o i n t s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s .

Power Steering

Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment

Special Tools Required Belt tension gauge set, 07JGG-001000A or Belt tension gauge, 07JGG-001010A

Belt Tension Gauge Method

Inspection

1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt w i th the gauge face toward the engine, and measure the tension of the belt. Follow the manufacture's instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it.

NOTE: Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to avoid hitt ing the gauge reset lever.

Tension: Used Belt: 390 -540 N ( 40 -55 kgf, 88 -121 Ibf) New Belt: 740 880 N (75 90 kgf, 1 6 5 1 9 8 Ibf)

0 7 J G G - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A or 0 7 J G G - 0 0 1 0 1 0 A

2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specifications.

Adjustment

3. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A) and bolt (B).

2 4 N m (2.4 k g f m , 17 Ibff t )

4. Turn the adjusting nut (C) to get the proper belt tension, then retighten the mount ing nut and bolt.

5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel f rom lock-to-lock several t imes, then stop the engine and recheck the tension of the belt.

17-10

Deflection Method

Inspection

1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 Ibf) and measure the deflection between the power steering pump pulley (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B).

Deflection: Used Belt: 13.0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in.) New Belt: 8.5 11.0 mm (0.33 0.45 in.)

2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5 minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt specifications.

Adjustment

3. Loosen the power steering pump mount ing nut (A) and bolt (B).

24 N m (2.4 kgf -m, 17 Ibfft)

4. Turn the adjusting nut (C) to get the proper belt tension, then retighten the mount ing nut and bolt.

5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel f rom lock-to-lock several t imes, then stop the engine and recheck the tension of the belt.

17-11

Power Steering

Hoses and Lines Replacement

Note these items during installation: • Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or

adjustable clamp at the specified distance f rom the hose end as shown. • Check all clamps for deterioration or deformat ion; replace wi th the clamps new ones if necessary. • Add the recommended power steering f lu id to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.

ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (A) HOSE CLAMP (B)

2 . 5 — 5 . 5 mm ( 0 . 0 1 - 0 . 2 2 in.)

2 . 5 — 5 . 5 mm 2 .0—4 . 0 mm ( 0 . 0 1 - 0 . 2 2 In.) ( 0 . 0 8 - 0 . 1 6 in . )

6 x 1.0 mm

17-12

Pump Replacement

1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle.

2. Drain the power steering f luid f rom the reservoir.

3. Remove the intake manifold cover.

4. Cover the crankshaft pulley with several shop towels to protect if f rom spil led power steering f lu id. Disconnect the pump inlet hose (A) and pump outlet hose (B) f rom the pump (C), and plug them. Take care not to spill the f luid on the body or parts. Wipe off any spilled f luid at once.

6 x 1.0 m m B O L T 11 N-m (1.1 kgf-m, 8 Ibfft)

5. Remove the belt (D) by loosening the pump adjusting nut (E), then remove pump mounting bolts (F), nut (G) and pump. Do not turn the steering wheel wi th pump removed.

6. Connect the pump outlet hose and inlet hose. Tighten the pump fitt ings securely.

7. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket wi th the mount ing bolts and nut.

8. Install the pump belt (A) on the pulley (B).

Note these items during belt installation: • Make sure that the power steering belt is

properly positioned on the pulleys. • Do not get the power steering f luid or grease on

the belt or pulley faces. Clean off any f luid or grease before installation.

A

9. Adjust the pump belt adjustment (see page 17-10).

10. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-14).

17-13

Power Steering

Pump Overhaul

Exploded View R e p l a c e t h e p u m p a s a n a s s e m b l y If t h e p a r t s "indicated w i t h a s t e r i s k (*) a r e w o r n or d a m a g e d .

4.5 mm R O L L E R

* S I D E P L A T E

15 .2x2 .4 m m O - R I N G R e p l a c e .

F L A N G E B O L T S 20 N m (2.0 kgf -m, 14 Ibff t )

* P U M P C O V E R

5 mm R O L L E R

P U L L E Y N U T 64 N-m (6.5 kgf -m, 47 Ibf f t )

P U M P C O V E R S E A L R e p l a c e .

* P U M P C A M R I N G

51 x 2.4 m m O - R I N G R e p l a c e .

13 x 1.9 m m O - R I N G R e p l a c e .

I N L E T J O I N T

F L A N G E B O L T S 11 N-m (1.1 kgf -m, 8 Ibff t )

* F L O W C O N T R O L V A L V E

S P R I N G

1 5 . 2 x 2 . 4 m m O - R I N G R e p l a c e .

* F L O W C O N T R O L V A L V E C A P 49 N-m (5.0 kgf -m, 36 Ibff t )

17-14

® Special Tools Required Universal holder, 07725-0030000

Disassembly

NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the fol lowing procedure.

1. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-13).

2. Drain the f luid f rom the pump.

3. Hold the steering pump (A) in a vise wi th soft jaws, hold the pulley (B) wi th the special tool , and remove the pulley nut (C) and pulley. Be careful not to damage the pump housing wi th the jaws of the vise.

07725-0030000

B A

4. Loosen the f low control valve cap wi th a hex wrench, and remove it and the O-ring, f low control valve, and spring.

5. Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal.

6. Remove the outer side plate, pump cam ring, pump rotor, pump vanes, side plate, and O-rings.

7. Remove the snap ring, then remove the sub-valve f rom the pump housing.

8. Remove the circlip, then remove the pump drive shaft by tapping the shaft end wi th the plastic hammer.

9. Remove the pump seal spacer and pump seal.

Inspection

10. Check the f low control valve for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the valve.

11. Inspect the bore of the f low control valve on the pump housing for scratches and wear.

12. Slip the f low control valve back in the pump housing, and check that it moves in and out smoothly. If OK, go to step 13; if not, replace the pump as an assembly. The f low control valve is not available separately.

(cont'd)

17-15

Power Steering

Pomp Overhaul (cont'd)

13. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the f low control valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the f low control valve (B) in a container of power steering f luid or solvent (C), and b low in the hose. • If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than

98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm 2 , 14.2 psi), replace the pump as an assembly. The f low control valve is not available separately.

• If the f low control valve tests OK, set it aside for reassembly later.

15.

14. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or roughness remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and install a new one (B).

WE iulJJji WE iulJJji

Inspect each part shown wi th an asterisk in the Exploded View; if any of them are worn or damaged, replace the pump as an assembly.

Reassembly

16. Clean the disassembled parts wi th solvent, and dry them wi th compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts in solvent.

17. Al ign the pin (A) of the sub-valve (B) wi th the oil passage (C) in the pump housing, and push the sub-valve into place, then install the snap ring (D).

18. Install the new pump seal (A)(with its grooved side facing in) into the pump housing by hand, then install the pump seal spacer (B).

19. Position the pump drive shaft (C) in the pump housing (D), then drive it in using a 29 m m socket (E).

20. Install the 40 mm snap ring (F) wi th its radiused side facing out.

17-16

21. Coat the new pump cover seal (A) with power steering f lu id, and install it into the groove in the pump cover (B).

22. Install the outer side plate (C) over the 2 rollers (D).

23. Set the pump cam ring (A) over the 2 rollers with its " • " mark (B) facing up.

ID

24. Assemble pump rotor (A) to the pump cover (B).

25. Set the 10 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor. Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are in contact wi th the sliding surface of the cam ring.

26. Coat the new O-ring (A) wi th power steering f lu id, and install it into the groove in the side plate (B).

.A

27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning the roller set holes (D) in the side plate wi th the rollers (E).

(cont'd)

17-17

Power Steering

Pump Overhaul (cont'd)

28. Coat the new O-ring (A) wi th power steering f lu id , and position it in the bottom of the pump housing (B).

8 x 1.25 m m 2 0 N m (2.0 kg f -m, 14 Ibf f t )

29. Install the pump cover assembly (C) in the pump housing.

30. Coat the f low control valve (A) wi th power steering f lu id, then install it and the spring (B) in the pump housing.

A

49 N-m (5.0 kgf -m, 36 Ibf f t )

32. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise wi th soft jaws. Be careful not to damage the pump housing w i th the jaws of the vise.

07725-0030000

64 N m (6.5 kgf -m, 47 Ibff t )

33. Hold the pulley (A) wi th the special tool , and tighten the pulley nut (B).

34. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the pulley by hand.

31 . Coat the new O-ring (D) wi th power steering f lu id, and install it on the f low control valve cap (E). Install the cap on the pump housing, and t ighten it.

17-18

Rack Guide Adjustment

1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.

2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) wi th a commercial ly available 1 3/4 inch crowfoot wrench (B), then remove the rack guide screw (C).

69 N - m (7.0 kg f -m,

7. Check for t ight or loose steering through the complete turning travel.

8. Check the steering wheel rotational play and the power assist; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-7).

3. Remove the old sealant f rom rack guide screw threaded section, and apply new sealant all the way around the first three threads (A). Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.

A

4. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf f t ) , then loosen it.

5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N-m (0.4 kgf-m, 2.9 Ibf f t ) , then back it off to specified angle.

Specified Return Angle: 60° + 5°

6. Tighten the locknut while holding the rack guide screw.

17-19

Power Steering

Steering Gearbox Overhaul

Exploded View

F L A R E NUTS F L A N G E B O L T S 13 N-m (1-3 k g f m , 9 .4 Ibfft) 19 N-m (1.9 kg fm, 1.4 Ib f f t )

C Y L I N D E R E N D S E A L R e p l a c e .

17-20

Special Tools Required 8 Cylinder end seal remover attachment, 07TAF-SZ50100

• Driver, 07749-0010000 • Attachment, 42 X 47 m m , 07746-0010300 • Piston seal ring guide, 07LAG-SM4010A or 07LAG-SM40100

• Piston seal ring sizing tool , 07LAG-SM4020A or 07LAG-SM40200

• Pincer Oetiker 1098, or equivalent, commercial ly available

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the fol lowing procedure.

Removal

1. Remove the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-30).

Note these items during removal: • Disconnect the primary H02S sensor connector. • Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 5-2) to al low

clearance for the steering gearbox.

Disassembly

2. Remove the boot band (A) and tie-rod clips (B). Pull the boots away f rom the ends of the gearbox.

3. Unbend the lock washer (A). A

4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the right side steering rack (B) wi th a wrench, and unscrew both rack ends (C) wi th a wrench. Be careful not to damage the rack surface wi th the wrench. Remove the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E).

B

(cont'd)

17-21

Power Steering

Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)

5. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide screw (B).

6. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) f rom the gearbox.

7. Remove the cylinder lines f rom the gearbox.

8. Drain the f luid f rom the cylinder f i t t ings by slowly moving the steering rack back and for th.

9. Remove the end plug (A) f rom the gearbox housing, then remove the nut (B) f rom the pinion shaft end.

C

10. Remove the two flange bolts, the valve body unit (C), and gasket (D) f rom the gearbox. Check that the valve turns smoothly by turning the pinion shaft. If any play or roughness is felt, replace the valve body unit wi th a new part if necessary. Do not try to disassemble the valve body unit.

11. Slide the steering rack all the way to the left.

12. Turn the rack stop (A) counterclockwise until the end of the circlip (B) sticks out f rom the hole (C) in the rack stop. Then turn it clockwise to remove the circlip (D).

17-22

13. Remove the rack stop (A), rack bushing (B), and steering rack (C) f rom the steering gearbox.

14. Remove the O-ring (A) and cylinder end seal (B) f rom the rack bushing (C).

15. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the inside of seal ring groove and piston edges when removing the seal ring.

16. Install a washer (O.D. 27.5 m m , P/N 94103-10400) (A) so it wi l l f it through the rack guide hole of the gearbox housing, then position the washer on the cylinder end seal (B). Make sure that the washer is securely positioned on the cylinder end seal edges,

A

17. Install a socket wi th a 27.5 mm O.D. (A) onto a 24 in. long, 3/8 in. drive extension (B), and carefully place it on the washer (C).

18. Install a bearing separator (D) on the gearbox housing. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the gearbox housing points upward, then push out the cylinder end seal (E) 5 - 6 mm (0.20-0.24 in.) by pressing on the end of the extension.

19. Remove the steering gearbox f rom the press, and remove the washer f rom the gearbox inside.

(cont'd)

17-23

Power Steering


20. Turn the special tool so it wi l l f it through the rack guide hole of the steering gearbox, then posit ion the special tool on the cylinder end seal (A). Make sure that the special tool is securely positioned on the seal edges.

21. Insert a 24 in. long, 3/8 in. drive extension (A), on the special tool . Place the steering gearbox in a press, then remove the cylinder end seal (B) f rom of the gearbox by pressing on the end of the extension.

Note these items when pressing the cylinder end seal: • Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the

cylinder wal l . Check the tool angle, and correct it if necessary, when removing the cylinder end seal.

• Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do not try to remove the seal by striking the too l ; striking the tool would break the cylinder end seal, and the seal wou ld remain in the gearbox.

0 7 T A F - S Z 5 0 1 0 0

Reassembly

22. Coat the special tool wi th power steering f luid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first.

23. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal ring (B) on the special tool , then slide them down toward the big end of the tool .

Note these items during reassembly: • Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install

the resin seal rings wi th care so as not to damage them. After installation, be sure to contract the seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool).

• Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.

24. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on top of the O-ring.

25. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the special tool wi th power steering f lu id, then carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the piston seal ring.

0 7 L A G - S M 4 0 1 0 A or 0 7 L A G - S M 4 0 1 0 0

26. Move the special tool back and forth several t imes to make the piston seal ring f i t snugly in the piston.

17-24

27. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power steering f lu id. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped portion.

28. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal (A) with power steering f lu id, then install it onto the steering rack wi th its grooved side toward the piston. When installing the cylinder end seal, be careful not damage the lip of the seal wi th the edges or teeth of the steering rack.

A I

29. Remove the vinyl tape f rom the steering rack, thei remove any adhesive residue.

30. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the steering rack into the gearbox housing. Be careful not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder wal l wi th the rack edges.

31 . Insert a deep socket (A) onto the steering rack as shown.

P r e s s

32. Install the cylinder and seal (B) into the bottom of the cylinder by pressing on the tool wi th a press. Do not push on the tool wi th excessive force as it may damage the cylinder end seal.

33. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.

(cont'd)

17-25

Power Steering


34. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and coat the surface of the tape with power steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped carefully so there is no stepped portion.

35. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal (A) with power steering fluid, then press it into the rack bushing (B) using the special tools.

SS 0 7 7 4 9 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 A

0 7 7 4 6 - 0 0 1 0 3 0 0

36. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid, and carefully fit it in the groove of the rack bushing.

37. Install the rack bushing onto the steering rack with the cylinder end seal grooved side toward the piston. Push in the rack bushing with your finger.

38. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then remove any adhesive residue.

39. Install the rack stop (A) onto the steering rack so the hole (B) is aligned with the slot (C) on the steering rack.

17-26

40. Insert the end of the circlip (A) into the hole (B) of the rack stop (C). Turn the rack stop counterclockwise until the circlip is fully seated in the rack stop.

A

41. Apply grease to the needle bearing (A) in the gearbox housing, and install the valve body unit (B) and gasket (C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve body unit installation position (direction of line connections). Then loosely install the 2 flange bolts.

42. Install the nut (D) onto the pinion shaft end, and tighten to specified torque. After tightening, use a drift to stake the nut shoulder (E) against the pinion shaft.

43. Apply sealant all the way around the threads on the end plug (F), install the end plug onto the gearbox housing, and tighten it to the specified torque.

44. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque.

45. Before installing the cylinder lines, coat the new O-rings with power steering fluid, then install the lines.

Note these items during reassembly: • Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.

The joints must be free of foreign material. • Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare

nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.

13 N m (1.3 k g f m , 9.4 Ibf f t )

46. Apply multipurpose Grease to the sliding surface of the rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox housing.

47. Apply new sealant all the way around the first 3 threads of the rack guide screw (B), then install the spring (C) f rack guide screw, and locknut (D).

48. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-19). After adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by sliding it right and left.

(cont'd)

17-27

Power Steering


49. Install the stop washer (A) wi th the chamfered side facing out, and screw each rack end (B) into the rack whi le holding the lock washer (C) so its tabs (D) are in the slots (E) in the end of the rack.

50. Hold the flat surface sections of the right side steering rack wi th a wrench, and t ighten both rack ends. Be careful not to damage the rack surface wi th the wrench.

51 . Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on the rack end joint housing.

52. Apply mult ipurpose grease (A) to the circumference of the rack end joint housing.

A

B

53. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (B) to the boot grooves (B) on the rack ends.

54. Center the steering rack wi th in its stroke. Install the boots on the rack ends wi th the tie-rod clips. After installing the boots, wipe the grease off the threaded section (A) of the rack end.

17-28

55. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A) with the holes (B) of the band.

56. Close the ear portion (A) of the band wi th a commercial ly available Oetiker 1098 pincer or equivalent (B).

57. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots are not deformed or twisted.

Installation

58. Install the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-47).

Note these items during installation: • Reinstall exhaust pipe A wi th new gasket (see

page 5-11). • Reconnect the primary H02S sensor connector.

Brakes

Conventional Brake Components Front Brake Pads Inspection

and Replacement 19-2 Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul 19-4

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Components 19-7

NOTE; Refer to the 1998-2001 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 for the items not shown in this section.


The front brake caliper is different; the brake pad replacement and the brake caliper overhaul procedures are included.

Conventional Brake Components

Front Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement

ACAUTION Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust,regardless of material composition,could be hazardous to your health. • Avoid breathing dust particles. • Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake

assemblies.Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.

1 . Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported. Remove the front wheels. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts (A) from the knuckle.

A 9.8 N m (1.0 k L

7.2 Ibfft)

Remove the caliper bolt (B), and pivot the caliper (C) up out of the way. If the caliper pin head is the hex. type, the caliper bolt should be removed using a wrench while holding the caliper pin with another wrench. Check the hoses and pin boots for damage and deterioration.

i

3. Remove the pads (A), pad shims (B), and pad retainers (C).

4. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. The measurement does not include the pad backing plate (A) thickness.

Brake Pad Thickness: Standard: 10.5 - 1 1 . 5 mm (0.41 - 0.45 in) Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in)

5. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the front pads and shims together as a set.

6. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.

7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.

19-2

®

8. Install the pad retainers (A).

9. Apply Molykote M77 grease to both sides of the pad shims (A) and the back of the pads (B). Wipe excess grease off the shim.

A C

10. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the pad with the wear indicator (C) on the inside.If you are reusing the pads,always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.

11. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down.

12. Pivot the caliper down into position, being careful not to damage the pin boot Install the caliper bolt (B), and torque it to proper specification. If the caliper pin head (C) is the hex. type, the caliper bolt should be installed by using a wrench while holding the caliper pin with another wrench. Install the brake hose onto the knuckle.

13. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then road-test.

NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.

14. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.

19-3


Front Brake Caliper Overhaul

ACAUTION Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composit ion, could be hazardous to your health. • Avoid breathing dust particles • Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.

Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items: • Do not spill brake f luid on the vehicle; It may damage the paint; if brake f luid gets on the paint, wash it off

immediately wi th water. • Clean all parts in brake f luid and air dry; blow out all passages wi th compressed air. • Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles. • Replace parts wi th new ones as specified in the i l lustration. • Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake f lu id. • Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads. • When reusing pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. • Do not reuse drained brake f lued. • Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Non-Honda brake f luid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of

the system. • Coat the piston, piston seal, and caliper bore wi th clean brake f luid. • Replace all rubber parts wi th new ones. • After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twist ing.

19-4

Sedan:

^3Mm:S\\ l i cone grease

{ G R E A S E M : R u b b e r g r e a s e

B A N J O B O L T 34 N m (3.5 kgfm, 25 Ibfft)

B R A K E H O S E

10 m m F L A N G E B O L T S 34 N m (3.5 k g f m , 25 Ibfft)

C A M B O O T Rep lace .

/ S E A L I N G W A S H E R S R e p l a c e .

B L E E D S C R E W 9 N m (0.9 k g f m , 6.5 Ibf f t )

C A L I P E R B O D Y

S L E E V E P I S T O N B E A R I N G A

A D J U S T I N G S P R I N G B

S P R I N G C O V E R

C I R C L I P

P I S T O N A S S E M B L Y

B R A K E P A D S

O U T E R P A D S H I M

C A L I P E R B R A C K E T 10 m m F L A N G E B O L T S 38 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 Ibff t )

PIN B O O T

(cont'd)

19-5


Front Brake Caliper Overhaul (cont'd)

Coupe:

: S i l i c o n e g r e a s e

G R E A S E ! : R u b b e r g r e a s e

10 x 1.25 mm 43 N m (4.4 kg f -m, 3 2 Ibfft)

B A N J O B O L T 34 N m (3.5 kg f -m, 25 Ibff t )

, S E A L I N G W A S H E R S R e p l a c e .

B L E E D S C R E W 9 N m (0.9 kg f -m , 6.5 Ibff t )

P I S T O N S E A L R e p l a c e .

C A M B O O T R e p l a c e .

P I S T O N B O O T R e p l a c e .

P A R K I N G L E V E R / C A M A S S E M B L Y


P A D S P R I N G % G R E A S E S !

C A L I P E R B O L T S 8 x 1.0 m m 25 N m (2.5 kgf -m, 19 Ibf f t )

PIN A

B O O T C L I P R e p l a c e .

P IN B O O T S R e p l a c e .

B R A K E P A D S

PIN B O O T S

S I L I C O N E G R E A S E

P IN

R E T A I N E R

F L A N G E B O L T S 10 x 1.25 m m 55 N-m (5.6 kgf -m, 41 Ibff t )

C A L I P E R B R A C K E T

19-6

Brakes

ABS Components ('98-00 Models) Component Location Index 19-8 DTC Troubleshooting Index 19-9 Symptom Troubleshooting Index 19-10 Circuit Diagram 19-12 DTC Troubleshooting 19-14 A B S Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ................... 19-18 Modulator Unit Removal and Installation .............. 19-21 ABS Control Unit Replacement 19-22

NOTE: Refer to the 1998 -2001 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) for the items not shown in this section.


* The locations of the modulator unit and ABS control unit were changed; - Component location index was added. - Modulator unit removal and installation was added. - ABS control unit replacement was added.

• Ground numbers of pump motor ground and ABS control unit ground were changed; - DTC troubleshooting index was added. - Symptom troubleshooting index was added. - Circuit diagram was added. - DTC troubleshooting was added. - ABS indicator circuit troubleshooting was added.

ABS Components


/ U N D E R - H O O D A R S R E L A Y B O X ( P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y ) I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 22-52 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

/ U N D E R - H O O D A B S R E L A Y B O X ( F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y ) I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 22-52 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

/ U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

/ P A S S E N G E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

M O D U L A T O R U N I T R e m o v a l a n d Instal lat ion, / page 19-21

A B S C O N T R O L U N I T R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-22

R I G H T - F R O N T W H E E L S E N S O R Inspec t ion , p a g e 19-70 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-71 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (16P)

L E F T - R E A R W H E E L S E N S O R Inspec t ion , page 19-70 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e p l a c e m e n t , page 19-71 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R I G H T - R E A R W H E E L S E N S O R Inspec t ion , page 19-70 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-71 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

D R I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X

L E F T - F R O N T W H E E L S E N S O R Inspec t ion , page 19-70 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l


19-8


DTC Detection item Note DTC: 11 R igh t - f ron t whee l sensor (open/shor t to body g r o u n d / s h o r t t o powe r ) Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-52) DTC: 12 R igh t - f ron t w h e e l sensor (electr ical no ise / in te rmi t ten t i n te r rup t i on ) Refer t o t he '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-53) DTC: 13 Lef t - f ront w h e e l sensor (open/shor t to body g r o u n d / s h o r t to powe r ) Refer t o t he '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l

(see page 19-52) DTC: 14 Lef t - f ront w h e e l sensor (electr ical no ise / in te rmi t ten t i n te r rup t i on ) Refer t o t he '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-53) DTC: 15 Right - rear w h e e l sensor (open /shor t t o b o d y g r o u n d / s h o r t t o p o w e r ) Refer to t he '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-52) DTC: 16 Right - rear w h e e l sensor (electr ical no ise / in te rmi t ten t i n te r rup t i on ) Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-53) DTC: 17 Left-rear whee l sensor (open /shor t t o body g r o u n d / s h o r t t o p o w e r ) Refer t o t he '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-52) DTC: 18 Left- rear whee l sensor (electr ical no ise / in te rmi t ten t i n te r rup t i on ) Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-53) DTC: 21 R igh t - f ron t pulser Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-54) DTC: 22 Lef t - f ront pu lser Refer t o t he '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-54) DTC: 23 Right - rear pulser Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-54) DTC: 24 Left- rear pu lser Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-54) DTC: 31 R igh t - f ron t in let so l eno id Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-55) DTC: 32 R igh t - f ron t out le t so l eno id Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-55) DTC: 33 Lef t - f ront in let so leno id Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-55) DTC: 34 Lef t - f ron t out le t so l eno id Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-55) DTC: 35 Right - rear inlet so leno id Refer t o t he '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-55) DTC: 36 Right - rear ou t le t so leno id Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-55) DTC: 37 Lef t - rear inlet so leno id Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-55) DTC: 38 Left- rear out le t so leno id Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-55) DTC: 41 R igh t - f ron t whee l lock Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-58) DTC: 42 Lef t - f ront w h e e l lock Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-58) DTC: 43 Right - rear w h e e l lock Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-58) DTC: 44 Lef t - rear whee l lock Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-58) DTC: 51 M o t o r lock Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-59) DTC: 52 M o t o r s tuck OFF (see page 19-14) DTC: 53 M o t o r stuck ON (see page 19-16) DTC: 54 Fai l-safe relay Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-63) DTC: 61 L o w ign i t ion vo l tage Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-65) DTC: 62 H igh ign i t i on vo l tage Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-65) DTC: 71 D i f fe ren t d iamete r t i re Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-66) DTC: 81 Cent ra l Processing Un i t (CPU) d iagnos is , and R O M / R A M d iagnos is Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l

(see page 19-66)

19-9

ABS Components


Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

ABS indicator does not come on ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 19-18)

ABS indicator does not go off and no DTC is stored

ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 19-18)

19-10

ABS Components

Circuit Diagram

18P CONNECTOR CO number)

3 i—r 1 4 1 S ; 6

7 8 9 A" a^\a/

7P CONNECTOR ( • number)

20P CONNECTOR ( O number) 18P CONNECTOR (• number)

18P CONNECTOR ( O number)

1 2 3 .,1—1, 4 6

7 8 | 9 i o [ / 12J13 14| / l l 7 18

BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR

1 ; 2 3 4 r - i | 5 I 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 E = L . 5 8 7 8

i o ' n :12 13 i 4 , i 5 i i e ; i 7 18 19 20 9 10 11 12 13114 15 16 17 18

GAUGE ASSEMBLRY CONNECTORS 22P CONNECTOR ( O number)

o 16P CONNECTOR ( • number)

6 7 ( 8 9 11C 1 I 2 4 5 6 7

• . i ' i 2y / ; / i6 !>oy / 19! 20 21122 8 j 9 1 0 J l l | X J l 2 / 14 15 16


16P CONNECTOR ( • number)

1 2 3 4 J s 6 7

8 3 10 11112 A" 15

MODULATOR UNIT CONNECTOR ( O number)

PUMP MOTOR CONNECTOR ( • number)

Terminal side of female terminals

19-12

T V B S l

ABS CONTROL UNIT C O N N E C T O R S

CONNECTOR a (22P)

C O N N E C T O R B (12P)

J U . •• p53 , , n ,

F R O N T / R E A R


Wire side o f female terminals

19-13

ABS Components

DTC Troubleshooting

D T C 52: Motor Stuck O F F

1. Check the ABS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK,

Is the fuse OK ?

Y E S - G o t o step 3. •

NO - Replace the fuse, and g o t o step 2.

2. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal No. 3 to No. 4 wi th a jumper wire for a moment , and check the fuse.

P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y C O N N E C T O R

4 [| 3 + B I | M O T O R (WHT) [ ) ( W H T / B L U )

J U M P E R W I R E

T e r m i n a l s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

Is the fuse blown?

Y E S —Check for a short to body ground in the motor power source circuit. •


3. Check the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.

Is the fuse OK ?


NO-Rep lace the fuse, and go to step 4.

4. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal No. 3 to No. 4 wi th a jumper wire for a moment, and check the fuse.


' 4 II 3

+ B I I M O T O R (WHT) I J ( W H T / B L U )

J U M P E R W I R E

T e r m i n a l s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

Is the fuse blown?

Y E S - C h e c k for a short to body ground in the MCK circuit. •


5. Check the pump motor relay in the under-hood ABS relay box, refer to the ' 9 8 - 0 1 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-52).

Is the relay OK?


NO —Replace the pump motor relay. •

6. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal No. 3 to No. 4 wi th a jumper wire for a moment.

Does the pump motor operate?


NO Go to step 7.

7. Disconnect the pump motor connector.

8. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal No. 3 to No. 4 wi th a jumper wire.

19-14

9. Measure the voltage between the pump motor connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

P U M P M O T O R C O N N E C T O R

I M O T O R ( W H T / B L U )

(V)

T e r m i n a l s ide of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s



NO —Repair open in the wire between the under-hood ABS relay box and the pump motor. •

10. Measure the voltage between the pump motor connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2.


M O T O R G N D ( B L K ) M O T O R ( W H T / B L U )



Y E S —Replace the modulator unit. •

NO -Repa i r open in the wire between the pump motor and body ground (G203).B

11. Disconnect the ABS control unit connector B (12P).

12. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal No. 1 to No. 4 with a jumper wire.


J U M P E R W I R E

P M R ( Y E L / R E D )

2lxTi

+ B (WHT)


13. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit connector terminal B12 and body ground.

A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (12P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

, 8

I 9 10 11

1 . 12 _ r - j

P M R ( Y E L / R E D )




NO— Repair open in the wire between the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS control unit. •

(cont'd)

19-15

ABS Components


14. Remove the jumper wire f rom the pump motor relay connector.


16. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit connector terminal B12 and body ground.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 L

8 y ,

9 10 11 I 1

12 I T "

P M R ( Y E L / R E D )



YES —Repair a short to power in the wire between the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS control un i t .B

NO —If the problem recurs, replace the ABS control un i t .B

DTC 53: Motor Stuck ON

1. Check that the pump motor operates wi th the ignit ion switch OFF.


Y E S —Replace the pump motor relay. (Pump motor relay stuck O N . )B

IMO-Go to step 2.

2. Remove the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.

Is the fuse OK ?

Y E S —Remove the fuse, and go to step 3.

NO -Replacethe fuse, and recheck.B


4. Measure the voltage between the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 16P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.

P A S S E N G E R S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X 16P C O N N E C T O R

M C K ( G R N )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 / 14 15 / (YJ




NO —Repair open in the wire between the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the ABS control un i t .B

5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.

19-16

6. Disconnect the pump motor connector.

7. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and body ground.


u r n M O T O R ( W H T / B L U )





8. Measure the voltage between the pump motor connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2.


M O T O R G N D ( B L K ) M O T O R ( W H T / B L U )

9. Remove the pump motor relay.


11. Check for continuity between terminal B12 and body ground.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

u " 9 10 11

L 12 1 t J

P M R ( Y E L / R E D )



Y E S —Repair short to body ground in the wire between the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS control uni t .H

NO —If the problem recurs, replace the ABS control unit .H




NO —Repair open in the wire between the pump motor and body ground (G203).B

19-17

ABS Components

ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Turn the ignit ion switch ON(II), and watch the ABS indicator.

Does the ABS indicator come on?


Y E S If the ABS indicator comes on and goes off, it's OK. If the ABS indicator stays on, go to step 13.

2. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF then ON (II) again.

Does the brake system indicator come on?

Y E S Go to step 3.

NO Repair open in the brake system indicator c i r cu i t . *

• Blown BACK-UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse. • Open in the wire between the BACK-UP LIGHT

(7.5 A) fuse and the gauge assembly. • Open circuit inside the fuse box.





Y E S Check for loose ABS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS control unit and recheck. •

NO Go to step 6.

6. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge assembly.

Is the bulb OK?


NO Replace the ABS indicator bulb B


8. Disconnect the gauge assembly 16P connector.

9. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly 16P connector terminal No.10 and body ground.

G A U G E A S S E M B L Y 16P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 12 / 14 15 16

W A L P ( B L U / W H T )



Y E S —Repair short to body ground in the wire between the gauge assembly and the ABS control unit. B

NO Go to step 10.

10. Connect the gauge assembly 16P connector.

11. Connect the gauge assembly 22P connector terminal No. 16 to body ground wi th a jumper wire.


G A U G E A S S E M B L Y 2 2 P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 X 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X / / 16 X X X 19 20 21 22

J U M P E R W I R E

G N D (BLK)



Y E S - Repair open in the wire between the gauge assembly and body ground (G50D.B

NO -Rep lace the printed circuit board in the gauge assembly. B

19-18

13. Check the POWER MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash driver's fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.

Is the fuse OK ?


NO Replace the fuse, and recheck B

14. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal A1 to body ground wi th a jumper wire.

A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (22P)

G N D 3 (BLK)

J U M P E R W I R E

1 7 4 / X 6 7 8 9

n 10

- T L -

11 12

I 14 / 16 17 18 19 20

L 21 22



Does the ABS indicator go off?

Y E S - Repair open in the wire between the ABS control unit and body ground (G204). B

NO - Go to step 16.

16. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit connector terminal A11 and body ground.

A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (22P)

I G 2 ( Y E L / B L K )

__n n n t 1_

1 / 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14

l 16 17 18 19 20

i h

21 22 d




N O - Repair open in the wire between the POWER MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse and the ABS control unit, fl

17. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal B1 to body ground wi th a jumper wire.


J U M P E R W I R E


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12



Y E S - Check for loose ABS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS control unit, and recheck. •

NO- Go to step 18.

(cont'd)

19-19

ABS Components

ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

18. Connect the gauge assembly 16P connector terminal No. 10 to body ground wi th a jumper wi re.

G A U G E A S S E M B L Y 16P C O N N E C T O R

J U M P E R W I R E

£2. 1 2 3 " ' > - < . ' 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 12 X 14 15 16




YES —Repair open in the wire between the gauge assembly and the ABS control uni t .H

NO —Replace the printed circuit board in the gauge assemb ly . •

19-20

Modulator Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE: 8 Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off

immediately with water. • Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. 8 To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel.

Removal

1 . Disconnect the modulator unit connector (B) and the pump motor connector (A).

2. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit (C).

Installation

3. Install the modulator unit, then connect the brake lines. Tighten the flare nuts to 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 lbf-ft).

4. Connect the modulator unit connector and the pump motor connector.

5. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels.

6. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off.

7. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on.

19-21

ABS Components

ABS Control Unit Replacement

1. Remove the passenger's side kick panel.

2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connectors.

3. Remove the ABS control unit.

4. Install the ABS control unit in the reverse order of removal.

19-22

Brakes

ABS/TCS Components ( # § 1 Model) Component Location Index 19-24 General Troubleshooting Information 19-25 DTC Troubleshooting Index 19-30 Symptom Troubleshooting Index 19-31 System Description 19-32 Circuit Diagram 19-46 DTC Troubleshooting 19-48 ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting 19-76 TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting 19-78 Modulator Unit Removal and Installation 19-80 TCS Switch test - 19-81 ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement 19-82 Wheel Sensor Inspection 19-82 Wheel Sensor Replacement 19-83


• The ABS has been changed to ABS/TCS; troubleshooting was added.

ABS/TCS Components

Component Location index

/ U N D E R - H O O D A B S R E L A Y B O X ' P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y

I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 22 -52 in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y T e s t , p a g e 22-52 i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l T C S R E L A Y T e s t , p a g e 22-31

R I G H T - R E A R W H E E L S E N S O R I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-82 R e p l a c e m e n t , page 19-83

I

L E F T - R E A R W H E E L S E N S O R I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-82 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-83

M O D U L A T O R U N I T R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 19-80

T C S S W I T C H T e s t , p a g e 19-81

D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (16P)

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-82

R I G H T - F R O N T W H E E L S E N S O R I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-82 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-83

L E F T - F R O N T W H E E L S E N S O R I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-82 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-83

19-24

General Troubleshooting Information

ABS/TCS Indicators

• If the system is OK, the ABS indicator goes off once after turning the ignition switch ON(II) wi thout starting the engine, and then comes on again and goes off several seconds later after starting the engine. This occurs because the ABS/TCS control unit is turned on by the IG2 power source.

• The TCS or ABS indicator comes on when the ABS/ TCS control unit detects a problem in the system. However, even though the system is operating properly, the TCS or ABS indicator wil l come on, under the fol lowing conditions:

• For ABS or TCS Indicator: - Only drive wheels rotate - One drive wheel is stuck - The vehicle goes into a spin. - The ABS continues to operate for a long t ime. - The vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal

disturbance. • For TCS Indicator:

- The TCS operated when the front brake pad temperature rises excessively.

- The TCS switch is OFF. - One or more of these components are faulty:

Heated oxygen sensor, Manifold absolute pressure sensor, Crankshaft position sensor, Engine coolant temperature sensor, Throttle position sensor, Top dead center sensor, Top dead center sensor 2, Intake air temperature sensor, Exhaust gas recirculation, Barometric pressure sensor, Idle air control valve, VTEC pressure switch, Knock sensor, Fuel supply system, Automatic transaxle, Misfire detection system of the PGM-FI system.

To determine the actual cause of the problem, question the customer about the problem, taking these conditions into consideration:

• When a problem is detected and the ABS or TCS indicator comes on, there are cases when the indicator stays on until the ignition switch is turned OFF, and cases when the indicator goes off automatically when the system returns to normal. For ABS DTCs 61 and 62, the indicator goes off automatically when the system returns to normal. For all other codes, the indicator stays on until the ignition switch is turned OFF.

• For ABS DTCs 12, 14, 16, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24, 51 , 52 and 53, the ABS indicator goes off when the vehicle is driven again and the system is OK after the ignit ion switch is turned f rom OFF to ON (II). However, if the DTC is cleared, the CPU resets and the indicator goes off right after the engine is started if the system is OK.

• The ABS is not operational when the ABS indicator is ON; the TCS is not operational when the TCS indicator is ON.

• When the ABS and TCS indicators are both ON, troubleshoot the ABS first.

• When the TCS indicator and MIL are both ON, troubleshoot the PGM-FI system first.

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

• The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However, when the same DTC is detected more than once, the more recent DTC is wri t ten over the earlier one . Therefore, when the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.

• The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order, not in the order they occur.

• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery. Perform the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.

Self-diagnosis

• Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories: - Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine

starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off. - Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial

diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF. • When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis/the

ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.

Kickback

The pump motor operates when the ABS is funct ioning, and the f luid in the reservoir is forced out to the master cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.

Pump Motor

• The pump motor operates when the ABS is functioning.

• The ABS/TCS control unit checks the pump motor operation during initial diagnosis when the vehicle is started. You may hear the motor operate at this t ime, but it is normal.

Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding

Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures are identical to the procedures used on vehicles not equipped with ABS/TCS. To ease bleeding, start wi th the front wheels.

(cont'd)

19-25

ABS/TCS Components


How to Troubleshoot ABS and TCS DTCs

The troubleshooting f lowchart procedures assume that the cause of the problem is still present and the ABS and/or TCS indicator is still on. Following the f lowchart when the ABS and/or TCS indicator does not come on can result in incorrect diagnosis. The connector i l lustrations show the female terminal connectors wi th a single outline and the male terminal connectors wi th a double outl ine.

1. Question the customer about the condit ions when the problem occured, and try to reproduce the same condit ions for troubleshooting. Find out when the ABS and/or TCS indicator came on, such as during ABS control , after ABS control, when vehicle speed was at a certain speed, etc.

2. When the ABS or TCS indicator does not come on during the test drive, but t roubleshoot ing is performed based on the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor contact of the terminals, etc. before you start troubleshooting.

3. After troubleshoot ing, clear the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle. Make sure the ABS and TCS indicators do not come on.

How to Retrieve ABS or TCS DTCs

Using the Honda PGM Tester:

1. With the ignit ion switch OFF, connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (B) behind the driver's side kick panel.

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and fo l low the prompts on the Honda PGM Tester to display the DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.

NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific instructions.

Shorting the Service Check Signal Circuit with the Honda PGM Tester:

1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (B) behind the driver's side kick panel.

2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the Honda PGM Tester.

3. Turn the ignition switch ON i brake pedal.

' wi thout pressing the

NOTE: If the brake pedal is pressed when turning the ignit ion switch ON (II), the system shifts to the DTC clearing mode.

19-26

4. The blinking frequency indicates the DTC.

NOTE: If the DTC is not memorized, the ABS or TCS indicator wi l l go off for 3.6 seconds, and then come back on.

The system wi l l not indicate the DTC unless these condit ions are met: • The TCS switch is not pushed. • The brake pedal is not pressed. • The ignition switch is turned ON (II). • The engine is stopped. • The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before

the ignition switch is turned ON (II).

E x a m p l e of D T C 1 5 S h o r t b l i n k s

L o n g bl ink (five t i m e s )

O N | 1 n n n n r

O F F ' U U U U U

E x a m p l e of D T C 2 2 S h o r t b l i n k s

L o n g b l inks ( two t i m e s ) ( two t i m e s )

O F F J *—' — —


6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester f rom the DLC.

How to Clear ABS DTCs

Honda PGM Tester Method:


2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the DTC (s) by fol lowing the screen prompts on the Honda PGM Tester.


Service Check Signal Circuit Method:


2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the Honda PGM Tester.

(cont'd)

19-27

ABS/TCS Components

General Troubleshooting information (cont'd)

3. Press the brake pedal.

4. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II) whi le keeping the brake pedal pressed.

5. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake pedal.

6. After the ABS indicator comes on, press the brake pedal again.

7. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake pedal again.

You cannot clear the DTC unless these condit ions are met: • The vehicle speed is 6 mph (10 km/h) or less. • The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before

the ignition switch is turned ON (II). • The brake pedal is pressed before the ignit ion

switch is turned ON (II).

A B S ind ica tor

ON

O F F

D e p r e s s e d -B r a k e p e d a l

R e l e a s e d --

d | d I

Igni t ion s w i t c h O N (II)

a : 2 s e c . c : 0.3 s e c . b: 4 s e c . d : w i t h i n 3 s e c .

8. After a few seconds, the ABS indicator blinks twice and the DTC is cleared. If the indicator does not blink twice, repeat steps 1 through 7. If the indicator stays on after the indicator blinks twice, check the DTC because a problem was detected during initial diagnosis before shifting to DTC clearing mode.


10. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester f rom the DLC.

19-28

I

rABS

How to Clear TCS DTCs

Honda PGM Tester Method:

1. With the ignit ion switch OFF, connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (B) behind the driver's kick panel.

2. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), and clear the DTC (s) by fo l lowing the screen prompts on the PGM Tester.


Service Check Signal Circuit Method:

1. Press the parking brake pedal wi th the SCS circuit opened. Keep the pedal pressed during the entire DTC clearing procedure.

2. Press and hold the TCS switch, then turn the ignition switch ON (II) wi thout starting the engine.

3. Continue to hold the TCS switch for four seconds, then turn the ignit ion switch OFF.

4. Within six seconds, turn the ignit ion switch back ON (II) for at least 4 seconds, then release the TCS switch, and watch the TCS indicator.

5. After a few seconds, the TCS indicator wi l l come on after blinking to indicate that the DTC is cleared. If the indicator blinks repeatedly, repeat steps 1 through 4.


S t a n d a r d Ind ica t ion Pa t te rn

ON r - — C o n t i n u e s O N

T C S Ind icator

O F F

I a a

Igni t ion S w i t c h O N (II)

A b n o r m a l Ind ica t ion Pa t te rn

O N

T C S Ind icator

OFF

b l i n k s repea ted ly

4 a: 0 .3 s e c .

Igni t ion S w i t c h O N (II)

19-29

ABS/TCS Components


ABS DTCs DTC Detect ion I tem aMote 11 Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48) 12 Right-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49) 13 Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48) 14 Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49) 15 Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48) 16 Right-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49) 17 Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48) 18 Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49) 21 Right-front pulser (see page 19-50) 22 Left-front pulser (see page 19-50) 23 Right-rear pulser (see page 19-50) 24 Left-rear pulser (see page 19-50) 31 Right-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-51) 32 Right-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-51) 33 Left-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-51) 34 Left-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-51) 35 Right-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-51) 36 Right-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-51) 37 Left-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-51) 38 Left-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-51) 41 Right-front wheel lock (see page 19-54) 42 Left-front wheel lock (see page 19-54) 43 Right-rear wheel lock (see page 19-54) 44 Left-rear wheel lock (see page 19-54) 51 Motor lock (see page 19-55) 52 Motor stuck OFF (see page 19-55) 53 Motor stuck ON (see page 19-57) 54 ABS Fail-safe relay (see page 19-59) 61 Low ignit ion voltage (see page 19-61) 62 High ignit ion voltage (see page 19-61) 71 Different diameter tire (see page 19-62) 81 Central Processing Unit (CPU) diagnosis, and ROM/RAM diagnosis (see page 19-62)

TCS DTCs DTC Detection Item Note 24 RF TCS NO solenoid (see page 19-63) 25 RF TCS NC solenoid (see page 19-63) 26 LF TCS NO solenoid (see page 19-63) 27 LF TCS NC solenoid (see page 19-63) 28 TCS relay (see page 19-66) 31 Engine retard command (PFINH) signal (see page 19-69) 32 Engine speed (NEP) signal (see page 19-71) 34 Reference voltage (VREF) signal (see page 19-72) 36 Throttle position sensor output (THLOUT) signal (see page 19-73) 61 A/T shift position (ATSFTP) signal (see page 19-74) 81 Continuous TCS operation (see page 19-75)

19-30


Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for ABS indicator does not come on ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page

19-76) ABS indicator does not go off and no DTC is stored


ABS indicator came on once, but it is OK now

The vehicle is OK at this t ime (see page 19-25)

TCS indicator does not come on ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 19-78)

TCS indicator does not go off and no DTC is stored


TCS indicator came on once, but it is OK now

The vehicle is OK at this t ime (see page 19-25)

19-31

ABS/TCS Components

System Description

A B S / T C S Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (26P)

ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)

n n X n n 1

GND1 2

NCL 3

NOL 4

ABS 6

SCS 8

FLW (-)

9 10 FRW (-)

11 FRW

{+)

12 STOP

13 IG2

15 NCR

16 NOR

18 TCS1

20 MCK

21 RLW

(+)

22 RRW (+)

24 RRW (-)

25 FSR

26 DLC


Terminal number

Wire color Terminal sign (Terminal name)

Descript ion Measurement Terminal number


Descript ion Terminal Condit ions

(Ignition swi tch O N (II)) Vol tage

1 BLK G N D 1 ( G r o u n d 1)

G r o u n d 1-GND B e l o w 0.3 V

2 YEL/GRN NCL ( N o r m a l l y c losed left)

Dr ives left TCS n o r m a l l y c losed s o l e n o i d va l ve

2 -GND TCS Ind icator

OFF Bat tery Vo l tage

3 GRY NOL ( N o r m a l l y o p e n left)

Dr ives left TCS n o r m a l l y o p e n s o l e n o i d va l ve

3 -GND

TCS Ind icator

ON (Disconnect

16P connec to r to t u r n

ind icator on)

B e l o w 0. 3V

4 B L U / W H T A B S Dr ives A B S ind ica to r (Turns t h e ind ica to r d r i ve t rans is to r to O N , t hen t u r n s of f t he ind ica tor )

4 -GND ABS ind icator

ON 4 - 6 V 4 B L U / W H T A B S Dr ives A B S ind ica to r (Turns t h e ind ica to r d r i ve t rans is to r to O N , t hen t u r n s of f t he ind ica tor )

4 -GND ABS ind icator OFF B e l o w 1.0 V

6 BRN SCS (Serv ice check s igna l )

Detects serv ice check connec to r s igna l (Use f o r DTC ind ica t ion)

6 -GND SCS Ci rcu i t Sho r ted Be low 0.3 V 6 BRN SCS (Serv ice check s igna l )

Detects serv ice check connec to r s igna l (Use f o r DTC ind ica t ion)

6 -GND SCS Ci rcu i t Opened A p p r o x . 5 V

8 BRN F L W ( - ) (Front- le f t w h e e l

neqat ive)

Detects le f t - f ron t w h e e l sensor s igna l

8-9 W h e e l T u r n w h e e l at 1 t u rn / second

AC: 0. 053 V or

above (Reference) Oscilloscope: 0.15 V p - p o r

above

9 GRN/BLU F L W ( + ) (Front - le f t w h e e l

pos i t i ve)

Detects le f t - f ron t w h e e l sensor s igna l


AC: 0. 053 V or


above 10 GRN F R W ( ) (F ron t - r igh t w h e e l

neqat ive)

Detects r i gh t - f ron t w h e e l sensor s igna l

10-11

W h e e l T u r n w h e e l at 1 t u rn / second

AC: 0. 053 V or


above

11 GRN/BLK F R W H - ) (F ron t - r igh t w h e e l

pos i t ive)

Detects r i gh t - f ron t w h e e l sensor s igna l

10-11

W h e e l

S topped 0.25 V -1.15V

12 W H T / B L K STOP Detects brake sw i t ch s igna l

12-GND Brake pedal Pressed Bat tery Vo l tage

12 W H T / B L K STOP Detects brake sw i t ch s igna l

12-GND Brake pedal

Released B e l o w 0.3 V 13 YEL/BLK IG2

( Ign i t ion 2) Power source fo r ac t i va t ing t he sys tem

13-GND Ign i t ion sw i t ch ON (II) Bat tery Vo l taqe

13 YEL/BLK IG2 ( Ign i t ion 2)

Power source fo r ac t i va t ing t he sys tem

13-GND Ign i t ion sw i t ch

Start (III) B e l o w 0.3 V

19-32

Terminal number

W i r e co lo r Terminal sign (Terminal name)

Description Measurement Terminal number


Description Terminal Condit ions

(Ignition swi tch O N (II)} Voltage

15 RED/GRN NCR (No rma l l y c losed r iqht )

Dr ives r igh t TCS n o r m a l l y c losed so leno id va lve

15-GND TCS ind ica to r OFF Bat tery Vo l taqe

16 LT BLU NOR (No rma l l y o p e n e d

r ight)

Dr ives r igh t TCS n o r m a l l y open so leno id va lve

16-GND

TCS ind ica to r

O N (D isconnect

16P connec to r t o t u r n

ind ica to r on)

Be low 0.3 V

18 RED/WHT TCS1 Dr ives TCS ind icator (Turns the ind icator dr ive t rans is to r t o O N , t hen t u r n s of f t he ind icator )

18-GND TCS ind ica to r W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g , and ind ica tor OFF

Bat tery Vo l tage

18 RED/WHT TCS1 Dr ives TCS ind icator (Turns the ind icator dr ive t rans is to r t o O N , t hen t u r n s of f t he ind icator )

18-GND TCS ind ica to r

O N A p p r o x . 2 V 20 GRN MCK

(Mo to r check) Detects p u m p m o t o r dr ive s igna l

20 -GND P u m p m o t o r O N Bat tery Vo l taqe

20 GRN MCK (Mo to r check)

Detects p u m p m o t o r dr ive s igna l

20 -GND P u m p m o t o r

OFF Be low 0.3 V

20 GRN MCK (Mo to r check)

Detects p u m p m o t o r dr ive s igna l

20 -GND

R e m o v e M C K fuse A p p r o x . 10 V 21 LT BLU RLW (+)

(Rear-left w h e e l pos i t ive)

Detects lef t-rear whee l sensor s igna l


AC: 0. 053V or

above (Reference) Oscilloscope: 0.15 Vp-p o r

above

22 GRY R L W ( - ) (Rear-left w h e e l

pos i t ive)

Detects lef t-rear whee l sensor s igna l


AC: 0. 053V or


above 23 GRN/YEL R R W ( + ) (Rear-r ight w h e e l

pos i t ive)

Detects r ight - rear whee l sensor s igna l

23-24

W h e e l T u r n w h e e l at 1 t u rn / second

AC: 0. 053V or


above

24 BLU/YEL R R W ( - ) (Rear-r ight w h e e l

neqat ive)

Detects r ight - rear whee l sensor s igna l

23-24

W h e e l

S t o p p e d 0.25 V -1.15 V

25 YEL/GRN FSR (Fail-safe relay)

Dr ives A B S fai l -safe relay (ABS fa i l -safe relay is t u r n e d OFF to shu t of f t he p o w e r source t o the so leno id and p u m p m o t o r re lay w h e n a p r o b l e m occurs. )

25 -GND A B S (SCS c i rcu i t m u s t be open)

W a r n i n g Be low 0.3 V 25 YEL/GRN FSR (Fail-safe relay)

Dr ives A B S fai l -safe relay (ABS fa i l -safe relay is t u r n e d OFF to shu t of f t he p o w e r source t o the so leno id and p u m p m o t o r re lay w h e n a p r o b l e m occurs. )

25 -GND A B S (SCS c i rcu i t m u s t be open)

N o r m a l A p p r o x . 11V

26 LT BLU DLC (Data l ink connec to r )

C o m m u n i c a t e s w i t h the Honda P G M Tester

(cont 'd)

19-33

ABS/TCS Components


ABS/TCS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (16P)

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)

1 F P

TDR 2

V R E F / 4 T C S S W

7 AT

S F T P / OUT

10 PF

INH 11

N E P 13

TCSR 14

PARK 15

PMR 16

T C S 2

Wire s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

Terminal number


Descript ion Measurement Terminal number


Descript ion Terminal Condit ions

(Ignition swi tch ON (II)) Voltage

1 PNK FPTDR (Frame to p o w e r t r a i n torque d o w n request)

Outpu ts e n g i n e retard request s igna l

1-GND TCS N o t ope ra t i ng A p p r o x . 2.5 V (5V, du t y 50)

1 PNK FPTDR (Frame to p o w e r t r a i n torque d o w n request)

Outpu ts e n g i n e retard request s igna l

1-GND TCS

Opera t ing A p p r o x . 5V 2 O R N / G R N V R E F

(Voltage reference) Reference vo l t age f o r t he sensors o f t he PGM-FI sys tem

2-GND A p p r o x . 5V

4 O R N / W H T TCS S W (TCS sw i t ch )

Detects TCS s w i t c h s igna l 4 -GND TCS sw i t ch

TCS sw i t ch pressed

Bat tery Vo l taqe

4 O R N / W H T TCS S W (TCS sw i t ch )

Detects TCS s w i t c h s igna l 4 -GND TCS sw i t ch

OFF (TCS ind ica to r is ON)

0 V

7 L T G R N ATSFTP (AT sh i f t pos i t ion)

Detects A / T sh i f t pos i t i on s ignal

7 -GND Shi f t the t r ansm iss i on to E , t hen start the eng ine .

A p p r o x . 4 V

9 YEL /GRN T H L O U T (Thro t t le out )

Detects t h r o t t l e pos i t i on sensor s igna l

9 -GND Thro t t le va lve

Ful ly c losed A p p r o x . 0.5V 9 YEL /GRN T H L O U T (Thro t t le out )

Detects t h r o t t l e pos i t i on sensor s igna l

9 -GND Thro t t le va lve Ful ly o p e n e d A p p r o x . 4.8V

10 B L U PFINH (Power t ra in t o f r a m e

inh ib i t i on )

Detects TCS ope ra t i on p e r m i s s i o n s igna l

10-GND Permiss ion (no rma l ) A p p l o x . 2.5V (5V, du t y 50)


inh ib i t i on )


10-GND

Inh ib i t ion (the coo lan t t e m p e r a t u r e is 0°C or be low)

A p p r o x . 5 V


inh ib i t i on )


10-GND

Fai lure (TCS and /o r PCM has fa i led)

A p p l o x . 0 V

11 B L U NEP (Enqine speed pulse)

Detects e n g i n e speed s ignal

11-GND Engine id l ing A p p r o x . 6 V

13 G R N / Y E L TCSR (TCS relay)

Dr ives TCS re lay (TCS relay is t u r n e d OFF t o shut o f f t h e p o w e r source to the TCS so leno id and p u m p m o t o r relay w h e n a p r o b l e m occurs)

13-GND TCS (SCS c i rcu i t m u s t be opened)

W a r n i n g Be low 0.3 V 13 G R N / Y E L TCSR (TCS relay)

Dr ives TCS re lay (TCS relay is t u r n e d OFF t o shut o f f t h e p o w e r source to the TCS so leno id and p u m p m o t o r relay w h e n a p r o b l e m occurs)

13-GND TCS (SCS c i rcu i t m u s t be opened)

N o r m a l A p p r o x . 11 V

14 GRN/RED PARK (Parking)

Detects pa rk ing brake sw i t ch s igna l

14-GND W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g , park ing brake

Pul led Be low 0.3 V 14 GRN/RED PARK (Parking)

Detects pa rk ing brake sw i t ch s igna l

14-GND W i t h eng ine r u n n i n g , park ing brake

Released Bat tery Vo l tage

15 YEL/RED PMR (Pump m o t o r relay)

Dr ives p u m p m o t o r re lay 15-GND ABS ind icator

O F F ] P u m p m o t o r

ON B e l o w 1.0 V 15 YEL/RED PMR (Pump m o t o r relay)


O F F ] P u m p m o t o r OFF Bat tery

Vo l tage

15 YEL/RED PMR (Pump m o t o r relay)


ON Be low 0.3 V 16 RED/WHT TCS2 Dr ives TCS ind ica tor

(Turns t he ind ica to r d r ive t rans is to r t o O N , t hen t u rns of f t he ind icator )

16-GND Tcs 1

ind icator OFF Battery

Vo l taqe 16 RED/WHT TCS2 Dr ives TCS ind ica tor

(Turns t he ind ica to r d r ive t rans is to r t o O N , t hen t u rns of f t he ind icator )

16-GND Tcs 1

ind icator ON A p p r o x . 2 V

19-34

ABS/TCS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (12P)

A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12P)

2 LG

3 RR-OUT

4 FL OUT

5 RL~ OUT

6 FR-

OUT

7 GND3

8 RR-IN

9 FL-IN

10 RL-IN

11 FR-IN

12 GND2


Terminal number


Description Measurement Terminal number


Description Terminal Condit ions

(Ignition swi tch O N (II)) Voltage

2 BRN/BLK LG (Loqic q r o u n d )

G r o u n d fo r log ic c i rcu i t 2 -GND Be low 0.3 V

3 YEL /WHT RR-OUT (Rear- r iqht out le t )

Dr ives r ight- rear ou t le t so leno id va lve

3-GND ABS indicator OFF Bat tery Vo l tage

4 YEL/BLU FL-OUT (Front- lef t out le t )

Dr ives le f t - f ront out le t so leno id va lve

4-GND

ABS indicator OFF Bat tery Vo l tage

5 YEL/GRN RL-OUT (Rear-left out le t )

Dr ives left-rear out le t so leno id va lve

5-GND

ABS indicator

O N (D isconnect


ind ica tor on)

Be low 0.3 V

6 YEL/BLK FR-OUT (Front - r igh t out le t )

Dr ives r igh t - f ron t ou t le t so leno id va lve

6-GND

ABS indicator

O N (D isconnect


ind ica tor on)

Be low 0.3 V

7 BLK GND3 (Ground 3)

G r o u n d 7-GND Be low 0.3 V

8 RED/WHT RR-IN (Rear- r ight inlet)

Dr ives r ight - rear in let so leno id va lve

8-GND ABS indicator OFF Bat tery Vo l tage

9 RED/BLU FL-IN (Front- lef t in let)

Dr ives le f t - f ront in let so leno id va lve

9-GND

ABS indicator OFF Bat tery Vo l tage

10 RED/GRN RL-IN (Rear- left in let)

Dr ives left-rear inlet so leno id va lve

10-GND

ABS indicator

ON (Disconnect


ind ica tor on)

Be low 0.3 V

11 RED/BLK FR-IN (Front - r igh t inlet)

Dr ives r igh t - f ron t in let so leno id va lve

11-GND

ABS indicator

ON (Disconnect


ind ica tor on)

Be low 0.3 V

12 BLK GND2 ( G r o u n d 2)

G r o u n d 12-GND Be low 0.3 V

(cont 'd)

19-35

ABS/TCS Components


Outline Th is sys tem cons is ts o f the ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t , t he m o d u l a t o r un i t , f o u r w h e e l senso rs , and the PCM. The sys tem in tegra tes the A B S (An t i -lock Brake Sys tem) and the TCS (Tract ion Con t ro l Sys tem) and c o n t r o l s bo th s y s t e m s us ing the brakes.

A B S / T C S

A B S c o n t r o l • I m p r o v e s m a n e u v e r a b i l i t y a n d s tab i l i ty w h e n brak ing .

T C S cont ro l • I m p r o v e s a c c e l e r a t i n g abi l i ty f r o m a s tandst i l l on s l ipper ly road s u r f a c e s .

• I m p r o v e s t r a c t i o n w h e n o n e d r i v e w h e e l is o n a s l i p p e r y r o a d s u r f a c e .

N O : N o r m a l l y O p e n N C : N o r m a l l y C l o s e d

19-36

ABS Features W h e n the brake pedal is pressed w h i l e d r i v i n g , t he w h e e l s can lock be fo re the veh ic le c o m e s t o a s top . In such an even t , t he m a n e u v e r a b i l i t y o f the veh ic le is reduced if the f r o n t whee l s are locked , and the s tabi l i ty o f t h e veh ic le is reduced if t h e rear w h e e l s are locked, c rea t ing an e x t r e m e l y uns tab le c o n d i t i o n . The A B S precisely con t ro l s the s l ip rate o f t h e w h e e l s t o ensu re m a x i m u m g r i p f o r ce f r o m the t i res , and it t h e r e b y ensures maneuve rab i l i t y and stabi l i ty of the veh ic le . T h e A B S calcu lates the sl ip rate o f the whee l s based o n the veh ic le speed and the w h e e l speed , t hen it con t ro l s the brake f l u i d p ressure t o at ta in the ta rget s l ip rate.

Grip Force of Tire and Road Surface

C O E F F I C I E N T O F F R I C T I O N

T A R G E T S L I P R A T E

S L I P R A T E

TCS Features The TCS p rov ides l o w speed t rac t ion . W h e n a d r i ve w h e e l loses t rac t i on on a s l ipper ly road sur face and star ts t o sp in , t h e ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t sends a brake s ignal t o the m o d u l a t o r un i t , w h i c h app l ies brake pressure to s l o w the sp inn ing w h e e l . A t t ha t t i m e , t he ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t sends an eng ine retard s ignal to the PCM to p reven t d a m a g e to the t r a n s m i s s i o n .

(cont 'd)

19-37

ABS/TCS Components


ABS Main Control T h e ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t detects t he w h e e l speed based o n t h e w h e e l senso r s igna l it rece ived, t h e n it ca lcu lates the veh ic le speed based on t h e de tec ted w h e e l speed . T h e con t ro l un i t de tec ts t he veh ic le s p e e d d u r i n g dece le ra t ion based o n the rate o f dece le ra t ion . T h e ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t ca lcu la tes t h e s l ip rate o f each w h e e l , and it t r a n s m i t s the con t ro l s igna l t o the m o d u l a t o r un i t so l eno id va lve w h e n t h e s l ip rate is h i g h . T h e pressure reduc t i on con t ro l has 3 m o d e s : p ressu re i n t e n s i f y i n g , p ressu re re ta in ing , and pressure reduc ing .

RIGHT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

Detect Vehicle Speed

Detect | — 1 \ \ \ Wheel Speed | J J J

Detect Wheel Speed

Select Low Speed Wheel

RIGHT-FRONT 1 Detect WHEEL SENSOR f ~ f ^ Wheel Speed

Detect Wheel Speed

A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT

Reference Slip Rate

Detect Slip Rate 3>

ABS Control

RIGHT-FRONT Detect Slip Rate

Detect Slip Rate

ABS Control

ABS Control

Drive . ^ Solenoid [ |

Drive Solenoid

Drive Solenoid

RIGHT-REAR SOLENOID

LEFT-REAR SOLENOID

RIGHT-FRONT SOLENOID

Drive 1 L I LEFT-FRONT Solenoid : SOLENOID

TCS Main Control The ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t con t ro l s t h e TCS based o n s igna l i npu ts f r o m the t h ro t t l e pos i t ion sensor , eng ine speed sensor , sh i f t pos i t i on sensor , and the w h e e l sensors . In a d d i t i o n , t he ABS/TCS c o n t r o l un i t sends an e n g i n e re tard request s igna l t o the PCM if necessary. The ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t uses t h e m o d u l a t o r un i t t o con t ro l t h e TCS. T h e p ressure i n tens i f y i ng con t ro l has th ree m o d e s : p ressure i n tens i f y i ng , p ressure re ta in ing , and pressure reduc ing .

THROTTLE ANGLE SENSOR

Engine speed signal -

Shift position signal -

RIGHT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

LEFT-REAR

RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

LEFT-FRONT

Detect wheel speed

WHEEL SENSOR~~| wheel speed Detect

Detect wheel speed

WHEEL SENSOR wheel speed Detect


Calucufate traction torque

->* slip rate

Calculate control target value

Calculate vehicle speed

Calculate drive wheel speed avarage

Calculate drive wheel speed difference

Calculate deviation

Calculate deviation

Calculate control condition signal

Calculate amount of right-front wheel control

Calculate amount of left-front wheel control

Drive solenoid

RIGHT-FRONT SOLENOID

Drive solenoid

LEFT-FRONT SOLENOID

19-38

ABS Self-Diagnosis

• The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.

• The CPUs check the circuit of the system.

9 Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories; - Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off. - Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.

• When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.

ABS Self-diagnosis Table Diagnostic Trouble Detect ion I tem Detection Timing Fail-safe Mode

Code (DTC) Initial

Diagnosis

Regular

Diagnosis

11, 13, 15, 17 Wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) AO

12, 14, 16, 18 Wheel sensor (electrical noise/ intermittent interruption) O AO, LO

21-24 Pulser AO, LO

31-38 Solenoid (short to body ground/shor t to wire) o o S1

41-44 Wheel lock o AO, LO

51 Motor lock AO, LO

52 Motor stuck OFF o AO, LO

53 Motor stuck ON o AO, LO

54 Fail-safe relay S1

61 Low ignit ion voltage o BO

62 High ignit ion vol tage r BO

71 Different diameter t i re S1

81 Central Processing Unit (CPU), ROM/RAM o O S1

ABS Operation Mode Table Operation Mode Description A B S Indicator T C S Indicator

Regular operation Operation in normal condi t ion OFF OFF

Fail-safe mode-S1 The ABS/TCS control unit turns the system off (ABS fail-safe relay off) when the

control unit detects a prob lem.

ON ON

Fail-safe mode-AO If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a mal funct ion whi le the ABS or TCS is

operat ing, it w i l l tu rn off the mal funct ioning component , and cont inue to

modulate the rest of the ABS system until complet ing the ABS or TCS operat ion.

At that t ime, the entire system wi l l be turned off unti l the problem goes away.

ON ON

Fail-safe mode-LO The ABS/TCS control unit stores a DTC in back-up memory when it detects a

prob lem. If a prob lem is detected when the igni t ion switch is turned ON (II), the

ABS/TCS control unit wi l l turn the system off. If the problem goes away, the

ABS/TCS control unit wi l l turn the system on again.

ON ON

Fail-safe mode-BO The ABS/TCS control unit wi l l turn the system off if ignit ion voltage drops, and

wi l l turn it on again when ignit ion vol tage returns to normal.

ON ON

On-board Diagnosis Function The ABS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester. The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions.

(cont'd)

19-39

ABS/TCS Components


TCS Self-diagnosis

• The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped wi th a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.

• The CPUs check the circuit of the system.

• Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories: - Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off. - Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.

• When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.

Diagnostic Trouble

Code(DTC)

Detection Item Detection Timing Fail-safe Mode Diagnostic Trouble

Code(DTC)

Detection Item

Initial

Diagnosis

Regular

Diagnosis

Fail-safe Mode

24-27 T C S s o l o n o i d ( s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d / s h o r t t o w i r e ) (J) O S1

2 8 T C S r e l a y r> S1

31 E n g i n e r e t a r d c o m m a n d (PFINH) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y

g r o u n d ) o A 2

3 2 E n g i n e s p e e d ( N E P ) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d ) o A 2

3 4 R e f e r e n c e v o l t a g e ( V R E F ) s igna l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d ) ^% A 2

3 6 T h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n s e n s o r o u t p u t ( T H L O U T ) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o

b o d y g r o u n d )

o A 2

61 A/T s h i f t p o s i t i o n ( A T S F T P ) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d ) o A 2

81 C o n t i n u o u s T C S o p e r a t i o n A 2

TCS Operation Mode Table Operation Mode Description ABS Indicator TCS Indicator

R e g u l a r o p e r a t i o n O p e r a t i o n i n n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n OFF OFF

Fa i l-safe m o d e - S 1 T h e ABS/TCS c o n t r o l u n i t t u r n s t h e s y s t e m o f f ( f a i l -sa fe r e l a y o f f ) w h e n t h e

c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s a p r o b l e m .

O N O N

Fa i l-safe m o d e - A 2 If t h e ABS/TCS c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s a m a l f u c t i o n w h i l e t h e T C S is o p e r a t i n g , i t

w i l l t u r n o f f t h e m a l f u n c t i o n i n g c o m p o n e n t , a n d c o n t i n u e t o m o d u l a t e t h e r e s t o f

t h e T C S s y s t e m u n t i l c o m p l e t i n g t h e T C S o p e r a t i o n . A t that t i m e , t h e T C S

s y s t e m w i l l b e t u r n e d o f f .

OFF O N

T C S d e a c t i v a t e

m o d e

If t h e f r o n t b r a k e p a d t e m p e r a t u r e r i s e e x c e s s i v e l y , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t

s t o p s t h e T C S s y s t e m a n d it t u r n s t h e T C S i n d i c a t o r o n . W h e n t h e b r a k e p a d

t e m p e r a t u r e l o w e r s , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t t u r n s o f f t h e T C S i n d i c a t o r a n d

r e s t a r t s t h e T C S s y s t e m .

OFF C o m e s O N w h e n

the f r o n t b r a k e p a d

t e m p e r a t u r e r i s e s

e x c e s s i v e l y .

T C S OFF m o d e T h e ABS/TCS c o n t r o l u n i t c a n c e l s t h e T C S s y s t e m u n d e r t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s :

• If t h e ABS/TCS c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s a p r o b l e m w i t h t h e PGM-F I

c o m m u n i c a t i o n c i r c u i t .

• T h e A B S s y s t e m i s f a u l t y .

• T h e T C S s y s t e m is OFF.

If t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s r e t u r n t o n o r m a l , t h e ABS/TCS c o n t r o l u n i t r e s t a r t s t h e T C S

s y s t e m .

O N o r OFF

( O N : W h e n t h e

A B S s y s t e m i s

f a u l t y )

O N

On-board Diagnosis Function The TCS can be diagnosed wi th the Honda PGM Tester. The ALB Checker cannot be used wi th this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda PGM Tester. See the Honda Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions.

19-40

^ABSl

Modulator Unit

T h e modu la to r un i t cons is ts of t he in le t so leno id va lve , ou t le t so leno id va lve , TCS n o r m a l l y o p e n (NO) so leno id va lve , TCS n o r m a l l y c losed (NC) so leno id va lve , reservo i r , p u m p , p u m p m o t o r , and the d a m p i n g chamber . T h e m o d u l a t o r con t ro l s the cal iper f l u i d p ressure d i rect ly . It is a c i rcu la t ing- type m o d u l a t o r because the brake f l u i d c i rcu la tes t h r o u g h t he cal iper , the reservo i r , and the master cy l inder . The hydrau l ic con t ro l has th ree m o d e s : pressure in tens i f y ing , pressure re ta in ing , and pressure r educ ing . T h e hydrau l ic c i rcu i t is an i ndependen t f o u r channe l t ype , one channe l f o r each w h e e l .

ABS Control Pressure intensifying mode TCS NO va lve o p e n , TCS NC va lve c losed , in let va lve o p e n , out le t va lve c losed . Master cy l inder f l u i d is p u m p e d ou t t o the cal iper .

Pump Motor W h e n s tar t ing t he pressure reduc ing m o d e , the p u m p m o t o r is O N . W h e n s t o p p i n g A B S o p e r a t i o n , t h e p u m p m o t o r is OFF. T h e reservoi r f l u i d is p u m p e d ou t by the p u m p , t h o u g h the d a m p i n g chambe r , t o the mas te r cy l i nder .

MASTER CYLINDER

MODULATOR UNIT

IPCV]

I"""" IN i m

DAMP CHAM

\N W[ j 3 V \ {

St 1PING MBER

3

3 3 s v \ 33 '

Pressure retaining mode TCS NO va lve o p e n , TCS NC va lve c losed , in let va lve c losed , ou t le t va lve c losed . Cal iper f l u id is re ta ined by the in let va lve a n d out le t va lve .

MASTER CYLINDER

MODULATOR UNIT

~|~ I TCS NO

_ [jgA/-|EZCI>

• DAMPING •

1 CHAMBER WBB

gj 11 1 ' IvV P U M P(~>

a g ^ M ^ T c ' s ' N ' c ' 1 * ' ' ' * " " * " " * ' T C S N C ^ ^ T ^ " ^ ^

w| 111' [a Y vfflTta * , J B DAMPING | J 1 I

1 m CHAMBER r * H u T ^ ^ I O U T

1 II ( ^ p u M P ^ y y j " 1 [I [X] wj' 111 Ixi

(03

(cont 'd)

19-41

ABS/TCS Components


Pressure reducing mode TCS N O va lve o p e n , TCS NC va lve c l osed , in let va lve c losed , o u t l e t va l ve o p e n . Cal iper f l u id f l o w s t h r o u g h the ou t le t va lve t o t he reservo i r .

MASTER CYLINDER

MODULATOR UNIT

OUT J !

[T]/v <y a E C

UU I

TTTW DAMPING 9 H L CHAMBER WUK

}w wC

MOTOR

WHT MDAMPING

CHAMBER

' ^ P U M p W J n 1

»NO I """""I1"1"

IN T j j 3 V

UU I

CO)

T C S Control

Pressure intensifying mode TCS N O va lve c losed , TCS NC va lve o p e n , in let va lve o p e n , ou t le t va lve c l osed , p u m p m o t o r O N . The reservo i r and mas te r cy l i nder f l u i d is p u m p e d ou t by t he p u m p , t h r o u g h t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r , t o the f r o n t cal iper .

MASTER CYLINDER

MODULATOR UNIT

I IN

LZ 1 M°™ flich

UMP I • • • M B M ^ M ^ H Ill I BB^ ^PUWIP

J 3

3 a

RESERVOIRL

CcO

19-42

Pressure retaining mode TCS NO va lve o p e n , TCS NC va lve o p e n , in let va lve c losed , out le t va lve c losed , p u m p m o t o r O N . Front cal iper f l u i d is re ta ined by t he in let va lve and ou t le t va lve.

MASTER CYLINDER

MODULATOR UNIT

I IN

EZ] II | pump( =4=

3 WTTHi] x^wQ

y I I i < m ^ J DAMPING | H U M n T n R lAfM|DAMPII' G EC.,--*. ^ w r -

0 U T * * M T | CHAMBER • H T l IVIUKJK H M c H A M B E R ft" ' O U r

izj 111 JTIM P U M P ^ ^ I ™ ^ ^ ^ ™ 1 ^ ^ ) ^ ^ v\^TF!^ )pUMP " 1 [I |X1

J RESERVOIR

Pressure reducing mode TCS NO va lve c losed , TCS NC va lve o p e n , f r o n t in let va lve c losed, f r o n t ou t le t va lve o p e n , p u m p m o t o r O N . Cal iper f l u i d f l o w s t h r o u g h the ou t le t va lve t o the reservo i r .

MASTER CYLINDER

MODULATOR UNIT

E O

}N

- Q J ^ P U M P ^ ^

Ik /vc MOTOR

3 v\<| 111" in

J*

(cont 'd)

19-43

ABS/TCS Components


Wheel S e n s o r

The wheel s e n s o r s are the magnetic contactless type. A s the gear pulser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor 's magnetic coil, A C current is generated. The A C frequency changes in accordance with the whee l s p e e d . The A B S / T C S control unit detects the wheel sensor signal f requency and thereby detects the wheel speed.

GEAR PULSER WHEEL SENSOR at HIGH SPEED

| at LOW SPEED

Whee l S p e e d and Modulator Control (ABS)

S P E E D V E H I C L E S P E E D

P R E S S U R E

O U T L E T V A L V E O N —

O F F

I N L E T V A L V E O N

O F F

R E F E R E N C E V E H I C L E S P E E D

W H E E L S P E E D

M O T O R O N

O F F

W h e n the w h e e l speed d r o p s sha rp l y b e l o w the veh ic le speed , the ou t le t va lve opens m o m e n t a r i l y to reduce the cal iper f l u id pressure. T h e p u m p m o t o r s tar ts at th is t i m e . A s t h e w h e e l speed is res to red , the in let va l ve opens m o m e n t a r i l y t o increase the cal iper f l u i d pressure .

19-44

Wheel S p e e d and Modulator control (TCS)

S P E E D

D R I V E W H E E L S P E E D

B R A K E P R E S S U R E

O U T L E T V A L V E

I N L E T V A L V E

T C S N C V A L V E

T C S N O V A L V E

M O T O R

W h e n the f r o n t w h e e l speed r ises sharp ly above the vehic le speed , the TCS NC va lve o p e n s , the TCS NO va lve c loses, a n d the p u m p m o t o r starts t o in tens i fy the f r o n t ca l iper f l u id pressure. W h e n the w h e e l speed d rops , the f r o n t in let va lve c loses m o m e n t a r i t y t o rata in the f r o n t cal iper f l u i d pressure. W h e n the w h e e l speed d rops fu r the r , the f r o n t ou t le t va lve opens m o m e n t a r i t y t o reduce the f r o n t ca l iper f l u id pressure.

19-45

ABS/TCS Components

Circuit Diagram

UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTORS CONNECTOR A (18P) CONNECTOR B (7P)

DEIVER'S UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTORS CONNECTOR M (20P) CONNECTOR J (18P)

3 i—I 4 5 6 7 8 | 9 /113 A/ / | 1 7 4

1 I 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14|15 16 17 18 19 20

P A S S E N G E R ' S UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR S CONNECTOR B (18P) CONNECTOR I (16P) T

1 2 3 I—1 4 5 6 7 8 | 9 10 11 / | 1 3 1 4 | / 16|17 18

1 L

1 2 3 t = ! 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11(12 / 14 15 / G A U G E A S S E M B L Y CONNECTORS CONNECTOR B (22P) CONNECTOR C (16P)

1 2 4 5 >^ 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 / / / 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 5 6 7

8 9 10 111X112 / 14 15 16

1 2 3 4 F = l 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR

CRUISE CONTROL/ A B S PUMP MOTOR T C S SWITCH 8P CONNECTORS R£|_AY 5P CONNECTOR

T F=1._ 2 7 4

j — 1

5 ( 6 7 4 .rnzfai, i 4 I I 5 1

FAIL S A F E RELAY/ T C S RELAY 4P CONNECTOR

m±

MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR

| / 1 / I 5 | 6 | 7 l 1 ?

16 1/ ,.,171

M11|12|13|14|/| / 1 l 9 l 2 0 | 2 l l 2 2 | / l /

19 -46


- G R N / R E D

• (DAYTIME RUNNING [LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT| I QRN/RED

' GRN/WHT J I ! J [ C a n a d i . | USAj

AC\ PARKING Uh J BRAKE SWITCH ^ j K Closed: Brake lever

• pulled ~ • BLU/WHT

Y

- G R N / B L U •

— — B R N — •

- L T BLU -

— G R Y — •

- B L K

- B L K

- B L K ' 1

+ B

J BRN/BLK —i

l l

- o 8 0 4 - W H T / G R N « 13 O — - B R N / B L K -12 0 - - B L K |

WHEEL SENSOR

A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS CONNECTOR A (26P) •—n—

1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

/ 15 16 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

CONNECTOR B (16P)

10 11 L / | 1 3 14 0 16

CONNECTOR C(12P)

/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DATA LINK CONNECTOR (16P) J S L

13

WHEEL SENSOR CONNECTOR FRONT/REAR

J l F = t f L

19-47

ABS/TCS Components

DTC Troubleshooting

A B S D T C 1 1 , 1 3 , 1 5 . 1 7 : Wheel S e n s o r (Open/ Short to Body Ground/Short to Power)

1. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P).


3. Measure the voltage between the appropriate wheel sensor ( + ) circuit terminal and body ground (see table).

DTC Appropriate Terminal 11 (Right-front) A11 : FRW (+) 13 (Left-front) A9 : FLW (+) 15 (Right-rear) A23 : RRW (+) 17 (Left-rear) A21 : RLW (+)

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)

F L W ( + ) ( G R N / B L U )

F R W ( + ) ( G R N / B L K )

it n • L _ 1 2 3 4 6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13

/ 15 16 18 / 20 22 23 24 25 26

R L W ( + ) ( L T B L U )

R R W ( + ) ( G R N / Y E L )


Is there 2 V or more?

YES-Repa i r short to power in the ( + ) circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the appropriate wheel sensor. •


4. Check for continuity between the appropriate wheel sensor ( + ) circuit terminal and body ground (see table).

DTC Appropriate Terminal 11 (Right-front) A11: FRW (+) 13 (Left-front) A9: FLW (+) 15 (Right-rear) A23: RRW (+) 17 (Left-rear) A21: RLW (+)


F L W ( + ) ( G R N / B L U )

F R W ( + ) ( G R N / B L K )

n n I i „

1 2 3 4 / 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

/ 15 16 / 18 20 22 23 24 25 26 u -

R L W ( + ) ( L T B L U )

R R W ( + ) ( G R N / Y E L )

<g) (g> ( g





5. Disconnect the harness 2P connector f rom the appropriate wheel sensor, then check for continuity between the ( + ) and ( - ) terminals of the harness and body ground.


YES-Repa i r short to body ground in the ( + ) or ( - ) circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the wheel sensor. •

NO —Replace the wheel sensor. I

19-48

6. Check the resistance between the appropriate wheel sensor ( + ) and ( —) circuit terminals (see table).

DTC Appropriate Terminal DTC ( + )Side ( - ) S i d e

11 (Right-front) A11 :FRW( + ) A10:FRW(~) 13 (Left-front) A9:FLW( + ) A8:FLW( - ) 15 (Right-rear) A23: RRW

( + ) A24; RRW

<-) 17 (Left-rear) A21 :RLW( + ) A22:RLW(~)


G R N / B L U G R N

B R N \ / G R N / B L K

- X L -

1 2 - X L -

3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 _JT_

13

/ 15 16 18 / 20 21 22 23 24 - ~ i r -

25 26

L T B L U / \ B L U / Y E L

G R Y G R N / Y E L


Is the resistance between 450-2,000 Q ?

Y E S - Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors.If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. B

NO Go to step 7.

7. Disconnect the harness 2P connector f rom the appropriate wheel sensor, and check the resistance between the ( + ) and ( — ) terminals of the wheel sensor.

Is the resistance between 450-2,000 Q ?

Y E S —Repair open in the ( + ) or ( —) circuit wire, or short beween the ( + ) circuit wire and the ( —) circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the wheel sensor •

NO - Replace the wheel sensor. •

ABS DTC 12,14,16,18: Wheel Sensor (Electrical Noise/Intermittent Interruption)

NOTE: If the ABS indicator comes on for the reasons described below,the indicator goes off when you test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h).

• Only the drive wheel rotated • The vehicle spun • Electrical noise

1. Visually check for appropriate wheel sensor and pulser installation (see table).

DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor 12 Right-front 14 Left-front 16 Right-rear 18 Left-rear

Are they installed correctly?


NO —Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel sensor or pulser •


3. Measure the resistance between the appropriate wheel sensor ( + ) and ( —) circuit terminals (see table).

DTC Appropriate Terminal ( + )Side ( ) Side

12 (Right-front) A11 : FRW A10 :FRW ( + ) ( - )

14 (Left-front) A9 : FLW A 8 : FLW ( + ) ( - )

16 (Right-rear) A23 : RRW A24 : RRW ( + ) ( - )

18 (Left-rear) A21 : RLW A22 : RLW ( + > ( - )

Is there less than 450 Q ?

Y E S - Repair short to wire between the appropriate wheel sensor ( + ) and ( —) circuits. •


(cont'd)

19-49

ABS/TCS Components


4. Check for continuity between the appropriate wheel sensor < + ) circuit terminal and other wheel sensor ( + ) circuit terminals (see table).

DTC Appropriate Other Terminal Terminal

12 A11 : A 9 : A 2 3 : A21 : FRW FLW( + ) RRW RLW ( + ) ( + ) ( : )

14 A9 : A11 : A23: A21 : FLW( + ) FRW RRW RLW

( + ) ( + ) ( ; ) 16 A 2 3 : A11 : A9 : A21 ;

RRW FRW FLW( + ) RLW ( + ) ( + ) ( + )

18 A21 : A11 : A9: FLW A23: RLW( + ) FRW( + ) ( + ) RRW( + )


Y E S - Repair short to wire between the appropriate wheel sensor and the other wheel sensor. •

N O - C l e a r the DTC, and test-drive the vehicle. If the ABS indicator comes on and the same DTC is indicated, replace the ABS/TCS control uni t .B

ABS D T C 21,22,23,24: Pulser

1. Clear the DTC.

2. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.

Does the ABS indicator come on and are DTCs 21-24 indicated?


N O - T h e system is OK at this t ime.B

3. Check the appropriate pulser gear for a chipped tooth (see table).

DTC Appropriate Pulser 21 Right-front 22 Left-front 23 Right-rear 24 Left-rear

Is the pulser OK ?

Y E S - Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. B

NO—Replace the driveshaft or the hub unit. (Chipped pulser gear)B

19-50

ABS DTC 31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38: Solenoid

1. Verify the DTC.

Is DTC 54 indicated?

YES — Perform the appropriate troubleshooting for DTC 54. •



3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and the ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P).

4. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/ TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit terminal and body ground (see table).

DTC Appropriate Terminal 31: FR-IN C11 32: FR-OUT C6 33: FL-IN C9 34: FL-OUT C4 35: RR-IN C8 36: RR-OUT C3 37: RL-IN C10 38: RL-OUT C5

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (12P)

Y E L / B L U

/ Y E L / G R N

/ Y E L / B L K Y E L / W H T

\ / 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

R E D / W H T / * R E D / B L K R E D / W H T / R E D / Q R N

R E D / B L U



YES-Repa i r short to body ground in the appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator unit I


5. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.

6. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/ TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit terminal and body ground (see table).

DTC Appropriate Terminal 31: FR-IN C11 32: FR-OUT C6 33: FL-IN C9 34: FL-OUT C4 35: RR-IN C8 36: RR-OUT C3 ^ : R U N 1 C10 38: RL-OUT C5

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C(12P)

Y E L / B L U

/ Y E L / G R N


/ 2 3 4 5 61 7 8 9 10 11 12

R E D / W H T / • ' R E D / B L K R E D / W H T / m B / G m

R E D / B L U



YES -Replace the modulator uni t .H


7. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.

(cont'd)

19-51

ABS/TCS Components


8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P connector solenoid circuit terminal to body ground wi th a jumper wi re (see table).

DTC Appropr iate Terminal 31 : FR-IN No. 11 32: FR-OUT No. 19 33: FL-IN No. 14 34: FL-OUT No. 22 35: RR-IN No. 13 36: RR-OUT No. 21 37: RL-IN No. 12 38: RL-OUT No. 20

M O D U L A T O R U N I T 2 4 P C O N N E C T O R

R E D / G R N R E D / W H T

R E D / B L K \ / R E D / B L U

1 ?

16 1 / IXlii|i2li3|uX7l

19120|21|22|/1/ \ Y E L / B L K / \ Y E L / B L U

Y E L / G R N Y E L / W H T W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

/ f B L K J

9. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit terminal and body ground (see table).

DTC Appropriate Terminal 31 : FR-IN C11 32: FR-OUT C6 33: FL-IN C9 34: FL-OUT C4 35: RR-IN C8 36: RR-OUT C3 37: RL-IN C10 38: RL-OUT C5


Y E L / B L U

/ Y E L / G R N


7 2 3 4 5 6 7

i — t

8 —i 9 10 11 i—r-j

12 j — 1

R E D / W H T R E D / B L K

R E D / G R N R E D / B L U




IMO —Repair open in the appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator unit. •

10. Remove the jumper wire f rom the modulator unit 24P connector.


19-52

12. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground wi th a jumper wire.

NOTE: Wire colors of ABS fail-safe relay connector; WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK, YEL/GRN.

ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR

SOLENOID (BRN/BLK)

JUMPER WIRE


13. Check the resistance between the appropriate ABS/ TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal and body ground (see table). IN: 8 - 1 0 Q (at20°C, 68°F) OUT: 3 - 5 Q (at20°C, 68°F)


ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12P) YEL/BLU

y YEL/GRN /YEL/BLK

YEL/WHT

/ 2 3 4 5 1 8 9 10 11

RED/WHT / * RED/BLK RED/WHT / R E D / G R N

RED/BLU W i r e s i d e o f female t e r m i n a l s

Is the resistance OK ?


NO - Replace the modulator uni t .H

14. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector, and remove the jumper wire f rom the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector.

15. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit terminals (see table).


TCS Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit Connector A (26P) Terminal

NOR A16 NCR A15 NOL A3 NCL A2

A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12P) Y E L / B L U

/YEL /GRN / /YEL /BLK

YEL/WHT

7 2 3 4 5

1 i — .

8 n—

9 10 11 I —

1 2 ]

RED/WHT RED/BLK RED/GRN

RED/BLU W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)

YEL/GRN GRY

1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 - f l—

11 12 n—

13

/ 15 16 18 / 20121 22 23 24 _ _ j 25 26

RED/GRN LT BLU

W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e terminals


Y E S - R e p a i r short in the appropriate wires between the ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator uni t .H

N O - G o to step 16. (cont'd)

19-53

ABS/TCS Components



17. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit terminals (see table).


TCS Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit Connector A (26P) Terminal

NOR A16 NCR A15 NOL A3 NCL A2

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R C (12P)

Y E L / B L U / Y E L / G R N


\ J J J 7 2

,7 LR-»

3 jS.ll,,,

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

R E D / W H T W. R E D / B L K R E D / G R N

R E D / B L U W i r e s ide of f ema le t e r m i n a l s

ABS DTC 41, 42,43,44: Wheel Lock

1. Check for brake drag.

Do the brakes drag?

Y E S - Repair the brake drag.B


2. Check the installation of the appropriate wheel sensor (see table).

DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor 41 Right-front 42 Left-front 43 Right-rear 44 Left-rear

Is it correct?

YES—The probable cause was the vehicle spun during cornering. If the problem recurs, check the modulator using the Honda PGM Tes te r . •

NO —Reinstall the wheel sensor correctly. •

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (26P)

Y E L / G R N G R Y

1 2 3 4 / 6 / 8 9 10 J -

11 12 13

/ 15 16 -••tr\

/ 18 / 20 21J22 23 24 L i r J

25 26

/ \ R E D / G R N LT B L U

W i r e s ide of f ema le t e r m i n a l s

Is there less than 3 Q?

Y E S —Replace the modulator uni t .H

N O - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. •

19-54

http://jS.ll

ABS DTC 51: Motor Lock

1. Clear the DTC.


Does the ABS indicator come on and is DTC 51 indicated?

YES —Replace the modulator uni t .B

NO—The system is OK at this t ime .B

ABS DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF

1. Check the ABS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.

Is the fuse OK?


NO —Replace the fuse, and go to step 2.

2. Remove the pump motor relay, and connect the pump motor relay 5P connector terminal No. 4 to No. 5 with a jumper wire for a moment, and check the fuse.

P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R

M O T O R ( W H T / B L U )

+ B (WHT)

J U M P E R W I R E


Is the fuse blown?

Y E S —Check for a short to body ground in the motor power source circuit .B


3. Check the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.

Is the fuse OK ?


NO —Replace the fuse, and go to step 4.

(cont'd)

19-55

ABS/TCS Components


4. Connect the pump motor relay 5P connector terminal No. 4 to No. 5 wi th a jumper wire for a moment, and check the fuse.

P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R

IMA


+ B (WHT)

J U M P E R W I R E


Is the fuse blown?

Y E S -Check for a short to body ground in the GRN wire between the passenger's under-dash fuse/ relay box and the ABS/TCS control unit. •


5. Check the pump motor relay in the under-hood ABS relay box. Refter to the '98 — 01 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) (see page 22-52).

Is the relay OK ?


NO -Rep lace the pump motor relay. •

6. Connect the pump motor relay 5P connector terminal No. 4 to No. 5 wi th a jumper wire for a moment.





8. Connect the pump motor relay 5P connector terminal No. 4 to No. 5 wi th a jumper wire.

9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit 24P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R

MOTOR (WHT/BLU)

1 ?

16 1 ( 111121131141/1

1 7L / |19|20| 21 \22\/\/

W i r e s ide of f ema le t e rm ina l s


Y E S - G o t o step 10. NO —Repair open in the wire between the under-hood ABS relay box and the pump motor. •

10. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit 24P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 16.


MOTOR (WHT/BLU)

Vlll l l2J13lUl / r 7113120[21122|/1/

MOTOR GND (BLK)

Wire side of f e m a l e terminals


Y E S - Replace the modulator unit .H NO —Repair open in the wire between the pump motor and body ground (G203). •

11. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P).

12. Connect the pump motor relay 5P connector terminal No. 1 to No. 5 with a jumper wire.

PUMP MOTOR R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R

J U M P E R WIRE

+ B (WHT)

Wire s ide of fema le terminals

19-56

^ B S

13. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P) terminal B15 and body ground.

ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)

_Jfl_ 1 2 /

-J-2; 4

"S4_,

7 9 10 11 13 14 15 16

PMR (YEL/RED)



YES —Go to step 14.

NO —Repair open in the wire between the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS/TCS control unit.

14. Remove the jumper wire f rom the pump motor relay 5P connector, and reinstall the pump motor relay.



ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)

1 2 / it*.

4 / 9 10 11 13 14 15|16

PMR (YEL/RED)

W i r e side of f e m a l e t e rm ina l s


Y E S —Repair short to power in the wire between the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS/TCS control un i t .B

NO —If the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control un i t .B

A B S DTC 53: Motor Stuck ON

1. Check that the pump motor operates wi th the ignit ion switch OFF.


YES —Replace the pump motor relay. (Pump motor relay stuck O N . )B


2. Remove the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.

Is the fuse OK ?

Y E S —Leave the fuse removed, and go to step 3.

NO —Replace the fuse, and recheck. B


4. Measure the voltage between the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box connector I (16P) terminal 15 and body ground.

PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR f (16P)

MCK (GRN)

1 1 1 2 3 F = J 4 5 6 7 8

i—. 9

•—i 10 11|12 / 14 15




NO —Repair open in the wire between the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the ABS/TCS control uni t .B

5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.

(cont'd)

19-57

ABS/TCS Components



7. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and body ground.



1 2

16 1 /

/ 5 | 6 7 | / |11|12|13|14| / |

/ 19 20 21 22 / /





8. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit 24P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 16.



1 ?

16 1 /

/ | 5 | 6 7 8 / | / | 11 |12 |13 |14L / |

/ 19 20 21 22 / / M O T O R G N D ( B L K )




NO —Repair open in the wire between the pump motor and body ground (G203). •

9. Remove the pump motor relay, then connect relay terminals No. 4 and No. 5 together wi th a jumper wire.

Does the pump motor run?


NO —Replace the pump motor. •


11. Check for continuity between terminal B15 and body ground.


_ _ n _

1 2 / 4 / / 7 9

i — L

10 j — i / 13 14 15

I— 16 — i

P M R ( Y E L / R E D )



Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire between the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS/TCS control unit. •

N O - I f the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control uni t .H

19-58

A B S DTC S4; A B S Fail-safe Relay

1. Check the ABS F/S (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.

Is the fuse OK ?


NO —Replace the fuse, and recheck •


Does the fuse blow?

Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire between the ABS fail-safe relay, the TCS relay, the pump motor relay, and modulator uni t .H

NO Go to step 3.

3. Check the ABS fail-safe relay in the under-hood ABS relay box. Refer to the ' 9 8 - 0 1 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) (see page 22-52). The wire colors of the ABS fail-safe relay connector are WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK, and YEL/GRN.

Is the relay OK ?

YES —Leave the ABS fail-safe relay removed, and go to step 4.

NO Replace the ABS fail-safe relay •

4. Measure the voltage between the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.

A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R

+ B (WHT/GRN)

W i r e side of f ema le t e rm ina l s



NO -Repair open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the ABS fail-safe relay. I

5. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 to No. 2 wi th a jumper wire.


+ B ( W H T / G R N )

J U M P E R W I R E

S O L E N O I D ( B R N / B L K )



7. Measure the voltage between terminal No.2 and body ground.



1 2

16 1 /

/ V I 51 6 7 | 8 / | / |11 |12|13|14| / |

/ 1 9 20 21 2 2 / /




NO —Repair open in the wire between the ABS fail-safe relay and the modulator unit .H

8. Remove the jumper wire f rom the ABS fail-safe relay connector.

(cont'd)

19-59

ABS/TCS Components





1 ?

16 1 /

/ | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | / | / |11 |12 |13 |14 | / |

/ 19 20 21 2 2 / /



YES—Repair short to power in the wire between the ABS fail-safe relay, the TCS relay, the modulator unit, and the under-hood ABS relay box.




12. Measure the voltage between terminal A25 and body ground.


n n n n

1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

/ 15 16 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

F S R ( Y E L / G R N )



Y E S —Repair short to power in the wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS fail-safe relay. •

N O - G o to step 13. 13. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control

unit connector A (26P) terminal A25 and body ground.


n n n n

1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

/ 15 16 / 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

F S R ( Y E L / G R N )



Y E S —Repair short to body ground in the wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS fail-safe r e l ay . •


14. Check for continuity between the ABS fail-safe relay 4 P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.


G N D (BLK)




NO —Repair open in the wire between the ABS fail-safe relay and body ground, or a loose or poor connection at body ground (G202).H

19-60

15. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4 with a jumper wire.


G N D (BLK) mi

F S R ( Y E L / G R N )

J U M P E R W I R E

Wire s ide of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

16. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal A25 and body ground.


n n X n n

1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

15 16 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

F S R ( Y E L / G R N )

Wi re s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s


Y E S —If the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control unit.H

NO—Repair open in the wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS fail-safe relay. •

A B S D T C 61, 62: Ignition Voltage

1. Clearthe DTC.




NO The system is OK at this time. H

3. Verify the DTC.

Is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?

Y E S —Check the charging system. H

NO —Perform the appropriate troubleshooting for the code.H

19-61

ABS/TCS Components


ABS DTC 71: Different Diameter Tire

1. Clear the DTC.

2. Test-drive the vehicle.


YES —Make sure all four tires are the specified size and are inflated to proper specification. •

NO —Intermittent fai lure; the vehicle is OK at this t ime.B

A B S DTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU) Diagnosis, and ROM/RAM Diagnosis

1. Clear the DTC.



YES-Replace the ABS/TCS control unit. •

NO —Intermittent fai lure; the vehicle is OK at this t ime.H

19-62

7VBS

T C S DTC 24,25,26,27: T C S Solenoid

1. Verify the TCS DTC.

Is TCS DTC 28 indicated?

YES —Perform the appropriate troubleshooting for

DTC 28. •


2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and

the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P).

4. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) TCS solenoid circuit terminal and body ground (see table).

TCS DTC Appropriate Terminal 24: NOR A16 25: NCR A15 26; NOL A3 27: NCL A2


N O L ( G R Y )

N C L ( Y E L / G R N )

N C R ( R E D / G R N )

16 21 22 10 23

11 24

12 25

13 26

N O R (LT B L U )

X X f l W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s


Y E S —Repair short to body ground in the appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator unit. I



6. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid circuit terminal and body ground (see table).

TCS DTC Appropriate Terminal 24: NOR A16 25: NCR A15 26: NOL A3 27: NCL A2


NOL (GRY)

NCL (YEL/GRN)

n 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

/ 15 16 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

NCR (RED/ GRN)

ID ® ©(H;

NOR (LT BLU)



Y E S —Replace the modulator unit. B

NO - Go to step 7.


8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P connector TCS solenoid circuit terminals to body ground wi th jumper wires (see table).

TCS DTC Appropriate Terminal 24: NOR No 5 25: NCR No. 6 26: NOL No. 8 27: NCL No. 7


NCR (RED/GRN) NCL (YEL/GRN)

NOR (LT BLU)

1 ?

1 6 1 /

1 NOL (GRY)

1 / 1 / 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 /

M11|12|13114|7T

/1191201211221 /17 JUMPER WIRE


(cont'd)

19-63

ABS/TCS Components


9. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/ TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid circuit terminal and body ground (see table).

TCS DTC Appropr iate Terminal 24: NOR A16 25: NCR A15 26: NOL A3 27: NCL A2


N O L ( G R Y )

N C L ( Y E L / G R N )

N C R ( R E D / G R N )

16 20 21 22 10 23

11 24

12 25

13 26

N O R (LT B L U )

(a) (p) (oxo) W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

12. Remove the TCS relay, and connect the TCS relay 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.

NOTE: Wire colors of TCS relay 4P connector; BLU, RED/BLU, BRN/BLK, GRN/YEL.

T C S R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R

TCS S O L E N O I D ( R E D / B L U )

J U M P E R W I R E




NO —Repair open in the appropriate TCS solenoid circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator uni t .H

10. Remove the jumper wires f rom the modulator unit 24P connector.


19-64

13. Check the resistance between the appropriate ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal and body ground (see table). NOR, NOL, NCR, NCL: 8 - 1 0 0 (at 20°C, 68°F)



N O L ( G R Y )

N C L ( Y E L / G R N )

15 N C R ( R E D / G R N )

16 20 21 22 10 23

11 24

12 25

13 26

N O R (LT B L U )


Is there resistance OK?


NO —Replace the modulator uni t .H

14. Disconnect the modulator unit connector, and remove the jumper wire f rom the TCS relay 4P connector terminal.

15. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal and each of the other terminals listed (see table).


ABS Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit Connector C (12P) Terminal

FR-IN C11 FR-OUT C6 FL-IN C9 FL-OUT C4 RR-IN C8 RR-OUT C3 RL-IN C10 RL-OUT C5


YEL /GRN GRY

_ n _ 1 1

_n_ 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10

_n_ 11 12

_ n _ 13

/ 15 16 u-ur / 18 / 20 21 22 23 24

H U T 25 26

RED/GRN LT BLU


A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12P)

Y E L / B L U

YEL/WHT / / Y E L / G R N / Y E L / B L K

7 2 3 4 5 6 I 7 8 9 10 11 12

7 / W RED/WHT / \ RED/BLK

RED/BLU RED/GRN



Y E S - R e p a i r short in the appropriate wires between the ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator unit .H


(cont'd)

19-65

ABS/TCS Components



17. Check for continuity between the appropriate A B S / TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit terminals (see table).


ABS Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit Connector C (12P) Terminal

FR-IN C11 FR-OUT C6 FL-IN C9 FL-OUT C4 RR-IN C8 RR-OUT C3 RL-IN C10 RL-OUT C5

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (26P)

Y E L / G R N G R Y

in 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10

_ n _

11 12 13

/ 15 16 i—j - j 18 / 20 21 2223 24 25 26

R E D / G R N LT B L U

Wi re s ide of f e m a l e t e rm ina l s

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R C (12P)

Y E L / B L U

Y E L / W H T / /YEL/GRN

/ Y E L / B L K U Z / ' 7 2 3 4 5 .._n_i 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

R E D / W H T / \ R E D / B L K

R E D / B L U R E D / G R N

Wi re s ide of f ema le t e rm ina l s

Is there less than 3Q?

Y E S - Replace the modulator uni t .B

N O - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. •

T C S D T C 28: T C S Relay

1. Check the BSC F/S (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.

Is the fuse OK ?


NO —Replace the fuse, and recheck. •


Does the fuse blow?

Y E S — Repair short to body ground in the wire between the TCS relay and the modulator u n i t s


3. Check the TCS relay in the under-hood ABS relay box (see page 22-31). The wire colors of the TCS relay 4P connector are BLU, RED/BLU, BRN/BLK, and GRN/YEL.

Is the relay OK ?

Y E S — Leave the TCS relay removed, and go to step 4.

NO-Rep lace the TCS relay •

4. Measure the voltage between the TCS relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.


B (BLU)




NO —Repair open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the TCS relay. •

19-66

5. Connect the TCS relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 to No. 2 with a jumper wire.


+ B ( B L U )

J U M P E R W I R E

T C S S O L E N O I D ( R E D / B L U )



7. Measure the voltage between terminal No.17 and body ground.

M O D U L A T O R U N I T 24P C O N N E C T O R

M X l 5 l 6 l 7 l 8 l X l M1111211311417T"

1 9 l 2 0 i 2 l i 2 2 l / l / T C S S O L E N O I D ( R E D / B L U )



Y E S Go to step 8.

NO —Repair open in the wire between the TCS relay and the modulator unit. H

Remove the jumper wire f rom the TCS relay 4P connector.



1 ?

16 1 /

/ | 5 | 6 |/111|12|13|14|/1

/ 19 20 21 22 / / T C S S O L E N O I D ( R E D / B L U )



Y E S Repair short to power in the wire between the TCS relay and the modulator uni t .H

N O - Go to step 10.


11. Measure the voltage between terminal B13 and body ground.


1 2 / 4 / 7 / 9 10 11 13 14 15 16

T C S R ( G R N / Y E L )



YES Repair short to power in the wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the TCS relay. H


(cont'd)

19-67

ABS/TCS Components


12. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P) terminal B13 and body ground.


- T L .

1 2 / - J U S

4 / 7 7 9

1 — i

10 —

11 13 14 15 I !

16 J — 1




YES —Repair short to body ground in the wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and the TCS r e l a y . •



14. Remove the ABS fail-safe relay. The wire colors of ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector are WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK, YEL/GRN.

15. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2 wi th a jumper wire.

A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4 P C O N N E C T O R

+ B ( W H T / G R N )

J U M P E R W I R E

S O L E N O I D (BRN/BLK)

16. Measure the voltage between the TCS relay 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.






NO —Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe relay and the TCS relay. •

17. Connect the TCS relay 4P connector No. 3 and No. 4 wi th a jumper wire.

NOTE: Make sure the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P) is disconnected.




J U M P E R W I R E



19-68

ABS



1 2 / 4 / / 9 10 11 13 14 15 16




Y E S - I f the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control u n i t s

NO—Repair open in the wire between the TCS relay and the ABS/TCS control uni t .B

TCS DTC 31: Engine Retard C o m m a n d (PFINH) signal

NOTE: If the MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot the PGM-FI or ABS first.

1. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P) and the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P).

2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector A (32P) terminal A13 and body ground.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

P F I N H ( B L U )



YES —Repair short to body ground in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control uni t .B

N O G o to step 3.

3. Connect the PCM connector A (32P).


(cont'd)

19-69

ABS/TCS Components


5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A (32P) terminal A13 and body ground.

NOTE; Use the 10 V range or similar range in an analog tester.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

P F I N H (BLU)


5 V

A p p r o x . 2 . 5 V -

OV — '



NO - Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. •

6. Wi th an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar range, measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P) terminal B10 and body ground.


1 2 / 4 / 7 Y 9

i — | 10

r -11 13 14 15 16

P F I N H ( B L U )


5 V

A p p r o x . 2 . 5 V -

OV


YES-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. •

NO —Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit .H

19-70

T C S DTC 32; Engine speed (NEP) Signal

NOTE; If the MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot the PGM-FI or ABS first.

1. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P) and ABS/ TCS control unit connector B (16P).



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 2 9 30 31 32

N E P ( B L U )



Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit.

NO —Go to step 3.


4. Start the engine, warm it up to normal operating temperature, and let it idle.

5. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar range, measure the voltage between the PCM connector A (32P) terminal A19 and body ground.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 2 9 30 31 32

N E P ( B L U )


1 2 V | j ,—

A p p r o x . 6 V

OV — J I



NO —Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.•

(cont'd)

19-71

ABS/TCS Components


6. With the engine still idl ing, measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P) terminal B11 and body ground wi th the analog voltmeter again.


1 2 / 4 / 7 7 9

i — . 10

j — 1

11 13 14 15 16

N E P ( B L U )


12V

A p p r o x . 6 V -

OV


YES The system is OK at this t ime. If the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control uni t .H

N O - Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control uni t .H

T C S D T C 34: Reference Voltage (VREF) Signal

NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot the PGM-FI or the ABS the first.




V R E F ( O R N / G R N )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

(8) W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s


YES-Repa i r short to body ground in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit .H




19-72

5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A (32P) terminal A7 and body ground.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32




NO—Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. •

6. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control unit connector B(16P) terminal B2 and body ground.



1 2 / 4 / / 9 10 11 13 14 15 16



YES —The system is OK at this t ime. If the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control unit. •

NO — Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit H

TCS DTC 36: Throttle Position Sensor Output (THLOUT) Signal

NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot the PGM-FI or the ABS first.

1. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P) and the ABS/TCS control unit connector B(16P).

2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector A (32P) terminal A31 and body gound.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

T H L O U T ( Y E L / G R N )



YES —Repair short to body ground in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit.




(cont'd)

19-73

ABS/TCS Components


5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A (32P) terminal A31 and body ground wi th the throttle ful ly opened and ful ly closed. There should be a smooth transit ion f rom approx. 0.5 V and 4.5 V.


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32



Is the voltage as specified?

Y E S Go to step 6.

NO - Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. •

6. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P) terminal B9 and body ground wi th the throttle ful ly closed.


1 2 / 4 / 7 9 10 11 13 14 15 i — 16

j — 1




Y E S —The system is OK at this t ime. If the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control uni t .B

NO - Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control un i t .B

T C S DTC 61: A /T Shift Position (ATSFTP) Signal




P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P) A T S F T P (LT G R N )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32



Y E S - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control uni t .B

NO Go to step 3.


4. Shift the transmission to SB position.


19-74

6. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar range, measure the voltage between the PCM connector A (32P) terminal A 1 1 and body ground.

PCM C O N N E C T O R A (32P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 A T S F T P ( Y E L / G R N )


5 V -A p p r o x . 4 V -

OV



NO —Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. H

7. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar range, measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P) terminal B7 and body ground.


1 2 / 4 / / 9 10 11 13 14 15 16

A T S F T P (LT G R N )


5 V A p p r o x . 4 V -

OV — 1


Y E S Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. •

NO Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit .H

TCS DTC 81: Continuous T C S Operation


1. Clear the DTC.


Does the TCS indicator come on, and is DTC 81 indicated?

Y E S - R e p l a c e the ABS/TCS control un i t .H

NO — Intermittent fai lure; the vehicle is OK at this t ime.H

19-75

ABS/TCS Components

ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), and watch the ABS indicator.


YES —If the ABS indicator comes on and goes off, it's OK. If the ABS indicator stays on, turn the ignit ion switch OFF, and go to step 13.


2. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF then ON (II) again.



NO —Repair open in the indicator power source circuit. • • Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse. • Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT



4 . Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P).



Y E S - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. •

N O G o to step 6.

6. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge assembly.

Is the bulb OK?


NO —Replace the ABS indicator bu lb .B


8. Disconnect the gauge assembly connector C (16P).

9. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly connector C (16P) terminal C10 and body ground.

GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C (16P)

1 2 3 x 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111X112 / 14 15 16

ABS (BLU/WHT)



Y E S —Repair short to body ground in the wire between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS control un i t .B

N O G o to step 10.

10. Connect the gauge assembly connector C (16P).

11. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (22P) terminal B16 to body ground wi th a jumper wire.

GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (22P)

1 2 / 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 / / / 16|XI/ 18 19 20 21 22

JUMPER WIRE

GND (BLK)




Y E S —Repair open in the wire between the gauge assembly and body ground (G501). fl

NO —Replace the gauge assembly. •

19-76

13. Check the R/C MIRROR (7,5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.

Is the fuse OK?


NO —Replace the fuse, and recheck. •

14. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal A1 to body ground wi th a jumper wire.

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L C O N N E C T O R A (26P)

J U M P E R WIRE

~] GND1 (BLK)

16 20 22

10

23 24

12

25

13

26




Y E S —Repair open in the wire between the ABS/ TCS control unit and body ground (G403) •


16. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal A13 and body ground.


IG2 ( Y E L / B L K ) n n n rt 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

/ 15 16 18 / 20 21 22 23 24 L~u- j

25 26

W i r e s ide of f ema le t e r m i n a l s



NO —Repair open in the wire between the R/C MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse and the ABS/TCS control unit .H

17. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal A4 to body ground with a jumper wire.


J U M P E R W I R E A B S ( B L U / W H T )

n n I _ _ n n

1 2 3 4 6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13

/ 15 16 18 / 20 21 22 23 24 25 26



Y E S - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. •

NO Go to step 18.

18. Connect the gauge assembly connector C (16P) terminal C10 to body ground wi th a jumper wire.

G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C O N N E C T O R C (16P)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 12 / 14 15 16

J U M P E R W I R E

A B S ( B L U / W H T )



Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS control unit. •

NO —Replace the gauge assembly. •

19-77

ABS/TCS Components

TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Start the engine, and watch the TCS indicator.

Does the TCS indicator come on?

Y E S - I f the TCS indicator comes on and goes off, It's OK. If the TCS indicator stays on, go to step 7.


2. Turn the engine OFF, then restart it again.



NO -Rep a i r open in the indicator power source circuit. • • Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse. • Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT


3. Turn the engine OFF, and check the TCS indicator bulb in the gauge assembly.

Is the bulb OK?


NO-Rep lace the TCS indicator bulb. •

4. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (22P) terminal B18 and body ground wi th a jumper wire. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II).

G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C O N N E C T O R B (22P)

1 2 / 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 / / / 16 X i X 18 19 20 21 22

J U M P E R W I R E

T C S ( R E D / W H T )




NO -Rep lace the gauge assembly. •

5. Remove the jumper wire at the gauge assembly, and connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P) terminal B16 and body ground wi th a jumper wire.


1 2 / 4 X 7 9

i — l

10 j —

11 13 14 15 • i

16 i — 1

J U M P E R W I R E

T C S 2 ( R E D / W H T )




NO -Repa i r open in the wire between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS control uni t .H

6. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal C2 and body ground wi th a jumper wire.


L G ( B R N / B L K )

J U M P E R W I R E

/ 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12



Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the ABS/ TCS control unit and body ground (G10D.B

N O - C h e c k f o r loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. •

19-78

7, Check the R/C MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.

Is the fuse OK ?


NO -Rep lace the fuse, and recheck. •

8. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal A13 and body ground.



10. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) and connector B (16P).

11. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Does the TCS indicator go off?

YES-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. •

NO —Repair short to body ground in the wire between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS control un i t .B

IG2 ( Y E L / B L K )

n n " X 1

1 2 3 4 6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13

/ 15 16 18 / 20 21 22 23 24 25 26




NO —Repair open in the wire between the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and ABS/TCS control uni t .B

19-79

ABS/TCS Components

Modulator Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE: • Do not spill brake f luid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake f luid gets on the paint, wash it off

immediately wi th water. • Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines dur ing removal and installation. • To prevent the brake f lu id f rom f lowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints wi th a shop towel or equivalent

material.

Removal

1. Push the modulator unit connector lock (C), and turn the connector lever (D).

2. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (B).

3. Disconnect the brake pipes, then remove the modulator unit (A).

Installation

1. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal.

2. Bleed the brake system, starting wi th the front wheels.

3. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator and the TCS indicator go off.

4. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator and the TCS indicator do not come on.

19-80

A B S

TCS Switch Test

1 . Remove the cruise control/TCS switch (A) from the switch panel.

2. Check for continuity between terminal No. 5 and No. 6. There should be continuity when the TCS switch is pushed.

C R U I S E C O N T R O L / T C S S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R

1 2 / 4

u — 5 6 7 4

I G 2 ( B L K / Y E L )

T C S S W ( O R N / W H T )


19-81

ABS/TCS Components

ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement

1. Remove the passenger's side kick panel.

2. Remove the ABS/TCS control unit (A).

3. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connectors <B).

4. install the ABS/TCS control unit in the reverse order of removal.

Wheel Sensor Inspection

1. Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or damaged teeth.

2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and pulser all the way around whi le rotating the pulser. Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 m m (0.04 in), check for a bent suspension arm.

Standard: Front: 0.4- 1.05 m m (0.02 - 0.04 in) Rear: 0.19 1.14 m m (0.01 0.05 in)

Front

Rear

t

19-82

Wheel Sensor Replacement

Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting wires.

Front

Rear

19-83

S U P P L E M E N T A L R E S T R A I N T S Y S T E M (SRS) (If body maintenance is required)

The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS includes a driver 's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs, Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in the '98-01 Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) Service Manual, P/N 61S8008. Items marked wi th an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items wi l l require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be done by and authorized Honda dealer.

• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal coll ision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.



• SRS electrical wi r ing harnesses are indicated wi th yel low color coding. Related components are located in the steering column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats ('00-01 models) and around the f loor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.

Body

Seats Front Seat Removal and Installation

-4-way Power-Sedan 20-2 Front Seat D isassembly /Reassembly

-4-way Power-Sedan 20-3 Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly

-4-way Power-Sedan 20-4 Front Seat Wire Harness Installation

-4-way Power-Sedan 20-5

Bumper Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement 20-6

Hood Replacement 20-7

Exterior Trim Emblem Replacement-Coupe 20-8 Emblem Replacement-Sedan 20-8

Frame Sub-frame Replacement 20-9 Frame Repair Chart 20-12

NOTE: Refer to the 1998-2001 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) for the items not shown in this section.

Outline of V6 Model Changes 1998 model: • The Accord sedan and coupe V6 model has been added.

- The V6 emblem has been added. - The hood replacement procedure is different. - The sub-frames are different. - The frame repair chart is different.

2001 model: • The fol lowing item has been added on Sedan or Coupe V6 model.

- The passenger's 4 way power seat (sedan) -~ The rear bumper spoiler (coupe)

Seats

Front Seat Removal/Installation - 4-1

'01 model; SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-28).


2. Disconnect the negative cable f rom the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.

3. Remove the seat track end covers (A), and remove the bolts securing the front seat (B). When prying wi th a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it wi th protective tape to prevent damage. Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat covers.

F a s t e n e r L o c a t i o n s

• : Bol t , 4 > : Cl ip , 1

ay Power - Sedan

4. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect and detach the seat harness connector (A) and harness clip (B).

A B B

To body. To body.

5. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the front seat through the front door opening.

6. Install the front seat in the reverse order of removal, and note these item:

• Replace the damaged track and cover clip. • Make sure the seat harness connector is plugged

in properly. • Enter the anti-there code for the radio, then enter

the customer's radio station presets.

20-2

Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - 4-Way Power - Sedan

'01 model: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, and precautions and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-28).

Disassembly the front sent as shown. Reassemble the seat in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:

Route the seat wire harness correctly (see page 20-5). Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly. Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track. To prevent wrinkles in the seat-back cover, stretch the material evenly over the pad. If the seat-back pad or the OPDS unit is replaced, reinitialize the OPDS unit. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-322).

BACK PANEL

HOOKS

HEADREST

SEAT-BACK

PIVOT WASHER

PIVOT N U T 8 x 1.25 m m 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )

W I R E TIE

SEAT CUSHION

FRONTCOVER

CENTER COVER

RECLINE COVER 10 x 1.25 m m 47 N m (4.8 k g f m , 35 I b f f t )

SEAT LINKAGE

10 x 1.25 m m 47 N m (4.8 k g f m , 35 I b f f t )

CAPS SWITCH K N O B S

20-3

Seats

Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - 4-Way Power - Sedan

'01 model :

NOTE: • Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• To remove the slide motor and slide gearbox, slide the f ront seat backward fully.

Disassemble the linkage as shown.

Reassemble the linkage in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items: • Before install ing the slide motor and slide gearbox, al ign port ion (A) as shown to align both slide gearbox positions. • Apply mult ipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot port ions of the linkage. • Check operation of the recline and slide adjusters.

3.7 N-m (0.38 k g f m , 2.7 Ibf f t ) L E F T S L I D E G E A R B O X

20-4

Front Seat Wire Harness Installation - 4-Way Power - Sedan

'01 model :

When assembling the front seat, make sure the seat belt switch harness (A), seat harness (B), seat heater harnesses (C), side airbag harness (D), OPDS unit harness (E), connectors (F), clips (G) and wire tie (H) are fastened correctly.

20-5

Bumpers

Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement - Coupe

'01 model :

NOTE: Take care not to scratch the rear bumper. Remove the rear bumper spoiler as shown.

Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.


• : Bo l t , 2 [ > : C l i p , 2

20-6

Hood

Replacement

1. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (A) f rom the windshield washer nozzles (B), and release the windshield washer tube f rom the clips (C).

C B

2. With a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the clips (A) out of the support struts (B) on each hood side, then release both support struts f rom the pivot bolts (C) with the help of an assistant. Do not remove the clips f rom the support struts. If necessary, release the support strut f rom the pivot bolt on the body, then remove the support strut.


• : Bo l t , 4 6 x 1.0 m m |

fntaED 9.8 N-m (1.0 kg f -m, | ^ 7.2 Ibff t ) I

8 x 1.25 m m 22 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )

3. With the help of an assistant, remove the bolts, then remove the hood (D). Take care not to damage the hood and body.

4. Install the hood in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:

• Before reattaching the support struts, adjust the hood alignment.

• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely.

• Make sure the windshield washer tubes are connected properly.

• When reattaching the support struts, set the clips (A) to the original posit ion, then attach the support struts (B) on the pivot bolts (C) by pushing the support strut.

\

B

20-7

Exterior Trim

Emblem Replacement - Coupe Emblem Replacement - Sedan

Apply the emblem where shown.

NOTE: • Before applying, clean the rear bumper surface w i th a

sponge dampened in alcohol. • After cleaning, keep oi l , grease and water f rom

getting on the surface.

Attachment Point (Reference):

V 6 E M B L E M

A C C O R D E M B L E M

T R U N K LID

Uni t : m m (in.!

A C C O R D E M B L E M / 2 0

r V / (o.79tN?

13(0 .51 ) 10 (0.39)

V 6 E M B L E M

E d g e o f t h e t r u n k l i d .

Apply the emblem where shown.

NOTE: • Before applying, clean the rear bumper surface wi th a

sponge dampened in alcohol. • After cleaning, keep oi l , grease and water f rom

getting on the surface.

Attachment Point (Reference):

V 6 E M B L E M

Uni t : m m (in.)

E d g e o f t h e rear b u m p e r .

E d g e o f t h e rea r b u m p e r .

20-8

Frame

Sob-frame Replacement

After loosening the sub-frame mounting bolts, be sure to replace them wi th new ones.

REAR B E A M

(cont'd)

20-9

Frame

Sub-frame Replacement (cont'd)

After loosening the sub-frame mount ing bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.

S U B - F R A M E

20-10

Frame

Frame Repair Chart

Top V iew

U n i t ; m m ( i n . ) 0 : I n n e r d i a m e t e r

POINT g POINT h

POINT e

POINT I

< U J Z

> •

20-12

POINT rt

POINT w

2145 (84.45) 2236 (88.03)

2365 (93.11) 2750 (108.3)

2899 (114.1) 297TTlT7¥)

2998 (118.0) 3008 (118.4)

3200 (126.0) 3622 (142.6)

(cont'd)

20-13

Frame

Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)

Side V iew

0 1 1 . 5 (0.45)

SECTION BB SECTION AA

20-14

SECTION DD

S U P P L E M E N T A L R E S T R A I N T S Y S T E M ( S R S ) (If H V A C maintenance is required)

The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS Includes a driver's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in the '98-01 Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) Service Manual, P/N 61S8008. Items marked wi th an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items wi l l require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be done by and authorized Honda dealer.

• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal coll ision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.



• SRS electrical wi r ing harnesses are indicated wi th yel low color coding. Related components are located in the steering column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats ('00-01 models) and around the f loor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.

HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)

Air Conditioning Special Tools 21-2 Component Location

Index 21-3 A / C Refrigerant Oil

Replacement 21-6 Symptom Troubleshooting

Index 21-7 Circuit Diagram .................... 21-8 Condenser Fan Circuit

Troubleshooting ............... 21-10 Radiator and Condenser Fans

Common Circuit Troubleshooting 21-12

Heater Valve Cable Adjustment 21-13

Compressor Replacement ('98-00 model) 21-14

Compressor Clutch Check ('98-00 model) 21-16

Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00 model) 21-17

Compressor Relief Valve Replacement ('98-00 model) 21-18

Compressor Replacement ('01 model) 21-19

Compressor Clutch Check ('01 model) 21-21

Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('01 model) 21-22

Compressor Relief Valve Replacement ('01 model) ........................ 21-23

Condenser Replacement ..... 21-24

Climate Control Component Location

Index 21- 26 General Troubleshooting

21- 26

Information 21- 28 DTC Troubleshooting

Index 21- 29 Symptom Troubleshooting

21- 29

Index 21--30 System Description 21--31 Circuit Diagram 21--32 DTC Troubleshooting 21--34 ECT Sensor Circuit

Troubleshooting 21--50 Climate Control Power and

Ground Circuits Troubleshooting 21 -51

Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting ... 21 -52

A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting 21 -53

In-car Temperature Sensor Replacement and Test 21 -55

Outside Air Temperature Sensor Replacement

21 -56 Sunlight Sensor Replacement

and Test 21 -57 Power Transistor Test 21 -58 Climate Control Unit Remova I

and Installation 21 -58 Climate Control Unit

Disassembly and Reassembly 21 -59

Refer to the 1998-2001 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) for items not shown in this section.


The air condit ioning and climate control has been changed to suit the Accord V6.

HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)

Special Tools

Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty © 07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set 2

®

I

21-2

Air Conditioning i n Component Location Index

/ E V A P O R A T O R / R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 21-46

/ in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

E V A P O R A T O R C O M P O N E N T S R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-47 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

\ C O N D E N S E R I \ R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -24

I R E C E I V E R / D R Y E R

C O M P R E S S O R ( '98-00 m o d e l s ) R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -14 C l u t c h C h e c k , p a g e 21 -16 C l u t c h O v e r h a u l , p a g e 21-17 Re l i e f V a l v e R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -18 C O M P R E S S O R ( '01 m o d e l ) R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-19 C l u t c h C h e c k , p a g e 21 -21 C l u t c h O v e r h a u l , p a g e 21-22 Re l i e f V a l v e R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -23

(cont'd)

21-3

Air Conditioning


A / C P R E S S U R E S W I T C H

B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y , R A D I A T O R F A N R E L A Y , C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y , C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H R E L A Y ( L o c a t e d in the u n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y box) T e s t , p a g e 22-52 i n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

21-4

f H E A T E R V A L V E C A B L E A d j u s t m e n t , page 21-13

H E A T E R U N I T / C O R E R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-28 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

E V A P O R A T O R m o v a l and Insta l la t ion, page 21-46 t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

E V A P O R A T O R C O M P O N E N T S R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-47 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R E C I R C U L A T I O N C O N T R O L M O T O R T e s t , page 21-22 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l


B L O W E R U N I T R e m o v a l a n d Insta l lat ion, page 21-26 in the '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

B L O W E R U N I T C O M P O N E N T S R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-27 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

B L O W E R R E S I S T O R

M O D E C O N T R O L M O T O R Tes t , p a g e 21-21 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a

R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-21 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

E V A P O R A T O R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R T e s t , p a g e 21 -23 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

D U S T A N D P O L L E N F I L T E R R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 2 1 - 2 5 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

H E A T E R C O N T R O L P A N E L R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 21 -24 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

D i s a s s e m b l y a n d R e a s s e m b l y , p a g e 2 1 - 2 4 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

H E A T E R F A N S W I T C H T e s t , p a g e 21 -23 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

AIR M I X C O N T R O L M O T O R T e s t , p a g e 21 -20 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-20 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

21

Air Conditioning

A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement

© D i s c h a r g e h o s e to t h e c o m p r e s s o r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibff t ) CO D i s c h a r g e h o s e to t h e c o n d e n s e r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibff t ) (D C o n d e n s e r l ine t o t h e c o n d e n s e r (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibfft) ® C o n d e n s e r l ine t o t h e r e c e i v e r / d r y e r : 9.8 N m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibff t ) ® R e c e i v e r l ine to t h e r e c e i v e r / d r y e r : 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibf f t ) (D R e c e i v e r l ine to t h e e v a p o r a t o r : 13 N-m (1.3 kgf -m, 9.4 Ibff t ) ( 7 ) S u c t i o n h o s e to t h e e v a p o r a t o r : 31 N-m (3.2 kgf -m, 23 Ibff t ) (D S u c t i o n h o s e to t h e c o m p r e s s o r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf -m, 7.2 Ibfft) (D C o m p r e s s o r t o c o m p r e s s o r b r a c k e t (8 x 1.25 m m ) : 22 N-m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibff t ) (3D C o m p r e s s o r b r a c k e t to e n g i n e b lock (10 x 1.25 m m ) : 44 N-m (4.5 kgf -m, 33 Ibff t )

21-6


Symptom Diagnostic procedure | Also check for Recirculation control doors do not change between Fresh and Recirculate.

Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-14)

• Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box

• Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors

Blower motor runs, but one or more speeds are inoperative.

Blower Motor Circuit Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-15)

• Blown fuse No. 56 (40A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box

• Poor ground at G202 and G401 • Cleanliness and tightness of all

connectors Blower motor does not run at all. Blower Motor Circuit

Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-15)



connectors Condenser fan does not run at all (but radiator fan runs wi th the A/C on).

Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 21-10)


• Poor ground at G201 • Cleanliness and tightness of all

connectors Both fans do not run wi th the A/C on.

Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 21-12)

• Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No. 58 (20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box


connectors Compressor clutch does not engage.

Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-39)



A/C system does not come on (both fans and compressor).

A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-41)


Both heater and A/C do not work.

Heater Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-19)

• Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box, No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box


connectors

21-7

Air Conditioning

Circuit Diagram


UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH

No.41 (100A)

No.42 (50A)

No.54 (40A)

No.6 (15A)

No. 13 (7.5 A)

PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

RADIATOR FAN RELAY

CONDENSER FAN RELAY

COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY

BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

GRN BLU/YEL RED

- GRN -

BLU/BLK GRN

RADIATOR XX FAN SWITCH A

/Closed : Above\ \199°F(93DC) /

RADIATOR FAN MOTOR A CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

BLK YEL/BLK

COMPRESSOR CLUTCH

X L

G202

FAN C (_ ^ t - H j 2 7 ) — - BLU/RED

A/C PRESSURE SWITCH

2 1

G201

BLK WHT/GRN

1 RADIATOR FAN

r SWITCH B I 2 /Closed: AboveN

l225°F (107°C)/

-LL

G101 G201

1

21-8

E

COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH TA ILL IGHT RELAY

M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L UNIT < | R E D (DRIVER'S)

H E A T E R C O N T R O L P A N E L

Air Conditioning

Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 58 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.

Are the fuses OK ?


NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. •

2. Remove the condenser fan relay f rom the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-52).

is the relay OK ?


NO - Replace the condenser fan relay. •

3. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.

C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4 P S O C K E T

1

2

4 3



NO —Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. I

4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.

C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4 P S O C K E T

J U M P E R W I R E

B L U / Y E L

Does the condenser fan run?


N O - Go to step 9.




C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T

1 2

4 3

Y E L / W H T


Y E S —Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.


21-10

8. Measure the voltage between the No. 3 terminal of the radiator fan control module 8P connector and body ground with the 8P connector connected.

R A D I A T O R F A N C O N T R O L M O D U L E 8 P C O N N E C T O R


, I Y E L / W H T

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8


Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the condenser fan relay and the radiator fan control module.H

NO —Perform the radiator fan control module input tests (see page 10-20). •


10. Disconnect the condenser fan 2P connector.

11. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of the condenser fan relay 4P socket and the No. 2 terminal of the condenser fan 2P connector.

12. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of the condenser fan 2P connector and body ground.

C O N D E N S E R F A N 2 P C O N N E C T O R



YES —Replace the condenser fan motor. •

NO —Check for an open in the wire between the condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G201. •

C O N D E N S E R FAN R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T

B L U / Y E L 1

' B L U / Y E L

C O N D E N S E R FAN 2P C O N N E C T O R W i r e s ide of f ema le t e rm ina l s



NO —Repair open in the wire between the condenser fan relay and the condenser fan .B

21-11

Air Conditioning

Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 57 (20 A) and No. 58 (20 A) fuses in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.

Are the fuses OK ?


NO — Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. •

2. Remove the condenser fan relay f rom the under-hood fuse/relay box.



C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T

Y E L / W H T



NO —Perform the radiator fan control module input tests (see page 10-20). •


6. Reinstall the condenser fan relay.

7. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.


9. Using a Backprobe Set, measure the voltage between the No. 20 terminal of the PCM connector A (32P) and body ground wi th the PCM connectors connected.



G R N

/ 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10

12 13 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 32


YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the PCM connector A(32P). If the connections are good, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM.B

NO - Repair open in the wire between the radiator fan relay, the condenser fan relay and PCM. •

21-12

Heater Valve Cable Adjustment

1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the heater valve arm (C).

B

2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air mix control linkage (C).

D

3. Set the temperature control dial on MAX COOL (60°F or 18°C) with the ignition switch ON (II).

4. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix control linkage (C) as shown above. Hold the end of the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D), then snap the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).

jam 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)

to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable housing to take up any slack, then install the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).

B

21-13

Air Conditioning

Compressor Replacement ('98-00 model)

1. If the compressor is marginally operable, run the engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off.


3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

4. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ charging station, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-54).


6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from the condenser fan shroud (B), then disconnect the compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the condenser fan connector (C), then remove the wire harness clips (D) from the condenser fan shroud. Remove the cruise control actuator cable (E) from the clamp. Loosen the lower mounting bolt, then remove the upper mounting bolts and the condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan shroud.

6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibf f t )

-6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibf f t )

Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the suction (A) and discharge (B) lines from the compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination.

6 x 1 . 0 m m 9.8 N m (1.0 kg f -m, 7.2 Ibff t )

8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor. Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when removing the compressor.

8 x 1 . 2 5 m m 2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibff t )

21-14.

on 9. Remove the bolts, the suction service valve (A) and

the O-ring (B) from the compressor. 25 .5 N-m (2.6 kgf -m, 18.8 Ibff t )

10. If necessary, remove the mounting bolts and the compressor bracket.

10 x 1.25 m m 44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 Ibff t )

11. Install the compressor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:

• If you're installing a new compressor, you must calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be removed from it, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-32).

• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.

• Use refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for HFC-134a DENSO piston type compressor only.

• To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils.

• Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.

• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.

• Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when installing the compressor and the condenser fan shroud.

• Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-55).

• Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-56), and test its performance, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-44).

• Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets.

21-15

Air Conditioning

Compressor Clutch Check ('98-00 model)

1. Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch set (see page 21-17).

2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set wi th a new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag (see page 21-17).

4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not wi th in specifications, replace the field coil (see page 21-17).

Field Coil Resistance: 3 .4-3.8 ohms at 68°F (20°C)

3. Measure the clearance betweenn the pulley (A) and the pressure plate (B) w i th a dial indicator. Zero out the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the compressor clutch. Measure the movement of the pressure plate when the voltage is applied. If the clearance is not wi th in the specified l imits, the pressure plate must be reshimed (see page 21-17).

Clearance: 0.5 + 0.15 mm (0.020 + 0.006 in)

NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses: 0.1 m m , 0.3 m m and 0.5 m m .

21-16

Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00 model)

Special Tool Required A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, commercially available

1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure plate with a commercially available A/C clutch holder.

13.2 N-m (1.35 kg fm, 9.76 Ibfft)

2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B), taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs adjustment, increase or decrease the number and thickness of shims as nesessary, then reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its clearance (see page 21-16).

.A

B

3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley and compressor.

A

4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (B) with snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil (C). Be careful not to damage the field coil and compressor.

(cont'd)

21-17

Air Conditioning

Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00 model) (cont'd)

5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:

• Install the field coil with the wire side facing down, and align the boss on the field coil with the hole in the compressor.

• Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum solvent.

• Install new snap rings, note the installation direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the groove.

• Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled.

• Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be damaged by the pulley.

Compressor Relief Valve Replacement ('98-00 model)


2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug the opening to keep foreign matter from entering the system and the compressor oil from running out.

A 13.2 N m (1.35 k g f m , 9.76 Ibf ft)

B

3. Clean the mating surfaces.

4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing it.

5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief valve.

6. Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-55).

7. Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-56), and test its performance, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-44).

21-18

Compressor Replacement ('01 model)

1. If the compressor Is marginally operable, run the engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off.


3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

4. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ charging station, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-54).


6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from the condenser fan shroud (B), then disconnect the compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the condenser fan connector (C), then remove the wire harness clips (D) from the condenser fan shroud. Remove the cruise control actuator cable (E) from the clamp. Loosen the lower mounting bolt, then remove the upper mounting bolts and the condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan shroud.

7. Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the suction line (A) and discharge line (B) from the compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination.

8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor. Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when removing the compressor.

8 x 1.25 m m 2 2 N m (2.2 kgf -m, 16 Ibf f t )

(cont'd)

21-19

Air Conditioning

Compressor Replacement ('01 model) (cont'd)

9. If necessary, remove the mount ing bolts and the compressor brecket.

0

10 x 1.25 m m 44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)

10. Install the compressor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:

• If you're installing a new compressor, you must calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be removed f rom it, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-32).

• Replace the O-rings wi th new ones at each f i t t ing, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.

• Use refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for HFC-134a DENSO piston type compressor only.

• To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it wi th other refrigerant oils.

• Immediately after using the oi l , replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.


• Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when installing the compressor and the condenser fan shroud.

• Evacuate the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-55).

• Charge the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-56), and test its performance, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-44).

• Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets.

21-20

Compressor Clutch Check ('01 model)

1. Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch set (see page 21-22).

2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag (see page 21-22).

3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and the pressure plate (B) wi th a dial indicator. Zero out the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the compressor clutch. Measure the movement of the pressure plate when the voltage is applied. If the clearance is not within the specified l imits, the pressure plate must be reshimed (see page 21-22).

Clearance: 0.5 + 0.15 m m (0.020 + 0.006 in.)

NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses: 0.1 m m , 0.3 m m and 0.5 mm.

12V

4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not wi th in specifications, replace the field coll (see page 21-22).

Field Coil Resistance: 3.4~3.8 ohms at 68°F (20°C)

9 0

21-21

Air Conditioning

Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('01 model)

Special Tool Required A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, commercial ly available

1. Remove the center bolt (A) whi le holding the pressure plate wi th a commercial ly available A/C clutch holder (B).

A 13.2 N-m (1.35 kg f -m, 9 .76 Ibf f t )

Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B), taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs adjustment, increase or decrease the number and thickness of shims as nesessary, then reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its clearance (see page 21-21).

3. If you are replacing the field coi l , remove the snap ring (A) wi th snap ring pliers, then remove the pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley and compressor.

4. Remove the screw f rom the field coil ground terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (B) wi th snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil (C). Be careful not to damage the field coil and compressor.

21-22

5. Reassemble the clutch In the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:

• Install the field coil with the wire side facing down, and align the boss on the field coil with the hole in the compressor.

• Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum solvent.

• install new snap rings, note the installation direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the groove.

• Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled.

• Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be damaged by the pulley.

Compressor Relief Valve Replacement ('01 model)

1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ charging station, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-54).

2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug the opening to keep foreign matter from entering the system and the compressor oil from running out.

A 13.2 N m (1.35 kg f -m, 9 .76 Ibff t )

3. Clean the mating surfaces.

4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing it.

5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief valve.

6. Evacuate the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-55).

7. Charge the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-56), and test its performance, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-44).

21-23

Air Conditioning

Condenser Replacement


2. Remove the coolant reservoir, but do not disconnect the reservoir hose from the coolant reservoir and the radiator.

3. Remove the bolts, then remove the upper mount brackets from the radiator.

6 x 1.0 m m 9.8 N m {1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf f t )

4. Remove each bolt, then disconnect the discharge line (A) and condenser (B) line from the condenser. Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination.

5. Remove the bolts and the upper mount brackets (A), then remove the condenser (B) by lifting it up. Be careful not to damage the radiator and condenser fins when removing the condenser.

A

6. Install the condenser in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:

• If you're installing a new condenser, add refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8), refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-32).

• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.

• Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.


• Be careful not to damage the radiator and condenser fins when installing the condenser.

• Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-55).

• Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-56), and test its performance, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-44).

21-24

Climate Control



B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y , R A D I A T O R F A N R E L A Y , C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y , C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H R E L A Y (Located in the u n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y box) T e s t , p a g e 22-52 in the ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R A D I A T O R F A N

O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-56 T e s t , page 21-56

C O N D E N S E R F A N

21-26

E

H E A T E R V A L V E C A B L E A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 21-13

S U N L I G H T S E N S O R R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-57 T e s t , p a g e 21-57

H E A T E R U N I T / C O R E R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -28 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

B L O W E R U N I T R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

B L O W E R U N I T C O M P O N E N T S R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-27 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R E C I R C U L A T I O N C O N T R O L M O T O R T e s t , p a g e 21 -22 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -22 "n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

AIR M I X C O N T R O L M O T O R T e s t , p a g e 21 -20 i n t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -20 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

E V A P O R A T O R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R T e s t , p a g e 21 -23 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

I N - C A R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -55 Tes t , p a g e 21 -55

M O D E C O N T R O L M O T O R Tes t , p a g e 21 -21 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -21 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

B L O W E R M O T O R H IGH R E L A Y T e s t , p a g e 22-52 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R T e s t , p a g e 21 -58

D U S T A N D P O L L E N F I L T E R R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 2 1 - 2 5

n t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

E V A P O R A T O R R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 21 -46 "n t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

E V A P O R A T O R C O M P O N E N T S R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21 -47 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 21 -58 D i s a s s e m b l y a n d R e a s s e m b l y , p a g e 21 -59

21

Climate Control

General Troubleshooting Information

How to Retrieve a DTC

The climate control unit has a self-diagnosis funct ion.

Running the Self-diagnosis Function 1. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II).

T E M P E R A T U R E C O N T R O L D I A L T E M P E R A T U R E I N D I C A T O R

A / C O N Q H F U L L

A / C O F F U U A U T O MODE

f r AUTO O F F qf^l i

V J J \ I ) ) 1

A U T O B U T T O N O F F B U T T O N

2. Set the temperature control dial on MAX COOL, then slowly to MAX HOT.

3. After 1 minute, press the AUTO button and then the OFF button. Continue to hold both buttons down. If there is any abnormal i ty in the system when both buttons are pressed, the temperature indicator wi l l l ight up the segment (A to N) corresponding to the error. The temperature indicator wi l l then alternate every second between displaying " 8 8 " (all segments lit) and the error segment. If there is no abnormality, the segments wi l l not light up.

Resetting the Self-diagnosis Function Turning the ignit ion switch OFF wi l l cancel the self-diagnosis funct ion. After completing repair work, run the self-diagnosis function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.

21-28


To retrieve the DTC, you must run the self-diagnosis function (see page 21-28), In the case of mult iple problems, the respective indicator segments wi l l come on. If indicator segments A, C, E, G, I, and L come on at the same t ime, there may be an open in the common ground wire of the sensors.

TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

DTC (Temperature

Indicator segment)

Detection I tem Page

A An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-34) B A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-35) C An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-35) D A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-37) E An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-37) F A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-38) G An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-39) H A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-40) I An open in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-41) J A short in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-41) K A problem in the air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-42) L An open or short in the mode control motor circuit (see page 21-43) M A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor (see page 21-44) N A problem in the blower motor circuit (see page 21-45)

21-29

Climate Control


Symptom | Diagnostic procedure | Also check for The blower motor does not run immediately even through the engine is fully warmed up NOTE: The temperature control dial or button must be set between 64°F (18°C) and 90°F (32°C)

ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 21-50)


Recirculation control doors do not change between Fresh and Recirculate.

Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 21-52)

• Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box


Condenser fan does not run at all (but radiator fan runs with the A/C on).

Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 21-10)



connectors Both fans do not run wi th the A/C on.

Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 21-12)

• Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No. 58 (20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box


connectors Compressor clutch does not engage.

Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-39)



A/C system does not come on (both fans and compressor).

A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 21-53)

Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors

Both heater and A/C do not work.

Climate Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting (see page 21-51)

• Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box, No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box


connectors

21-30

System Description

Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs

CLIMATE C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R S

Wire s ide of f ema le te rmina ls

8P CONNECTOR 20P CONNECTOR

B

CXI

\ 3

4 r

5 1

6 r

7 1

8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

8P CONECTOR ( • on Circuit Diagram)

Cavity Wire color Signal 1 BLK/YEL IG2 (Power) INPUT 2 WHT/YEL + B (Power) INPUT 3 RED/WHT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR OUTPUT 4 BLU/ORN BLOWER MOTOR HIGH RELAY INPUT 5 ORN/BLK POWER TRANSISTOR OUTPUT 6 BLU/RED BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT 7 BRN/YEL REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY INPUT 8 BLK GROUND OUTPUT

OP CONECTOR (O on Circuit Diagram)

Cavity Wire color Signal 1 PNK/BLK AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT 2 YEL/GRN A/C PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT 3 GRN/RED FRESH ' INPUT 4 GRN/WHT RECIRCULATE INPUT 5 BLU/BLK MODE DEF OUTPUT 6 BLU/WHT MODE VENT OUTPUT 7 RED/YEL AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT 8 RED/BLK COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH or TAILLIGHT RELAY INPUT 9 RED/WHT AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT 10 RED MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DRIVER'S) OUTPUT 11 YEL/GRN SENSOR COMMON GROUND INPUT 12 WHT/RED r SUNLIGHT SENSOR OUTPUT 13 GRY AIR MIX POTENTIAL + 5 V OUTPUT 14 BRN EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT 15 BRN/WHT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT 16 YEL/RED IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT 17 BLU/GRN MODE 4 OUTPUT 18 LT GRN/BLK MODE 3 OUTPUT 19 GRN/YEL MODE 2 OUTPUT 20 GRN/BLK MODE 1 OUTPUT

21-31

Climate Control

Circuit Diagram



&

No.42 (50A)

No.41 (100 A)

No.57 (20A)

No.54 (40A)

No.56 (40A)

IGNITION SWITCH

/ I G I OX— BLK/YEL -WHT—+0 BAT )

\ I G 2 O y - • YEL —

No.6(15A)

No.3 (7.5A) BLK/YEL BLK/YEL

No.58 (20A)

RADIATOR FAN RELAY

CONDENSER FAN RELAY

COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY

BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

GRN BLU/YEL

- 6 R N -

BLU/BLK GRN

GRN

I -RED

RADIATOR FAN M O T O R

RADIATOR / f * FAN SWITCH A /Closed : Above* \199SF(93°C) /

CONDENSER FAN M O T O R

BLK YEL/BLK

COMPRESSOR CLUTCH

G202

A/C PRESSURE SWITCH

2 / C \ 1 > ] " @ BLU/RED -L^^L— YEL/GRN

ECTX — R E D / W H T

S G V S

PCM

G201 G101

t \ RADIATOR i ) FAN

SWITCH B I2 /Closed: Above\

.225°F(1075C)/

G201

BLK v " BLK

1 1 G401

21-32

Y E L / B L K

B L U / R E D

B L K / Y E L -^T}-VW^#4-

W H T / Y E L --{2}-VWLW-

A : IN -CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R

B : O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R

C : S U N L I G H T S E N S O R D : E V A P O R A T O R

T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R

Y E L / G R N •

S 5 V S - C O M

R E A R W I N D O W D E F O G G E R R E L A Y

>AMD-P AIR M X

> M - C O O L C O N T R O L 21 M O T O R

O M - H O T

C O M B I N A T I O N L I G H T S W I T C H T A I L L I G H T R E L A Y

M U L T I P L E X C O N T R O L UNIT ( D R I V E R ' S )

J M - V E N T

J M - D E F

!>MODE1

) M O D E 2

> M O D E 3

) M O D E 4

S-COM Q-

MODE CONTROL MOTOR

F R S R E C I R C U L A T I O N C O N T R O L

R E C M O T O R | G 2 ' B L K / Y E L

C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT

• : BP C O N N E C T O R

O : 2 0 P C O N N E C T O R G401

2

Climate Control

DTC Troubleshooting

DTC indicator light A: An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit

1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-55).

2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor. *Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling the sensor wi th a hair drier.

I N - C A R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R

h — i

1 2

U L

R E S I S T A N C E

50 68 86 1 0 4 ° F 10 20 30 40 °C

T E M P E R A T U R E

*ls the resistance within the specifications shown on the graph?


N O - Replace the in-car temperature sensor. •

3. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.

Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. 2 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P connector.

CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R

Wire s ide of f e m a l e te rm ina ls

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Y E L / R E D

Y E L / R E D

IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R

Wi re side of f e m a l e te rm ina ls



NO —Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the in-car temperature sensor B

5. Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. 1 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P connector.

CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R Wi re side of f ema le te rm ina l s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Y E L / G R N

I Y E L / G R N

IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R Wi re s ide of f e m a l e t e rm ina l s


Y E S —Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 20P connector and at the in-car temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ indication goes away, replace the original climate control uni t .B

NO —Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the in-car temperature sensor. •

21-34

DTC indicator light B: A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit

1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-55).

2. Test the in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-55).

Is the resistance within the specifications shown on the graph?


NO —Replace the in-car temperature sensor. •


4. Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of the climate control unit 20P connector and body ground.

C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 2 0 P C O N N E C T O R


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Y E L / R E D


YES — Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the in-car temperature sensor H

NO —Substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original climate control unit. 11

DTC indicator light C: An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit

1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-56).

2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor. *Dip the sensor in ice water the and measure the resistance. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance.

O U T S I D E A I R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R

R E S I S T A N C E kQ

14 32 50 68 86 104 °F - 1 0 0 10 20 30 40 °C


*ls the resistance within the specifications shown on the graph?


NO- Replace the outside air temperature senso r . •


(cont'd)

21-35

Climate Control


4. Check for continuity between the No. 15 terminal of the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. 1 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P connector.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

B R N / W H T

B R N / W H T

O U T S I D E A IR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R



YES Go to step 5.

NO —Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the outside air temperature sensor. •

5. Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. 2 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P connector.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Y E L / G R N

Y E L / G R N

O U T S I D E A IR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R



YES —Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 20P connector and at the outside air temperature sensor 2 P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ indication goes away, replace the original climate control uni t .B

NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the outside air temperature sensor. •

21-36

DTC indicator light D: A short In the outside air temperature sensor circuit

1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-56) .

2. Test the outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-56) .

Is the resistance within the specifications shown

on the graph?


NO —Replace the outside air temperature sensor, I I

3. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector. 4. Check for continuity between the No. 15 terminal of

the climate control unit 20P connector and body ground.

C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

I B R N / W H T

DTC indicator light E: An open in the sunlight sensor circuit

1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.


3. Check for continuity between the No. 12 terminal of the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. 1 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

W H T / R E D

W H T / R E D

1

S U N L I G H T S E N S O R 2 P C O N N E C T O R W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s


YES - G o t o step 4.

NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the sunlight sensor. •


Y E S R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the outside air temperature sensor. H

NO - Substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control uni t .H

(cont'd)

21-37

Climate Control


4. Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. 2 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2 P connector.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

i Y E L / G R N

Y E L / G R N

S U N L I G H T S E N S O R 2 P C O N N E C T O R W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s



NO - Repair open in the wire between the cl imate control unit and the outside air temperature sensor. •

5. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2 P connector.

6. Reconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.

7. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-57).

Is the sunlight sensor OK?

Y E S - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 20P connector and at the sunlight sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original climate control un i t .H

NO - Replace the sunlight sensor. •

D T C indicator light F: A short in the sunlight sensor circuit

1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.





1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

W H T / R E D


Y E S — Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the sunlight sensor. •

NO - Go to step 4 .

4. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.


6. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-57).

Is the sunlight sensor OK?

Y E S - Substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control uni t.H

NO -Replace the sunlight sensor.H

21-38

DTC Indicator light G: A n open in the evapora to r tempera tu re sensor c i rcu i t

1 . Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.

2 . Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the evaporator temperature sensor.

E V A P O R A T O R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R

T e r m i n a l s ide of m a l e t e r m i n a l s

1 2

u U

R E S I S T A N C E

40

3 0

20

10

5 0 1 0

6 8 8 6 °F 2 0 3 0 °C


Is the resistance within the specifications shown

on the graph?

Y E S - G o t o s tep3.

NO Replace the evaporator temperature sensor. •


4 . Check for continuity between the No. 1 4 terminal of the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. 2 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ^0

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

B R N

B R N

E V A P O R A T O R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R



Y E S - Goto step 5.

NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the evaporator temperature sensor •

(cont'd)

21-39

Climate Control


5, Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of the climate control unit 20P connector and the No. 1 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Y E L / G R N

Y E L / G R N

E V A P O R A T O R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2 P C O N N E C T O R



Y E S Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 20P connector and at the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ indication goes away, replace the original cl imate control un i t .B

NO -Repa i r open in the wire between the climate control unit and the evaporator temperature sensor. 11

DTC indicator light H: A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit

1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.

2. Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see step 2 on page 21-39).

Is the resistance within the specifications shown on the graph?

Y E S Go to step 3.

NO Replace the evaporator temperature sensor, m





1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

B R N


Y E S -Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the evaporator temperature sensor. •

NO -Subst i tute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control uni t .B

21-40

DTC Indicator light I: An open in the air mix control motor circuit

1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.


3. Check for continuity between fo l lowing terminals of the climate control unit 20P connector and the air mix control motor 7P connector.

20P: 7P: No. 1 No. 3 No. 7 No. 2 No. 9 No. 1 No. 11 No. 5 No.13 No. 7



P N K / B L K R E D / Y E L

Y E L / G R N

R E D / W H T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | 20

G R Y

P N K / B L K

R E D / W H T

Y E L / G R N G R Y

1 2 3 /

LO / 7

R E D / Y E L

A I R M I X C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R



YES- Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 20P connector and at the air mix control motor 7P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original climate control uni t .H

NO Repair any open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the air mix control motor. H

DTC indicator light J : A short in the air mix

control motor circuit

1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.

2. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector. 3. Check for continuity between body ground and the

climate control unit 20P connector terminals No. 1, 7, 9, 11 and 13 individually.



R E D / Y E L

P N K / B L K

Y E L / G R N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

R E D / W H T

G R Y


YES Repair any short to body ground in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the air mix control motor. H

NO Go to step 4.

(cont'd)

21-41

Climate Control


4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same terminals for voltage.



R E D / Y E L

P N K / B L K R E D / W H T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Is there any voltage?

Y E S —Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the air mix control motor. This short also damages the climate control unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the climate control unit. •

NO —Substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control unit. •

DTC indicator light K: A problem In the air mix control linkage, door and motor

1. Test the air mix control motor, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-20).

Is the air mix control motor OK ?

YES- Substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control unit.H

NO Go to step 2.

2. Remove the air mix control motor, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-20).

3. Check the air mix control linkage and door for smooth movement.

Do the air mix control linkage and door move smoothly?

YES- Replace the air mix control motor H

NO -Repair the air mix control linkage or door.H

21-42

DTC indicator light L: An open or short in the mode control motor circuit

1. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.


3. Check for continuity between body ground and the climate control unit 20P connector terminals No. 5, 6, 11, 17, 18,19 and 20 individually.



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Y E L / G R N

B L U / G R N

(U) (Q)

L T G R N / B L K

G R N / Y E L

;o) ( £ D (h (0) u

G R N / B L K


4. Turn the ignit ion switch ON (II), and check the same terminals for voltage.



B L U / B L K | ^ | B L U / W H T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

G R N / B L K


YES- Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the mode control motor. This short also damages the climate control unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the climate control unit B


YES Repair any short to body ground in the wire (s) between the climate control unit and the mode control motor. •

N O - Go to step 4.

(cont'd)

21-43

Climate Control


5. Turn the ignit ion switch OFF, and check for continuity between fo l lowing terminals of the climate control unit 20P connector and the mode control motor 7P connector. 20P: No. 5 No. 6 No. 11 No. 17 No. 18 No. 19 No. 20

7P: No. 1 No. 2 No. 7 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 No. 6



Y E L / G R N

B L U / B L K I ^ B L U / W H T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

M O D E C O N T R O L M O T O R 7 P C O N N E C T O R


D T C indicator light M: A problem in the mode control linkage, doors and motor

1. Test the mode control motor, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-21).

Is the mode control motor OK?

Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control unit. •


2. Remove the mode control motor, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-21).

3. Check the mode control linkage and doors for smooth movement.

Do the mode control linkage and doors move smoothly?

Y E S -Replace the air mix control m o t o r . •

NO - Repair the mode control linkage or d o o r s . •


Y E S Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 20P connector and at the mode control motor 7P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ indication goes away, replace the original climate control unit. •

NO Repair any open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the mode control motor. •

21-44

DTC indicator light N: A problem In the blower motor circuit

1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and turn the blower fan speed knob to HIGH.

Does the blower motor run?



2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the power transistor 5P connector.

3. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of the power transistor 5P connector and body ground.

P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R

Wire s ide of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

3

4 5

B L K



NO —Check for an open in the wire between the power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G401. •

4. Connect the No. 4 and No. 5 terminals of the power transistor 5P connector with a jumper wire.


Wi re s ide of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

_Q_

B L U / R E D t J B L K

J U M P E R W I R E


Does the blower motor run at high speed?


NO - Repair open in the wire between the power transistor and the blower motor. •




(cont'd)

21-45

Climate Control


9. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of the climate control unit 8P connector and the No. 3 terminal of the power transistor 5P connector.

C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 8P C O N N E C T O R

W i r e s ide of f e m a l e t e rm ina l s

f ^ l 2 31

4 r 5 6 f 7 8

O R N / B L K

O R N / B L K




YES Go to step 10.

NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the power transistor. •




1 2 \ 3

4 r

5 l ...

6 J r 7 l

8

O R N / B L K


YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the power transistor. •


11. Check for continuity between the No. 6 terminal of the climate control unit 8P connector and the No. 1 terminal of the power transistor 5P connector.



1 2 \ 3

4 r 5 1

6 r 7 1

8

B L U / R E D

POWER T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R



Y E S G o t o step 12.

NO- Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the power transistor. •




/ • -1 2

\ 3

4 r

5 1

6 r

7 1

8

B L U / R E D


YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the power transistor. •

NO Go to step 13.

21-46

ra


14. Test the power transistor (see page 21-58).

Is the power transistor OK?

YES Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 8P connector and at the power transistor 5P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indicat ion goes away, replace the original climate control unit. •

NO Replace the power transistor. •

15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check the No. 56 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/ relay box.

Are the fuses OK ?

YES Goto step 16.

NO Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. •

16. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the blower motor 2P connector to body ground wi th a jumper wire.

B L O W E R M O T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R


J U M P E R W I R E

B L U / R E D



YES - Go to step 18.

NO Go to step 31.



20. Remove the blower motor high relay, and test it, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-52).

Is the relay OK?

YES Go to step 21.

NO —Replace the blower motor high relay. •

21 . Connect the No. 4 terminal of the blower motor high relay 5P connector to body ground wi th a jumper wire.

B L O W E R M O T O R H I G H R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R


X L

1

t r

B L U / R E D

J U M P E R W I R E




NO -Repair open in the wire between the blower motor high relay and the blower motor. •




(cont'd)

21-47

Climate Control


26. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the blower motor high relay 5P connector and body ground.

B L O W E R M O T O R H I G H R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R


B L K / Y E L 1 / 3 1 / 3

4 0 5



NO —Repair open in the wire between the blower motor high relay and the No. 3 fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box .H


28. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of the blower motor high relay 5P connector and body ground.

B L O W E R M O T O R H I G H R E L A Y 5 P C O N N E C T O R


1

B L K


30. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of the climate control unit 8P connector and the No. 3 terminal of the blower motor high relay 5P connector.



1 2 31 4 r 5 6

r 7 8

B L U / O R N

n B L U / O R N

B L O W E R M O T O R HIGH R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R



Y E S —Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 8P connector and at the blower motor high relay 5P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ indication goes away, replace the original climate control unit. M

NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the blower motor high relay H



N O - Check for an open in the wire between the blower motor high relay and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G401 •

21-48


32. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.

33. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the blower motor 2P connector and body ground.

B L O W E R M O T O R 2 P C O N N E C T O R W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

Y E L / B L K


YES - Replace the blower motor. •

NO Go to step 34.


35. Remove the blower motor relay f rom the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-52).

Is the relay OK?


NO —Replace the blower motor relay. •

36. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.

B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T


YES Go to step 37.

NO Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. •


38. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.


B L K / Y E L


YES Go to step 39.

NO —Repair open in the wire between the No. 3 fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the blower motor relay. •

(cont'd)

21-49

Climate Control



40. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.


B L K 2 1 2 1

^ [ ] 3


Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the blower motor relay and the blower motor. •

N O - C h e c k for an open in the wire between the blower motor relay and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G202. •

ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).

Does the malfunction indicator lamp come on?

Y E S —Refer to the fuel and emissions section of the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3). •

NO Go to step 2.


3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.



6. Measure the voltage between the No. 3 terminal of the climate control unit 8P connector and body ground.



1 2

4 5 l

6 r

7 1

8

\ R E D / W H T

Is there approximately 5 volts?

Y E S - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 8P connector and at the ECT sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original climate control uni t .H

NO — Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the ECT sensor. •

21-50

Climate Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 54 (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, the No. 3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.

Are the fuses OK ?

Y E S G o t o step 2.

NO — Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. •




C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T BP C O N N E C T O R


B L K / Y E L /



NO Repair open in the wire between the No. 3 fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the climate control uni t .B





W H T / Y E L



NO -Repair open in the wire between the No. 13 fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the climate control unit. •


CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT 8P C O N N E C T O R


M l IWl 2 -v 3

4 ^ 5 6J L 7 1 8

BLK


YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 8P connector. If the connections are good,substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ indication goes away, replace the original climate control uni t .B

NO- Check for an open in the wire between the blower motor high relay and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G401. •

21-51

Climate Control

Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.

Is the fuses OK ?


NO —Replace the fuse, and recheck. H

2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P connector.


4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the recirculation control motor 7P connector and body ground.

R E C I R C U L A T I O N C O N T R O L M O T O R 7 P C O N N E C T O R


1 5 / 1

B L K / Y E L



NO — Repair open in the wire between the recirculation control motor and the No. 3 fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box .B


6. Test the recirculation control motor, refer to

the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-22).

Is the recirculation control motor OK?




8. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the climate control unit 20P conector and body ground individually.



G R N / R E D G R N / W H T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20


Y E S R e p a i r any short to body ground in the wire (s) between the climate control unit and the recirculation control motor. •

NO Goto step 9.

9. Turn the ignition switch ON(II), and check the same wires for voltage.



G R N / W H T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20


Y E S - Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the recirculation control motor. This short also damages the climate control unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the climate control unit.


21-52

10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between the fo l lowing terminals of the climate control unit 20P connector and the recirculation control motor IP connector. 20P: 7P: No. 3 No. 5 No. 4 No. 7

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

GRN/RED GRN/WHT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

9) U

GRN/RED GRN/WHT

RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e terminals


YES -Check for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 20P connector and at recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ indication goes away, replace the original climate control unit. •

NO -Repair any open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the recirculation control motor. •

11. Remove the recirculation contol motor, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-22).

12. Check the recirculation control linkage and doors for smooth movement.

Do the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly?

YES Replace the recirculation control motor B

NO - Repair the recirculation control linkage or d o o r s . •

A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.


3. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of the A/C presure switch 2P connector and body ground.

A / C P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R


B L U / R E D



NO Go to step 10.


5. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C pressure switch.




NO - Goto step 11.

(cont'd)

21-53

Air Conditioning

A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

6. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.



9. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of the cl imate control unit 20P connector and body ground.



Y E L / G R N r > ^

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20


Y E S - C h e c k for loose wires or poor connections at the climate control unit 20P connector and at the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ indication goes away, replace the original cl imate control uni t .B

NO- Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the A/C pressure switch fl

10. Using a Backprobe Set, measure the voltage between the No. 27 terminal of the PCM connector A (32P) and body ground wi th the PCM connectors connected.



/ 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10

12 13 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30

B L U / R E D


Y E S - Repair open in the wire between the PCM and the A/C pressure switch. H

NO- Check for loose wires or poor connections at the PCM connector A (32P). If the connections are good, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original PCM.B

11. Check for proper A/C system pressure.

Is the pressure within specifications?

Y E S -Replace the A/C pressure switch.B

N O - Repair the A/C pressure problem. B

21-54

Climate Control

In-car Temperature Sensor Replacement

Remove the in-car temperature sensor (A) from the dashboard, then disconnect the 2P connector (B) and the air hose (C). Be careful not to damage the sensor and the dashboard.

2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Be sure to connect the air hose securely.

In-car Temperature Sensor Test

Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling the sensor with a hair drier.

Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications.

I N - C A R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R

1 2 J

1 2

u u

R E S I S T A N C E ( k P J


21-55

Climate Control

Outside Air Temperature Sensor Replacement

Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test

1 . Disconnect the 2P connector from the outside air temperature sensor. Release the lock, and remove the outside air temperature sensor.

2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.

Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a change in resistance.

Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor with the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance should be within the specifications.

O U T S I D E A IR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R

R E S I S T A N C E ( k P J

104 °F 40 °C


21-56

Sunlight Sensor Replacement Sunlight Sensor Test

1. Remove the sunlight sensor from the dashboard, then disconnect the 2P connector. Be careful not to damage the sensor and the dashboard.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe on the No. 1 terminal and the (—) probe on the No. 2 terminal with the 2P connector connected. The voltage will not change under the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp. Voltage should be:

• 3.6—3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct sunlight.

• 3.3—3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight.

WHT/RED YEL/GRN

2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.

21-57

Climate Control

Power Transistor Test

1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the power transistor.

2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals of the power transistor. If should be approximately 1.4 — 1.5 kQ .

• If the resistance is within the specifications, go to step 3.

• If the resistance is not within the specifications, replace the power transistor.

POWER TRANSISTOR

1 y 3 L 4

3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No. 3 terminal (ORN/BLK) (A) in the 5P connector, then remove the terminal and insulate it from body ground.

B

Climate Control Unit Removal and Installation

1. Remove the center panel together with the climate control unit, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-86).

2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the climate control unit (A) from the center pagnel (B).

B 3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of

removal. After installation, operate the control unit controls to see whether it works properly.

4. Run the self-diagnosis function to comfirm that there are no problems in the system (see page 21-28).

4. Connect a 1.2 3.4 W bulb (B) between the No. 3 and the No. 4 cavity on the 5P connector.

5. Reconnect the 5P connector to the power transistor.

6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the blower motor runs.

• If the blower motor does not run, replace the power transistor.

• If the blower motor runs, replace the climate control unit.

21-58

Climate Control Unit Disassembly and Reassembly

1. Remove the fan switch (A) and temperature control (B) dials, then remove the front (C), temperature control (D) and fan switch (E) panels. Remove A/C switch (F), MODE control switch (G), AUTO switch (H), OFF switch (I), recirculation control switch (J), front defroster switch (K) and rear defogger switch (L) buttons.

J A

2. Reassemble the control unit in the reverse order of removal.

21-59

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If Electrical maintenance is required)

The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS includes a driver 's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in the '98-01 Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) Service Manual, P/N 61S8008. Items marked wi th an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items wi l l require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be done by and authorized Honda dealer.

• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal col l ision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.



• SRS electrical wi r ing harnesses are indicated wi th ye l low color coding. Related components are located in the steering co lumn, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats ('00-01 models) and around the f loor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.

Body Electrical

Relay and Control Unit Locations 22-2 Connectors and Harnesses 22-4 Fuse/Relay Boxes 22-23 Power Distribution 22-26 Ground Distribution 22-29 Battery 22-30 Relays

Power Relay Test 22-31 * Gauges

Gauge Bulb Replacement . 22-32 Circuit Diagram 22-33

Safety Indicator System Circuit Diagram 22-38

* Stereo Sound System Component Location Index 22-40 Circuit Diagram 22-41 Audio Unit Connector Replacement 22-42 Radio Remote Switch Test 22-42

Homelink Remote Control System Circuit Diagram 22-43 Test 22-43

Power Seat ('01 Sedan) Component Location Index 22-44 Circuit Diagram 22-45 Motor Test 22-46 Switch Test /Replacement 22-47

Seat Heaters-Canada Component Location Index 22-48 Circuit Diagram 22-49

NOTE; Refer to the '98 01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8007, for the items not shown in this section.

Outline of V6 Model Chenges

1998 model: • The ABS control unit location has been changed; related component locations are included. • A blower motor high relay and a radiator fan control module have been added; related componet locations are included.

• The wire harness and ground locations have been changed. • The bulb locations in the gauges have been changed. • The stereo sound system has been changed. • Homelink remote control system has been added; related information is included. • Circuit diagrams which differ f rom those in the '98 Accord Service Manual have been included. 1999 model: • There are no changes to the 1998 model. 2000 model: • There side airbag system has been added; related information is included. • The engine wire harness has been changed. • Circuit diagrams which differ f rom theose in the '98-99 Accord Service Manual have been included. 2001 model: • The seat heater relay location has been changed • The ABS/TCS control unit, TCS relay, and TCS indicator have been added. • The wire harness and ground locations have been changed. • The passenger's power seat has been added in the sedan. • Circuit diagrams which differ f rom those in the '98-01 Accord Service Manual have been included.

Relay and Control Unit Locations

Engine Compartment

S E A T H E A T E R R E L A Y ( C a n a d a ) ( '98-00 m o d e l s ) [W i re c o l o r s : B L K / Y E L , B L K , L W H T / B L K a n d W H T / G R N T C S R E L A Y ( '01 m o d e l ) [W i re c o l o r s ; G R N / Y E L , i B R N / B L K , R E D / B L U a n d B L U

H E A D L I G H T H E A D L I G H T H A R M R F I A V R E L A Y 1 R E L A Y 2 H O R N R E L A Y

M U L T I - R E L A Y B O X

B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y

C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y

A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y f W i r e c o l o r s : Y E L / G R N , B L K , L B R N / B L K a n d W H T / G R N

A B S P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y f W i r e c o l o r s : Y E L / R E D , ^ B R N / B L K , W H T / B L U a n d W H T

A / C C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H R E L A Y

E L D U N I T

R A D I A T O R F A N R E L A Y

I N T E R M I T T E N T W I P E R R E L A Y W i r e c o l o r s : G R N / B L K , W H T , B L K , G R N / R E D , a n d B L U / W H T

I 22-2

Dashboard

B L O W E R M O T O R H I G H R E L A Y

C O N T R O L M O D U L E A B S C O N T R O L U N I T ( '98-00 m o d e l s ) A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T ( '01 m o d e l )

22-

Connectors and Harnesses

Connector Index

Iden t i f i ca t ion n u m b e r s have been ass igned to in- l ine c o n n e c t o r s . T h e n u m b e r is p receded by the letter "C" f o r connec to rs , " G " f o r g r o u n d t e r m i n a l s or " T " f o r n o n - g r o u n d t e r m i n a l s .

Harness Location Harness Engine Compar tment Dashboard Others (Floor, Door,

Trunk, and Roof) Notes

Star ter cable T 1 , T 2 a n d ( + ) (see page 22-5) Bat tery g r o u n d cable T3

G 1 a n d ( - ) (see page 22-5)

Eng ine g r o u n d cable T 4 G2

(see page 22-5)

Eng ine w i r e harness C103 t h r o u g h C108 T101 and T102 G101 a n d G 1 0 2

(see page 22-6)

R igh t eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness

G201 t h r o u g h G205 C201 t h r o u g h C204 (see page 22-12)

Left eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness

G301 and G302 C 1 0 3 a n d C 1 0 4 C301 and C302

(see page 22-14)

Dashboa rd w i r e harness B (left b ranch)

C301 ,C401 and C402 G401

(see page 22-16)

D a s h b o a r d w i r e harness B ( r igh t b ranch)

C201 t h r o u g h C203 and C403

(see page 22-16)

D a s h b o a r d w i r e harness A C204, C302 and C401 G501 and G502

C501 t h r o u g h C505 and C582 G503 and G504

(see page 22-18)

Left s ide w i r e harness C501 and C551 t h r o u g h C557 G551 and G552

Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-24)

R igh t s ide w i r e harness C581 t h r o u g h C586 and C851 G581

(see page 22-20)

Rear w i r e harness C 5 5 4 a n d C601 G601

Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-28)

M o o n r o o f w i r e harness C502 Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-30)

Roo f w i r e harness Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-30)

Dr ive r ' s p o w e r seat w i r e harness C551 Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-31)

Passenger 's p o w e r seat w i r e harness ('01 Sedan)

C701 (see page 22-22)

Dr iver ' s doo r w i r e harness C631 and C632 Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-32)

Passenger 's doo r w i r e harness Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-34)

Left rear d o o r w i r e harness C553 Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-36)

R igh t rear d o o r w i r e harness C581 Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-37)

Ign i t i on sw i t ch harness C404 Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-38)

SRS m a i n harness C503 C556, C557, C583 and C584 G801

Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-38)

SRS f l oo r harness (Sedan) C505 and C851 Refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-39)

OPDS w i r e harness (w i th s ide a i rbags)

C851 Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-42)

Rear w i n d o w de fogge r w i r e harness

Refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-42)

22-4

Connector to Harness Index

Starter Cable

C o n n e c t o r o r T e r m i n a l Ref Cav i t ies L o c a t i o n C o n n e c t s t o Notes T1 T2

1 2

Right s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Left s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t

U n d e r - h o o d fuse / re lay b o x Star ter m o t o r

( • ) Battery Bat tery pos i t i ve t e r m i n a l

Battery Ground Cable

Connector or Terminal Ref Cavi t ies Locat ion Connec ts to Notes T3 6 Left s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t T r a n s m i s s i o n h o u s i n g G1 5 Left s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d v ia ba t te ry

g r o u n d cables ( ) Bat tery Bat tery negat ive t e r m i n a l

Engine Ground Cable ('99 model)

Connector or Terminal Ref Cavit ies Location Connec ts to Notes T4 8 M idd le of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Valve cover G2 7 Right s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d v ia eng ine

g r o u n d cab le

Engine Ground Cable ('00-01 models)

Connector or Terminal Ref Cavit ies Locat ion Connects to Notes T4 4 Left s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t T r a n s m i s s i o n h o u s i n g G2 3 Left s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d v ia eng ine

g r o u n d cable

22-5


Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)

Engine Wire Harness ('98-99 models)

C o n n e c t o r o r T e r m i n a l Ref Cavi t ies Locat ion Connec ts to Notes A l t e r n a t o r 42 4 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t A /T c lu tch p ressure c o n t r o l va l ve A 27 2 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t A / T clutch pressure control valve B 28 2 Righ t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Transmiss ion range switch (A/T gear 15 10 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t position switch) C K P sensor 4 2 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Countershaft speed sensor 16 2 Righ t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Coolant temperature gauge sending 41 1 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t

unit Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 39 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t sensor Radiator fan switch B 45 2 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Exhaust gas recircuration (EGR) 40 6 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t control solenoid valve Idle air con t ro l (IAC) va l ve 35 3 Righ t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Ignition coil 18 3 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Ignition control module (ICM) 14 3 R igh t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor 13 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Lock-up control solenoid valve and 32 3 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t shift control solenoid valve A Mainshaft speed s e n s o r 29 2 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t M A P sensor 38 3 Righ t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t No . 1 fue l in jec tor 7 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 2 fue l in jec tor 9 2 M i d d l e o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 3 fue l in jec tor 12 2 M i d d l e o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t No . 4 fue l in jec tor 6 2 M i d d l e o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t No . 5 fue l in jec tor 8 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 6 fue l in jec to r 10 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Oi l p ressure sw i t ch 2 1 Right s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t PCM connec to r B 19 25 U n d e r m i d d l e o f dash PCM connec to r C 20 31 U n d e r m i d d l e o f dash PCM connec to r D 21 16 U n d e r m i d d l e o f dash P r ima ry heated o x y g e n sensor 11 4 M i d d l e o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t (P r imary H 0 2 S ) Rad ia tor f an sw i t ch A 25 2 Right s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t S e c o n d c lu tch p ressure sw i t ch 33 1 Right s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Sh i f t con t ro l so leno id va l ve B 36 2 R igh t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Sh i f t con t ro l so l eno id va l ve C 34 2 Right s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Star ter so leno id 31 1 Righ t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t TDC sensor 44 4 R igh t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t T h i r d c lu tch pressure sw i t ch 30 1 Right s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Th ro t t l e pos i t i on (TP) sensor 37 3 Right s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t VTEC pressure sw i t ch 1 2 R igh t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t VTEC so leno id va l ve 5 1 Right s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t C103 23 14 Righ t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Left eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e

harness (see page 22-14) C104 24 10 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Left eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e

harness (see page 22-14) C105 ( Junc t i on connec to r ) 22 20 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t C106 ( Junc t ion connec to r ) 17 8 R igh t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t T101 3 U n d e r - h o o d fuse / re lay b o x T102 43 A l te rna to r G101 26 R igh t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Engine g r o u n d v ia eng ine

w i r e harness

22-6

(cont 'd)

22-7



Engine Wire Harness ('00-01 models)

C o n n e c t o r o r T e r m i n a l Ref Cavi t ies Locat ion Connec ts to Notes A l te rna to r 46 4 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t A /T c lu tch p ressure con t ro l va l ve A 28 2 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t A /T c lu tch p ressure c o n t r o l va l ve B 29 2 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t T r a n s m i s s i o n range (TR) s w i t c h (A/T 15 10 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t gear pos i t i on sw i t ch ) CKP sensor 4 2 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Coun te rsha f t speed sensor 16 2 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Eng ine coo lan t t e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) 41 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t sensor Exhaus t gas rec i rcu ra t ion (EGR) 40 6 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t con t ro l so l eno id va lve Idle air con t ro l (IAC) va l ve 36 3 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Intake air t e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) sensor 14 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Lock-up con t ro l s o l e n o i d va l ve and 33 3 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t sh i f t con t ro l s o l e n o i d va l ve A M a i n s h a f t speed sensor 30 2 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t M A P sensor 39 3 Right s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t No . 1 fue l in jec tor 7 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 2 fue l in jec tor 10 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 3 fue l in jec tor 13 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 4 fue l in jec tor 49 2 M i d d l e o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t No . 5 fue l in jec tor 45 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t No . 6 fue l in jec tor 43 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 1 i gn i t i on coi l 8 3 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 2 i gn i t i on coi l 9 3 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 3 i gn i t i on coi l 11 3 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t No . 4 i gn i t i on coi l 48 3 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 5 i gn i t i on coi l 44 3 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t N o . 6 i gn i t i on coi l 42 3 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Oi l p ressure sw i t ch 2 1 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t PCM c o n n e c t o r B 19 25 U n d e r m i d d l e o f dash PCM c o n n e c t o r C 20 31 U n d e r m i d d l e o f dash PCM connec to r D 21 16 U n d e r m i d d l e o f dash

22-8

(cont 'd)

22-9



Engine Wire Harness ( '00 -01 models) (cont'd)

C o n n e c t o r o r T e r m i n a l Ref Cavi t ies Locat ion Connects to Notes Pr imary H 0 2 S 12 4 M i d d l e o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Radia tor f an sw i t ch A 26 2 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Radia tor f an sw i t ch B 51 2 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Seconda ry c lu tch sw i t ch p ressure 34 1 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t sw i t ch Sh i f t con t ro l so leno id va lve B 37 2 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Sh i f t con t ro l so leno id va lve C 35 2 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Star ter so leno id 32 1 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t TDC sensor 50 4 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t T h i r d c lu tch pressure sw i t ch 31 1 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Th ro t t l e pos i t i on (TP) sensor 38 3 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t VTEC pressure sw i t ch 1 2 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t VTEC so leno id va lve 5 1 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t C103 24 14 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Left eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e

harness (see page 22-14) C104 25 10 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Left eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e

harness (see page 22-14) C105 (Junc t ion connec to r ) 22 20 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t C106 (Junc t ion connec to r ) 17 8 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t C107 (Junc t ion connec to r ) 18 14 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t C108 (Junc t ion connec to r ) 23 20 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t T101 3 U n d e r - h o o d fuse / re lay box T102 47 A l t e r n a t o r G101 27 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d via eng ine w i r e

harness G102 6 M i d d l e o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d v ia eng ine w i r e

harness

22-10



Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness Connector or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavi t ies Locat ion Connects to Notes

A B S con t ro l un i t connec to r A 1 12 B e h i n d r igh t kick pane l * 1 A B S con t ro l un i t connec to r B 2 22 B e h i n d r igh t kick pane l * 1 A B S fa i l -safe re lay 6 4 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t -x- -| A B S m o d u l a t o r un i t 22 10 R igh t s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t * 1 A B S p u m p m o t o r 23 2 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t A B S p u m p m o t o r re lay 5 4 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t A B S r igh t f r o n t w h e e l sensor 20 2 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t ABS /TCS con t ro l un i t connec to r A 45 26 B e h i n d r igh t kick pane l * 2 ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t connec to r B 1 16 B e h i n d r i gh t kick pane l * 2 ABS/TCS con t ro l un i t connec to r C 2 12 B e h i n d r igh t kick pane l * 2 ABS /TCS m o d u l a t o r un i t 22 23 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t * 2 A /C c o m p r e s s o r c lu tch 31 1 R igh t s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t A /C pressure sw i t ch 25 2 Beh ind c o n d e n s e r f an m o t o r Condense r f a n m o t o r 30 2 M i d d l e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Cru ise con t ro l ac tua to r 21 4 R igh t s ide o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t D iode (L igh t ing) 40 2 B e h i n d r igh t kick pane l Canada ELD un i t 12 3 Ins ide u n d e r - h o o d fuse / re lay b o x H igh b e a m cut re lay 42 4 B e h i n d r igh t kick pane l Canada Left h o r n 26 1 B e h i n d m i d d l e o f f r o n t b u m p e r Ou ts ide air t e m p e r a t u r e sensor 28 2 B e h i n d m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r Passenger 's unde r -dash fuse / re lay b o x 4 3 Beh ind r igh t kick pane l c o n n e c t o r D (see page 22-25) Passenger 's unde r -dash fuse / re lay b o x 3 18 Beh ind r igh t kick pane l c o n n e c t o r C (see page 22-25) Power s tee r ing p ressure (PSP) sw i t ch 19 2 M i d d l e o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Radia tor f an m o t o r 24 2 M i d d l e o f eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t R ight f r o n t pa rk ing l igh t 33 2 Beh ind r igh t head l i gh t R ight f r o n t s ide marke r l i gh t 39 3 Beh ind r igh t o f f r o n t b u m p e r R igh t head l i gh t (H igh b e a m ) 32 2 Beh ind r igh t head l i gh t R ight head l i gh t ( L o w beam) 34 2 Beh ind r igh t head l i gh t Right h o r n 29 1 Beh ind m i d d l e o f f r o n t b u m p e r Seat heater re lay 7 4 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t * 1 S e c o n d a r y hea ted o x y g e n sensor 18 4 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t (Secondary H 0 2 S ) Secur i t y h o o d s w i t c h 27 2 Beh ind m i d d l e o f f r o n t b u m p e r Ta i l l i gh t re lay 41 4 Beh ind r igh t kick pane l TCS re lay 7 4 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t * 2 U n d e r - h o o d fuse / re lay b o x connec to r 8 16 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t D (see page 22-23) U n d e r - h o o d fuse / re lay b o x connec to r 9 3 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t C (see page 22-23) U n d e r - h o o d fuse / re lay b o x connec to r 10 7 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t B (see page 22-23) U n d e r - h o o d fuse / re lay b o x connec to r 11 18 Right s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t A (see page 22-23) W a s h e r level sw i t ch 38 2 Beh ind r igh t o f f r o n t b u m p e r Canada W i n d s h i l d w a s h e r m o t o r 37 2 Beh ind r igh t o f f r o n t b u m p e r C201 13 16 Unde r r i gh t s ide o f dash Dashboa rd w i r e harness B

(see page 22-16) C202 14 7 Unde r r i gh t s ide o f dash Dashboa rd w i r e harness B

(see page 22-16) C203 15 5 Unde r r igh t s ide of dash Dashboa rd w i r e harness B

(see page 22-16) C204 16 22 U n d e r r igh t s ide of dash Dashboa rd w i r e harness A

(see page 22-18) G201 35 Right s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d Via r igh t eng ine

c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness G202 17 Right s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d Via r igh t eng ine

c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness G203 36 R igh t s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d Via r igh t eng ine

c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness G204 43 Beh ind r igh t kick panel Body g r o u n d Via r igh t eng ine

c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness G205 44 Beh ind r igh t kick panel Body g r o u n d Via r igh t eng ine

I c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness * 1: '98-00 m o d e l s * 2; '01 m o d e l

22-12


Connector to Harness index (cont'd)

Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness

Connector or Termina l Ref Cavit ies Locat ion Connec ts to Notes A B S left f r o n t w h e e l sensor 16 2 Left s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Brake f l u i d level sw i t ch c o n n e c t o r A 6 1 Left s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t

Brake f l u i d level s w i t c h c o n n e c t o r B 7 1 Left s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t

( / Dr i ve r ' s unde r -dash fuse / re lay b o x 12 20 Beh ind left kick pane l c o n n e c t o r E (see page 22-24) Dr i ve r ' s unde r -dash fuse / re lay b o x 11 5 B e h i n d lef t k ick pane l c o n n e c t o r C (see page 22-24) Eng ine m o u n t con t ro l s o l e n o i d va lve 4 2 Left s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t EVAP p u r g e con t ro l so l eno id va l ve 3 2 Left s ide o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t I n te rm i t t en t w i p e r re lay 1 3 6 Left s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Left f r o n t pa rk ing l igh t 20 2 Beh ind left head l i gh t Left f r o n t s ide ma rke r l i gh t 17 3 Beh ind left o f f r o n t b u m p e r Left head l i gh t (H igh beam) 21 2 Beh ind left head l i gh t Left head l i gh t ( Low b e a m ) 19 2 Beh ind left head l i gh t Seat heater re lay 13 4 Beh ind left kick pane l * Test t a c h o m e t e r connec to r 1 2 Left s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t W i n d s h i e l d w i p e r m o t o r 8 5 Left rear of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t C103 2 14 Left s ide of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Eng ine w i r e harness (see

page 22-6) C104 1 5 10 Left s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t Eng ine w i r e harness (see

page 22-6) C 3 0 1 9 20 U n d e r left s ide o f dash Dashboa rd w i r e harness B

(see page 22-16) C302 10 16 U n d e r left s ide o f dash Dashboa rd w i r e harness A

(see page 22-18) G301

G302

18

5

Left s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t

Left s ide of eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t

Body g r o u n d v ia left eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness Body g r o u n d via left eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness

'01 m o d e l

22-14



Dashboard Wire Harness B (Left Branch)

C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavi t ies Locat ion Connec ts to Notes Brake s w i t c h 5 4 U n d e r left s ide o f dash Cable reel 13 4 U n d e r left s ide o f dash C o m b i n a i o n l igh t sw i t ch 12 14 U n d e r left s ide o f dash Data l ink c o n n e c t o r (DLC) 16 16 U n d e r left s ide o f dash D a y t i m e r u n n i n g l igh ts con t ro l un i t 14 14 U n d e r left s ide o f dash Dr ive r ' s unde r -dash fuse / re lay box 1 20 B e h i n d lef t kick pane l connec to r 0 (see page 22-24) Dr i ve r ' s unde r -dash fuse / re lay box 3 7 B e h i n d lef t k ick pane l connec to r P (see page 22-24) Dr iver ' s unde r -dash fuse / re lay b o x 2 22 B e h i n d left kick pane l connec to r Q (see page 22-24) Ign i t i on s w i t c h 11 7 U n d e r left s ide o f dash I m m o b i l i z e r con t ro l un i t 10 5 U n d e r left s ide o f dash In te rm i t t en t dwe l l t i m e con t ro l l e r 8 2 U n d e r left s ide o f dash PGM-FI m a i n re lay 7 7 U n d e r left s ide of dash W i n d s h i e l d w i p e r / w a s h e r sw i t ch 9 8 In s tee r ing c o l u m n cove rs C301 6 20 U n d e r left s ide o f dash Left eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e

harness (see page 22-14) C401 15 22 U n d e r left s ide o f dash Dashboard w i r e harness A

(see page 22-18) C402 4 8 U n d e r left s ide o f dash Secur i ty sys tem w i r e harness

(Opt ional ) Canada

C402 4 4 U n d e r left s ide of dash Secur i t y sys tem w i r e harness (Opt ional )

U S A

G401 17 Beh ind left kick panel Body g r o u n d v ia d a s h b o a r d w i r e harness B

D A S H B O A R D W I R E H A R N E S S B (left b ranch )

22-16

Dashboard Wire Harness B (Right Branch)

C o n n e c t o r or Te rm ina l Ref Cavit ies Location C o n n e c t s to Notes Air m i x con t ro l m o t o r 15 7 Unde r r igh t s ide o f dash B lower m o t o r 12 2 Under r igh t s ide of dash B lower m o t o r h igh relay 11 4 Under r igh t s ide of dash AUTO A/C C l imate c o n t r o l un i t connec tor A 3 20 Under m i d d l e of dash AUTO A/C Cl imate con t ro l un i t connec to r B 1 8 Unde r m i d d l e of dash AUTO A/C Evapora tor t e m p e r a t u r e sensor 4 2 Unde r m i d d l e of dash Heater con t ro l panel 3 22 Unde r m i d d l e of dash MAN. A/C Heater f an sw i t ch 1 7 Unde r m i d d l e of dash MAN. A/C M o d e con t ro l m o t o r 2 7 Unde r m idd le of dash Passenger 's under -dash fuse / re lay b o x 8 16 Beh ind r igh t kick pane l connec to r J (see page 22-25) Passenger 's under -dash fuse / re lay b o x 9 16 Beh ind r igh t kick pane l connec to r K (see page 22-25) Power t rans is to r 10 4 Unde r r i gh t s ide of dash AUTO A/C Radiator f an con t ro l m o d u l e 16 8 Unde r m i d d l e of dash Rec i rcu la t ion con t ro l m o t o r 5 7 Unde r m idd le of dash C201 6 16 Unde r r igh t s ide of dash Right eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t

w i r e harness (see page 22-12) C202 14 7 Unde r r i gh t s ide of dash Right eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t

w i r e harness (see page 22-12) C203 13 5 Unde r r igh t s ide of dash Right eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t

w i r e harness (see page 22-12) C403 7 2 Unde r r igh t s ide o f dash Secur i ty s ys tem w i r e harness

(Opt iona l )

22-17



Dashboard Wire Harness A

C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavi t ies Locat ion Connects to Notes Accesso ry socket 29 2 B e h i n d m i d d l e o f dash A / T gear pos i t i on conso le l ight /parking 32 4 M i d d l e o f f l o o r b e t w e e n f r o n t p in sw i t ch seats A u d i o un i t 17 20 B e h i n d a u d i o un i t Clock 16 5 B e h i n d m i d d l e o f dash Cruise con t ro l unit 37 14 B e h i n d left s ide of dash Cruise main sw i t ch 7 5 B e h i n d i n s t r u m e n t pane l *1 Cruise main / T C S sw i t ch 7 8 B e h i n d i n s t r u m e n t pane l * 2 Driver's seat heater sw i t ch 31 6 B e h i n d m i d d l e o f dash Driver's under -dash fuse/relay box 2 18 B e h i n d left kick pane l connector 1 (see page 22-24) Driver's under -dash fuse/relay box 3 18 Beh ind left kick pane l connec to r K (see page 22-24) Gauge assembly connector A 11 14 B e h i n d g a u g e s Gauge assembly connector B 10 22 B e h i n d g a u g e s Gauge assembly connector C 12 16 B e h i n d g a u g e s Glove box light 27 2 Beh ind g l o v e b o x Hazard warning switch 14 10 B e h i n d m i d d l e o f dash In-car temperature sensor 38 2 Beh ind lef t s ide of dash Left tweeter 9 2 B e h i n d i n s t r u m e n t pane l M o o n r o o f switch 8 6 Beh ind i n s t r u m e n t pane l Mu l t i p l ex con t ro l un i t (dr iver 's ) 5 22 Beh ind left kick panel connec to r B M u l t i p l e x con t ro l un i t (passenger 's ) 23 22 Beh ind r i gh t kick pane l connec to r B Park ing brake sw i t ch 36 1 M i d d l e o f f l o o r b e t w e e n f r o n t

seats Passenger 's seat heater sw i t ch 30 6 Beh ind m i d d l e o f dash Passenger 's under -dash fuse / re lay box 21 18 Beh ind r igh t kick pane l connec to r H (see page 22-25) Passenger 's under -dash fuse / re lay box 22 18 Beh ind r i gh t kick pane l connec to r 1 (see page 22-25) PCM connec to r A 28 32 Beh ind m i d d l e o f dash R igh t twee te r 20 2 Beh ind i n s t r u m e n t pane l Sh i f t lock so leno id 34 2 M i d d l e o f f l o o r b e t w e e n f r o n t

seats S u n l i g h t sensor 15 2 Beh ind m i d d l e o f dash SRS m e m o r y erase s igna l (MES) 4 2 Beh ind left kick panel * 2 SRS un i t 33 8 M i d d l e o f f l o o r * 3 C204 26 22 Beh ind r igh t s ide of dash Right eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e

harness (see page 22-12) C302 39 16 Beh ind left s ide of dash Left eng ine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e

harness (see page 22-14) C401 40 22 Beh ind left s ide of dash Dashboa rd w i r e harness B (see

page 22-16) C501 42 18 Beh ind lef t kick pane l Left s ide w i r e hareness , refer to

the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice Manua l (see page 22-24)

C502 6 7 Beh ind i n s t r u m e n t panel M o o n r o o f w i r e harness , refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-30)

C503 13 3 Unde r m i d d l e o f dash SRS m a i n harness, refer to the '98- * 1 01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-39)

C503 13 2 Unde r m i d d l e o f dash SRS m a i n harness, refer t o t he '98- '00 Sedan 01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-39)

C503 13 8 Unde r m i d d l e o f dash SRS m a i n harness, refer to the '98- '00 Coupe 01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-39)

C504 41 2 Beh ind left kick panel Secur i ty sys tem w i r e harness USA (Opt ional )

C505 35 6 Midd le o f f l oo r SRS f l oo r harness , refer to the '98- '00 Sedan 01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see with side page 22-39) airbags

C582 25 16 Beh ind r igh t s ide of dash Right s ide w i r e harness (see page '00 Coupe 22-21)

22-18

Connector or Terminal Ref Cavit ies Locat ion Connec ts to Notes C582 25 6 Beh ind r igh t s ide o f dash R igh t s ide w i r e harness (see

page 22-20) * 2

G501 18 Under m i d d l e o f dash Body g r o u n d v ia dashboa rd w i r e harness A

G502 19 Under m i d d l e o f dash Body g r o u n d v ia dashboa rd w i r e harness A

G503 1 Beh ind left kick pane l B o d y g r o u n d v ia dashboa rd w i r e harness A

G504 24 Beh ind r i gh t kick pane l B o d y g r o u n d v ia dashboa rd w i r e harness A

* 1 : '98-00 m o d e l s * 2: '01 m o d e l * 3: '00-01 Sedan , '01 Coupe

22-19



Right Side Wire Harness (Sedan)

C o n n e c t o r o r T e r m i n a l Ref Cavi t ies Locat ion Connects to Notes A B S r i gh t rear w h e e l sensor 16 2 U n d e r r i gh t s ide o f rear seat F ron t passenger ' s s ide a i rbag in f l a to r 2 2 U n d e r passenger ' s seat * 4 Passenger ' s d o o r sw i t ch 13 1 R igh t B-pi l lar Passenger ' s seat bel t s w i t c h 4 3 U n d e r passenge r ' s seat *1 Passenger ' s seat heater 3 3 U n d e r passenge r ' s seat * 2 Passenger 's seat heater 3 4 U n d e r passenge r ' s seat * 3 Passenger 's s ide impac t sensor 11 2 U n d e r passenger ' s seat * 4 Passenger 's unde r -dash fuse / re lay b o x 7 20 B e h i n d r i gh t kick pane l c o n n e c t o r A (see page 22-25) Passenger 's unde r -dash fuse / re lay b o x 8 3 B e h i n d r i gh t kick pane l Canada connec to r G (see page 22-25) R igh t rear d o o r sw i t ch 15 1 R igh t q u a r t e r pane l R igh t rear speaker 17 2 R igh t qua r t e r pane l R igh t s ide seat be l t t ens ione r 14 2 R igh t B-pi l lar # 4 W i n d o w an tenna coi l connec to r A 18 1 M i d d l e o f rear she l f C581 1 10 R igh t s ide o f f l oo r R ight rear d o o r w i r e harness ,

refer t o t he '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-37)

G582 9 6 B e h i n d r i gh t kick pane l Dashboa rd w i r e harness A , * 4 refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-

G583 5 4 l o ; SRS m a i n harness , refer to # 4 the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-39)

G584 6 4 SRS m a i n harness , refer to * 4 the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-39)

C701 3 10 U n d e r passenger ' s seat Passenger 's seat w i r e harness * 2 (see page 22-22).

G851 12 4 OPDS w i r e harness , refer to # 4 the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-42)

G581 10 U n d e r passenger ' s seat Body g r o u n d v ia r igh t s ide w i r e harness

* 1: '00 m o d e l w i t h o u t seat heater * 2: '98-99 m o d e l * 3: '00 m o d e l w i t h seat heater * 4: '01 m o d e l

22-20

Right Side Wire Harness (Coupe) C o n n e c t o r o r T e r m i n a l Ref Cavi t ies Loca t i on Connects to Notes

A B S r igh t rear wheel sensor 16 2 Under r i gh t side of rear seat Passenger 's door s w i t c h 13 1 Right B-pi l lar Passenger 's seat belt sw i t ch 12 3 Under passenger ' s seat * 1 Passenger 's seat heater 10 3 Unde r passenger 's seat * 2 Passenger 's seat heater 10 4 Unde r passenger 's seat * 3 Passenger 's s ide a i rbag in f la tor 15 2 Under passenger 's seat * 5 Passenger 's s ide i m p a c t sensor 14 2 Unde r passenger 's seat Passenger 's under -dash fuse / relay box 5 20 Beh ind r i gh t kick panel connec to r A (see page 22-25) Passenger 's under-dash fuse/relay box 6 3 Beh ind r igh t kick pane l Canada connec to r G (see page 22-25) Right rear speaker 17 2 Right quar te r panel W i n d o w an tenna coi l connec to r A 18 1 M idd le o f rear she l f C582 7 16 Beh ind r igh t kick panel Dashboa rd w i r e ha rnessA

(see page 22-18) * 4

C582 7 6 Beh ind r igh t kick panel Dashboa rd w i r e ha rnessA (see page 22-22)

* 5

C583 2 4 SRS m a i n harness , refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-39)

* 6

C584 3 4 SRS m a i n harness, refer t o the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-39)

* 6

C585 (Connects to C586) 4 1 Unde r passenger 's seat * 6 C586 (Connects to C585) 8 1 Unde r passenger 's seat * 6 C851 11 4 OPDS w i r e harness , refer to

the '98-01 A c c o r d Serv ice M a n u a l (see page 22-42)

* 6

G581 1 Unde r passenger 's seat B o d y g r o u n d via r igh t s ide w i r e harness

* 1: '00-01 m o d e l w i t h o u t seat heater * 2: '98-99 m o d e l s * 3: '00-01 m o d e l w i t h seat heater * 4: '00 m o d e l * 5: '01 m o d e l * 6: '00-01 m o d e l s

22-21


Connector to Harness index (cont'd)

Passenger's Seat Wire Harness (4-way Adjustable) ('01 model)

C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavit ies Locat ion Connects to Notes Passenger 's p o w e r seat a d j u s t m e n t 4 6 R igh t s ide o f passenger ' s seat s w i t c h connec to r A Passenger 's p o w e r seat a d j u s t m e n t 2 6 R igh t s ide of passenger ' s seat s w i t c h connec to r B Passenger 's seat be l t sw i t ch 7 3 U n d e r passenge r ' s seat Passenger 's seat heater 5 4 U n d e r passenge r ' s seat Recl ine m o t o r 1 2 U n d e r passenger ' s seat S l ide m o t o r 6 2 U n d e r passenge r ' s seat C701 3 10 R igh t s ide o f passenger ' s seat Right s ide w i r e harness (see

page 22-20)

22-22

Fuse/Relay Boxes

Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index

Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box

Socket Ref Terminal Connects t o A 15 18 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12) A/C compressor clutch relay 3 4 B 14 7 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12) Blower motor relay 11 4 C 13 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12) Condenser fan relay 1 4 D 12 16 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12) Diode 9 2 Not used ELD unit 4 3 Horn relay 10 4 Headlight relay 1 7 4 Headlight relay 2 8 4 Radiator fan relay 2 4 T1 6 Battery positive cable (see page 22-5) T101 5 Engine wire harness (see page 22-6)

1 2 3

22-23

Fuse/Relay Boxes

Connector t© Fuse/Relay Box index (cont'd)

Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Socket Ref Terminal Connects to A 11 10 Left side wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual

(see page 22-24) B 3 14 Left side wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual

(see page 22-24) C 10 5 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-14) D 7 Not used Diode 1 Diode 2 E 4 20 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-14) F 9 6 Driver's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service

Manual (see page 22-32) G 8 18 Driver's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service

Manual (see page 22-32) H 5 6 No used 1 13 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-18) J 12 2 Service check connector K 14 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-18) L 23 Not used M 15 6 Ignit ion switch harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual

(see page 22-38) Mult iplex control unit 6 24 (Plugs directly into the fuse box) connector A N 22 2 SRS wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see

page 22-39) 0 21 20 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16) P 16 7 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16) Q 17 22 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16) R 26 1 Optional connector Reverse relay 19 4 S 27 1 Optional connector Starter cut relay 18 4 T 24 1 Optional connector Turn signal/hazard relay 20 4 U 25 1 Optional connector

22-24

Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Socket Ref Terminal Connects to A 10 20 Right side wire harness (see page 22-20) Accessory relay 15 4 B 4 4 Roof wire harness (see page 22-20) C 9 18 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12) D 5 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12) Diode 1 Not used Diode 2 Diode 3 E 8 2 Passenger's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord

Service Manual (see page 22-34) F 7 20 Passenger's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord

Service Manual (see page 22-34) G 6 3 Right side wire harness (see page 22-20) H 18 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-18) I 12 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-18) J 17 16 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16) K 13 16 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16) Multiplex control unit connector A

11 24 (Plugs directly into the fuse box) M

Power window relay 14 4 Rear window defogger relay 16 4

16 15 14

22-25

Power Distribution

Fuse to Components Index

Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box

Fuse Number

Amps Wire color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

41 100A Battery, Power distr ibut ion 42 50A WHT Ignition switch (BAT) 43 20A RED/GRN Right headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada) 44 Not used 45 20A RED/YEL Left headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)

Hight beam indicator, Hight beam cut relay 46 15A W H T / G R N PGM-FI main relay, Data link connector (DLC) 47 20A WHT/YEL Ignition key light and key interlock solenoid, ABS control unit (BLS)

Cruise control unit, PCM, Horn relay High mount brake light, Brake failure sensor, Trailer l ighting connector

47 20A

Fuse/relay box socket

Mult iplex control unit (driver's)

48 20A W H T / G R N ABS front and rear solenoids 49 15A W H T / G R N Turn signal/hazard relay 50 30A WHT ABS pump motor 51 40A WHT/BLU No. 1, 7, 8, 15 and 16 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box) 52 20A BLU TCS relay 53 40A • W r f f T G R N " " Rear w indow defogger relay 54 40A YEL No. 9, 10, 11, 12 and 13 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box) 55 40A Y E L / G R N No. 2, 4, 5 and 6 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box) 56 40A YEL/BLK Blower motor 57 20A BLU/BLK Radiator fan motor 58 20A BLU/YEL Condenser fan motor 58 20A

WHT Fan control module (Radiator fan control module) 58 20A

RED A/C compressor clutch 59 20A W H T / G R N Driver's and front passenger's seat heaters (Canada)

22-26

- + BODY

Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Fuse Number Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected 1 15A RED/WHT PGM-FI main relay

RED/BLU (or GRN) SRS unit (VA) 2 10A BLK/WHT (or GRN) SRS unit (VB) 3 7.5A BLK/YEL Blower motor high relay, Climate control unit, Heater

control panel, Fan control module (Radiator fan control module), Recirculation control motor, Rear w indow defogger relay, Seat heater relay

4 7.5A YEL/BLK ABS control unit, Power mirror actuators, Power mirror defoggers (Canada), ABS/TCS control unit ('01 model)

Fuse/relay box socket Optional connector 5 7.5 A 1 YEL/RED Daytime running lights control unit (Canada) 6 15A BLK/YEL Alternator, Cruise control unit, Cruise control main

switch indicator, ELD unit, Engine mount control solenoid valve, Evaporative emission bypass solenoid valve, Evaporative emission purge control solenoid valve, Gauge assembly, PCM, Primary and Secondary heated oxygen sensors, Vent shut solenoid valve, TCS switch ('01 model)

7 7.5A YEL /GRN Mult iplex control unit (driver's) (All '98-99 models and '00 Sedan), Windshield washer motor (All '98-99 models and '00-01 Sedan), OPDS unit (with side airbags)

8 7.5A YEL/BLK Accessory socket relay Fuse/relay box socket Optional connector

9 7.5A YEL Back-up lights, Brake failure sensor, Clock, DRL indicator light, Gauge assembly, Mult iplex control unit (passenger's), Shift lock solenoid, Trailer l ighting connector

Fuse/relay box socket Mult iplex control unit (driver's) 10 7.5A YEL/RED Turn signal/hazard relay 11 15A BLK/YEL Ignition coils 12 30A GRN/BLK Windshield wiper intermittent relay, Windshield wiper

motor, Windshield washer motor ('00-01 Coupe), i Multiplex control unit (driver's) ('00-01 Coupe)

13 7.5A BLU/ORN PCM, PGM-FI main relay

(cont'd)

22-27

Power Distribution

Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)

Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Fuse Number Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected 1 30 A GRN Moonroof motor 2 20 A RED Power seat rear up-down motor, Recline motor 3 20A RED Passenger's power seat, Slide motor ('01 Sedan) 4 20 A BLU Power seat front up-down motor, Slide motor 5 20A WHT/RED Passenger's power seat, Recline motor ('01 Sedan) 6 10 A RED/BLU Daytime running lights control unit (Canada) 7 20 A WHT/YEL Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Left rear

power w indow motor (Sedan), Mult iplex control unit (passenger's)

8 20 A BLU/BLK Passenger's power w indow motor 9 20 A WHT/GRN Audio unit

WHT/RED Audio unit, Accessory socket 10 10 A

(Sedan) 15 A

(Coupe)

RED/GRN Heater control panel, A/T gear position console light, Driver's seat heater switch light (Canada), Audio unit, Gauge lights, Cruise main switch light, Moonroof switch light, Clock, Hazard warning switch light, Glove box light, Vanity mirror lights, Front parking lights, Front side marker lights, Rear side marker lights, License plate light(s), Taill ights, Trailer l ighting connector, Climate control unit

Fuse/relay box socket Mult iplex control unit (driver's) 11 7.5 A WHT/BLU Courtesy lights, Trunk light, Ceiling light, Spotlights 12 20 A Fuse/relay box socket Mult iplex control unit (passenger's) 13 7.5 A WHT/YEL PCM, Heater control panel, Security indicator,

Mult iplex control unit (door), Gauge assembly, Clock, Climate control unit

Fuse/relay box socket Multiplex control unit (driver's) Multiplex control unit (passenger's)

14 7.5 A GRN ABS control unit 15 20 A GRN/WHT Multiplex control unit (door) 16 20 A WHT/BLK Right rear power w indow motor (Sedan)

22-28

Ground Distribution

Ground to Components Index

NOTE: All ground wires are BLK unless otherwise noted.

Ground Component or circuit grounded G1 Battery, Transmission housing G2 Engine block

G101 and

G102

PCM (PG1 and PG2 are BLK; LG1 and LG2 are BRN/BLK), Idle air control solenoid valve, Radiator fan switch, PGM-FI main relay, EGR control solenoid valve, Shift control solenoid valve assembly, A/T gear position switch, Engine coolant temperature switch, Ignition coils ('00 model)

('00-01 models)

Shielding between the PCM and these components (all have BRN/BLK wires); CKP sensor, TDC sensor, Primary and secondary heated oxygen sensors, Mainshaft speed senser, Countershaft speed sensor, VTEC pressure switch, Data link connector (DLC), Immobilizer control unit

G201 Condenser fan motor, Radiator fan motor, Right headlight (low beam), Right front parking light, Right front side marker light, Right front turn signal light, Hood switch (security), Washer level switch, Windshield washer motor

G202 Seat heater relay ('98-00 models), Blower motor relay, ELD unit, ABS fail-safe relay, Power steering pressure switch, Cruise control actuator

G203 ABS pump motor, ABS/TCS modulator unit ('01 model) G204 ABS control unit (2 wires), ABS/TCS control unit ('01 model) G205 ABS control unit (2 wires), ABS/TCS control unit (2 wires) ('01 model) G301 Left headlight (low beam), Left front parking light, Left front side marker light, Left front turn signal

light G302 Brake fluid level switch, Windshield wiper motor, Intermittent wiper relay, Seat heater relay

('01 model) G401 Multiplex control unit (driver's), Turn signal/hazard relay, Power window master switch, Driver's

door key cylinder switch, Driver's door lock switch, Driver's door lock knob switch, Ignition key switch, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada), Data link connector (DLC), Combination switches (3 wires), Heater control panel (2 wires), Fan control module (Radiator fan control module), Blower motor high relay, Power transistor, Climate control unit

G501 Moonroof switch, Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Driver's seat heater switch, Front passenger's seat heater switch, Glove box light, Transmission range switch (A/T gear position switch), Clock, Audio unit, Accessory socket, Gauge assembly, Cruise control unit, Cruise control main switch, OPDS unit ('00 Sedan with side airbags), Fuel gauge sending unit ('00 Coupe), Front passenger's seat belt switch ('00 model), Memory erase signal (MES) connector ('01 model), Cruise control main/TCS switch ('01 model)

G502 Audio unit G503 Multiplex control unit (driver's) G504 Multiplex control unit (passenger's) G551 Power mirror switch, Left power mirror defogger (Canada), Driver's power window motor, Power

window master switch (2 wires), High mount brake light, Driver's seat belt switch, Left rear door lock knob switch, Driver's power seat switch (2 wires), Driver's seat heater (Canada)

G552 Fuel pump (FP), Fuel gauge sending unit (All '98-99 models, '00 Sedan, and '01 model) G581 Multiplex control unit (passenger's), Power window relay, Accessory relay, Vanity mirror lights,

Spotlights, Passenger's door key cylinder switch, Passenger's door lock switch, Passenger's door lock knob switch, Front passenger's seat heater, Right power mirror defogger (Canada), Right rear door lock knob switch, OPDS unit (Coupe with side airbags, '01 Sedan with side airbags) Front passenger's seat belt switch ('01 model), Front passenger's power seat switch (2 wires) ('01 model)

G601 Tail lights (right, left), License plate light, Trunk latch switch, Trunk key cylinder switch (security), Trunk actuator (security), Brake light failure sensor, Trailer lighting connector

G801 S R S unit (2 wires), Memory erase signal (MES) connector ('00 model)

22-29

Battery

Battery Test

A battery can explode if you do not fo l low the proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep sparks and open flames away f rom the battery.

Use either a JCI or Bear ARBST tester, and fo l low the manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of these computerized tester, fo l low this conventional test procedure:

1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is between 70°F (21°C) and 100°F (38°C).

2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.

• If the case is damaged, replace the battery. • • If the case looks OK, go to step 3.

3. Check the indicator EYE.

• If the EYE indicates the battery is charged, go to step 4.

• If the EYE indicates a low charge, go to step 7.

4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the surface charge.

5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps for 15 seconds.

6. Record battery voltage.

• If voltage is above 9.6 volts, the battery is OK. • • If voltage is below 9.6 volts, go to step 7.

7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the EYE shows the battery is charged, plus an additional 30 minutes. If the battery charge is very low, it may be necessary to bypass the charger's polarity protection circuitry.

• If the EYE indicates the battery is charged wi th in 3 hours, the battery is OK.B

• If the EYE indicates the battery is not charged wi th in 3 hours, replace the battery. •

22-30

Relays

Power Relay Test

Identify the relay, then do the test listed for i t

NOTE: Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual for the relay input test except that it is mentioned in this manual (see page 22-52)

Relay Test TCS relay Normally-open type A

Normally-open type A:

Check for continuity between the terminals.

• There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals.

• There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected. - TCS relay ('01 model)

2 3

1 4

22-31

Gauges

Gauge Bulb Replacement

Bulb Location

A B S I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W ) H I G H B E A M

R I G H T T U R N S I G N A L \ I N D I C A T O R I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W ) \ L I G H T (1.26 W )

S I D E A I R B A G I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26W) {'00-01 m o d e l s

A / T G E A R P O S I T I O N I N D I C A T O R L I G H T S ( 1 . 4 W x 7 )

I M M O B I L I Z E R I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W )

W A S H E R L E V E L I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W) ( C a n a d a )

D R L I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W ) ( C a n a d a )

T C S I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W ) ( '01 m o d e l )

L E F T T U R N S I G N A L I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W )

G A U G E L I G H T (3.78 W )

G A U G E L I G H T (3.78 W )

L O W F U E L I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (3.78 W )

G A U G E L I G H T (3.78 W )

M A I N T E N A N C E R E Q U I R E D I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W )

G A U G E L I G H T S (3.78 W )

M A L F U N C T I O N I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W)

22-32

Circuit Diagram

I BODY I

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY

0 - B L K

J No.6

C (15A) (

j No.9 } (7-5A)


BLU/RED

G401 G302

(cont'd)

22-33

Gauges

Circuit Diagram {cont'd)

PCM

/From \ previous

\page /

BLU

1 WHT/YEL YEL

T E S T TACHOMETER

BLU CONNECTOR

B21 B11 GAUGE ASSEMBLY

/From \ previous

\page /

FUEL GAUGE

FUEL DRIVE CIRCUIT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) GAUGE

ECT DRIVE CIRCUIT

SPEEDOMETER

SPEEDOMETER DRIVE CIRCUIT

TACHOMETER

TACHOMETER DRIVE CIRCUIT

MICRO CONTROLLER and SUB SYSTEM CIRCUIT

C11

YEL/BLU

C2

YEL-GRN

B3 (SCS)

B13 (RXD)

FUEL GAUGE UNIT

FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT

BLU/WHT

v PCM

BLK

1

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENDING UNIT

PCM

('00-01 models)

B14 (TXD)

G552 ('98-99 models)

22-34

COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH or TAILLIGHT RELAY

V

{Canada;

(cont'd)

22-35

Gauges


TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

LEFT RIGHT

GRN/BLU GRN/YEL

SRS UNIT V BLU

GRN/BLU

I GRN/YEL

JL V LEFT

V RIGHT

TURN TURN SIGNAL SIGNAL LIGHTS LIGHTS

GRN/BLU

FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT

1 G552

22-36

• BODY •

MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Driver's)

v RED/WHT

GAUGE ASSEMBLY

® ® SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT (LED)

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) (1.26W)

CRUISE INDICATOR LIGHT (1.26W) LOW

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR LIGHT (LED)

SIDE AIRBAG INDICATOR LIGHT (1.26W)

DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS CONTROLLER


RED/BLU

RED/BLU

B6

GRN/ORN

PCM

BLU/BLK YEL/RED

('00-01 models)

YEL/RED

DRIVER'S SEAT BELT SWITCH (OH : Unbuckled ' VOFF: Buckled ,

BLK

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH /ON : Engine stopped ' \ O F F : Engine running ,

G551

22-37

Safety Indicator System

Circuit Diagram


( + ) - B L K * No.47 (20A)

- < A J > »

No.41 (100A) N o . 4 2 (50A)

IGNITION SWITCH

BAT


I TRUNK LATCH

J SWITCH

BLK

G601

22-38

6[1] 0 — — • WHT/BLK '

I BODY fl

; Coupe

WHT/YEL

WHT'BLK

WHT/BLK

WHT/BLK

• MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Driver's)

• PCM • CRUISE CONTROL UNIT • ABS CONTROL UNIT • TRAILER LIGHTING

CONNECTOR

WHT/BLK

d) HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT (21W)

BLK

G601

-5" G551

22-39

Stereo Sound System


T W E E T E R S R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 22 -125

n t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

P A S S E N G E R ' S D O O R S P E A K E R R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 22 -125 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

A U D I O U N I T R e m o v a l , p a g e 22-124 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

C o n n e c t o r R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 22-38 n t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

A N T E N N A L E A D

D R I V E R ' S D O O R S P E A K E R R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 22 -125 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R E A R S P E A K E R S R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 2 2 - 1 2 5 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R A D I O R E M O T E S W I T C H T e s t , p a g e 22 -38

W I N D O W A N T E N N A T e s t , p a g e 2 2 - 1 2 6 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

R e p a i r , p a g e 2 2 - 1 2 6 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l

22-40

Circuit Diagram


©- BLK • No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A)

No.54 (40A)

IGNITION SWITCH

' BAT


- W H T O f — WHT/BLK • ACC>

N 0 . 8 (7.5A)

YEL/BLK

VOL. H VOL. Q DOWN [ UP I ( • ) g ( A ) g

i I 0501 I (With security alarm system)

22

Stereo Sound System

Audio Unit Connector Replacement

When replacing an audio unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the fo l lowing table. Cavities 1, 11, 12, and 13 are not used.

Cavity Wire Connect to 2 WHT/RED ACC (Main stereo power

supply) 3 GEN/RED Radio remote switch 4 BLU Security IN 5 RED/YEL Right rear speaker ( ) 6 BLU/YEL Left rear speaker ( + ) 7 RED/GRN Front passenger's speaker

( + ) Right tweeter ( + )

8 BLU/GRN Driver's door speaker ( + ) Left tweeter ( + )

9 RED/BLK Lights-on signal 10 WHT/GRN Constant power 14* BLK Security OUT 15 BRN/WHT Right rear speaker ( -) 16 GRY/WHT Left rear speaker ( ) 17 BRN/BLK Front passenger's door

speaker( - ) Right tweeter ( )

18 GRY/BLK Driver's door speaker ( ) Left tweeter ( - )

19 RED Dash lights brightness controller

20 BLK Ground (G502) '98-00 models

foj I I Qj

(Si

Qj

(Si > o o °

Qj

(Si

© )

c

• 1 2 3 "4 "5 6 7 8 " 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18

Radio Remote Switch Test

1. Remove the 2 screws (A) f rom the radio remote switch (B).

B

2. Remove the radio remote switch (B) f rom the steering wheel by removing the 2 screws, and disconnect the 2P connector (C).

3. Measure resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals in each switch position according to the table.

Position Resistance OFF Approx. 3.6 k Q

AUDIO/CH (SEEK)

Approx. 780 Q

• ( V O L UP)

Approx. 360 Q

• ( V O L D O W N )

Approx. 100 0

22-42

Homelink Remote Control System

Circuit Diagram Test

BATTERY

( + )



Turn on the spotlight.

• If the spotlight comes on, the Homelink's power and ground circuits are OK. If the Homelink wi l l not open the customer's garage door, check that the Homelink is programmed properly (see the owner's manual) or call Homelink at 800-355-3515. On the Internet, go to www.homelink. jc i .com

• If the spotlight does not come on, check for these problems: - A blown No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's

under-dash fuse/relay box. - An open in the WHT/BLU wire between the

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and spotlight.

- An open in the BLK wire between the spotl ight and G581.

G581

22-43

http://www.homelink.jci.com

Power Seat


Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable):

N O T E : Re fe r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l , P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 6 , f o r t h e d r i v e r ' s p o w e r sea t .

22-44

Circuit Diagram - 4-way Adjustable


(4^*™ BLK • No.41 (100A) No.55 (40A)

YEL/GRN

No.3 (20A)

No.5 (20A)


WHT/RED

B3

O

B1 POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

FORWARD

B4

BACKWARD

A4

BACKWARD

A2

a FOR- ' WARD

B5 B6 B2

BLK BLU BLU/YEL Y E L YEL/GRN BLK

SLIDE MOTOR

RECLINE MOTOR

G581

JOL

G581

Power Seat

Motor Test

Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjutable):

1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-2).

2. Disconnect the 6P connectors f rom the adjustment switch.

3. Test the motor. When the motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately.

Recline motor:

\ T e r m i n a l

Position \ ^ B5 B6

F o r w a r d 0 0 B a c k w a r d 0 0

Slide motor;

\ ^ T e r m i n a l

P o s i t i o n \ ^ A2 A4

F o r w a r d 0 © Backward © 0

4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, check for an open in the power seat wire harness between the 6P connector and the 2P connectors. If the harness is OK, replace the motor (see page 20-2).

22-46

Switch Test/Replacement

Passenger 's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable);

1. Remove the adjustment switch cover (A) from the passenger's seat by removing the 2 screws (B), and pulling off the adjustment switch knobs (C).

2. Disconnect the 6P connectors (D) f rom the adjustment switch (E), then remove the switch f rom the cover by removing its 2 mount ing screws.

3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs.

4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

T e r m i n a l

Pos i t ion

S L I D E S W I T C H

R E C L I N E S W I T C H

F O R W A R D

B A C K W A R D

F O R W A R D

B A C K W A R D

A 2

o

A 4

o

B1

o o

B 2

o

o

B3

-o -o

B 4 B5 B 6

22-47

Seat Heaters - Canada


S E A T H E A T E R R E L A Y { '98-00 m o d e l s ) T e s t , p a g e 22-52 in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .

i F R O N T P A S S E N G E R ' S S E A T C U S H I O N H E A T E R

' T e s t , p a g e 22-199 i n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l ,

. F R O N T P A S S E N G E R ' S S E A T - B A C K H E A T E R Tes t , p a g e 22-199 in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .

D R I V E R ' S S E A T - B A C K H E A T E R T e s t , p a g e 22 -199 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .

F R O N T P A S S E N G E R ' S S E A T H E A T E R S W I T C H T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 2 2 - 1 9 9 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .

D R I V E R ' S S E A T C U S H I O N H E A T E R T e s t , p a g e 22 -199 in t h e ' 98 -01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .

S E A T H E A T E R R E L A Y { '01 m o d e l ) T e s t , p a g e 22-52 i n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .

D R I V E R ' S S E A T H E A T E R S W I T C H T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 22 -199 in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .

22-48

Circuit Diagram


BATTERY

BLK • No. 41 (100 A) No.42 (50A)

No.59 (20A)

IGNITION SWITCH

TH : THERMOSTAT TON ; Below 93°F (34°C) 1 l O F F : Above 109°F (43°C)J

BR : BREAKER fON : Below 86 °F (30°C) 1 [OFF: Above 122°F (50°C)J

HI . High LO : Low

SEAT HEATER RELAY

• COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH (DX, LX)

• TAILLIGHT RELAY (EX)

RED/BLK

• COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH (DX, LX)

• TAILLIGHT RELAY (EX)

• WHT/BLK


DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER

I B K SEAT HEATER B L K (Without side airbag)

1 1 1 G202 ("98-00 models) G302 ('00 model)

22-49

Restraints

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) S R S Unit Identification 23-2 DTC Troubleshooting Index . 23-3 Symptom Troubleshooting Index .......... 23-4

NOTE: Refer to the '98-01 M Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for the items not shown in this section.

SRS

SRS Unit Identification

'98 Model

MAKER IDENTIFICATION MARK

KEIHIN M2

SRS UNIT

I 23-2


'98 Model KE1H1N (M2) SRS unit

DTC Detection I tem Notes 1-1 Open in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-74)* 1

1-2 Increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-74)* 1

1-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's airbag inflator

(see page 23-76)* 1

1-4 Short to power in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-78)* 1

1-5 Short to ground in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-80)* 1

2-1 Open in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-82)* 1

2-2 Increased resistance in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-82)* 1

2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in passenger's airbag inflator

(see page 23-83)* 1

2-4 Short to power in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-85)* 1

2-5 Short to ground in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-86)* 1

5-1 Internal failure of SRS unit (see page 23-88)* 1

5-2 Internal failure of SRS unit (see page 23-88)* 1

5-3

Internal failure of SRS unit (see page 23-88)* 1

5-4


6-1


6-2


6-3


6-4


7-1


7-2


7-3


8-1


8-2


8-5


8-6


9-1 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could mean internal failure of the unit or a faulty indicator light circuit. Refer to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 23-45)* 1

(see page 23-88)* 1

9-2 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could mean internal failure of the power supply (VB line). Refer to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 23-45)* 1

(see page 23-88)* 1

10-1 SRS airbag deployed (SRS unit must be replaced) (see page 23-88)* 1

* 1: Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008.

23-3

SRS

Symptom Troubleshooting index

'98 Model Symp tom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

SRS indicator l ight doesn't come on. SRS Indicator Light Troubleshoot ing, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-264)* 1.

The SRS indicator l ight stays on after the ignit ion switch is turned on (II).

SRS Indicator Light Troubleshoot ing, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-264)* 1.

* T. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008.

23-4

Service Manual index

NOTE: Refer t o the f o l l o w i n g list t o look up DTCs, symptoms, fuses, connectors, wire harnesses, specifications, maintenance schedules, and genera l service i n f o r m a t i o n :

DTC Troubleshooting Indexes ABS/TCS C o m p o n e n t s 19-9 A u t o m a t i c C l imate Cont ro l 21-29 A u t o m a t i c Transax le 14-7 Fuel and Emiss ions 11-3 SRS 23-3

S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Indexes A/C - 21-7 A B S / T C S Components .................. 19-10,31 Automatic Climate Control ................. 21-30 A u t o m a t i c Transax le 14-8 Cruise Con t ro l Sys tem 4-43 Fan Cont ro ls 10-15 Fuel and Emiss ions 11-6 S R S . . . . .23-4 Steer ing 17-4

Fuse /Relay Indexes A / C Compressor Clutch Relay ............ 22-23 A / C Condenser Fan Relay 22-23 B lower M o t o r Relay 22-23 ELD (Electr ical Load Detector) 22-23 Head l igh t Relay , 22-23 Horn Relay 22-23 Power Distribution 22-26 Radiator Fan Relay 22-23 Under -dash Fuse /Relay Box, Dr iver 's .... 22-24 Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box, Passenger 's .. 22-25 U n d e r - h o o d Fuse/Relay Box 22-23

Connec to r a n d W i r e Harness Indexes Component Connectors (to harness) ... 22-5 G r o u n d s (to components) 22-29 In- l ine Connec tors (to harness) 22-4

Spec i f i ca t ions sec t i on S e c t i o n 2

M a i n t e n a n c e sec t ion S e c t i o n 3

Genera l I n f o r m a t i o n sec t i on S e c t i o n 1

A

A / C C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 21-3 Circui t D iag ram 21-8

A / C Compresso r Rep lacement 21-14 ,19

A / C Compressor Clutch Inspect ion . . . . .21-16,21 Overhau l 21-17, 22

A / C Compresso r Relief Va l ve Rep lacement 21-18, 23

A / C Condenser Rep lacement 21-24

A / C Condenser Fan A s s e m b l y C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2 Test 10-8 Rep lacement 10-13

A / C Condenser Fan C i rcu i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 21-10

A / C Pressure S w i t c h C i rcu i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 21-53

A / T A s s e m b l y Remova l 14-114 Insta l la t ion 14-121

A / T C lu t ch Pressure C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d Va l ves Test 14-108 Rep lacement 14-109

A / T C oun t e r sha f t A s s e m b l y D isassemb ly / l nspec t i on /Reassemb ly .... 14-172 Insta l la t ion 14-192

A / T Coun te r sha f t 1st Gear Rep lacement 14-173

A / T Coun te r sha f t 3 r d Gear Rep lacement 14-173

A / T D i f fe rent ia l C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index .............. 14-201

A / T Gear Pos i t i on Ind ica to r Rep lacement 14-144

A / T Gear Pos i t i on Ind ica to r S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 14-138 Circu i t D iag ram 14-139 Test 14-143

A / T Hydrau l i c Con t ro l s Test 14-104

A / T M a i n s h a f t A s s e m b l y D isassemb ly / Inspec t ion /Reassemb ly .... 14-169 Insta l la t ion 14-192

A / T S e c o n d a r y S h a f t A s s e m b l y D isassemb ly / Inspec t ion /Reassemb ly .... 14-176 Inspect ion 14-177 Insta l la t ion 14-192

A / T Sh i f t Cable Rep lacement 14-133 A d j u s t m e n t 14-136

A / T Sh i f t Lever Remova l 14-129 Insta l la t ion 14-130 D isassemb ly /Reassemb ly 14-132

A B S C o n t r o l U n i t Rep lacemen t 19-22

A B S Ind ica to r C i rcu i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 19-18, 76

A B S M o d u l a t o r U n i t Remova l / Ins ta l la t ion 19-21

A B S / T C S C o m p o n e n t s Component Location Index ............. 19-8, 24 Circuit Diagram 19-12,46 Descr ip t ion 19-32

ABS-TCS C o n t r o l U n i t H o w - t o I n f o r m a t i o n 19-25 Replacement 19-82

ABS-TCS M o d u l a t o r U n i t Remova l / Ins ta l l a t i on 19-80

A c c u m u l a t o r B o d y D isassemb ly / Inspec t ion /Reassemb ly .... 14-166

A i r Cleaner E l e m e n t Rep lacemen t 11-97

A l t e r n a t o r Component Location Index ................... 4-25 Replacement 4-31 Overhaul 4-35

A l t e r n a t o r - c o m p r e s s o r Be l t Component Location Index

A / C Compressor , 4-25 Cha rg ing S y s t e m 4-25

Inspec t ion /Rep lacement Charging S y s t e m 4-31

A l t e r n a t o r - c o m p r e s s o r Be l t A u t o -t e n s i o n e r Inspec t ion /Rep lacement 4-33

A T F Inspection 14-112 Rep lacement 14-113

A T F Coo ler Repair 14-127

ATF Coo ler L ines a n d Hoses C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2 Replacement 14-128

ATF P u m p Inspect ion 14-163

A u d i o U n i t Replacement 22-42

A u d i o / E n t e r t a i n m e n t C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 22-40 Circuit Diagram 22-41

A u t o m a t i c C l i m a t e C o n t r o l C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 21-26 Descr ip t ion 21-31 Circuit Diagram .21-32

A u t o m a t i c T ransax le Descr ip t ion 14-18 Test 14-101

(cont 'd)

Service IVIanuaB Index

(cont'd)

B

B a t t e r y C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index

C h a r g i n g S y s t e m 4-25 Tes t

W i r i n g S y s t e m - 22-30

B l o w e r P o w e r T rans i s to r Test ..........21-58

Brake Cal ipers Ove rhau l 19-4

Brake Pads Inspec t i on /Rep lacemen t 19-2

Brake Pedal Pos i t i on S w i t c h Test - . . . . .4-50

B u m p e r Spo i le r , Rear Rep lacemen t • 20-6

c C a m s h a f t Inspec t ion 6-40 Ins ta l la t ion • 6-50

C h a r g i n g S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index 4-25 Ci rcu i t D i a g r a m 4-26 T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 4-27

C h a r g i n g S y s t e m Ind ica to r C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index ................... 4-25

CKP (Cranksha f t Pos i t ion ) Senso r Rep lacemen t 6-56

C l i m a t e C o n t r o l P o w e r a n d G r o u n d C i rcu i t s T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 21-51

C l i m a t e C o n t r o l U n i t H o w - t o I n f o r m a t i o n 21-28 Remova l / Ins ta l l a t ion 21-58 D isassemb ly /Reassemb ly 21-59

C o n n e c t i n g Rod Bear ing Caps C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index 7-3

C o n n e c t i n g Rod Bear ings C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3 Rep lacemen t 7-10

C o n n e c t i n g R od Bo l t s C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index ..................... 7-3 Inspec t ion 7-21

C o n n e c t i n g Rods C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index 7-3 Inspec t ion 7-7

C o n n e c t o r s (See f i rs t page o f th i s Index)

C o o l a n t Rep lacemen t 10-10

C o o l a n t Reservo i r C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index 10-2

C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e G a u g e Test 10-5 T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 10-5

C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e G a u g e S e n d i n g U n i t C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index

Coo lan t T e m p e r a t u r e G a u g e C o m p o n e n t s 10-2

Coo l i ng S y s t e m 10-2 Test

Coo lan t T e m p e r a t u r e Gauge C o m p o n e n t s 10-7

C o o l i n g S y s t e m 10-7

C o o l i n g S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index 10-2

C o u n t e r s h a f t Bea r i ng H u b / B e a r i n g Rep lacemen t 14-175

C o u n t e r s h a f t B e a r i n g , A / T H o u s i n g Rep lacemen t 14-156

C o u n t e r s h a f t Bea r i ng , T o r q u e C o n v e r t e r H o u s i n g Rep lacemen t 14-168

C o u n t e r s h a f t Id ler Gear ins ta l la t ion 14-195

C o u n t e r s h a f t Reverse Se lec to r H u b Rep lacemen t 14-173

C o u n t e r s h a f t S p e e d Senso r Rep lacemen t 14-110

C ranksha f t C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3 Inspec t ion 7-7, 14 Remova l 7-12 Ins ta l la t ion 7-24

C ranksha f t M a i n Bear ings C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3 Rep lacemen t 7-8

C ranksha f t Oi l Sea l , Pul ley End C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3 Ins ta l la t ion 7-29

C ranksha f t Oi l Sea l , T r a n s m i s s i o n End C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3 Ins ta l la t ion 7-29

C ranksha f t Pul ley Remova l / Ins ta l l a t ion 6-17

C ranksha f t T h r u s t Washe rs C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3

Cru ise C o n t r o l A c t u a t o r Cable A d j u s t m e n t 4-54

Cru ise C o n t r o l A c t u a t o r S o l e n o i d Test 4-50

Cru ise C o n t r o l C o m m u n i c a t i o n C i rcu i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 4-45

Cru ise C o n t r o l M a i n S w i t c h Tes t /Rep lacement 4-48

Cru ise C o n t r o l S e t / R e s u m e / C a n c e l S w i t c h Tes t /Rep lacement .................................. 4-49

Cru ise C o n t r o l S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-41 Circui t D i a g r a m 4-42

Cru ise C o n t r o l U n i t Inpu t Test 4-46

Cy l inder Head A s s e m b l y C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 6-3 Remova l .................................................. 6-31 Insta l la t ion 6-51

Cy l inder Head , Bare Inspect ion 6-36

D

Di f fe ren t ia l Carr ier Bear ing O u t e r Races, A IT Rep lacement 14-204

D i f fe rent ia l Carr ier Bear ings , A / T Rep lacement 14-202 Inspect ion 14-205

D i f fe rent ia l Carr ier , A / T Rep lacement 14-202

D i f fe rent ia l O i l Seals , A / T Rep lacement 14-203

D i f fe rent ia l P in ion Gears , A / T Inspect ion 14-201

D i s t r i bu to r C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-14 Rep lacement 4-19 D isassemb ly /Reassemb ly 4-20

Dr ive Plate C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3 Remova l / Ins ta l la t ion 7-6

DTCs

(See f i rs t page of th is Index)

D4 Ind ica to r C i rcu i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 14-93

Cru ise C o n t r o l A c t u a t o r Test Rep lacemen t

4-51 4-52

E

ECT S e n s o r C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2

ECT Senso r C i rcu i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 21-50

E G R Va lve C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2

E m b l e m s Rep lacement 20-8

E n d Cover , A / T Remova l 14-151

Engine A s s e m b l y Remova l 5-2 Insta l la t ion 5-11

Engine Block Assembly C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3

Engine Block E n d Cover C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3

Engine Block, Bare C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3 Inspect ion 7-15 Repair 7-17

Engine Mount Control Solenoid Valve C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-55

Engine Mount Control S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-55 Circui t D iag ram 4-56 T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 4-57

E V A P Control S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index .............. 11-103

Exhaust Manifold Remova l / Ins ta l la t ion 9-3

Exhaust Manifold G a s k e t Rep lacement 9-3

Exhaust Pipe Rep lacement 9-4

F

Fan Control Module Input Test 10-20

Fan Controls C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-14 Circui t D iag ram 10-16

Final Driven Gear , A / T Rep lacement 14-202

Frame Repair Char t 20-12

Front Driveshaft Assembly Resassembly 16-3

Front S e a t s C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 22-44 Circui t D iag ram 22-45

Fuel and Emiss ions Descr ip t ion 11-7 Circui t D iag ram 11-30, 39

Fuel Gauge Test 11-94

Fuel Injection S y s t e m (PGM-FI) C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 11-50

Fuel Injectors Rep lacement 11-80, 82

Fuel Lines and Hoses Inspect ion 11-91

Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement 11-92, 93

Fuel Supply S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 11-87 A d j u s t m e n t 11-88 T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 11-89

Fuses (See f i rs t page of th is Index)

G

Gauges Circui t D iag ram .22 -33

General Information (See sect ion 1)

H

Heater Hoses and Pipes C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2

Heater Valve C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2

Heater Valve Cable A d j u s t m e n t 21-13

Homelink Remote Control S y s t e m Circui t D iag ram 22-43 Test 22-43

Hood Rep lacement 20-7

H 0 2 S , Primary Rep lacement 11-84

H 0 2 S , Secondary Rep lacement 11-84

i

IA (Intake Air) B y p a s s Control Va lve Test 11-101

ICM (Ignition Control Module) C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-14 Input Test 4-21

Idle Control S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index ................. 11-85 A d j u s t m e n t 11-86

Ignition Coil(s) C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-14 Test 4-22 T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 4-23

Ignition S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-14, 15 Circui t D iag ram 4-16, 17 Inspec t ion 4-18

Ignition Wires C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-14 Tes t / Inspec t ion 4-22

In-car Temperature S e n s o r Rep lacement 21-55 Test 21-55

Intake Air S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 11-95

Intake Manifold Remova l / Ins ta l la t ion 9-2

Interlock S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 14-145 Circui t D i a g r a m 14-146

Intermediate Shaft A s s e m b l y Disassemb ly 16-14 Remova l 16-14 Resassembly 16-16 Insta l la t ion 16-18

K

Key Interlock Solenoid Test 14-149

Key Interlock S y s t e m Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 14-99

L

Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve Test 14-103

L o w Fuel Indicator Rep lacement 22-32

(cont 'd)

Service Manual Index

(cont'd) Lubrication S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 8-3 Test 8-4

_

Main Va lve Body R e m o v a l 14-157 Repair • 14-159 Resassemb ly 14-160 D isassemb ly / I nspec t i on /Reassemb ly .... 14-161 Ins ta l la t ion - 14-190

Mainshaft Bear ing, Torque Converter Housing Rep lacemen t 14-167

Mainshaft Sea l ing Rings Rep lacemen t 14-171

Mainshaft S p e e d S e n s o r Rep lacemen t 14-110

Maintenance (See sect ion 3)

Multiplex Control Unit, Driver's Inpu t Test 14-147

o

Oil Filter Rep lacemen t 8-5

Oil Pan C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index

Eng ine Block A s s e m b l y . . . . .7-3 Lubr i ca t ion S y s t e m 7-3

Oil Pressure S w i t c h Test

L o w Eng ine Oi l Ind ica tor C o m p o n e n t s . 8-4

Lubr i ca t ion S y s t e m 8-4

Oil P u m p , Engine C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index

Eng ine Block A s s e m b l y . . . .7-3 Lubr i ca t ion S y s t e m 7-3

Ove rhau l Lubr i ca t ion S y s t e m 8-7

Oil, Engine Rep lacemen t •••• 8-5

Outs ide Air Temperature S e n s o r Rep lacemen t 21-56 Test 21-56

P

Park Lever Posit ion S top I n s p e c t i o n / A d j u s t m e n t 14-153

Park Pin S w i t c h Test 14-150

P C M C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index 4 55

P C V Va lve Test 11-102

Piston Pins C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index 7-3

Piston Rings C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3 Rep lacemen t 7-22

Pistons C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 7-3 R e m o v a l 7-12 Rep lacemen t 7-18

P o w e r S e a t L inkage Disassemb l y /Reassemb l y 20-4

P o w e r S e a t Motors Test 22-46

P o w e r S e a t S w i t c h Tes t /Rep lacemen t 22-47

P o w e r Steer ing Fluid Reservoir C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index 17-3

P o w e r Steer ing Lines and Hoses Rep lacemen t 17-12

P o w e r Steer ing Pump C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 17-3 Tes t 17-7 ,8 Rep lacemen t 17-13 O v e r h a u l 17-14

Power Steer ing Pump Belt I n s p e c t i o n / A d j u s t m e n t 17-10

_

Radiator C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2 Tes t 10-8 Rep lacemen t 10-13

Radiator and Condenser Fans C o m m o n Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 21-12

Radiator C a p C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2 Tes t 10-7

Radiator F a n Assembly C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2 Tes t 10-8 Rep lacemen t 10-13

Radiator Fan Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 10-17

Radiator Fan S w i t c h C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2 Test 10 21

Radiator Fan S w i t c h Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 10-19

Radiator Hoses and Pipes C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 10-2

Radio Remote S w i t c h Test 22-42

Recirculation Control Motor Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 21 52

Refrigerant Oil Rep lacement 21-6

Regulator Valve Body Disassemb ly / l nspec t ion /Reassemb ly .... 14-164

Rocker Arm A s s e m b l y Remova l 6-36 D isassemb ly /Reassemb ly 6-37

Rocker A r m s Test 6-10 Inspect ion 6-38

s

Safety Indicator S y s t e m Circui t D iag ram 22-38

Seat Heaters C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 22-48 Circui t D iag ram .................................... 22-49

Seat Wire Harness, Driver's .. Insta l la t ion 20-5

Seat , Front Remova l / Ins ta l la t ion 20-2 D isassemb ly /Reassemb ly 20-3

Secondary Shaft Bear ing, Torque Converter Housing Rep lacement 14-168

Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement....................................... 14-179

Servo Body Disassembly / Inspec t ion /Reassembly .... 14-165

Shift Control Solenoid Va lves Rep lacement 14-107 Test 14-107

Shift Lock Solenoid Test 14-149 Rep lacement 14-150

Sh i f t Lock S y s t e m C i rcu i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 14-96

Spa rk P lugs C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-14 Inspect ion 4-24

Specif icat ions (See sec t ion 2)

S ta r te r Test 4-7 Rep lacement 4-8 Overhau l ................................................... 4-9

S t a r t e r S o l e n o i d Test 4-6

S t a r t i n g S y s t e m C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 4-3 Circui t D iag ram . .4-4 T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 4-5

S tee r i ng C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 17-3 T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 17-6 Inspect ion 17-9

S tee r i ng Co lumn C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 17-3

S tee r i ng Gearbox C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 17-3 Overhau l 17-20

S tee r i ng Lock C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 17-3

S tee r i ng Rack G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t 17-19

S t e e r i n g W h e e l C o m p o n e n t Locat ion Index 17-3

Sub - f r ames Rep lacement 20-9

S u n l i g h t Sensor Rep lacement 21-57 Test . .21-57

T

TCS Ind ica to r C i rcu i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 19-78

TCS Relay Test • 22-31

TCS S w i t c h Test 19-81

TDC Sensors Rep lacement 6-55

T h e r m o s t a t Test 10-9 Rep lacement 10-12

T h r o t t l e B o d y Test 11-96 Remova l / Ins ta l la t ion 11-99 D isassemb ly /Reassemb ly 11-100

T h r o t t l e Cab le A d j u s t m e n t 11-98

T i m i n g Be l t Inspect ion 6-18 Remova l 6-19 Insta l la t ion 6-22

T o r q u e C o n v e r t e r C lu t ch S o l e n o i d V a l v e Rep lacement 14-106 Test 14-106

T r a n s m i s s i o n H o u s i n g Remova l 14-154 Insta l la t ion 14-192

T r a n s m i s s i o n Range S w i t c h Test 14-140 Rep lacement 14-141

Troubleshooting (See f i rs t page of th is Index)

Wire Harnesses (See f i rs t page of th is Index)

Wiring S y s t e m Relay and Con t ro l Un i t Loca t ions ..... 22-2, 3

1

1 s t / 2 n d C lu t ch A s s e m b l y D isassemb ly 14-180 Inspect ion 14-183 Resassembly 14-185

2

2 n d C lu t ch Pressure S w i t c h Rep lacement 14-111

3

V

Va lve G u i d e s Inspect ion 6-44 Rep lacement 6-45

Va l ve Seals Remova l 6-43

Va l ve Sea ts Repair 6-47

Va l ve S p r i n g s Remova l • 6-43

Va lves A d j u s t m e n t 6-13 Remova l 6-43 Inspect ion 6-44 Insta l la t ion 6-49

VTEC Los t M o t i o n A s s e m b l i e s / S p r i n g s Inspect ion 6-39

VTEC S o l e n o i d V a l v e Test 6-9

3 rd C lu t ch Pressure S w i t c h Rep lacement 14-111

3 r d / 4 t h C lu t ch A s s e m b l y Inspect ion 14-170, 183

w

W a t e r P u m p C o m p o n e n t Loca t ion Index 10-2 Inspect ion 10-9 Rep lacemen t 10-10

W h e e l S p e e d Senso rs Inspect ion 19-82 Rep lacemen t 19-83

" Portions of materials contained herein have been reprinted under license from America Honda Motor Co., Inc. License Agreement AH220 ."

1998-2001 Honda Accord v-6 b7xa

Documents

Transcript of 1998-2001 Honda Accord v-6 b7xa